Hy Drs Function Library 1 en

DRS
Library of
Protective Functions
Protection
www.andritz.com/NEPTUN
Identification DRS FNC LIB 1.06
Version.Revision 1.06
Date of issue 11.04.2016
This document is applicable to the following product(s):
DRS
2016 by ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH, All rights reserved.

Any kind of disclosure and reproduction whatsoever of this document or of parts thereof is permitted only upon prior written
consent by ANDRITZ HYDRO. Technical specifications are used for purposes of product description only and are no
guaranteed specifications in legal terms. Subject to modifications - also in terms of technology.
2 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1. General................................................................................................................. 23
1.1. Contents of This Document ....................................................................................................... 23
1.2. General Terms Definition .......................................................................................................... 23
1.3. Measuring Method ..................................................................................................................... 25
1.4. General Influencing Quantities and Tolerances: ....................................................................... 25
2. MB... LOGIC FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 27

2.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................... 27
2.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................... 28
2.2.1. Signal Functions ................................................................................................................ 28
2.2.2. Trip Circuit Supervision ...................................................................................................... 31
2.2.3. Out of Step Counter ........................................................................................................... 32
2.2.4. Logic Function 2 ................................................................................................................ 33
2.3. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ...................................................................................................... 34
2.3.1. MB111 /MB141/ MB142 ..................................................................................................... 34
2.3.2. MB211................................................................................................................................ 35
2.3.3. MB442................................................................................................................................ 37
2.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................... 38
2.4.1. MB111/ MB141/ MB142 ..................................................................................................... 38
2.4.2. MB211................................................................................................................................ 41
2.4.3. MB442................................................................................................................................ 51
2.5. FUNCTION ................................................................................................................................ 58
2.5.1. MB111/ MB141/ MB142 ..................................................................................................... 58
2.5.2. MB211................................................................................................................................ 59
2.5.3. MB442................................................................................................................................ 60
2.6. COMMISSIONING..................................................................................................................... 61
2.6.1. MB111/ MB141/ MB142/ MB211/ MB311/ MB442 ............................................................ 61
3. MC... CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION ........................................ 63

3.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................... 63
3.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................... 64
3.3.1. MC316 ............................................................................................................................... 65
3.4. LOGIC DIAGRAM...................................................................................................................... 66
3.4.1. MC316 ............................................................................................................................... 66
3.5. FUNCTION ................................................................................................................................ 70
3.5.1. MC316 ............................................................................................................................... 70
3.6. COMMISSIONING..................................................................................................................... 71
3.6.1. MC316 ............................................................................................................................... 71
4. MD... GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL ................................................................ 73

4.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................... 73
4.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................... 75
4.2.1. Generator Differential 2-phase 2-winding .......................................................................... 75
4.2.2. Generator Differential 3-phase 2-winding .......................................................................... 78
4.3.1. MD222 ............................................................................................................................... 81
4.3.2. MD322/ MD323 .................................................................................................................. 82
4.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................... 83
4.4.1. MD222 ............................................................................................................................... 83
4.4.2. MD322/ MD323 .................................................................................................................. 88
4.5. FUNCTION ................................................................................................................................ 95
DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 3 / 744

Table of Contents
4.5.1. CT Saturation Detection ................................................................................................. 97

4.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................... 98
5. MD... TRANSFORMATOR DIFFERENTIAL .....................................................101

5.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 101
5.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 105
5.2.1. Transformer Differential Protection 2-phase 2-winding .................................................. 105
5.3. CONNECTION DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................... 125
5.3.1. MD221 ............................................................................................................................. 125
5.3.2. MD231 ............................................................................................................................. 126
5.3.3. MD321 ............................................................................................................................. 127
5.3.4. MD331, MD334 ............................................................................................................... 128
5.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 129
5.4.1. MD221 ............................................................................................................................. 129
5.4.2. MD321 ............................................................................................................................. 132
5.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 144
5.5.1. Detailed Description of CT Saturation Detection Feature ............................................... 149
5.5.1.1. Transformer Differential Protective Functions with CT Saturation Detection ....... 149
5.5.1.2. CT Saturation Detection Principles ......................................................................... 149
5.5.1.3. Explanation of CT Saturation Detection ............................................................... 149
5.5.1.3.1. Precondition: Outzone Fault. ........................................................................... 149
5.5.1.3.2. Precondition: Inzone Fault ............................................................................... 152
5.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 153
6. ME... OUT OF STEP PROTECTION .................................................................157

6.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 157
6.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 158
6.2.1. Out of Step Protection With Circular MHO Characteristic for 3-Pase Systems .............. 158
6.3. CONNECTION DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................... 161
6.3.1. ME311 ............................................................................................................................. 161
6.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 162
6.4.1. ME311 ............................................................................................................................. 162
6.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 171
6.5.1. ME311/ ME312 ............................................................................................................... 171
6.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 182
6.6.1. ME311 Protective Function ............................................................................................. 182
6.7. CALCULATION EXAMPE FOR SETTING PARAMETERS ................................................... 188
7. ME... UNDER EXCITATION PROTECTION .....................................................191

7.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 191
7.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 192
7.2.1. Under Excitation for Single Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC) ........... 192
7.2.2. Under Excitation for Single Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC) ........... 194
7.2.3. Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC) ............ 196
7.2.4. Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC) ........... 198
7.2.5. Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC) ............ 200
7.2.6. Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC) ........... 202
7.3. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................... 204
7.3.1. ME121 ............................................................................................................................. 204
7.3.2. ME122 ............................................................................................................................. 205
7.3.3. ME321 ............................................................................................................................. 206
7.3.4. ME322 ............................................................................................................................. 207

Table of Contents
7.3.5. ME323.............................................................................................................................. 208

7.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 209
7.4.1. ME321.............................................................................................................................. 209
7.4.2. ME322.............................................................................................................................. 216
7.4.3. ME323.............................................................................................................................. 218
7.4.4. ME324.............................................................................................................................. 220
7.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 225
7.5.1. ME121/ ME122/ ME321/ ME322 Functions .................................................................... 225
7.5.2. ME323 / ME324 Functions .............................................................................................. 227
7.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 229
7.6.1. ME121/ ME122/ ME321/ ME322 Protective Functions ................................................... 229
8. MF... OVER/UNDERFREQUENCY / FREQUENY GRADIENT / VECTOR SHIFT

............................................................................................................................ 233
8.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 233
8.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 234
8.2.1. MF111 .............................................................................................................................. 234
8.2.2. MF121 .............................................................................................................................. 236
8.2.3. MF141 .............................................................................................................................. 238
8.2.4. MF112 .............................................................................................................................. 240
8.2.5. MF311 .............................................................................................................................. 242
8.3. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................... 244
8.3.1. MF111/ MF112/ MF121/ MF141 ...................................................................................... 244
8.3.2. MF311 .............................................................................................................................. 245
8.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 246
8.4.1. MF112 .............................................................................................................................. 246
8.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 249
8.5.1. MF111/ MF121/ MF141 ................................................................................................... 249
8.5.2. MF311 .............................................................................................................................. 250
8.5.3. MF112 .............................................................................................................................. 254
8.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 255
8.6.1. MF111/ MF121/ MF141 ................................................................................................... 255
8.6.2. MF112 .............................................................................................................................. 257
9. MI... CURRENT IDMT / VOLTAGE RESTRAINT OVERCURRENT / MOTOR

OSCILLATION .................................................................................................... 259
9.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 259
9.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 261
9.2.1. Overcurrent IDMT 1-phasig 2-stufig ................................................................................ 261
9.2.2. Overcurrent IDMT 3 Phase, 2 Stage ............................................................................... 262
9.2.3. Voltage Restraint Overcurrent ......................................................................................... 266
9.2.4. Motor Oscillation Protection ............................................................................................. 267
9.3. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................................. 269
9.3.1. MI325/ MI327/ MI125 ....................................................................................................... 269
9.3.2. MI318 ............................................................................................................................... 270
9.3.3. MI119 ............................................................................................................................... 271
9.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 272
9.4.1. MI325/ MI327/ MI125 ....................................................................................................... 272
9.4.2. MI318 ............................................................................................................................... 280
9.4.3. MI119 ............................................................................................................................... 284
9.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 290
9.5.1. MI125/ MI325/ MI327 ....................................................................................................... 290
9.5.2. MI318 ............................................................................................................................... 291
9.5.3. MI119 ............................................................................................................................... 292
9.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 295
9.6.1. MI325/ MI327/ MI125 ....................................................................................................... 295

Table of Contents
9.6.2. MI318 .............................................................................................................................. 295

9.6.3. MI119 .............................................................................................................................. 295
10. MI... OVER/UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME (DT) ..............297

10.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 297
10.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 299
10.2.1. Over/Undercurrent DT 1 Phase, 1 Stage ........................................................................ 299
10.2.4. Over/Undercurrent DT 3 phase, 2 stage ......................................................................... 307
10.2.5. Fast Overcurrent Function, 1 phase, 1 stage ................................................................. 313
10.2.6. Over/Undercurrent DC Input, 2 stage ............................................................................. 314
10.2.7. Directional Overcurrent DT 1 Phase, 3 Stage ................................................................ 315
10.3.1. MI111/ MI112/ MI121/ MI122/ MI311/ MI312/ MI313/ MI314 MI321/ MI322/ MI323/ MI324/
MI326 .............................................................................................................................. 321
10.3.2. MI120 .............................................................................................................................. 322
10.3.3. MI113 .............................................................................................................................. 323
10.3.4. MI132 .............................................................................................................................. 324
10.3.5. MI332 .............................................................................................................................. 325
10.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 326
MI326 .............................................................................................................................. 326
10.4.2. MI113 .............................................................................................................................. 329
10.4.3. MI120 .............................................................................................................................. 333
10.4.4. MI132 .............................................................................................................................. 337
10.4.5. MI332 .............................................................................................................................. 343
10.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 349
MI326/ MI132/ MI133/ MI332 .......................................................................................... 349
10.5.2. MI113 .............................................................................................................................. 350
10.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 351
10.6.1. All above mentioned functions ........................................................................................ 351
11. ML... OVERLOAD .............................................................................................353

11.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 353
11.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 354
11.2.1. Overload 1 Phase ........................................................................................................... 354
11.2.2. Overload 3 phase ............................................................................................................ 356
11.3.1. ML121/ ML321 ................................................................................................................ 358
11.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 359
11.4.1. ML121/ ML321 ................................................................................................................ 359
11.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 366
11.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 369
12. MN... NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE ............................................................373

12.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 373
12.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 374
12.2.1. Negative Phase Sequence 1 Stage DT/ Without Neutral ............................................... 374
12.2.2. Negative Phase Sequence 1 Stage DT / With Neutral ................................................... 375
12.2.3. Negative Phase Sequence 2 Stage DT / Without Neutral .............................................. 376
12.2.4. Negative Pase Sequence 2 Stage DT / With Neutral ..................................................... 377
12.2.5. Negative Phase Sequence Inverse Time (Thermal) / Without Neutral ........................... 378
12.2.6. Negative Phase Sequence Inverse Time (Thermal) / With Neutral ................................ 380

Table of Contents
12.3.1. MN211/ MN221 ................................................................................................................ 382

12.3.2. MN311/ MN321 ................................................................................................................ 383
12.3.3. MN222 ............................................................................................................................. 384
12.3.4. MN322 ............................................................................................................................. 385
12.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 386
12.4.1. MN211/ MN221 ................................................................................................................ 386
12.4.2. MN311/ MN321 ................................................................................................................ 389
12.4.3. MN222 ............................................................................................................................. 392
12.4.4. MN322 ............................................................................................................................. 395
12.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 399
12.5.1. DT Charakteristik: N211/ MN221/ MN311/ MN321 ......................................................... 399
12.5.2. Inverse Time Characteristic: MN222/ MN322.................................................................. 400
12.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 402
12.6.1. DT Characteristic: N211/ MN221/ MN311/ MN321 ......................................................... 402
12.6.2. Inverse Time Characteristic: MN222/ MN322.................................................................. 404
13. MP... POWER ................................................................................................... 407

13.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 407
13.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 408
13.2.1. Active Power Protection 1 Phase, 1 Stage ...................................................................... 408
13.2.4. Reverse Power Protection 1 Phase, 1 Stage .................................................................. 412
13.2.5. Reverse Power Protection 3 Phase, 1 Stage .................................................................. 413
13.2.6. Power Measuring 1 Phase ............................................................................................... 414
13.2.7. Power Measuring 3 Phase ............................................................................................... 415
13.3.1. MP312.............................................................................................................................. 416
13.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 417
13.4.1. MP312.............................................................................................................................. 417
13.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 421
13.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 422
14. MP... SUDDEN LOAD LOSS............................................................................ 425

14.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 425
14.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 426
14.2.1. Sudden Load Loss Function ............................................................................................ 426
14.3.1. MP319.............................................................................................................................. 428
14.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 429
14.4.1. MP319.............................................................................................................................. 429
14.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 434
14.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 436
15. MQ ... INADVERTENT ENERGISING/VOLTAGE CONTROLLED

OVERCURRENT ................................................................................................ 439
15.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 439
15.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 440
15.2.1. Inadvertent Energising ..................................................................................................... 440
15.2.2. Voltage Controlled Overcurrent ....................................................................................... 441
15.3.1. MQ311 ............................................................................................................................. 442
15.3.2. MQ312 ............................................................................................................................. 443
15.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 444
15.4.1. MQ311 ............................................................................................................................. 444
15.4.2. MQ312 ............................................................................................................................. 448

Table of Contents
15.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 452

15.5.1. MQ311 ............................................................................................................................ 452
15.5.2. MQ312 ............................................................................................................................ 454
15.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 455
15.6.1. MQ311 ............................................................................................................................ 455
15.6.2. MQ312 ............................................................................................................................ 457
16. MR... ROTOR EARTH FAULT / ROTOR INSULATION ...................................459

16.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 459
16.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 460
16.2.1. Rotor Earth Fault ............................................................................................................. 460
16.2.2. Rotor Insulation ............................................................................................................... 462
16.3.1. MR111 (0 ... 150 VAC) .................................................................................................... 465
16.3.2. MR111 (150 ... 400 VAC) ................................................................................................ 466
16.3.3. MR111 (400 ... 850 VAC) ................................................................................................ 467
16.3.4. MR121 (0 ... 400 VAC) .................................................................................................... 468
16.3.5. MR121 (400 ... 850 VAC) ................................................................................................ 469
16.3.6. MR131 (UAKB) ............................................................................................................... 470
16.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 471
16.4.1. MR111 (0 ... 150 VAC) .................................................................................................... 471
16.4.2. MR111 (150 ... 400 VAC) ................................................................................................ 474
16.4.3. MR111 (400 ... 850 VAC) ................................................................................................ 477
16.4.4. MR121 (0 ... 400 VAC) .................................................................................................... 480
16.4.5. MR121 (400 ... 850 VAC) ................................................................................................ 483
16.4.6. MR131 (UAKB) ............................................................................................................... 486
16.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 490
16.5.1. MR111/ MR121 / MR131 ................................................................................................ 490
16.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 491
16.6.1. MR111/ MR121 / MR131 ................................................................................................ 491
17. MS... STATOR EARTH FAULT ........................................................................493

17.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 493
17.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 494
17.3.1. MS111 ............................................................................................................................. 501
17.3.2. MS211 ............................................................................................................................. 502
17.3.3. MS212 ............................................................................................................................. 503
17.3.4. MS213 ............................................................................................................................. 504
17.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 505
17.4.1. MS111 ............................................................................................................................. 505
17.4.2. MS211 ............................................................................................................................. 513
17.4.3. MS212 ............................................................................................................................. 519
17.4.4. MS213 ............................................................................................................................. 523
17.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 526
17.5.1. MS111 ............................................................................................................................. 526
17.5.2. MS211 ............................................................................................................................. 527
17.5.3. MS211 ............................................................................................................................. 528
17.5.4. MS212 ............................................................................................................................. 529
17.5.5. MS113/ MS213 ............................................................................................................... 531
17.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 533
17.6.1. MS111 ............................................................................................................................. 533
17.6.2. MS211 ............................................................................................................................. 535
17.6.3. MS212 ............................................................................................................................. 537
17.6.4. MS113/ MS213 ............................................................................................................... 539

Table of Contents
18. MT... VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION ......................................... 547

18.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 547
18.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 548
18.2.1. VT Supervision 2 Phase .................................................................................................. 548
18.2.2. VT Broken Conductor 3 Phase ........................................................................................ 549
18.2.3. VT Supervision 3 Phase, Y - Connection ........................................................................ 551
18.2.4. VT Supervision 3 Phase, Y - Connection, With Optional VT Fault LED Indication ......... 552
18.2.5. VT Supervision 3 Phase, D - Connection ........................................................................ 553
18.2.6. Inverse Time VT Supervision 3 Phase, D Connection, With Optional VT Fault LED
Indication.......................................................................................................................... 554
18.3.1. MT212 .............................................................................................................................. 555
18.3.2. MT312/ MT315 ................................................................................................................ 556
18.3.3. MT313/ MT317 ................................................................................................................ 557
18.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 558
18.4.1. MT212 .............................................................................................................................. 558
18.4.2. MT312/ MT315 ................................................................................................................ 563
18.4.3. MT313/ MT317 ................................................................................................................ 567
18.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 571
18.5.1. General Basics MT212/ MT312/ MT315/ MT313/ MT317 ............................................... 571
18.5.2. MT300 .............................................................................................................................. 572
18.5.2.1. General Basics: ........................................................................................................ 572
18.5.2.2. Function Test ........................................................................................................... 574
18.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 577
19. MT... CT SUPERVISION................................................................................... 579

19.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 579
19.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 581
19.2.1. CT Supervision 2 Phase .................................................................................................. 581
19.2.2. CT Supervision 3 Phase, Y - Connection ........................................................................ 582
19.2.3. Current Sum Evaluation 3 Phase, Y Connection with Optional CT Supervision .......... 583
19.2.4. CT Supervision 3 Phase, D - Connection ........................................................................ 584
19.2.5. Inverse Time CT Supervision 3 Phase, D Connection with Optional LED Fault Indication
......................................................................................................................................... 585
19.3.1. MT211 .............................................................................................................................. 587
19.3.2. MT311/ MT316 ................................................................................................................ 588
19.3.3. MT314/ MT318 ................................................................................................................ 589
19.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 590
19.4.1. MT211 .............................................................................................................................. 590
19.4.2. MT311/ MT316 ................................................................................................................ 594
19.4.3. MT314/ MT318 ................................................................................................................ 598
19.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 602
19.5.1. MT211 .............................................................................................................................. 603
19.5.2. MT311 .............................................................................................................................. 604
19.5.3. MT314 .............................................................................................................................. 605
19.5.4. MT316 .............................................................................................................................. 607
19.5.5. MT318 .............................................................................................................................. 607
19.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 608
20. MU... SYNCHRONISING CHECK / VOLTAGE BALANCE 1 / VOLTAGE

BALANCE 2 ....................................................................................................... 609
20.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 609
20.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 610
20.2.1. Synchronising Check ....................................................................................................... 610
20.2.2. Voltage Balance 1 ............................................................................................................ 611

Table of Contents
20.2.3. Voltage Balance 2 ........................................................................................................... 613

20.3. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................................. 614
20.3.1. MU211 ............................................................................................................................. 614
20.3.2. MU611 ............................................................................................................................. 615
20.3.3. MU312 ............................................................................................................................. 616
20.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 617
20.4.1. MU211 ............................................................................................................................. 617
20.4.2. MU611 ............................................................................................................................. 620
20.4.3. MU312 ............................................................................................................................. 623
20.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 626
20.5.1. MU211 ............................................................................................................................. 626
20.5.2. MU611 ............................................................................................................................. 627
20.5.3. MU312 ............................................................................................................................. 628
20.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 629
20.6.1. MU211 ............................................................................................................................. 629
20.6.2. MU311 / MU611 .............................................................................................................. 629
21. MU... OVER/UNDERVOLTAGE DT .................................................................631

21.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 631
21.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 632
21.2.1. Over/Undervoltage DT 1 Phase, 1 Stage ....................................................................... 632
21.2.2. Over/ Undervoltage DT 1 Phase, 2 Stage ...................................................................... 633
21.2.5. Fast Overvoltage Protection DT 4-phase 1-stage .......................................................... 641
21.3.1. MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU313/ MU314/ MU315/ MU321/ MU322 ............................. 643
21.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 644
21.4.1. MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU313/ MU314/ MU315/ MU321/ MU322 ............................. 644
21.4.2. MU421 ............................................................................................................................. 647
21.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 650
21.5.1. MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU321.................................................................................... 650
21.5.2. MU421 ............................................................................................................................. 650
21.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 653
21.6.1. MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU321 .................................................................................... 653
22. MX... OVERFLUXING .......................................................................................655

22.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 655
22.2. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................. 656
22.2.1. Overfluxing DT 2 Stage ................................................................................................... 656
22.2.2. Overfluxing Inverse Time ................................................................................................ 658
22.3.1. MX121 ............................................................................................................................. 660
22.3.2. MX125 ............................................................................................................................. 661
22.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 662
22.4.1. MX121 ............................................................................................................................. 662
22.4.2. MX125 ............................................................................................................................. 665
22.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 669
22.5.1. MX121 ............................................................................................................................. 669
22.5.2. MX125 ............................................................................................................................. 670
22.6. COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................. 671
22.6.1. MX121 ............................................................................................................................. 671
22.6.2. MX125 ............................................................................................................................. 672
23. MY... ENERGISING FUNCTION .......................................................................673

23.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 673

Table of Contents
23.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 674

23.3.1. MY111.............................................................................................................................. 675
23.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 676
23.4.1. MY111.............................................................................................................................. 676
23.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 681
23.5.1. MY111.............................................................................................................................. 681
23.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 682
23.6.1. MY111.............................................................................................................................. 682
24. MZ... MINIMUM IMPEDANCE / UNDERVOLTAGE - OVERCURRENT /

. VOLTAGE RESTRAINT OVERCURRENT .............................................. 683
24.1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 683
24.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 684
24.2.1. Minimum lmpedance Circular Characteristic, 2 phase, 2 stage - separate output .......... 684
24.2.2. Minimum lmpedance Circular Characteristic, 2 Phase, 2 Stage -common output .......... 686
24.2.3. Minimum lmpedance Circular Characteristic, 3 Phase, 2 Stage -separate output .......... 687
24.2.4. Minimum lmpedance Circular Characteristic, 3 Phase, 2 Stage -common output .......... 689
24.2.5. Undervoltage/Overcurrent 3 Phase ................................................................................. 691
24.2.6. Compound Voltage Overcurrent (I> .AND. (U< .OR. UNPS>)) ................................ 692
24.3.1. MZ221/ MZ222 ................................................................................................................ 694
24.3.2. MZ321/ MZ322 ................................................................................................................ 695
24.3.3. MZ311 .............................................................................................................................. 696
24.3.4. MZ312 .............................................................................................................................. 697
24.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................. 698
24.4.1. MZ221/ MZ222 ................................................................................................................ 698
24.4.2. MZ321/ MZ322 ................................................................................................................ 702
24.4.3. MZ311 .............................................................................................................................. 707
24.4.4. MZ312 .............................................................................................................................. 712
24.5. FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................. 716
24.5.1. MZ221/ MZ222/ MZ321/ MZ322 ...................................................................................... 716
24.5.2. MZ311 .............................................................................................................................. 718
24.5.3. MZ312 .............................................................................................................................. 720
24.6. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................... 722
24.6.1. MZ221/ MZ222/ MZ321/ MZ322 ...................................................................................... 722
25. DRS SYSTEM / POLARITY OF VT AND CT QUANTITIES ............................... 725

25.1. DEFINITIONS / VOLTAGE- AND CURRENT VECTORS....................................................... 725
25.2. DRS COMPACT/ POLARITY OF VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS .......................................... 726
25.3. DRS-MODULAR / POLARITY OF VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS ........................................ 728
25.4. DRS-LIGHT / POLARITY OF VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS ................................................ 729
26. DRS SYSTEM / COMMUNICATION RS422-485 ............................................... 731

26.1. RS485 - BUS ........................................................................................................................... 731
26.2. RS485 -- DRSCOM ................................................................................................................. 732
26.3. RS485 -- CONTROL SYSTEM PC .................................................................................. 733
26.4. RS485 -- DRSCOM / LEGEND ............................................................................................... 734
27. DRS SYSTEM / DIFFERENCES DRS COMPACT2 - DRS COMPACT2A......... 735

27.1. BASICS ................................................................................................................................... 735
27.2. RELAY CASE DIMENSIONS .................................................................................................. 735
27.3. IN- / OUTPUTS........................................................................................................................ 735
27.3.1. ANALOGUE INPUTS FOR CT AND VT CIRCUITS ........................................................ 738
27.3.2. DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUTS .................................................................................... 738
27.3.3. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE .................................................................................... 738

Table of Contents
27.3.4. OPTIONAL MODULES ................................................................................................... 738
28. DRS FAMILY FURTHER DOCUMENTS .........................................................739

28.1. Download-Portal im WWW ..................................................................................................... 739
28.2. DRS-MODULAR ..................................................................................................................... 741
28.3. DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2A ............................................................................. 741
28.4. DRS-LIGHT ............................................................................................................................ 741
28.5. DRS-WIN ................................................................................................................................ 742

Figures
Figures
Fig. 1 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Wiring Diagram ................................................................. 34

Fig. 2 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Wiring Diagram .............................................................................. 35
Fig. 3 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Wiring Diagram .............................................................................. 36
Fig. 4 MB442 Logic Function 2 Wiring Diagram ......................................................................................... 37
Fig. 5 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Logic Diagram ................................................................... 38
Fig. 6 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Logic Diagram / Processing .............................................. 39
Fig. 7 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ................................. 40
Fig. 8 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram Desisgn Version: 1 ................................................ 41
Fig. 9 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram Design Version: 2 .................................................. 42
Fig. 10 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram / Processing Design Version: 1 .......................... 43
Fig. 11 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram / Processing Design Version: 2 ......................... 44
Fig. 12 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ........................................... 45
Fig. 13 MB211 Trip Cicuit Supervision Design Example / Not Using Aux. Ciruit Design Version : 2 ...... 46
Fig. 14 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Design Example / Not Using Aux Circuit Design Version: 2 ..... 47
Fig. 15 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Operating Conditions Design Version: 1 Example .................. 48
Fig. 16 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Operating Conditions Design Version: 1 Example .................. 49
Fig. 17 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Design-Version: 1A, 1B / Dig Input-Volt. Jumpers Design
Version: 1A, 1B ....................................................................................................................... 50
Fig. 18 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram ........................................................................................ 51
Fig. 19 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram Processing ..................................................................... 52
Fig. 20 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram / Processing Detail ......................................................... 53
Fig. 21 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ...................................................... 54
Fig. 22 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ...................................................... 55
Fig. 23 MB442 Logic Function 2 Example 1 .............................................................................................. 56
Fig. 24 NB442 Logic Function 2 Example 2 ............................................................................................... 57
Fig. 25 MC316 CBF (Circuit Breaker Failure) Logic Diagram .................................................................... 65
Fig. 26 MC316 CBF (Circuit Breaker Failure) Logic Diagram .................................................................... 66
Fig. 27 MC316 CBF (Circuit Breaker Failure) Logic Diagram Processing ................................................. 67
Fig. 28 MC316 CBF (Circuit Breaker Failure) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .................................. 68
Fig. 29 MC316 CBF (Ciruit Breaker Fail) ,,Zero Crossing ........................................................................ 69
Fig. 30 MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. Wiring Diagram .......................................................... 81
Fig. 31 MD322, MD323: 87G Wiring Diagram ........................................................................................... 82
Fig. 32 MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. Logic Diagram ........................................................... 83
Fig. 33 MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. Logic Diagram Processing ........................................ 84
Fig. 34 MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ......................... 85
Fig. 35 MD222/MD228 87G 2-PH. Standard Bias Characteristic .............................................................. 86
Fig. 36 MD223/MD228 87G 2PH. Bias Char. With Reduced Inference of Restraint Curr. ........................ 87
Fig. 37 MD322, MD323 87G Logic Diagram .............................................................................................. 88
Fig. 38 MD322, MD323: 87G Logic Diagram Processing .......................................................................... 89
Fig. 39 MD322/MD323/MD328/MD329: 87T Logic Diagram Processing / Detail ...................................... 90
Fig. 40 MD322, MD323: 87G Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ........................................................... 91
Fig. 41 MD322 87G Standard BIAS Characteristic .................................................................................. 92
Fig. 42 MD323 87G BIAS Char. with Reduced Inference of Restraint Curr. ........................................... 93
Fig. 43 MD322, MD323 87G Current Polarity Verification Shown: Regular Operation of Generator +
Regular Wiring of C.Ts ........................................................................................................... 94
Fig. 44 MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. Wiring Diagram ............................................ 125
Fig. 45 MD231 87T3-INP., 2-PH. Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 126
Fig. 46 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 127
Fig. 47 MD331/MD334/MD335/MD336/MD337 87T 3-INP. 3-PH. Wiring Diagram ................................ 128
Fig. 48 MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. Logic Diagram ............................................. 129
Fig. 49 MD211/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. Logic Diagram Processing .......................... 130

Figures
Fig. 50 MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ........... 131
Fig. 51 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Logic Diagram ....................................................... 132
Fig. 52 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Logic Diagram Processing .................................... 133
Fig. 53 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Logic Diagram Processing / Detail ........................ 134
Fig. 54 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ..................... 135
Fig. 55 MD321 87T Standard Bias Characteristic ................................................................................... 136
Fig. 56 MD325/MD327 87T Bias Char. With Reduced inference of Restraint Curr. ............................... 137
Fig. 57 MD321 Vector Group Verification Example: Vector Group Of Main Transformer = ,,0. ............ 138
Fig. 58 MD321 Vector Group Verification Example: Vector Group Of Main Transformer = ,,1 ............. 139
Fig. 62 MD321 Vector Group Verification Example: Vector Group Of Main Transformer = ,,11. .......... 143
Fig. 63 ME311 78MHO Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................. 161
Fig. 64 ME311 78MHO Logic Diagram .................................................................................................... 162
Fig. 65 ME311 78MHO Logic Diagram / Processing ............................................................................... 163
Fig. 66 ME311 78MHO Logic Diagram Processing / Legend.................................................................. 164
Fig. 67 ME311 78MHO Theorie Of ,,Out Of Step- Function .................................................................. 165
Fig. 68 ME311 78MHO Calculation Of Set Values .................................................................................. 166
Fig. 69 ME311 78MHO Trip Condition Setting ........................................................................................ 167
Fig. 70 ME311 78MHO Definition Of Sequence ...................................................................................... 168
Fig. 71 ME311 78MHO Trip Conditions ................................................................................................... 169
Fig. 72 ME311 78MHO Definition Of Time Settings ................................................................................ 170
Fig. 73 ME121 Underexcitation 1-PH. DC Wiring Diagram ..................................................................... 204
Fig. 74 ME122 Underexcitation 1-PH. DC Wiring Diagram ..................................................................... 205
Fig. 75 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Wiring Diagram......................................................................... 206
Fig. 76 ME322, ME324 Underexc. 3-PH. DC Wiring Diagram ................................................................ 207
Fig. 77 ME323 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 208
Fig. 78 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Logic Diagram .......................................................................... 209
Fig. 79 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH.AC Logic Diagram / Processing ...................................................... 210
Fig. 80 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ........................................ 211
Fig. 81 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Theor. Definition Of Rotor Angle .............................................. 212
Fig. 82 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-Ph. AC Calculation Of Rotor Angle ....................................................... 213
Fig. 83 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH.AC Example: Calc. Of Rotor Angle Using The Gen. Power Diagram
............................................................................................................................................. 214
Fig. 84 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Example: Calc. Of Rotor Angle Set Values Using Gen. Power
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 215
Fig. 85 ME322 Underexc. 3-PH. DC Setting Example For Slow Input SI03 ........................................... 216
Fig. 86 ME322 Underexc. 3-PH. DC Supervision Of Measuring Transducer For Rotorcurr. .................. 217
Fig. 87 ME323 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC Logic Diagram ........................................................ 218
Fig. 88 ME323 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC Logic Diagram Processing ..................................... 219
Fig. 89 ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. DC Logic Diagram ........................................................ 220
Fig. 90 ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO3-PH. DC Logic Diagram Processing ...................................... 221
Fig. 91 ME323, ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC, DC Logic Diagram Processing / Legend . 222
Fig. 92 ME323,ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC / DC Calculation Of Set Values Application
Example 1 ............................................................................................................................ 223
Fig. 93 ME323, ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC / DC Calculation Of Set Values Application
Example 2 ............................................................................................................................ 224
Fig. 94 MF112 Frequency Gradient Wiring Diagram ............................................................................... 244
Fig. 95 MF112 Frequency Gradient Logic Diagram ................................................................................ 246
Fig. 96 MF112 Frequency Gradient Logic Diagram Processing ............................................................. 247
Fig. 97 MF112 Frequency Gradient Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .............................................. 248
Fig. 98 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. Wiring Diagram ................................................................. 269
Fig. 99 MI318 Volt. Restrained O/C Wiring Diagram ............................................................................... 270
Fig. 100 MI119 Motor Oscillation Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 271
Fig. 101 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. Logic Diagram ................................................................ 272
Fig. 102 IDMT Overcurr. 3-PH.2-ST. With Phase-Separated Outputs Logic Diagram / Processing ...... 273

Figures
Fig. 103 MI327 IDMT Overcurr. 3-PH. 2-ST. With Phase Common Outputs For All Phases Logic
Diagram / Processing............................................................................................................ 274
Fig. 104 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ............................... 275
Fig. 105 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. IEC/ Long Inverse-Characteristic .................................... 276
Fig. 106 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. IEC/ Normal Inverse-Characteristic ................................ 277
Fig. 107 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. IEC / Very Inverse-Characteristic .................................... 278
Fig. 108 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Strom IEC/ Extremly Inverse-Characteristic ................................... 279
Fig. 109 MI318 Volt. Restrained O/C Logic Diagram ............................................................................... 280
Fig. 110 MI318 Volt. Restrained O/C Logic Diagram Processing ............................................................ 281
Fig. 111 MI318 Volt. Restrained O/C Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ............................................. 282
Fig. 112 MI318 Volt. Restr. O/C Voltage Restrained Characteristic ........................................................ 283
Fig. 113 MI119 Motor Oscillation Logic Diagram ..................................................................................... 284
Fig. 114 MI119 Motor Oscillation Logic Diagram Processing .................................................................. 285
Fig. 115 MI119 Motor Oscillation Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ................................................... 286
Fig. 116 MI119 Motor Oscillation Explanation of ,,grad f ou - Blocking ..................................................... 287
Fig. 117 MI119 Motor Oscillation Oscillation Counter Definition .............................................................. 288
Fig. 118 MI119 Motor Oscillation Setting Example .................................................................................. 289
Fig. 119 Def. Time Over- / Under-Current: MI111 Current 1-PH. 1.ST. Wiring Diagram ......................... 321
Fig. 120 MI120 Current DC 2-ST. Wiring Diagram .................................................................................. 322
Fig. 121 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Wiring Diagram ............................................................. 323
Fig. 122 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Wiring Diagram .................................................................. 324
Fig. 123 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-St. Wiring Diagram ............................................................................... 325
Fig. 124 MI111 MI121 MI311 MI313 MI314 MI315 MI321 MI322 MI323 MI324 MI326 Logic Diagram .. 326
Fig. 125 Def. Time Over-/Under-Current: MI111 Current 1-PH. 1-ST. Logic Diagram / Processing For
Available Models: See ,,Logic Diagram ............................................................................. 327
ST
Fig. 126 Def. Time Over-/Under-Current: MI111 Current 1-PH. 1 . Logic Diagram Legend / Processing
For Available Models: See ,,Logic Diagram ................................................................... 328
Fig. 127 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Logic Diagram .............................................................. 329
Fig. 128 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Definition Of Function ................................................... 330
Fig. 129 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Logic Diagram Processing ........................................... 331
Fig. 130 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ............................ 332
Fig. 131 MI120 Curent DC 2-ST. Logic Diagram ..................................................................................... 333
Fig. 132 MI120 Current DC 2-ST. Logic Diagram Processing ................................................................. 334
Fig. 133 MI120 Current DC 2-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .................................................. 335
Fig. 134 MI120 Current DC 2-ST. Supervision Of Meas. Transducer For Phase-Current ...................... 336
Fig. 135 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram .................................................................... 337
Fig. 136 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram Processing ................................................. 338
Fig. 137 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .................................. 339
Fig. 138 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Definition Of Directions ...................................................... 340
Fig. 139 MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DEF. Of Ranges Of DIR. 1 / DIR.2 ................................... 341
Fig. 140 MI132 MI133 Dir. 0/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DRS Fault Record / Def. Of Sign ........................................ 342
Fig. 141 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram ............................................................................... 343
Fig. 142 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram Processing ............................................................ 344
Fig. 143 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ............................................. 345
Fig. 144 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Definition Of Directions ................................................................. 346
Fig. 145 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Def. Of Ranges Of Dir. 1 / Dir. 2 ................................................... 347
Fig. 146 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. DRS Fault Record / Def. Of Sign .................................................. 348
Fig. 147 ML321 Overload 3-PH. / ML121 Overload 1-PH. Wiring Diagram............................................. 358
Fig. 148 ML321 Overload 3-PH / ML121 Overload 1-PH.. Logic Diagram .............................................. 359
Fig. 149 ML321 Overload 3-PH. / ML121 Overload 1-PH. Logic Diagram / Processing ......................... 360
Fig. 150 ML321 Overload 3-PH. / ML121 Overload 1-PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ............ 361
Fig. 151 ML321 ML121 Overload Definition Of Set Values ..................................................................... 362
Fig. 152 ML321 ML121 Overload 3-PH. Connection Of Temp. Sensor (Eurax) ...................................... 363
Fig. 153 ML321 ML121 Overload 3-PH. Connection Of Temp. Sensor (UAKB) ..................................... 364
Fig. 154 ML321 ML121 Setting Example ................................................................................................. 365
Fig. 155 MN211 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. / MN221 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Wiring Diagram
.............................................................................................................................................. 382

Figures
Fig. 156 MN311 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. Wiring Diagram / MN321 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St.
Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................................... 383
Fig. 157 MN222 INV. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 384
Fig. 158 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 385
Fig. 159 MN211 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. Logic Diagram / MN221 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St.
Logic Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 386
Fig. 160 MN211 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. Logic Diagram / Processing .......................................... 387
Fig. 161 MN211 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. / MN221 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Logic Diagram
Processing / Legend ............................................................................................................ 388
Fig. 162 MN311 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. / MN321 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Logic Diagram 389
Fig. 163 MN311 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. / MN321 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Logic Diagram /
Processing............................................................................................................................ 390
Processing / Legend ............................................................................................................ 391
Fig. 165 MN222 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram ....................................................... 392
Fig. 166 MN222 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram / Processing................................... 393
Fig. 167 MN222 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ..................... 394
Fig. 168 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram ....................................................... 395
Fig. 169 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram / Processing................................... 396
Fig. 170 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ..................... 397
Fig. 171 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Definition Of Set Values ........................................ 398
Fig. 172 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Wiring Diagram ....................................................................... 416
Fig. 173 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Logic Diagram ........................................................................ 417
Fig. 174 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Logic Diagram / Processing ................................................... 418
Fig. 175 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend page1/2 ........................ 419
Fig. 176 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend page 2/2 ....................... 420
Fig. 177 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Wiring Diagram ......................................................................... 428
Fig. 178 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Logic Diagram .......................................................................... 429
Fig. 179 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Logic Diagam /Processing ....................................................... 430
Fig. 180 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ........................................ 431
Fig. 181 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Definition of Sequence ............................................................. 432
Fig. 182 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Timing of Sequence ................................................................. 433
Fig. 183 MQ 311 Inadvertent Energizing Wiring Diagram ....................................................................... 442
Fig. 184 MQ312 Volt Contr. O/C Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 443
Fig. 185 MQ311 Inadvertent Energizing Logic Diagram ......................................................................... 444
Fig. 186 MQ311 Inadvertent Energizing Logic Diagram / Processing .................................................... 445
Fig. 187 MQ311 Inadvertent Energizing Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ....................................... 446
Fig. 188 MQ311 Inadvertent Energizing Timing Sequence / Examples .................................................. 447
Fig. 189 MQ312 Volt. Contr. O/C Logic Diagram .................................................................................... 448
Fig. 190 MQ312 Volt. Contr. O/C Logic Diagram Processing ................................................................. 449
Fig. 191 MQ312 Volt. Contr. O/C Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .................................................. 450
Fig. 192 MQ312 Volt. Contr. O/C Trip Characteristic .............................................................................. 451
Fig. 193 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55k Suitable For Exc. Systems With Exc.
Transformer Phase-Phase Voltage Up To 150VACRMS (0.150VACRMS) Wiring Diagram 465
Fig. 194 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55k Suitable For Exc Systems With Exc. Transformer
Phase-Phase Voltages Up To 400VACRMS (150400VACRMS) Wiring Diagram................. 466
Transformer Phase Phase Voltages Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Wiring
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 467
Fig. 196 MR121 Rotor E/F (Insulation Supervision) Range: 4100k Suitable For Exc. Systems with
Exc. Transformer Phase-Phase Voltages Up To 400VAC Wiring Diagram ....................... 468
Fig. 197 MR121 Rotor E/F (Insulation Supervision) Range: 4100k Suitable For Exc. Systems With
Exc. Transformer Phase-Phase Voltages Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Wiring
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 469
Fig. 198 MR131 Rotor E/F (Insulation Supervision) UAKB Wiring Diagram ........................................... 470

Figures
Transformer Phase Phase Voltages Up To 150VACRMS (0150VACRMS) Logic Diagram
.............................................................................................................................................. 471
Transformer Phase Phase Voltages Up To 150VACRMS (0150VACRMS) Logic Diagram /
Processing ............................................................................................................................ 472
Transformer Phase Phase Volt. Up To 150VACRMS (0150VACRMS) Logic Diagram
Processing / Legend ............................................................................................................. 473
.............................................................................................................................................. 474
Fig. 203 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55kk Suitable for Exc. Systems With Exc.
/ Processing .......................................................................................................................... 475
Fig. 204 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55k Suitable For Exc. Systems with Exc. Transformer
Phase Phase Volt. Up To 400VACRMS ( 150400VACRMS) Logic Diagram Processing /
Legend .................................................................................................................................. 476
.............................................................................................................................................. 477
/ Processing .......................................................................................................................... 478
Transformer Phase Phase Volt. Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Logic Diagram
Processing / Legend ............................................................................................................. 479
Fig. 208 MR121 Rotor E/F (Insulation Supervision) Range: 4100kW Suitable For Exc. Systems With
Exc. Transformer Phase Phase Voltages Up To 400VAC Logic Diagram ....................... 480
Exc. Transformer Phase Phase Voltages Up To 400VAC Logic Diagram / Processing .. 481
Exc. Transformer Phase Phase Voltages Up To 400VAC Logic Diagram Processing /
Legend .................................................................................................................................. 482
Exc. Transformer Phase Phase Voltages Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Logic
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 483
Exc. Transformer Phase Phase Voltages Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Logic
Diagram / Processing............................................................................................................ 484
Exc. Transformer Phase Phase Volt. Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Logic
Diagram Processing / Legend .............................................................................................. 485
Fig. 214 MR131 Rotor E/F (UAKB) Range: 1100k Logic Diagram .................................................... 486
Fig. 215 MR131 Rotor E/F (UAKB) Range: 1100k Logic Diagram / Processing ............................... 487
Fig. 216 MR131 Rotor E/F (UAKB) Range: 1100k Characteristic Diagram ...................................... 488
Fig. 217 MR131 Rotor E/F (UAKB) Range: 1100k Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .................. 489
Fig. 218 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................... 501
Fig. 219 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Wiring Diagram ......................................................................... 502
Fig. 220 MS212 Biased Stator E/F 100% Wiring Diagram....................................................................... 503
Fig. 221 MS213 Stator E/F 3rd Harmonic Wiring Diagram ...................................................................... 504
Fig. 222 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Logic Diagram ........................................................................................ 505
Fig. 223 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Logic Diagram Processing ..................................................................... 506
Fig. 224 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ...................................................... 507
Fig. 225 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Calculation Of Direction (1 2) ............................................................ 508
Fig. 226 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Polarity of I0 and U0 - Phasors ............................................................... 509
Fig. 227 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Polarity of I0 and U0 Phasors / Outzone E/F ....................................... 510

Figures
Fig. 228 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Polarity of I0 and U0 Phasors / Inzone E/F ......................................... 511
Fig. 229 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Polarity of I0 and U0 Phasors / Verification ......................................... 512
Fig. 230 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram page 1/3: Overview .......................................... 513
Fig. 231 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram / Processing ..................................................... 514
Fig. 232 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ........................................ 515
Fig. 233 MS211 Stator E/F 100% Equivalent Circuit page 1/3................................................................ 516
Fig. 234 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram page 2/3: Detail: Aux. Power Supply ............... 517
Fig. 235 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram page 3/3: Detail: Blocking Input ....................... 518
Fig. 236 MS212 Biased Stator E/F 100% Logic Diagram ....................................................................... 519
Fig. 237 MS212 Biased Stator E/F 100% Logic Diagram / Processing .................................................. 520
Fig. 238 MS212 Biased Stator E/F 100% Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ..................................... 521
Fig. 239 MS212 Biased Stator E/F Trip Characteristic [Processing (VE2) Only].................................... 522
Fig. 240 MS213 Stator E/F 3rd Harmonic Logic Diagram ....................................................................... 523
Fig. 241 MS213 Stator E/F 3rd Harmonic Logic Diagram Processing .................................................... 524
Fig. 242 MS213 Stator E/F 3rd Harmonic Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ..................................... 525
Fig. 243 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH: Wiring Diagram .......................................................................... 555
Fig. 244 MT312 V. T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Wiring Diagram MT315 Residual Voltage Detection Wiring
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 556
Fig. 245 MT313 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Wiring Diagram MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV Wiring
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 557
Fig. 246 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram ............................................................................ 558
Fig. 247 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram Processing ........................................................ 559
Fig. 248 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend.......................................... 560
Fig. 249 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Example 1= Using Phase Ground Voltages ........................... 561
Fig. 250 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Example 2= Using Phase Phase Voltages ............................. 562
Fig. 251 MT312 V.T.Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram MT315 Residual Voltage Detection Logic
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 563
Fig. 252 MT312 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram Processing MT315 Residual Voltage
Detection Logic Diagram Processing .................................................................................. 564
Fig. 253 MT312 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MT315 Residual Voltage
Detection Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ................................................................... 565
Fig. 254 MT312 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star MT315 Residual Voltage Detection } Example ................. 566
Fig. 255 MT313 V.T.Monitoring 3-PH.Delta Logic Diagram MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV Logic Diagram
............................................................................................................................................. 567
Fig. 256 MT313 V. T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram Processing MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV
Logic Diagram Processing ................................................................................................... 568
Fig. 257 MT313 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MT317 Neg. Phase
Sequ. OV Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .................................................................. 569
Fig. 258 MT313 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV } Example ....................... 570
Fig. 259 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Wiring Diagram .......................................................................... 587
Fig. 260 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Wiring Diagram MT316 Residual Current Detection Wiring
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 588
Fig. 261 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Wiring Diagram MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC Wiring
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 589
Fig. 262 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram ........................................................................... 590
Fig. 263 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram Processing ......................................................... 591
Fig. 264 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ......................................... 592
Fig. 265 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Example ..................................................................................... 593
Fig. 266 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH.Star Logic Diagram MT316 Residual Current Detection Logic
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 594
Fig. 267 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram Processing MT316 Residual Current
Detection Logic Diagram Processing .................................................................................. 595
Fig. 268 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MT316 Residual Current
Detection Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ................................................................... 596
Fig. 269 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star MT316 Residual Current Detection } Example ................. 597
Fig. 270 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC Logic
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 598

Figures
Fig. 271 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram Processing MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC
Logic Diagram Processing .................................................................................................... 599
Fig. 272 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MT318 Neg. Phase
Sequ. OC Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ................................................................... 600
Fig. 273 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC } Example ........................ 601
Fig. 274 MU211 Synchro Check Wiring Diagram ................................................................................. 614
Fig. 275 MU611 Voltage Balance 1 Wiring Diagram ................................................................................ 615
Fig. 276 MU312 Voltage Balance 2 Wiring Diagram ................................................................................ 616
Fig. 277 MU211 Synchro Check Logic Diagram ................................................................................... 617
Fig. 278 MU211 Synchro Check Logic Diagram / Processing .............................................................. 618
Fig. 279 MU211 Synchro Check Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ................................................. 619
Fig. 280 MU611 Voltage Balance 1 Logic Diagram ................................................................................. 620
Fig. 281 MU611 Voltage Balance 1 Logic Diagram Processing .............................................................. 621
Fig. 282 MU611 Voltage Balance 1 Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ............................................... 622
Fig. 283 MU312 Voltage Balance 2 Logic Diagram ................................................................................. 623
Fig. 284 MU312 Voltage Balance 2 Logic Diagram / Processing ............................................................ 624
Fig. 285 MU312 Voltage Balance 2 Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ............................................... 625
Fig. 286 Def. Time Over-/Under Voltage: MU111 Voltage 1-PH. 1-ST. Wiring Diagram For Available
Models: See ,,Logic Diagram ................................................................................................. 643
Fig. 287 Def. Time Over-/Under-Voltage Logic Diagram ......................................................................... 644
Fig. 288 Def. Time Over-/Under-Voltage: MU111 Voltage 1-PH. 1-ST. Logic Diagram / Processing
For Available Models: See ,, Logic Diagram ....................................................................... 645
Abb. 289 Def. Time Over-/Under-Voltage: MU111 Voltage 1-PH. 1-ST. Logic Diagram Processing /
Legend for available models: see "Logic Diagram" ....................................................... 646
Fig. 290 MU421 Voltage 4-ph 1-st ( V>>>) Logic Diagramm .................................................................. 647
Fig. 291 MU421 Voltage 4-ph 1-st ( V>>>) Logic Diagramm Processing ............................................... 648
Fig. 292 MU421 Voltage 4-ph 1-st ( V>>>) Logic Diagramm Processing / Legend ................................ 649
Fig. 293 MX121 Overfluxing Wiring Diagram ........................................................................................... 660
Fig. 294 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Wiring Diagram ..................................................................... 661
Fig. 295 MX121 Overfluxing Logic Diagram ............................................................................................ 662
Fig. 296 MX121 Overfluxing Logic Diagram / Processing ....................................................................... 663
Fig. 297 MX121 Overfluxing Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .......................................................... 664
Fig. 298 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Logic Diagram ...................................................................... 665
Fig. 299 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Logic Diagram / Processing .................................................. 666
Fig. 300 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .................................... 667
Fig. 301 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Example For Standard Settings............................................ 668
Fig. 302 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Wiring Diagram .............................................................. 675
Fig. 303 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Logic Diagram ................................................................ 676
Fig. 304 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Logic Diagram Processing ............................................. 677
Fig. 305 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend .............................. 678
Fig. 306 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Functional Sequence ..................................................... 679
Fig. 307 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Principle / Explanation ................................................... 680
Fig. 308 MZ221 Min Impedance 2-PH. 2-ST. Wiring Diagram MZ222 Min Impedance 2-PH. 2ST. Wiring
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 694
Fig. 309 MZ321 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2.-ST. Wiring Diagram MZ322 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. Wiring
Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 695
Fig. 310 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot. With Curr. Memory Wiring Diagram .......................................... 696
Fig. 311 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Wiring Diagram ............................................................................ 697
Fig. 312 MZ221 Min. Impedance 2-PH. 2ST. With Circular Characteristic, with Phase Separated
Outputs MZ222 Min. Impedance 2-PH. 2ST. With Circular Characteristic, with Joint
Phase Outputs ...................................................................................................................... 698
Fig. 313 MZ221 Min Impedance 2-PH. 2ST. With Circular Characteristic With Phase Separated Outputs
Logic Diagram / Processing .................................................................................................. 699
Fig. 314 MZ221 Min Impedance 2-ph 2-st Logic Diagram Processind /Legend MZ222 Min.
Impedance 2-ph 2-st Logic Diagram Processing/ Legend.................................................... 700
Fig. 315 MZ221 Min. Impedance 2-PH. 2-ST. Timing Sequence / Example MZ222 Min Impedance 2-PH.
2-ST. Timing Sequence / Example ...................................................................................... 701

Fig. 316 MZ321 Min. Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. With Circular Characteristic, With Phase Separated
Outputs MZ322 Min. Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. With Circular Characteristic With Phase
Common Outputs ................................................................................................................. 702
Fig. 317 MZ321 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. With Circular Characteristic With Phase Separated Outputs
Logic Diagram / Processing ................................................................................................. 703
Fig. 318 MZ322 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. With Cicular Characteristic With Phase Common Outputs
For Phases L1, L2, L3 Logic Diagram / Processing ........................................................... 704
Fig. 319 MZ321 Min. Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MZ322 Min
Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ............................................ 705
Fig. 320 MZ321 Min. Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. Timing Sequence / Example .......................................... 706
Fig. 321 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot. With Curr. Memory Logic Diagram ........................................... 707
Fig. 322 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot. With Curr. Memory Logic Diagram / Processing ...................... 708
Fig. 323 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot. With Curr. Memory Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ......... 709
Fig. 324 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot./ Timing Sequence / Example : Set Value ,,Curr. Memory =
,,YES................................................................................................................................... 710
Fig. 325 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot./ Timing Sequence / Example: Set Value ,,Curr. Memory = ,,No.
............................................................................................................................................. 711
Fig. 326 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Logic Diagram ............................................................................. 712
Fig. 327 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Logic Diagram / Processing ........................................................ 713
Fig. 328 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Logic Diagram Processing / Legend ........................................... 714
Fig. 329 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Timing Sequence / Example ....................................................... 715
Fig. 330 DRS Prot. System/ Polarity of Volt. & Curr. Phasors ................................................................ 725
Fig. 333 DRS Prot. System/ Polarity of Volt. & Curr. Phasors ............................................................... 728
Fig. 335 DRS Communication / RS485-BUS Notebook .................................................................. 731
Fig. 336 DRS Communication / RS485-BUS DRS-COM2 .............................................................. 732
Fig. 337 DRS Communication / RS485-BUS Control Room - PC .................................................. 733
Fig. 338 DRS Communication / RS485-BUS DRS-COM2/ Legend ............................................... 734
Fig. 339 DRS-COMPACT2 ...................................................................................................................... 736
Fig. 340 DRS-COMPACT2A ................................................................................................................... 737


CAUTION
Installing, commissioning and operating of this product may be performed only by thorough
trained and
specialized personnel (*).
We explicitly will not take any responsibility for any damage on our products caused by improper
installation, configuration and handling. Internal modifications must solely be carried out by
specialised personnel authorised by
ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH
During commissioning the operating instructions and also the applicable Local Safety Standards
have strictly to be observed.
(*) Definition: specialised personnel are persons who
are familiar with installing, mounting, commissioning and operating of the device and the
system in which the device is to be installed;
are instructed in maintenance and use of safety equipment according to standard rules and
regulations of safety technology;
passed an extensive First Aid training.

INTENTIONALLY BLANK PAGE

General
1. General
1.1. Contents of This Document
The document contains the description of the characteristic features and parameter settings of all the available
protective functions of the Digital Relay System" from now on referred to as DRS. The feasible operating
characteristics, setting ranges, input matrices, connections- and logic diagrams as well as the necessary
completing information is outlined for each protective function. For User information during relay configuration an
extensive Help Feature is included into the DRS operating system.
1.2. General Terms Definition
In the function descriptions following general denominations are used:
Function Denomination:
Specifies the application possibilities of the protective function.
Function Name:
Denomination of the protective function which is also shown in the device configuration window
display.
Function Abbreviation:
Designation of the protective function as shortened text displayed on the hand terminal.
Function Type:
Name of the protective function as Model Type for exact Version Definition.
Analogue Inputs:
The analogue input signals (current, voltage) into the protective function.
Digital Inputs:
Digital input signals into the protective function.
Slow Analogue Inputs:
Analogue signal input (DC-input) for special applications, i.e. temperature, DC current, DC voltage,
etc.
Test Input:
Digital input enabling operation of the respective protective function, respectively function Stage.

General
Blocking Input:
Digital input enabling blocking of the respective protective function, respectively function Stage.
Outputs:
Initiation: Initiating signal of the protective function or stage
Trip: Trip signal of the protective function or stage
All outputs can be configured to set the LED indications.
Setting Parameters:
All relevant protection setting values for correct operation are displayed for the various functions.
Reset Ratio:
Ratio between the reset- and operating value.
Operating Time:
Time delay between the fault initiation and the trip output of the protective function, i.e. start of the
initiating signal for time delayed functions or the trip signal for instantaneous functions.
Time Delay:
Time lag between the initiation- and the trip signal for time delayed functions.
Internal Measured Values:
Derived from the external CT/VT signals the function internal measured values relevant for the
operation of a protective function.
Function characteristic, i.e. specific digital outputs, digital inputs, etc. which are generally not displayed for all
functions are outlined and described in the respective detailed description.

General
1.3. Measuring Method
All protective DRS functions which are applying the power system frequency signals to evaluate the parameters
are using the Fourier-Transformation.
Thereby the CT/VT signals after potential isolation and filtering are sampled 12 times each cycle and subsequently
processed according to the formulas of the mentioned algorithm as per Fig. 1-1. The results of the computations
are then at disposal for further processing of the signal vector value, i.e. amplitude and phase angle, for the basic
harmonic.
T
t=
12
Signal frequency = 50Hz
s(t + t)
T = 20ms
t = 1,6ms
s(t)
Sampling frequency ft = 600Hz
s(t)
Fig. 1-1
Due to physical- and measuring principle reasons the above outlined method is not applicable for all functions. For
power measuring functions, i.e. overload, power direction, etc. a more complex digital signal computation is applied
which is described in detail in the specific chapters.
1.4. General Influencing Quantities and Tolerances:
Power supply voltage: Range 80 - 120 % VN: < 0,5%

Temperature: Range -5 - +45C: 0,5%/10K
Frequency: Range 10 Hz - fmax: 1%
Typical time delay accuracy: 10 ms
Further information to the measuring accuracy is outlined in the specific function descriptions.

General

MB... LOGIC FUNCTIONS
2. MB... LOGIC FUNCTIONS
2.1. OVERVIEW
List of the available MB . . . LOGIC FUNCTIONS
Abbreviations: C2 ... DRS-COMPACT2

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
FNNR ... Function Number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
TYPE ... Function Type (short denomination of the protective function)
ANSI ... ANSI Device Number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MB . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Signal function 1: 1 Signal function, time delay range: 1099 MB111 94 C2,M,L
0 - 180 sec.
Signal function 4: 4 Signal functions, time delay range: 1096 MB141 94 C2,M,L
0 - 2 sec.
Signal function 4: 4 Signal functions, time delay range: 1098 MB142 94 C2,M,L
0 - 180 sec.
Trip circuit supervision 1078 MB211 94 C2
Out of step counter 1036 MB311 94 C2,M,L
Logic function 2 1094 MB442 94 C2,M
Logic function 2 2028 MB442 94 L

2.2. TECHNICAL DATA
2.2.1. Signal Functions
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MB111 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Signal function 1: 1 signal function, time delay range: 1099 MB111 94 C2,M,L
0 - 180 sec.
Input signal processing of an external digital input for annunciation-, alarm- and trip with an
adjustable time delay.
MB111
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Binary input (digital signal)
Blocking input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Parameter Settings
Time delay range: 0 ... 180 s in steps of 0,05 s
Active slope: rising/falling
Response Time
Operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),
respectively 20 ms (16 2/3 Hz)


Signal function 4: 4 signal functions, time delay range: 1096 MB141 94 C2,M,L
0 - 2 sec.
Input signal processing of 4 external digital inputs for annunciation-, alarm- and trip with an
independent adjustable time delay for each stage.
MB141
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Binary input (digital signal) stage 1
Binary input (digital signal) stage 2
Blocking input stage 1
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Initiation stage 3
Trip stage 3
Initiation stage 4
Trip stage 4
Parameter Settings
Time delay range stage 1: 0 ... 2 s in 0,01 s steps
Active slope stage 1: rising/falling
Response Time


Signal function 4: 4 signal functions, time delay range: 1098 MB142 94 C2,M,L
0 - 180 sec.
Input signal processing of 4 external digital inputs for annunciation-, alarm- and trip with an
independent adjustable time delay for each stage.
MB142
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Binary input (digital signal) stage 1
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Initiation stage 3
Trip stage 3
Initiation stage 4
Trip stage 4
Parameter Settings
Response Time

2.2.2. Trip Circuit Supervision

CB trip circuit supervision 1078 MB211 94 C2
Trip circuit supervision of the CB TRIP circuit and the CB auxiliary circuit (2 digital inputs) with a setting selection
for the internal logic evaluation.
MB211
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: TRIP circuit (trip circuit supervision)
Auxiliary circuit (trip circuit supervision)
Blocking input
Outputs
Binary: Trip circuit faulty
Parameter Settings
Time delay range: 0 ... 30 s in steps of 0,05 s
TRIP circuit healthy (normal operation): 0/1
Auxiliary circuit healthy (normal operation): 0/1
Logic connection (result=1 ... alarm): EXOR/ NOT EXOR/ OR/ NOR/ AND/ NAND
Response Time
Minimum operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),

2.2.3. Out of Step Counter

Pole slipping evaluation 1036 MB311 94 C2,M,L
Out of step conditions are recognised by the number of pole slips within a set measuring time period.
Note: The pole slip pulses are provided by another protective function, e.g. field failure protection.
MB311
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Auxiliary input system 1
Auxiliary input system 2
Auxiliary input system 3
Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Parameter Settings
Pole slipping number: 1 ... 25
Measuring time: 0 ... 180 s in 5 s steps
Window Display for Internal Relay Computation

Values
Pole slip pulses: Number of pole slips within the configured actual
measuring time frame
Response Time
Minimum operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),

2.2.4. Logic Function 2

Logic function 2 1094 MB442 94 C2,M
Logik function 2 2028 MB442 94 L
Logic connections of digital signals with inverted output and with configurable time delay.
MB442
Technical Data
Inputs
Binary: Selection of:
IN01 ... IN32
inv. IN01 ... inv. IN32
OUT01 ... OUT32
inv. OUT01 ... inv. OUT32
Outputs
Binary: Logic function
Parameter Settings
Adjustable time delay: 0 ... 999 s in 0,01 s steps
Logic output: normal/ inverted
Response Time
minimum operating time: 7 ms (50 Hz), respectively 6 ms /60 Hz),

2.3. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

2.3.1. MB111 /MB141/ MB142
+ - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3
24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
5 5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A
8 5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14
15
5A
I5
DRS- OUT 06
11
12
I 6 COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A 13
18 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A
21 I7 OUT 08 16
22
23
1A
5A
X5
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
I 10 5
29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
1 MB141, MB142 only! 9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
BINARY INPUT STAGE 1 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
BLOCKING INPUT ST. 1 (OPT.) 4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
BINARY INPUT STAGE 2 +
6 - IN 03 9
-
7 + OUT 21 10
BLOCKING INPUT ST. 2 (OPT.) +
8 - IN 04 11
-
9 + OUT 22 12
BINARY INPUT STAGE 3 +
10 - IN 05 13
-
1 11 + OUT 23 14
+
BLOCKING INPUT ST. 3 (OPT.) 12 - IN 06 15
-
13 + OUT 24 16
+
BINARY INPUT STAGE 4 14 - IN 07
- X2
+ 15 +
16 IN 08 4
BLOCKING INPUT ST. 4 (OPT.) - -
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
1 6
2 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
8
Tx+
MOD-
4
BUS
Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
LEGEND: 5 10
6 GND
UAKB
TRANS-
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7 DUCER 2
SI03
-UAKB Transducer 1 8 +5 11
RS422/485
Transducer 2 9 Rx+ 12
Shaft Current 10 Rx- 13
Rotor E/F 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04 GND 14
12 Tx+ 15
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 13 Tx- 16
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 14 ROTOR E/F SI01
RS422/485 chain line data interface
MODBUS control system interface UAKB-
IN09
FAULT X9
FRONTSIDE
DRS-CABLE: TID-006--
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MB111 SIGNAL FUNCTION 1 WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 1 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Wiring Diagram

2.3.2. MB211
+ - BATT.
TRIP CIRCUIT
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3
24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
+ (BATT.) 5 5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A
8 5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
PROTECTION 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
SYSTEM TRIP 12 I4 9
CONTACT OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A
I5 11
15
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
VE1 17 5A
13
TRIP CIRCUIT 18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A
21 I7 OUT 08 16
22
23
1A
5A
X5
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
I 10 5
29 OUT 11 6
TRIP COIL AUX. X8 7
CONTACT 1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
VAR. 1B VAR. 1A 2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
VE2 AUX. CIRCUIT 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
CIRCIUT BREAKER U5 1
10
TRIP COIL OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
- (BATT.) BLOCKING (opt.) + 6 - IN 03 9
-
7 + OUT 21 10
1 PLEASE NOTE: 8 IN 04 11
-
VAR. 1A: (NOM. VOLTAGE OF BIN. INPUTS) = (BATT. VOLTAGE) / 2 9 + OUT 22 12
VAR. 1B: (NOM. VOLTAGE OF BIN. INPUTS) = (BATT. VOLTAGE) / 2 10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
REMARK: DESIGN VERSION 1A/ 1B WITH EXTENDED IN 06 15
12 -
RANGE INPUT-VERSION ONLY (VN 2x VN). 13 + OUT 24 16
NOTE: VAR. 1B additionally supervises the CB AUX. CONTACT. 14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
2 DIG. INPUTS: OPERATING RANGE = 18...300VDC, 16 IN 08 4
-
VOLTAGE SELECTION BY JUMPER RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7 6
3 APPLICATION FOR BATT: VAR. 1A,1B: 220VDC, 110VDC, 60VDC, 48VDC ... 2
EXAMPLE.: 220VDC JUMPER AT 110VDC. 3
TRANS-
SI02 8
Tx+
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
LEGEND: 5 GND 10
6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03
11
8 +5
-UAKB Transducer 1
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
Transducer 2 9 13
10 Rx-
Shaft Current 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04 GND
Rotor E/F 15
12 Tx+
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) Tx- 16
13
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 14 ROTOR E/F SI01
RS422/485 chain line data interface
UAKB-
MODBUS control system interface FAULT IN09 X9
DRS-Cable No. TID-006-- FRONTSIDE
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION WIRING DIAGRAM

DESIGN-VERSION: 1
Fig. 2 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Wiring Diagram

+ - BATT.
TRIP CIRCUIT
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
+ (BATT.) 4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
PROTECTION 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
SYSTEM 12 I4 9
TRIP CONTACT OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
UE1 17 5A
TRIP CIRCUIT 18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
TRIP COIL X8 7
AUX. CONTACT 1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
R UE2 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
CIRCIUT BREAKER U5 1
10
TRIP COIL OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 1 2 5
3 + OUT 19 6
4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
- (BATT.) BLOCKING (opt.) + 6 - IN 03 9
-
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
1 PLEASE NOTE: 10 - IN 05 13
NOM. VOLTAGE OF DIGITAL INPUT = BATT. VOLTAGE 11 + OUT 23 14
(220VDC, 110VDC, 60VDC, 48VDC, 24VDC) 12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
2 DIG. INPUTS: OPERATING RANGE = 70% 5%...120% IN 07
14 - X2
3 RESISTOR R TO BE MOUNTED CLOSE TO TRIP 15 +
COIL AUX. CONTACT. 16 IN 08 4
-
4 RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
NOTE: DESIGN-VERSION 2 IS SUITABLE FOR X7
NON-EXTENDED RANGE INPUTS TOO. 6
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
-UAKB Transducer 1 DUCER 2
+5 11
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Shaft Current 10 Rx-
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 13
RS422/485 chain line data interface 14 ROTOR E/F SI01

FAULT IN09 X9
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION WIRING DIAGRAM

DESIGN-VERSION: 2
Fig. 3 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Wiring Diagram

2.3.3. MB442
+ - BATT.
X2 1 2 3 X3
X1
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3
24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
5 5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A
8 5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14
15
5A
I5
DRS- OUT 06
11
12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A 13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A
21 I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
I 10 5
29
OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
AVAILABLE HARDWARE INPUTS: OUT 17 2
X4 3
+ 1 + OUT 18 4
BINARY INPUT 1 - 2 - IN 01 5
+ 3 + OUT 19 6
+ 5 + OUT 20 8
BINARY INPUT 3 6 - IN 03 9
-
+ 7 + OUT 21 10
BINARY INPUT 4 8 - IN 04 11
-
Optional + 9 + OUT 22 12
+ 11 + OUT 23 14
+ 13 + OUT 24 16
BINARY INPUT 7 - 14 - IN 07
X2
+ 15 +
BINARY INPUT 8 16 IN 08 4
- -
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
+5 11
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+

FAULT IN09 X9
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MB442 LOGIC FUNCTION 2 WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 4 MB442 Logic Function 2 Wiring Diagram

2.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS
2.4.1. MB111/ MB141/ MB142
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
BINARY INPUT STAGE 1
BLOCKING INPUT STAGE 1

(OPTIONAL)

(OPTIONAL)
1
(OPTIONAL)

(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
1 MB141, MB142 only!
ALARM
CONTACTS
62 Alarm
62 Trip
LEGEND
DRS DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS-COMPACT2A
PROCESSING CPU+DSP - BOARD/

VERSION 2
MB111 SIGNAL FUNCTION 1 LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 5 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
BIN. I/0
B.INP. PRESET
ST.1
1 1 MB141, MB142 only!
0
BIN. I/0
BL. PRESET
ST.1 & ALARM ST.1
1
0
& ALARM ST.1
&
BIN. I/0
B.INP. PRESET
ST.2 TRIP ST.1
1
0
t > tSET ST.1 TRIP
ST.1 & TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
BL. PRESET
ST.2 & ALARM ST.2
1
0
& ALARM ST.2 LED-
& DISPLAY
BIN. I/0
B.INP. PRESET
ST.3 1
TRIP ST.2
0
t > tSET ST.2 TRIP
ST.2 & TRIP ST.2
1
BIN. I/0
BL. PRESET
ST.3 & ALARM ST.3
1
0
LED-
& ALARM ST.3 MATRIX
&
BIN. I/0
B.INP. PRESET
ST.4 TRIP ST.3
1
0 t > tSET ST.3 TRIP
ST.3 & TRIP ST.3 BIN. I/0
PRESET
BIN. I/0
BL. PRESET 1
ST.4 & ALARM ST.4 0
1
0
& ALARM ST.4
&
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
TRIP ST.4 TRIP-
1 MATRIX
ST.4 & TRIP ST.4
PROCESSING
MB111 SIGNAL FUNCTION 1 LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 6 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MB111, MB141, MB142
Online simulation via notebook
BIN. I/0 Online-simulation of BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0

PRESET PRESET regular PRESET always PRESET always
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS function
1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MB111

OUTPUT
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation) MB141
1
0 all FUNCTION OUTPUTS disabled (test-operation) MB142
Programmable software-matrix for the LED-indications

LED- (row 2...14) of PROCESSING
MATRIX
LED-indications of PROCESSING
LED- (row 2...14)
DISPLAY
TRIP-
Programmable software-matrix for the output-contacts (OUT1...OUT30)
MATRIX
ALARM ST.1 ALARM STAGE1"-signal going to LED-MATRIX

ALARM ST.1 ALARM STAGE1"-signal going to TRIP-MATRIX
> Type of function: over-detection (actual value > set value)
< Type of function: under-detection (actual value < set value)
Set Value Active Edge = RISING

(BINARY INPUT): Active Edge = TRAILING
MB111 SIGNAL FUNCTION 1 LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 7 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

2.4.2. MB211
TRIP CIRCUIT
+ (BATT.) 3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROTECTION
SYSTEM
TRIP CONTACT 1
UE1
4
PROCESSING
TRIP COIL
AUX. CONTACT 2
UE2
4
7 E1 5
TRIP
CIRCIUT BREAKER CIRCUIT
TRIP COIL E2 6
AUX. 7
CIRCUIT
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
- (BATT.)
1 TRIP ACTIVE CORRESPONDS WITH

TRIP CONTACT CLOSED
2 AUX. CONTACT. CLOSED
CORRESPONDS WITH CB ON RESP.
AUX. CONTACT OPEN
CORRESPONDS WITH CB OFF
3 TRIP VOLTAGE
4 SHOWN: NO TRIP
CB OFF
5 UE1 HIGH VE1 = 1
6 UE2 HIGH VE2 = 1 TRIP
7 DESIGN-VERSION 1 IS SUITABLE FOR COMMANDS
EXTENDED RANGE INPUTS (18...300VDC) OUTPUT CB1
ONLY! CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Trip

VERSION 2
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION LOGIC DIAGRAM

DESIGN-VERSION: 1
Fig. 8 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram Desisgn Version: 1

TRIP CIRCUIT
+ (BATT.) 3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROTECTION
SYSTEM
TRIP CONTACT 1
UE1

PROCESSING
TRIP COIL
AUX. CONTACT 2
4 R UE2
E1 5
TRIP
CIRCIUT BREAKER CIRCUIT
TRIP COIL 0" 6
7
BLOCKING
- (BATT.) (OPTIONAL)
1 TRIP ACTIVE CORRESPONDS WITH

TRIP CONTACT CLOSED
2 AUX. CONTACT. CLOSED
CORRESPONDS WITH CB ON RESP.
AUX. CONTACT OPEN
CORRESPONDS WITH CB OFF
3 TRIP VOLTAGE
4 SHOWN: NO TRIP
CB OFF
5 UE1 HIGH E1 = 1
6 UE2 ALWAYS 0" BECAUSE OF R
NOTE: TRIP CIRCUIT ALWAYS CLOSED
AT TRIP COIL AUX. CONTACT TRIP
COMMANDS
BECAUSE OF RESISTOR R.
7 OUTPUT CB1
INPUT LEFT OPEN (NO CONNECTION):
CONTACTS CB2
DEFAULT VALUE GIVEN TO VE2 = 0"
8 ALARM
DESIGN-VERSION 2 IS SUITABLE FOR
CONTACTS
NON-EXTENDED RANGE INPUTS TOO!
Trip
LEGEND

VERSION 2
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION LOGIC DIAGRAM

DESIGN-VERSION: 2
Fig. 9 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram Design Version: 2

NOTEBOOK
BIN. I/0 TRIP CIR. READY VALUE =

PRESET
E1 set = 1
1 TRIP E1
0 CIRCUIT &
set = 0
BIN. I/0 AUX. CIR. READY VALUE =

E2 PRESET
set = 1 E2
1 AUX.
0
CIRCUIT set = 0 &
LOGICAL LINK (see setting):

NOT EX-OR
NAND E1 E2 A
E1 E2 A 0 0 1
AND 0 1 0 acc. 2
0 0 1
E1 E2 A 1 0 0
0 1 1 set
0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 0
1 1 0
E1 1 0 0
A LED-
E2 1 1 1 DISPLAY
EX-OR
NOR E1 E2 A
OR E1 E2 A 0 0 0
E1 E2 A 0 0 1 0 1 1
acc.
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
set 1 1 0
BLOCKING 0 1 1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 1 0 LED-
BIN. I/0 MATRIX
1 1 1
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0 1 1
2
A 0
& TRIP CIRCUIT
& t>
A FAULTY
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
& TRIP CIRCUIT TRIP-
1
FAULTY MATRIX
0
1 NOTE:
A = 1 ... TRIP CIRCUIT READY
A = 0 ... TRIP CIRCUIT FAULTY PROCESSING
2 NOTE: 3 NOTE: DESIGN-VERSION 1 APPLICABLE
LEDS AND OUTPUTS ACTIVE IN FOR EXTENDED RANGE
CASE OF TRIP CIRCUIT-FAULT. INPUT-VERSION ONLY (18...300VDC).
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION LOGIC DIAGRAM/ PROCESSING

DESIGN-VERSION: 1
Fig. 10 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram / Processing Design Version: 1

NOTEBOOK
BIN. I/0 TRIP CIR. READY VALUE =

PRESET
E1 set = 1
1 TRIP E1
0 CIRCUIT &
set = 0
BIN. I/0 AUX. CIR. READY VALUE =

PRESET
1 AUX. 0" set = 0 1" E2
&
0
CIRCUIT
01
no signal
connected
default
= 0

2
AND
E1 E1 E2 A
0 0 0 A LED-
E2 0 1 0 DISPLAY
1 0 0
1 1 1
BLOCKING
1 LED-
BIN. I/0 MATRIX
PRESET A A
& BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0
1
TRIP CIRCUIT 2
& t> 0
FAULTY
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
& TRIP CIRCUIT TRIP-
1
FAULTY MATRIX
0
1 NOTE:
A = 1 ... TRIP CIRCUIT READY
A = 0 ... TRIP CIRCUIT FAULTY PROCESSING
2 LEDS AND OUTPUTS ACTIVE IN 3 DESIGN-VERSION 2 IS
CASE OF TRIP CIRCUIT-FAULT. SUITABLE FOR NON-EXTENDED
RANGE INPUTS TOO.
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION LOGIC DIAGRAM/ PROCESSING

DESIGN-VERSION: 2
Fig. 11 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram / Processing Design Version: 2

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MB211
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MB211
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation)
1
0
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS disabled (test-operation)
TRIP CIR. READY VALUE =

set = 1 Please choose which INPUT VALUE corresponds with a
healthy TRIP CIRCUIT (see: SETTINGS).
set = 0 &

NOT EX-OR Please choose the LOGICAL LINK of the
NAND E1 E2 A INPUT SIGNALS E1 and E2 in order to get
E1 E2 A 0 0 1
AND
0 0 1 0 1 0 acc. the correct OUTPUT SIGNAL A
E1 E2 A 1 0 0 (see: SETTINGS).
0 1 1 set
0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 0
1 1 0 LOGICAL LINK:
1 0 0
E1 1 1 1 A Specifies the condition of E1, E2 in order to
EX-OR get a TRIP CIRCUIT READY decision
E2 E1 E2 A
NOR (A = 1).
OR E1 E2 A 0 0 0
E1 E2 A 0 0 1 0 1 1
acc. Note: applies for EXTENDED RANGE
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
set 1 1 0 INPUTS only!
0 1 1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 1 0
1 1 1
Programmable
LED-indications of
software-matrix
PROCESSING
LED- for the LED-indications LED-
MATRIX DISPLAY (row 2...14)
(row 2...14) of PROCESSING

TRIP-
MATRIX
Denomination of FUNCTION OUTPUTS going to LED-MATRIX

Denomination of FUNCTION OUTPUTS going to TRIP-MATRIX
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 12 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

EXAMPLE: TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION DESIGN VERSION 2

EXAMPLE WITHOUT AUX. CIRCUIT
+ (BATT.)
PROTECTION UE1
SYSTEM TRIP
CONTACT
SIMPLIFIED DESIGN:
CB INTERNAL
CONTACT UE2 USE AUX. RESISTOR INSTEAD
R
OF AUX. CIRCUIT IN ORDER
CIRCIUT
BREAKER
TO CLOSE THE TRIP CIRCUIT
OFF COIL SUPERVISION-SCHEME.
- (BATT.)
NOTE: DESIGN OF RESISTOR:
a) MUST NOT AFFECT THE OFF-COIL (R )

b) SHOULD PROVIDE ENOUGH CURRENT TO THE SUPERVISION CIRCUIT (R )
CURRENT SHOULD BE APPROX. 3 mA DC (MIN.).
c) DRS-Digital Input Voltage Range: 70% 5% 120%.
d) BATTERIE VOLTAGE RANGE: Vnom 15% (ALLOWED).
DESIGN EXAMPLE: SEE PAGE 2/2 !
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION DESIGN EXAMPLE / NOT USING AUX. CIRCUIT
DESIGN VERSION: 2 page 1/2
Fig. 13 MB211 Trip Cicuit Supervision Design Example / Not Using Aux. Ciruit Design Version : 2

DESIGN EXAMPLE:
+ (BATT.)
I = 3mADC max. 1
DRS PROTECTION
DIGITAL INPUT/
VINPUT
Vnom = 220VDC
RANGE:
220V +20% -25%
VBATT = 220VDC 15%
(165V...264V).
(187V... 253V) R VR
2 VCOIL
- (BATT.)
EXAMPLE (given for VBATT nom = 220VDC):
PRECONDITION: INPUT VOLTAGE JUMPER IS SET TO: 220VDC
VBATT = VINPUT + VR + VCOIL = 187V (= min. allowed battery volt.)
VINPUT min = (220V - 25%) = 165 VDC (min. allowed input volt.)
(VR + VCOIL) max = 187V - 165V = 22V
I = 3mADC = const. (controlled by DRS Digital Input/ control range = Vnom +20% -25% at input terminals)
(VR + VCOIL) / 3mA = RR + RCOIL
to be calculated given
Assume: VCOIL = 0 RR = 22V / 3mA RR = 7333W

Max. heat dissipation of RR in case the TRIP-contact is closed:
VBATT = VBATT max = 264V. PR = V / R = 264 / 7333W = 9,5W.
1 Input current is controlled by DRS Digital Input.

Input voltage range: Vnom (of dig. input) +20% -25%.
2 In case the relay does not drop off because of the 3mADC-test-current a loading resistor should
be added in parallel to the coil in order to lessen the voltage drop at the coil.
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION DESIGN EXAMPLE/ NOT USING AUX. CIRCUIT
DESIGN VERSION: 2 page 2/2
Fig. 14 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Design Example / Not Using Aux Circuit Design Version: 2

1
DESIGN-VERSION 1:
EXAMPLE: NORMAL OPERATING SEQUENCE (TRIP CIRCUIT HEALTHY)
A NORMAL OPERATION OF GEN. B GEN. IN OPERATION

CB = ON CB = STILL ON
NO TRIP - CONDITION PROTECTION ISSUES TRIP!
+ (BATT.) + (BATT.)
PROTECTION UE1= 1 PROTECTION UE1= 0

TRIP CONTACT TRIP CONTACT
OR OR
CB CB E1 E2 A
E1 E2 A
INTERNAL UE2= 0 INTERNAL UE2= 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
CONTACT CONTACT 0 1 1
0 1 1
CB 1 0 1 CB 1 0 1
OFF COIL 1 1 1 OFF COIL 1 1 1
RESULT: A = 1 RESULT: A = 0
- (BATT.) TRIP CIRCUIT = OK. - (BATT.) THIS IS A REGULAR CONDITION/

VERY SHORT DURING TRIPPING/
TO BE COVERED BY DELAY TIME!
TRIP CIRCUIT = OK.
C GEN. TRIPPED D GEN. TRIPPED

CB = OFF CB = OFF
PROTECTION STILL ISSUES TRIP PROTECTION ALREADY RESET
+ (BATT.) + (BATT.)
PROTECTION UE1= 0 PROTECTION UE1= 1

TRIP CONTACT TRIP CONTACT
OR OR
CB CB
E1 E2 A E1 E2 A
INTERNAL UE2= 1 INTERNAL UE2= 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
CONTACT CONTACT
0 1 1 0 1 1
CB 1 0 1 CB 1 0 1
RESULT: A = 1 RESULT: A = 1
- (BATT.) TRIP CIRCUIT = OK. - (BATT.) TRIP CIRCUIT = OK.
1 Note: Design-Version 1 requires EXTENDED RANGE INPUTS (RANGE: 18...300VDC)
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION OPERATING CONDITIONS/

DESIGN-VERSION: 1 EXAMPLE page 1/3
Fig. 15 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Operating Conditions Design Version: 1 Example

1
DESIGN-VERSION 1:
EXAMPLE: TRIP CIRCUIT FAULTY
A WIRE BROKEN: B OFF-COIL = DESTROYED (INTERRUPTED)
+ (BATT.) + (BATT.)
PROTECTION UE1= 0
TRIP CONTACT
PROTECTION UE1= 0
TRIP CONTACT
WIRE BROKEN U = UBATT.(= FAULT!)
OR OR
CB E1 E2 A CB E1 E2 A
INTERNAL UE2= 0 0 0 0 INTERNAL UE2= 0 0 0 0
CONTACT 0 1 1 CONTACT 0 1 1
CB 1 0 1 CB 1 0 1
OFF-COIL
RESULT: A = 0 INTERRUPTED RESULT: A = 0
- (BATT.) TRIP CIRC. = FAULT - (BATT.) TRIP CIRC. = FAULT
C BATT. = OFF
BATT. = 0V
PROTECTION UE1= 0
TRIP CONTACT
OR
CB E1 E2 A
INTERNAL UE2= 0 0 0 0
CONTACT 0 1 1
CB 1 0 1
OFF COIL 1 1 1
RESULT: A = 0
BATT. = 0V TRIP CIRCUIT = FAULT
1 Note: Design-Version 1 requires EXTENDED RANGE INPUTS (RANGE: 18...300VDC)
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION OPERATING CONDITIONS/

DESIGN-VERSION: 1 EXAMPLE page 2/3
Fig. 16 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Operating Conditions Design Version: 1 Example

DESIGN-VERSION 1:
EXAMPLE: HOW TO CHOOSE THE INPUT VOLTAGE FOR DESIGN VERSION 1
INPUTS (see Fig. 2-2)
THE DRS-COMPACT2A HAS 4 NOM. INPUT VOLTAGE RANGES WICH CAN BE CHOOSEN BY JUMPERS FOR
EVERY INPUT SEPARATLY
FOR DESIGN VERSION 1 THE JUMPERS FOR THE TWO REFERING INPUTS SHOULD BE SET TO:
VAR. 1A:
BATT. VOLTAGE SET JUMPER TO:
220 VDC 110 VDC (77V...300 VDC)

110 VDC 60 VDC (42V...300 VDC)
60 VDC 24 VDC (17V...300 VDC)
48 VDC 24 VDC (17V...300 VDC)
VAR. 1B:
BATT. VOLTAGE SET JUMPER TO:
220 VDC 220 VDC

110 VDC 110 VDC
60 VDC 60 VDC
48 VDC 48 VDC
24 VDC 24 VDC
MB211 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION DESIGN-VERSION: 1A, 1B /

DIG INPUT-VOLT. JUMPERS page 3/3
Fig. 17 MB211 Trip Circuit Supervision Design-Version: 1A, 1B / Dig Input-Volt. Jumpers Design Version: 1A, 1B

2.4.3. MB442
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
AVAILABLE HARDWARE INPUTS:
BINARY INPUT 1
BINARY INPUT 2
BINARY INPUT 3
BINARY INPUT 4
1
BINARY INPUT 5
BINARY INPUT 6
BINARY INPUT 7
BINARY INPUT 8
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
1 OPTIONAL
ALARM
CONTACTS
Alarm
Trip
LEGEND

VERSION 2
MB442 LOGIC FUNCTION 2 LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 18 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
Software
input
BINARY BIN. I/0 INPUT OF LOGIC FUNCTION 2
1...32 max. 32 SIGNALS
FEEDBACK
INPUTS PRESET CIRCUIT
1 2
1 2 IN1
1 0
1
HARDWARE INPUTS
IN8
IN9
IN32 &
32 1 INPUT- 32
OUT1 FEEDBACK
BIN. I/0 MATRIX
PRESET OUT32
1
8 0
IN1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
9 0 &
SOFT-INPUTS ONLY
OUT32
1
BIN. I/0 1 t>

PRESET
1 LED-
1
32 DISPLAY
0 INVERT &
?
& OUTPUT OF
LOGIC-
FUNCTION 2
LED-
MATRIX
BIN. I/0
DIG. OUT-
PRESET
PUTS 1...32
1
0
&
TRIP-
MATRIX
FUNCTION
Software output
OUTPUT 1...32
FEEDBACK CIRCUIT max. 32 SIGNALS
1
0
PROCESSING
1 SETTING VIA SOFTWARE / SEE DRS WIN LOGIC FUNCTION 2" RELAY PARAMETERS
NOTE: DELAYTIME APPLICABLE FOR (0" 1") ONLY.
2 INPUTS: HARDWARE INPUTS OR SOFTWARE INPUTS (VIA FEADBACK CIRCUIT)
NOTE: FEEDBACK CIRCUITS IF USED OVERWRITES THE HARDWARE - INPUTS! VALID FOR 0" AND 1"
PRIORITY FOR STATUS OF INPUTS: 1. SIMULATION VIA NOTEBOOK (BINARY I/O PRESET)
2. FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
3. HARDWARE INPUT
RECOMMENDED: IN ORDER TO FIND OUT THE VALID STATUS OF AN INPUT CHECK BINARY I/O - TABLE (USING NOTBOOCK);
CAUTION: THE INDICATION MAY BE TOO SLOW IN CASE OF A FAST FLIP - FLOP - ACTION!
MB442 LOGIC FUNCTION 2 LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 19 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram Processing

DETAIL:
AND-GATE
OVERVIEW
&
&
&
&
DETAIL
IN1
available
HARDWARE
INPUTS IN2
(or SOFT-INPUTS) 1
IN8
IN9
1 SOFT-INPUTS
only
IN32
&
OUT32
OUT1...32
may be used as
inputs for LOGIC
FUNCTION 2
OUT32
LEGEND:
1
SOFT-INPUTS can be generated by
using the FEEDBACK-FEATURE of
LOGIC FUNCITON 2!
MB442 LOGIC FUNCTION 2 LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING DETAIL

Fig. 20 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram / Processing Detail

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MB442

PRESET PRESET regular PRESET always PRESET
1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1
0 0 0 0 always
0"
FUNCTION Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MB441

OUTPUT
1
0 all FUNCTION OUTPUTS disabled (test-operation)

MATRIX
LED- (row 2...14)
DISPLAY

TRIP-
MATRIX

Set Value Active Edge = RISING

(BINARY INPUT): Active Edge = TRAILING
MB442 LOGIC FUNCTION 2 LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

page 1/2
Fig. 21 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

LEGEND PROCESSING
AND - GATE:
AND - Connection of all activated digital signals:
(IN)
.
.
. & resp. (inv IN)
.
.
.
.
resp (OUT) (feedback circuit)
.
.
resp. (inv OUT) (feedback circuit)
OR - GATE:
OR - CONNECTION of the output

signals of the 4 AND gates
t> Time delay for 0" 1" ( ) only!
If SET VALUE = INVERT is chosen:

INVERT resp.
?
Please note: actual status of signals can

FEEDBACK CIRCUITS
be checked by using the notebook
for IN and OUT
Binary I/O preset feature
MB442 LOGIC FUNCTION 2 LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

page 2/2
Fig. 22 MB442 Logic Function 2 Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

LOGIC: FUNCTION OUPUT =

(IN1 & invOUT22).OR.(IN2 & invOUT22).OR.(not used).OR.(not used)
Note 1: The FUNCTION OUTPUT-signal is feed back to IN10. The FUNCTION OUTPUT is not inverted (normal)
MB442 LOGIC FUNCTION 2 EXAMPLE 1

Fig. 23 MB442 Logic Function 2 Example 1

LOGIC: FUNCTION OUPUT =

(IN3 & IN4).OR.(invIN3 & invIN4).OR.(not used).OR.(not used)
Note 1: The FUNCTION OUTPUT-signal is feed back to IN24. The FUNCTION OUTPUT is not inverted (normal)
Note 2: These Settings are used for supervision of the aux. contacts of a CB (DBI...Dont Believe It)
Note 2: IN3 = CB open - contact
Note 2: IN4 = CB closed - contact
Note 2: In case of both contacts are 1 or boths contacts are 0 DBI...dont believe the contacts!
MB442 LOGIC FUNCTION 2 EXAMPLE 2

Fig. 24 NB442 Logic Function 2 Example 2

2.5. FUNCTION
2.5.1. MB111/ MB141/ MB142
Signal functions are provided to evaluate binary signals from the protected plant for alarm and/or trip conditions in
the DRS, as for example the initiation of an internal transformer fault, e.g. Buchholz, oil- or winding over
temperature, pressure relieve valve, cooler failure, etc.
The binary input signal is supervised according to the selected active signal slope (positive slope = transition from
logic 0 to logic 1, inverted slope = transition from logic 1 to logic 0) during each sample and after a contact bounce
delay of 4 samples the output initiation is started. When the initiating condition is maintained during the whole set
time delay a corresponding trip signal will be produced.
Signal function 1 and signal function 4 differ only in the number of input signals to be processed. Signal function 4
is especially used when several signals from a specific plant part are to be evaluated, e.g. transformer mechanical
protection which may be combined into a protective group.

2.5.2. MB211
The digital trip circuit supervision function MB211 has a similar operating characteristic as the analogue
hardware solution.
The function is provided with two digital inputs:

- Trip circuit healthy
- Auxiliary circuit healthy
The digital Trip Circuit Healthy corresponding parameter settings are configured whether during normal
system conditions the state of the trip circuit is sent to the digital input of the PROCESSING as either
0 or 1. The same applies for the auxiliary circuit healthy conditions.
In our example we assume that:

Both Healthy settings are logic 1.
A logic AND configuration therefore means that both digital inputs (trip circuit healthy + auxiliary circuit
healthy) have to be 1 to affirm that the trip circuit is recognised to be in order.
If not, an alarm annunciation Trip Circuit Failure is being initiated.
In a normal state, i.e. trip circuit healthy, no output will be set from the DRS protection system and no
LED indication is shown. This corresponds to our User Operating Philosophy that no yellow or red LED
indication is present when everything is in order.
The time delay is provided in order to not initiate a false alarm during CB operation but to produce an
alarm output for a real trip circuit fault.
Examples for the setting value "logical connection" under the presupposition that the Healthy
configuration is set to "1":
EX-OR:
One of the two inputs has to be "1" and the other one must be "0" for a trip circuit OK.
OR:
One or both inputs have to be "1" for a trip circuit OK.
NOR:
Both inputs must be "0" for a trip circuit OK.
AND:
Both inputs must be "1" for a trip circuit OK.
NAND:
At least one of the two inputs have to be "0" for a trip circuit OK.
Important Note:
The only possibility to use the whole range of the possible logical configuration is as follows:
Battery: 220 VDC

Inputs: 110 VDC (set jumper to 110VDC).
Note: The 110VDC rated inputs can also be used permanently with 220 VDC.

2.5.3. MB442
Logic Scheme:
This logic function consists of 4 AND Gates which are conveyed to a common OR Gate. In the Setting Value
Window of the DRSWIN these 4 AND Gates are clearly visible and there are 4 large blocks of input parameters, i.e.
1 to 4 for these 4 AND Gates. For following OR Connection after the AND Gate no setting values are required and
simply the output signals of the 4 AND Gates are assigned to the respective outputs.
This way, each of the 4 function inputs of the OR Gate represents thereby an AND Connection of all these inputs or
outputs assigned by the Selection Mask as per setting value window. Please note that the polarity for each
selected input or output (AND Gates) can be inverted. Therefore when an inverted input or output is to be used
also the Inverting Mask has to be marked and as an important NOTE: For an inverted input 2 confirmation selection
marks are required, i.e. in the Selection Mask as well as in the Inverting Mask.
It is not sufficient just to mark the Inverting Mask!
The inputs of the logic functions by themselves are either "Real" inputs, e.g. IN03 or "Real" outputs, e.g. OUT01, or
"simulated" (via notebook) inputs or outputs, or "feed-back" signals (output is routed back to an input via set value
of the protective function see Fig. 19), which then can be suitably connected into the logic function.
To further describe the logic functions outputs:
The output of a logic function 2 can be configured and routed to a virtual input as well as to a real input or inputs or
to a virtual output as well as real output or outputs. This way it is possible to transfer the state of the logic function 2
to an input of the DRS COMPACT2 software programme. This is necessary because, for example, the blocking
inputs for protective functions only accept binary inputs (BI).
Time Module:
The result of the OR logic is time delayed according to the setting value and this delay is only active during a
transition from 0 1 on the input of the time delay module (please also refer to the corresponding logic diagram)
and afterwards when thus set either directly or inverted activating the function output. Please note that this time
delay is not operative in case of a change from 1 0 at the input of the time module and the input to the time delay
module has always to be observed according to the logic diagram. Should the time delay module be activated
during an inverted slope condition then the desired result may be implemented by an additional, double inversion,
i.e. before and after the delay module.
Example: By a suitable selection of the parameter setting value Inversion by the input signals as well as by the
output signals of the logic function 2 it is possible to obtain configurable operating and/or reset time delays
Output:
The output of the logic function which is a single digital signal without initiation annunciation but a trip can be
allocated to the respective LED- and trip matrix and can be assigned to the general distribution to the LED- and trip
matrices. In addition these signals can be assigned to the back-coupling mask and returned to the binary inputs.

2.6. COMMISSIONING
Note: During all Commissioning Activities the Relevant

Safety Precautions Have to Be Strictly Observed!
2.6.1. MB111/ MB141/ MB142/ MB211/ MB311/ MB442
Connections:
The external connections to the binary input signals are realised via adapted coupling modules according to plant
requirements and then transferred to the Central Control Unit VE.
The coupling modules may either be relay modules or opto-isolator modules. The selectable input voltage can have
a rating between 24VDC to 220VDC whereby the 220VDC opto- isolator inputs can be energised
continuously with up to 300VDC.
- Pre-Commissioning:
The DRS WIN User program enables the operation (simulation) of all digital inputs and outputs (please also refer
to: System / Binary In- and Output Selection) which can be carried out either ONLINE or
OFFLINE and have preference over the real plant signals.
Thus it is possible to test all the complete logic functions OFFLINE.
- Commissioning Tests:
These tests can basically be limited to only verify the correct external input- and output signals for the protection
relay since the internal functions were already confirmed during the pre-commissioning tests.
- Input signals of the protective function:

The initiated external plant inputs are displayed in the Window "System"/ "Binary In/Output
Selection".
- Output signals of the protective function:

By operating (simulating) the outputs in the Window "System"/ "Binary In/Output Selection"
to verify the external circuitry, e.g. CB trip circuit, etc.


MC... CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION
3. MC... CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION
3.1. OVERVIEW
List of the available MC . . . Protective Functions
Abbreviations: C2 ... DRS-COMPACT2A

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
FNNR ... Function number (VE internal number of the protective function)
TYPE ... Function type (short name of the protective function)
ANSI ... ANSI device number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MC 316 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

CB Failure Protection 1115 MC316 40 C2,M
Note: Available from PROCESSING Firmware Version 5.24 on

3.2. TECHNICAL DATA
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MC316 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

CB Failure Protection 1115 MC316 40 C2,M
Note: Available from PROCESSING Firmware Version 5.24 on
2- stage CBF protection with "LOW GAS PRESSURE" logic and time monitoring of the
"CB Failure Start" (CBFS) signal.
TRIP output extension is provided as a standard.
MC316
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Binary: CB closed position (from CB auxiliary contacts)
CBF start (CB failure start)
LOW GAS PRESSURE (CB not ready)
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: CB failure stage 1 trip
CB failure stage 2 trip
CB failure stage 3 trip
Setting Parameters
Current interlock CBF 0,1 ... 2 A in 0,05 A steps
CBF feeder TRIP time delay 0,01 ... 0,99 s in 0,01 s steps
CBF bus section TRIP time delay 0,01 ... 0,99 s in 0,01 s steps
Maximum CBF STARTING time 1 ... 180 s in 1 s steps
Measuring
Reset Ratio: 0,97
Operating Time: 2 Periods
Accuracy: 3% of setting value or
2% In


3.3.1. MC316
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
+ OUT 12 8
1
U1 9
2
CB 3
OUT 13 10
11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
CB is ON 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
CBF START +
4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
LOW GAS +
6 - IN 03 9
-
7 + OUT 21 10
+
TEST STAGE1 (opt.) 8 - IN 04 11
-
9 + OUT 22 12
+
-
11 + OUT 23 14
+
BLOCKING ST.1 (opt.) 12 - IN 06 15
-
13 + OUT 24 16
BLOCKING ST.2 (opt.) +
14 - IN 07
- X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
LEGEND: X7 6
OPTIONAL MODULE:
-UAKB Transducer 1 2
TRANS-
Tx+ 8
3
MOD-
SI02
BUS
Transducer 2 DUCER 1 9
Shaft Current 4 Tx-
10
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND
Rotor E/F
6
UAKB
TRANS- 11
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 7 DUCER 2
SI03 +5
RS422/485
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 8 Rx+ 12

RS422/485 chain line data interface 9 Rx- 13
MODBUS control system interface 10 GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04 Tx+ 15
12 Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
IN09
X9
FAULT
FRONTSIDE
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MC316 CBF (CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE) LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 25 MC316 CBF (Circuit Breaker Failure) Logic Diagram

3.4. LOGIC DIAGRAM

3.4.1. MC316
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
I L1
PROCESSING
1
I L2
I L3
CB AUX CONT.
CB ON
CB is ON
CBF START
LOW GAS
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
LEGEND
OUTPUT CB1
1 CBF START = CB-TRIP - command is active CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
2 LOW GAS = CB probably faulty CONTACTS
51 Alarm
DRS DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM 51 Trip

VERSION 2
MC316 CBF (CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE) LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 26 MC316 CBF (Circuit Breaker Failure) Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
I L1
I L2 1
IL1 > set
I L3 1
& (ZERO CROSSING) 1
CB is ON
IL2 > set
BIN. I/0 >=1 &
& (ZERO CROSSING) 1
PRESET
1
IL3 > set
0
& (ZERO CROSSING) 1
CBF START
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
LOW GAS
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 &
0 CBF Start input is faulty 3
4
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0 t3>set & CBF Start input is faulty
PRESET
1 >=1
& LED-
0
TRIP DISPLAY
TEST ST.2 TRIP ST.1
4 PULSE
BIN. I/0 t1> EXTEN-
SION= & TRIP ST.1
PRESET
1
400ms
0
BLOCK. ST.1 LED-

MATRIX
BIN. I/0 >=1
PRESET &
1 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
BLOCK. ST.2 1
2 TRIP TRIP ST.2 0
BIN. I/0 4 PULSE
PRESET & t2 > EXTEN-
SION= & TRIP ST.2
1
set 400ms TRIP-
0
t2 = 0 MATRIX
FUNCTION
PROCESSING
OUTPUT
1
0
LEGEND LEGEND
1 see drawing ZERO CROSSING 3 CBF Start faulty means: CBS is ON too long!
2 if LOW GAS t2 is automatically set to 0s 4 t1...t > CBF trip feeder
t2...t > CBF trip zone
t3...CBF start supervision
MC316 CBF (CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 27 MC316 CBF (Circuit Breaker Failure) Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MC316
CALC. INTERNAL
Online simulation MEASURED VALUES Online-indication of DRS-internal
via notebook .. calculated values on notebook-screen

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MC316
1
0
IL1 > set 2 conditions must be fulfilled:

& (ZERO CROSSING)
a) I1L > set value
b) the actual values of I1L have to cross the ZERO-line
periodically: IL1
not valid: IL1
CBF Start input is faulty Usually the CBF START (dig. input) should be ON for short time
only (less than t3). If t3 is exceeded ALARM!
Check input CBF START (= TRIP-command)
Programmable LED-indications of
software-matrix for PROCESSING
LED- the LED-indications LED-
MATRIX
(row 2...14)
(row 2...14) of DISPLAY
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

ALARM FUNCTION OUTPUT: Alarm
TRIP FUNCTION OUTPUT: Trip
MC316 CBF (CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE)

LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 28 MC316 CBF (Circuit Breaker Failure) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

EXPLANANTION OF CONDITION
ZERO CROSSING
MEANING OF:
IL1 > set

& (ZERO CROSSING)
Condition fullfilled (ZERO CROSSING)
ICBS
1. HARM. (actual) > set

set value
ZERO CROSSING
Condition not fullfilled (no ZERO CROSSING)
ICBS
1. HARM. (actual) > set

set value
no ZERO CROSSING
MC316 CBF (CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL) ZERO CROSSING

Fig. 29 MC316 CBF (Ciruit Breaker Fail) ,,Zero Crossing

3.5. FUNCTION
3.5.1. MC316
Digital Inputs:
CB closed position (condition: CB is closed)
CBF start (condition: CB failure start = trip command is initiated)
LOW GAS PRESSURE (CB is possibly not ready / can possibly not be tripped)
2x BLK
2x TST
Analogue Inputs:
Current Phase L1
Current Phase L2
Current Phase L3
Digital Outputs:
Stage 1: After expiry of time delay t1.
Note: In case of LOW GAS PRESSURE then the time delay t2 is automatically set to 0 sec. and
stage 2 is operating first.
Logic for Stage 1 / Stage2:

CBF start & CB closed position .... time delays t1 and t2 are beginning to start.
Or:
CBF start & one of the three phase currents are exceeding the set value ....
time delays t1 and t2 are beginning to start.
Features:
1.
When set to "LOW GAS PRESSURE" (binary input), then the program will automatically set the
delay t2 to 0 sec., i.e. the stage 2 trip is initiated immediately because of a possible CB not ready condition and the
higher level trip command is given first.
2.
When the time delay t3 has expired it means that the CBF start signal is initiated for an excessive time which can
indicate that either the stage 1 and stage 2 tripping were not successful or that the CBF start signals are faulty or
not being previously reset.
3.
st
After CB trip there may be some current oscillations which however have no zero crossings even though the 1
harmonic is still above the configured setting value and in this case the CB failure
protective function will be blocked, i.e. no trip output.
4.
TRIP signal extension:
The tripping commands from stage 1 and stage 2 are being extended by 400 ms (in addition but not overall) in
order to prevent fleeting trip signals to the CB trip coil.
Stage 3 is not provided with a trip time extension but only will initiate an alarm annunciation meaning a fault
condition of the CBF function for internal or external causes.
5.
"CB is ON" signal may be used optionally (instead or additionally to the Overcurrent Measuring System); this
measure would act as a mechanical CB Failure Detection.

3.6. COMMISSIONING
Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations

Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!
3.6.1. MC316
-Pre-Commissioning
With a relay test set the test current is injected and the binary inputs set with the aid of a terminal or notebook
Binary In/Output Pre-Selection are displayed and controlled on-screen.
Note: in order to activate the protective function during test operation additionally the
"CBF Start" input has to be set (for example by simulation via notebook).
Note: If real trip outputs to the external plant have to be prevented this can be achieved by opening the
disconnecting terminals or by temporary re-programming and/or blocking of the function outputs (please refer to the
"Function Outputs ..." in the logic diagram).
-Commissioning Tests
During the commissioning tests by use of the Actual Measured Values" window the correct measurement of the
input currents is verified, and the binary inputs are checked by operation of the external auxiliary contacts of the
protected plant.
The trip circuits have to be checked via the "Binary In/Outputs Selection" by actual tripping of the corresponding
plant equipment when set to "1" of the relevant switchgear parts thereby saving the result of the tests into the event
recording feature.


MD... GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL
4. MD... GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL
4.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MD . . . Generator Differential Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
FNNR ... Function number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MD . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application
Generator differential protection 2-phase, 1018 MD222 87G C2,M,L

with Standard-BIAS characteristic.
Generator differential protection 2-phase. 1114 MD223 87G C2,M
Characteristic with reduced inference of restraint current.
Generator differential protection 2-phase, 1146 MD228 87G C2,M
with Standard-BIAS characteristic,
with CT Saturation Detection, High Set O/C (I >>)
and Quick Trip feature.
Includes CT Saturation Detection, High Set O/C (I >>)
Generator differential protection 3-phase, 1014 MD322 87G C2,M,L
Generator differential protection 3-phase, 1145 MD328 87G C2,M
with Standard-BIAS characteristic,
with CT Saturation Detection, High Set O/C (I >>)
Includes CT Saturation Detection, High Set O/C (I >>)

Comparison
CT High Set
Number Standard Reduced
Saturation O/C
of Phases BIAS BIAS
Detection (I >>)
MD222 2 +
MD223 2 +
MD228 2 + + +
MD229 2 + + +
MD322 3 +
MD323 3 +
MD328 3 + + +
MD329 3 + + +

4.2. TECHNICAL DATA
4.2.1. Generator Differential 2-phase 2-winding

Generator differential protection 2-phase 1018 MD222 87G C2,M,L
Formula for Restraint Current:
Restraint Current =
(|FFT 1H of ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L3|
+ |FFT 1H of ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L3|) / 1.
BIAS-Characteristic:
Restraint Current = 0 ... 1: Bias = const.
Restraint Current = 1 ... 3: Bias = 30%
Restraint Current > 3: Bias = Set value
2- phase generator differential protection with through fault stabilising (bias).

Standard BIAS-characteristic.

Restraint Current =
Restraint Current = 0 ... 2: BIAS = const.


Generator differential protection 2-phase 1146 MD228 87G C2,M
Restraint Current =

With CT Saturation Detection. High Set O/C Quick-Release (DiffStrom >>) and Quick Trip-feature.


Restraint Current =

MD222/ MD223/ MD228/ MD229

Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current system 1 phase L1
Current system 1 phase L3
Binary: Blocking input
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Available for MD228/ MD229 only:
CT Saturation
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0,05 ... 2.5 x In in 0,01 x In steps
Bias slope: 30 ... 60 % in 5 % steps
High Set O/C: Available for MD228/ MD229 only:
2 15 x In in 0,5A steps
Saturation Detection (CT): Available for MD228/ MD229 only:
0 240 periods.
Explanation: BIAS-characteristic change to 65% will
be activ for selected number of periods (= max. limit).
Note: Saturation Detection = OFF, if
Set value = 0 periods.

Window Display for Relay Internal

Determined and Computed Values
Differential current phase L1: in A
Bias current phase L1: in A
Measuring
Reset ratio: Set value Differential Current: 0,875
Set value High Set O/C: 0,75
Operating time: <30ms at 50 Hz (including output relays)
<90ms at 16.66 Hz (including output relays)
2% In

4.2.2. Generator Differential 3-phase 2-winding

Restraint Current =
(|FFT 1H of ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3|
+ |(FFT 1H of ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3|
+ |(FFT 1H of ISYSTEM3 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3|) / 1.


Restraint Current =
+ |FFT 1H of ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3|
+ |FFT 1H of ISYSTEM3 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3|) / 1.


Restraint Current =



Restraint Current =
Restraint Current = 0 ... 2: BIAS = const.


MD322/ MD323/ MD328/ MD329

Technical Data
Inputs
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Available for MD328/ MD329 only:
CT Saturation
Setting Parameters
High Set O/C: Available for MD328/ MD329 only:
2 15 x In in 0,5A steps
0 240 periods.
Explanation: BIAS-characteristic change to 65% will
be activ for selected number of periods
(= max. limit).

Measuring
Operating time: 30 ms at 50 Hz (including output relays)
26 ms at 60 Hz (including output relays)
2% In

4.3.1. MD222
+ - BATT.
R T
L1 L3 X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L3
5 5A
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03
8 5A
6
MAIN 9 I3 7
TRANSF. 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
SYSTEM1
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2
G 3
OUT 13 10
GEN. 11
2~ 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
I SYSTEM2 L1 U5 1
10
OUT 17 2
SYSTEM2 I SYSTEM2 L3 X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
+
BLOCKING (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
+5 11
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006--
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 30 MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. Wiring Diagram

4.3.2. MD322/ MD323
A B C
L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
SYSTEM1 4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I SYSTEM1 L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
G 17
18
5A
I6 OUT 07 14
GEN.
3~ 19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
I 10
I SYSTEM2 L1 29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
OUT 12 8
SYSTEM2 I SYSTEM2 L2 1
9
2 U1
OUT 13 10
I SYSTEM2 L3 3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
+
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
-UAKB Transducer 1 DUCER 2 +5 11
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MD322, MD323: 87G WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 31 MD322, MD323: 87G Wiring Diagram

4.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS

4.4.1. MD222
R T DRS-
L1 L3
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
I SYSTEM1 L1
I SYSTEM1 L3
G
GEN. 2~
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L3
TRIP
TEST COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL) OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
BLOCKING
ALARM
(OPTIONAL) CONTACTS
Trip
LEGEND Diff.Curr.
Block.

VERSION 2
MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 32 MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE L1
NOTEBOOK HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L1

HOLDING CURRENT PHASE L3
I SYSTEM1 L1 Holding Current

FFT 1H
for Phase L1 = PROCESSING
(|ISYSTEM1 L1| +
I SYSTEM1 L3 FFT 1H
|ISYSTEM2 L1|)/1
I SYSTEM2 L1 FFT 1H (FFT 1H) > (ACTUAL

OPERATE VALUE)
I SYSTEM2 L3 BASIC SET VALUE

OPERATE VALUE BIAS
Result: ACTUAL
OPERATE VALUE
SET VALUE BIAS
L1
L3
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET

1
0 LED-
DISPLAY
BLOCKING TRIP
BIN. I/0 >=1
PRESET
1 &
& TRIP LED-
0
MATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
FUNCTION
0
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 33 MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE MODULE: MD222
CALC. INTERNAL
BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0

Online-simulation of PRESET regular PRESET always PRESET always
PRESET
DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS 1 function 1 1" 1 0"
1
0
via notebook: 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MD222
1
0
Calculation of differential current by adding up the (proper signed) currents
FFT 1H Fast Fourier Transformation: 1. Harmonic

BIAS
Calculation of ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE by using the
BIAS CHARACTERISTIC DIAGRAM.
Input: Set Values Operate Value

Bias
Restraint current: IRESTRAINT = |ISYSTEM1|+|ISYSTEM2|
Output: ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE
(FFT 1H) > (ACTUAL The 1. Harmonic of the actual measured differential current is compared with the
OPERATE VALUE) actual operate value derived from the BIAS-diagram.

MATRIX
LED- (row 2...14)
DISPLAY

TRIP-
MATRIX

TRIP FUNCTION OUTPUT: Trip (no blocking active)
MD222MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM

PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 34 MD222/MD223/MD228/MD229 87G 2-PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

BIAS-Characteristic Differential-Protection
DRS PROCESSING/ MD222
RESULT: ACTUAL SET VALUE Rated Current of Protection Relay

ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE (1A AC resp. 5A AC)
Differential Current / Rated Current (of Prot. Relay)
Set Value
BIAS
6,0
Standard BIAS - Characteristic

BIAS=60%
5,0
Gen.-Differential-Protection DRS VE2
MD222/MD228/MD322/MD328
TRIP BIAS=50%
Diff. Curr./ Rated Curr..
SLOPE ACC.
4,0 BASIC SET TO SET VALUE
VALUE BIAS=40%
BIAS
OPERATE
VALUE
3,0 BIAS=30%
SetDiff
Set
Diff FIXED SLOPE
2,0 0.6
0,6
0.5 (BIAS= 0,3)
0.4
0,5
0.3
0,4
0.2
0.1
0,3
1,0 0,2
0,1
NO TRIP
0,0
0,0 1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0 9,0 10,0
Restraint Curr./ Rated Curr.

FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
INPUT: Rated Current of Protection
| FFT 1H of ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L3 | Relay
+ | FFT 1H of ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L3 (1A AC resp. 5A AC)
Note: The result of this diagram is the ACTUAL SET VALUE (valid for VE2 only!)
which is used to make the TRIP-decision.The ACTUAL SET VALUE has to be
calculated for every phase separately!
1
|FFT 1H (S)|
DIFF. TRIP
|((FFT 1H) of S)| > (ACTUAL SET VALUE)
|ACT. SET VALUE|
1 FFT 1H(S L1) = FFT 1H (ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1) ... Formula for 87G 2-ph.
L3 L3 L3
MD222/MD228 87G 2-PH. STANDARD BIAS CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 35 MD222/MD228 87G 2-PH. Standard Bias Characteristic

DRS PROCESSING

6,0
BIAS - Characteristic with Set Value

BIAS
Reduced Inference of Restraint Current
5,0 Gen.-Differential-Protection DRS VE2
SLOPE ACC.
MS223/MD229/MD323/MD329 TO SET VALUE
BIAS=60%
BIAS
4,0
BASIC SET BIAS=50%
TRIP
VALUE
OPERATE
BIAS=40%
3,0 VALUE
BIAS=30%
Set
Set Diff
Diff FIXED SLOPE
2,0 0,6
0.6 (BIAS= 0,3)
0.5
0,5
0.4
0,4
0.3
0,3
0.2
NO TRIP
0.1
0,2
1,0
0,1
0,0
0,0 1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0 9,0 10,0

FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
INPUT: Rated Current of

| FFT 1H of ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L3 | Protection Relay
+ | FFT 1H of ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L3 | (1A AC resp. 5A AC)
1
|FFT 1H (S)|
DIFF. TRIP
|((FFT 1H) of S)| > (ACTUAL SET VALUE)
|ACT. SET VALUE|
1 FFT 1H(S L1) = FFT 1H (ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1)

L3 L3 L3
MD223/MD228 87G 2-PH. BIAS CHAR. WITH REDUCED

INFERENCE OF RESTRAINT CURR.
Fig. 36 MD223/MD228 87G 2PH. Bias Char. With Reduced Inference of Restraint Curr.

4.4.2. MD322/ MD323
A B C
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
I SYSTEM1 L1
PROCESSING
SYSTEM1 I SYSTEM1 L2
I SYSTEM1 L3
G
GEN.
3~
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L2
SYSTEM2
I SYSTEM2 L3
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
Trip
LEGEND Diff.Curr.
Block.

VERSION 2
MD322, MD323 87G LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 37 MD322, MD323 87G Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE A
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE B
DIFF.CURRENT PHASE C
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE A
NOTEBOOK HOLDING CURRENT PHASE B
HOLDING CURRENT PHASE C
I SYSTEM1 L1 Holding Current

FFT 1H PROCESSING
for Phase L1 =
I SYSTEM1 L2 FFT 1H
(|ISYSTEM1 L1| + PROCESSING
|ISYSTEM2 L1|)/1
I SYSTEM1 L3
I SYSTEM2 L1 FFT 1H (FFT 1H) > (ACTUAL

OPERATE VALUE)
I SYSTEM2 L2
BASIC SET VALUE
I SYSTEM2 L3 OPERATE VALUE BIAS
Result: ACTUAL
OPERATE VALUE
SET VALUE BIAS
L1
L2
L3
TEST
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
DISPLAY
BLOCKING TRIP
BIN. I/0 >=1
PRESET
1 &
& TRIP LED-
0
MATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
FUNCTION
0
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MD322, MD323: 87G LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 38 MD322, MD323: 87G Logic Diagram Processing

DETAIL TO: MD322/MD323/MD328/MD329
BASIC CALCULATION LOGIC CIRCUIT (FIRMWARE)

FOR SYSTEM1
3
I SYSTEM1 L1 FFT 1H=
FFT 1H>>
HIGH SET
I SYSTEM1 L2 RESTRAINT
DIFF.
CURRENT (FFT 1H) >
I SYSTEM1 L3 >=1 PROT.
(ACTUAL TRIP
OPERATE
VALUE)
2
CALCULATION FFT 1H
OF Example:
DIFFERENTIAL
CURRENT Saturation Detection 5 Periods 5
Example:
Set Value: Bias 45 % 4 1
I SYSTEM2 L1 BIAS
I SYSTEM2 L2
ACT. OPER. VALUE
I SYSTEM2 L3
Result: ACTUAL
Example: OPERATE VALUE
Set Value:
0,30 A
Operate Value
1 RESTR. CURR.
L1
L2
L3
LEGEND
1 RELAY PARAMETERS (SET VALUE)

2 FFT 1H...FOURIER TRANSFORM./ 1st HARM.
3 RESTRAINT CURRENT...USED FOR BIAS CALC.
4 ANGLE OF SLOPE OF BIAS CHARACTERISTIC
5 CT SATURATION DETECTION AVAILABE AT
MD228/MD229 ONLY.
MD322/MD323/MD328/MD329: 87T LOGIC DIAGRAM

PROCESSING / DETAIL
Fig. 39 MD322/MD323/MD328/MD329: 87T Logic Diagram Processing / Detail

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE MODULE: MD322, MD323
CALC. INTERNAL

PRESET
1
0
via notebook: 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0

BIAS
Calculation of ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE by using the
BIAS CHARACTERISTIC DIAGRAM.
Input: Set Values Operate Value

Bias
Restraint current: IRESTRAINT = |ISYSTEM1|+|ISYSTEM2|
Output: ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE
(FFT 1H ( )) > (ACTUAL The 1. Harmonic of the actual measured differential current is compared with the
OPERATE VALUE) actual operate value derived from the BIAS-diagram.

MATRIX
LED- (row 2...14)
DISPLAY

TRIP-
MATRIX

MD322, MD323: 87G LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 40 MD322, MD323: 87G Logic Diagram Processing / Legend



Set Value
BIAS
6,0

BIAS=60%
5,0
Gen.-Differential-Protection DRS VE2
MD222/MD228/MD322/MD328
TRIP BIAS=50%
SLOPE ACC.
4,0 BASIC SET TO SET VALUE
BIAS BIAS=40%
VALUE
OPERATE
VALUE BIAS=30%
3,0
Set
Set Diff
Diff
2,0 0.6
0,6 FIXED SLOPE
0.5
0.4
0,5 (BIAS= 0,3)
0.3
0,4
0.2
0.1
0,3
1,0
0,2
0,1
NO TRIP
0,0
0,0 1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0 9,0 10,0

FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
INPUT: Rated Current of
| FFT 1H of ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3resp. L3 | Protection Relay
+ | FFT 1H of ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3 |
2 (1A AC resp. 5A AC)
1
|FFT 1H (DIFF)|
DIFF. PROT. TRIP
|((FFT 1H) of DIFF)| > (ACTUAL SET VALUE)
|ACT. SET VALUE|
1 FFT 1H(DIFF L1) = FFT 1H (ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1) DIFF. CURRENT

L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3
2
RESTRAINT CURRENT = |(CURRENT OF SYSTEM1 H1)| + |(CURRENT OF SYSTEM2 H1)|
MD322 87G STANDARD BIAS CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 41 MD322 87G Standard BIAS Characteristic


6,0
Set Value
BIAS - Characteristic with
BIAS
5,0 Gen.-Differential-Protection DRS VE2 SLOPE ACC.
MS223/MD229/MD323/MD329 TO SET VALUE
BIAS BIAS=60%
4,0
BASIC SET BIAS=50%
TRIP
VALUE
OPERATE
BIAS=40%
3,0 VALUE
BIAS=30%
Set
Set Diff
Diff FIXED SLOPE
2,0 0,6
0.6 (BIAS= 0,3)
0.5
0,5
0.4
0,4
0.3
0,3
0.2
NO TRIP
0.1
0,2
1,0
0,1
0,0
0,0 1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0 9,0 10,0

FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
INPUT: 2 INPUT:
| FFT 1H of ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3 | Current of
+ | FFT 1H of ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3 | Protection Relay
+ ... (1A AC resp. 5A AC)
1
|FFT 1H (DIFF)|
DIFF. PROT. TRIP
|((FFT 1H) of DIFF)| > (ACTUAL SET VALUE)
|ACT. SET VALUE|
1 FFT 1H(DIFF L1) = FFT 1H (ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1) DIFF. CURRENT

L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3
2
RESTRAINT CURRENT = |(CURRENT OF SYSTEM1 H1)| + |(CURRENT OF SYSTEM2 H1)|
MD323 87G BIAS CHAR. WITH REDUCED INFERENCE OF RESTRAINT CURR.

Fig. 42 MD323 87G BIAS Char. with Reduced Inference of Restraint Curr.

A B C
L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 + - GND 1
SYSTEM1 I SYSTEM1 L1 2 I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 3
IL1 DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L2 4 I2
5
5 OUT 03 6
I SYSTEM1 L3 6 I3 7
IL3 IL2 IL1 OUT 04
7 8
IL2 8 I4 9
IL3 OUT 05 10
9
I5 11
10
COMPACT2A
OUT 06 12
11 13
G 12 I6 OUT 07 14
GEN.
3~
DRS-
13 15
14 I7 OUT 08 16
13 X5
15 I8 1
16 OUT 09 2
18 I9 3
19 OUT 10 4
I 10 5
20
I SYSTEM2 L1 OUT 11 6
SYSTEM2 X8 7
OUT 12 8
I SYSTEM2 L2 1
9
2 U1
IL1 OUT 13 10
I SYSTEM2 L3 3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
IL1
IL3 IL2 5 LEGEND: 13
IL2 U3 OUT 15 14
6
THIS RECORD SHOWS REGULAR
15
IL3 7
U4 OUTFAULT
OPERATION (NO 16
8
CONDITION OF GEN.).
THEREFORE THIS (FAULT)
RECORD WAS NO INITIATED BY
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD322.
IT IS FOR DEMONSTRATION OF
CURRENT POLARITY ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING
DIAGRAM FOR MD322, MD323!
MD322, MD323 87G CURRENT POLARITY VERIFICATION SHOWN:

REGULAR OPERATION OF GENERATOR + REGULAR WIRING OF C.T.s.
Fig. 43 MD322, MD323 87G Current Polarity Verification Shown: Regular Operation of Generator + Regular Wiring of C.Ts

4.5. FUNCTION
Differential protective functions are provided as a selective unit protection system against winding short circuits.
The measuring principle is based on the current vector differential computation within the protected zone of the
relevant sets of CTs.
Measuring Principle:
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times per cycle. By means of the Fourier-Analysis
st
(DSP) the corresponding vectors (value and phase) for 1 harmonic (nominal frequency) are computed and
transferred to the CPU.
The CPU evaluates for each sample instant the differential signals for each phase and checks whether the actual
setting value has been exceeded (please also refer to the BIAS characteristic graph). If during 11 consecutive
samples (0.9 cycles) the values are above the setting a trip signal will be initiated.
By this the trip operating time consists of following single time values:
a)
Fourier-Coefficient of the differential signal reaches and exceeds the actual setting value:
Duration: 1 ... 12 ms, depending on the size of the differential signal, respectively the ratio to the setting value.
b)
Safety time: 11 consecutive samples = 0.9 cycles.
c)
Output relay: Approximately 5 ms
d)
The sum of times is typically smaller than 30 ms.
Bias Current / Stabilising:

st
The bias currents are phase-wise computed from the 1 harmonic currents of systems 1 and 2 of the differential
protection.
The trip conditions per phase are indicated in detail in the respective logic diagrams.
Initiation and at the same time active trip outputs will reset (valid for DRS-COMPACT2A/ VE2) when during 25
consecutive samples, i.e. 2 cycles, the initiating conditions are no longer present (trip output extension).
Note: 37 consecutive samples at DRS-LIGHT and DRS-COMPACT /VE1.
Please mind: Two Bias characteristics are available:

Fig. 4-1: Generator Differential-Protection:
Standard BIASCharacteristic: MD222, MD228, MD322, MD328
Fig. 4-2: Generator-Differential-Protection:
Characteristic with reduced influence of restraint current (GE-type):
MD223, MD229, MD323, MD329

Fig. 4-1
Standard BIASCharacteristic
Fig. 4-2
Characteristic with reduced influence of restraint current

4.5.1. CT Saturation Detection
For explanation please refer to Transformer Differential Protection System.

4.6. COMMISSIONING
!Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations

Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external connections have to be verified.
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry and the operating value and
the bias slope set according to requirements.
Also the relay outputs have to be set for the LED matrix and the TRIP matrix according to plant requirements.
The function checks are preferably performed with the primary protected plant being out of service.
To check the function with a relay test set, e. g. the CT inputs for system 1 phase L1 the test current
is injected and raised up to the operation of the relay thereby observing the operating value with respect to the
operating characteristic.
The injected test current is now reduced and the reset value of the function recorded.
Please note that the external injected current values can be displayed and compared with the internal measured
values, i.e. phase and differential currents, in the User operating program display Window.
The same is to be carried out for the other two phases of system 1 and the measured values recorded.
To check the through fault stability of phase 1 system 1 short out relay terminals 2 and 8 and inject at least the
rated current between terminals 1 and 7 (please also refer to the relevant connection diagram) and the protective
function must neither be operating nor showing a differential current in the internal measured values display of
more than 5% In.
The same test should be carried out on the second phase whereby the analogous terminal numbers shown on the
connection diagram are applicable.
The trip- and alarm signals and the LED indications should be confirmed according to the relay configuration and
the connection diagrams.
Measuring with twice the differential current setting injection and the resulting operating time of the protective
function should to be carried out for each phase either via a timer or the "Recorded Curves" in the User program to
record the measured values.
A test of the configured function blocking input should be done in conjunction with a continuously initiated trip signal
whereby the trip signal is has to reset.
Checking of the configured relay test input by applying a test signal can be verified without any
external initiation.
Please note that during tests of the described protective function other functions may be operating when not
previously blocked via the software according to the User application and after these tests the original parameter
settings have to be set to the original values and restored after the tests to the plant setting values according to the
plant requirements.
After the tests any temporary setting changes should be restored to the original parameter settings.

Commissioning Tests:
During commissioning the function of the protection scheme is tested during normal service conditions.
If possible following tests under operating conditions are recommended:
- Short Circuit Test for an Internal Fault
Install a short circuit with a suitable cross section between all phases inside the protected zone.
Block protection trips.
Connect measuring instruments into the CT circuits and/or display the actual measured values window in the
User program.
Start up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation to produce operation of the
differential protection. Record the operating values.
Restore the protection trips.
Shut down the generator if possible via a protection trip and remove the short circuit.
- Short Circuit Test for a Through Fault
Install a short circuit with a suitable cross section between all phases outside the protected zone so that the
two sets of CTs can be provided with the test current flow.
Start up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation up to nominal current. Thereby the
differential protection has to be stable. Select the display of the actual measured values window in the User
program and record these values.


MD... TRANSFORMATOR DIFFERENTIAL
5. MD... TRANSFORMATOR DIFFERENTIAL
5.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MD . . . Transformer Differential Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT

Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection 2- 1033 MD221 87T C2,M,L
winding, 2-phase, with phase selective blocking.
With Standard-BIAS characteristic.
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection 2- 1119 MD224 87T C2,M
winding, 2-phase, with phase selective/phase overlapping
blocking.
winding, 2-phase, with phase selective/ phase overlapping
blocking.
blocking,
with CT Saturation Detection and Quick Trip feature.
blocking,
blocking.
blocking.


blocking; with CT Saturation Detection and Quick Trip feature.
blocking.
blocking.
blocking.
blocking.
Transformer/Generator-Transformer differential protection 4- 1003 MD341 87T M
blocking.
blocking.



Comparison
Phase CT
Number Number of Standard Reduced
Overlapping Saturation
of Phases Windings BIAS BIAS
Blocking Detection
MD221 2 2 +
MD224 2 2 + +
MD225 2 2 + +
MD226 2 2 + + +
MD227 2 2 + + +
MD231 2 3 +
MD234 2 3 + +
MD235 2 3 + +
MD236 2 3 + + +
MD237 2 3 + + +
MD321 3 2 +
MD324 3 2 + +
MD325 3 2 + +
MD326 3 2 + + +
MD327 3 2 + + +
MD331 3 3 +
MD334 3 3 + +
MD335 3 3 + +
MD336 3 3 + + +
MD337 3 3 + + +
MD341 3 4 +
MD344 3 4 + +
MD345 3 4 + +
MD346 3 4 + + +
MD347 3 4 + + +

5.2. TECHNICAL DATA
5.2.1. Transformer Differential Protection 2-phase 2-winding
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MD221 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

winding, 2-phase, with phase selective blocking;
Equation for the bias current (restraint current):
Bias current =
(|FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L3)|
+ |FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L3)|) / 1.
BIAS characteristic:
Bias current = 0 ... 1: Bias = constant
Bias current = 1 ... 3: Bias = 30%
Bias current > 3: Bias = Setting value.
Note: In case of phase overlapping blocking is required ... please
refer to MD224!

blocking;
Bias current =
Note: In case of no phase overlapping blocking is required ...
please refer to MD221!

blocking.
Bias current =


blocking,
Bias current =
blocking,
Bias current =
Application:
Suitable for 2-phase, two winding transformers or two winding generator-transformer units with
stabilising for through faults and energising blocking feature.
MD 226/ MD227 additionally include CT Saturation Detection and Quick-Trip Module.

MD221/ MD224/ MD225 MD226/ MD227

TECHNICAL DATA:
Inputs
Test input
Auxiliary input system 1 (neutral isolator open/closed)
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Differential current
Interlock 2.H./5.H.
CT Saturation (MD226/ MD227 only)
Setting Parameters
Vector group 12: None/0/6
Zero sequence filter 1: On/Off/External
2nd harmonic: 10 ... 50 % in 1 % steps
5th harmonic: 5 ... 20 % in 1 % steps
High set differential stage: 2 ... 15 xIn in 0,5 xIn steps
CT ratio compensation 21: 0 ... 2,5 in 0,01 steps
Higher harmonics blocking (2.H., 5.H.): MD224, MD225, MD226, MD227: Phase selective/
phase overlapping.
Note: MD221 ... only phase selective.
0 240 periods.
Explanation: in case of CT saturation there will be an
automatic BIAS-characteristic change to 65% activ for
selected numbers of periods (= max. limit).

Differential current phase L1: In Amps
Bias current phase L1: In Amps
Measuring

Reset ratio: Differential Current: 0,875

High Set O/C (DiffCurr >>): 0,75
Operating time: 75 ms at 16.66 Hz (including output relays)
2% In
Properties
CT saturation detection: MD226, MD227
Standard BIASCharacteristic: MD221, MD224, MD226:
Characteristic graph:
Bias current equation:

Bias current =
Characteristic with reduced inference of restraint MD225, MD227:
current:
Bias current equation:

Bias current =


Bias current =
+ |FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L3)|
refer to MD234!
blocking.
Bias current =

blocking.
Bias current =


blocking,
with CT Saturation Detection and Quick Trip feature;
Bias current =
blocking,
Bias current =
Application:
Suitable for 2-phase, three winding transformers or three winding generator-transformer units with
MD 236/ MD237 additionally include CT Saturation Detection and Quick-Trip Feature.

MD231/ MD234/ MD235/ MD236/ MD237

TECHNICAL DATA:
Inputs
Analog: Current system 1 phase L1
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Interlock 2.H./5.H.
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0,1 ... 2.5 xIn in 0,01 xIn steps
10 ... 50 % in 1 % steps
2nd harmonic:
Higher harmonics blocking (2.H., 5.H.): MD234, MD235: Phase selective/phase overlapping.
0 240 periods.
Window for calculated internal measured values


Measuring
Operating time: 75 ms at 16.66 Hz (including output relays)
2% In
Properties
Bias current =
current:
Bias current =

PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MD 321 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Bias current =
(|FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3)|
+ |FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3)|) / 1.
refer to MD324!

blocking;
Bias current =

blocking;
Bias current =


blocking,
Bias current =
blocking,
Bias current =
Application:
Suitable for 3-phase, two winding transformers or two winding generator-transformer units with
MD 326/ MD327 additionally include CT Saturation Detection and Quick-Trip Module.

MD321/ MD324/ MD325/ MD326/ MD327

TECHNICAL DATA:
Inputs
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Interlock 2.H./5.H.
Setting Parameters
Vector group 12: None/0/1/5/6/7/11
High set differential stage:2 ... 15 xIn in 0,5 xIn steps
Higher harmonics blocking: MD324, MD325: Phase selective/phase overlapping.
0 240 periods.


Measuring
2% In
Properties
Bias current =

current:
Bias current =


Bias current =
+ |FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3)|
refer to MD334!

blocking;
with CT saturation detection;
Bias current =


blocking;
Bias current =
blocking,
Bias current =
winding, -phase, with phase selective/ phase overlapping
blocking,
Bias current =
Application:
Suitable for 3-phase, three winding transformers or three winding generator-transformer units with
MD336/ MD337 additionally include CT Saturation Detection and Quick-Trip Feature.

MD331/ MD334/ MD335/ MD336/ MD337

TECHNICAL DATA:
Inputs
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Interlock 2.H./5.H.
Setting Parameters
High set differential stage:2 ... 15 xIn in 0,5 xIn steps
Higher harmonics blocking: MD334, MD335:
Phase selective/phase overlapping.
0 240 periods.



Measuring
2% In
Properties
Bias current =
current:



Bias current =
refer to MD344!

blocking;
Bias current =

blocking.
Bias current =


blocking,
with CT Saturation Detection and Quick Trip feature;
Bias current =
blocking,
Bias current =
Application:
Suitable for 3-phase, four winding transformers or four winding generator-transformer units with
MD 346/ MD347 additionally include CT Saturation Detection and Quick-Trip Module

MD341/ MD344/ MD345/ MD346/ MD347

TECHNICAL DATA:
Inputs
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Blocking
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0,1 ... 2,5 x In in 0,01 x In steps
Higher harmonics blocking: MD344, MD345: Phase selective/phase overlapping.


0 240 periods.

Measuring
2% In
Properties
Bias current =
current:
Bias current =

5.3. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
5.3.1. MD221
R T
L1 L3
+ - BATT.
X2 1 2 3 X3
X1
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6
5A
I2
5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS- 19 1A 15
FORMER
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
1 22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
SYSTEM2 9
I SYSTEM2 L1 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
I SYSTEM2 L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
G AUX.INPUT1 + 8 U4 OUT 16 16
GEN. (opt.) X6
2~ 9
10 U5 1
AUX.INPUT2 + OUT 17 2
X4 3
(opt.)
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
+
TEST (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
1 MD221 COVERS ALL 12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
TRANSFORMER VECTOR 14 - IN 07
X2
GROUPS 15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
1 6
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02 8
Tx+
MOD-
4
BUS
Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 10
6 GND
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
-UAKB Transducer 1 DUCER 2 11
8 +5
RS422/485
Transducer 2 9 Rx+ 12
Shaft Current 10 Rx- 13
Rotor E/F 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04 GND 14
12 Tx+ 15
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 16
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 13 Tx-

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 44 MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. Wiring Diagram

5.3.2. MD231
+ - BATT.
R T
L1 L3 X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L3 5
6
5A
I2 DC
5
SYSTEM1 7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
MAIN TRANS- 9 I3 7
TRANS- 1 FORMER 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
FORMER 3-INP. 12 I4 9
2-PH. OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
SYSTEM2 SYSTEM3 22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
I SYSTEM2 L1 X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
I SYSTEM2 L3 2 U1 9
OUT 13 10
3 11
5 13
7 15
R T R T OUT 16 16
L1 L3 L1 L3 + 8 U4
AUX. 9 X6
+ U5 1
INPUT1 10
AUX. (opt.) OUT 17 2
INPUT2 X4 3
+ (opt.) 1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
AUX. -
3 + OUT 19 6
INPUT3 4 - IN 02 7
(opt.) -
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
-
7 + OUT 21 10
TEST (opt.) + 8 - IN 04 11
-
9 + OUT 22 12
BLOCKING (opt.) + 10 - IN 05 13
-
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
1 MD231 COVERS ALL X2
15 +
TRANSFORMER VECTOR 16 IN 08 4
-
GROUPS X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
+5 11
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MD231 87T 3-INP., 2-PH. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 45 MD231 87T3-INP., 2-PH. Wiring Diagram

5.3.3. MD321
L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I SYSTEM1 L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
I5
15 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS- 19 1A 15
FORMER
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
1 22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
I SYSTEM2 L1 X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
SYSTEM2 I SYSTEM2 L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
G AUX.INPUT1 + 8 U4 OUT 16 16
GEN. (opt.) X6
3~ 9
10 U5 1
AUX.INPUT2 + OUT 17 2
X4 3
(opt.)
1 + OUT 18 4
- 2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
- 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
TEST (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
1 MD321 COVERS ALL 12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
TRANSFORMER VECTOR 14 - IN 07
X2
GROUPS (NO HARDWARE 15 +
16 IN 08 4
INTERPOSING C.T.s) -
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 46 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Wiring Diagram

5.3.4. MD331, MD334
SYSTEM1 + - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
ISYSTEM1 L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
ISYSTEM1 L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
ISYSTEM1 L3
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
ISYSTEM2 L1 11
12
5A
I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
11
ISYSTEM2 L2 14
15
5A
I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
1 16 1A 13
ISYSTEM2 L3 17
18
5A
I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
1 1
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
ISYSTEM3 L1 2 U1 9
OUT 13 10
3
ISYSTEM3 L2 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
ISYSTEM3 L3 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 8
9 X6
SYSTEM2 SYSTEM3
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
AUX.INPUT1 (opt.) + IN 01
- 2 - 5
3 + OUT 19 6
AUX.INPUT2 (opt.) + IN 02
- 4 - 7
5 + OUT 20 8
AUX.INPUT3 (opt.) + 6 - IN 03 9
-
7 + OUT 21 10
+
TEST (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
+
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
LEGEND: 15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
OPTIONAL MODULE: RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
-UAKB Transducer 1 X7
6
Transducer 2 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
Shaft Current 2
TRANS-
Rotor E/F 3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension)
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
UAKB
TRANS-
RS422/485 chain line data interface 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
MODBUS control system interface 8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
9 13
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
1 MD331 COVERS ALL 12 Tx+
Tx- 16
TRANSFORMER VECTOR 13
GROUPS (NO HARDWARE 14 ROTOR E/F SI01
INTERPOSING C.T.s) UAKB-

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006-- X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MD331/MD334/MD335/MD336/MD337 87T 3-INP. 3-PH. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 47 MD331/MD334/MD335/MD336/MD337 87T 3-INP. 3-PH. Wiring Diagram

5.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS
5.4.1. MD221
DRS-
COMPACT2A
R T
L1 L3
I SYSTEM1 L1
PROCESSING
I SYSTEM1 L3
SYSTEM1
MAIN
TRANSF.
1
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L3
SYSTEM2
AUX.INPUT1
(OPTIONAL)
AUX.INPUT2
G (OPTIONAL)
GEN. 2~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
LEGEND OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
DRS DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM ALARM
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY CONTACTS
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS-COMPACT2A Trip
Diff.Curr.
PROCESSING CPU+DSP - BOARD/ Block.
VERSION 2
1 MD221 COVERS ALL TRANSFORMER

VECTOR GROUPS
MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 48 MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES

1
I SYSTEM1 L1 FFT 1H
FFT 1H>>
|ISYSTEM1 L1|+|ISYSTEM2 L1|
I SYSTEM1 L3 I0 HIGH SET &
1
I SYSTEM2 L1
BIAS
I SYSTEM2 L3 I0 FFT 1H
CT SATURATION 3 &
AUX.INPUT1
AUX.INPUT2 FFT 1H FFT 2H>
1
FFT 5H>
L1
L2 2
TEST
BIN. I/0
TRIP LED-
PRESET
>=1 DISPLAY
1 &
0 & TRIP
BLOCKING
DIFF.CURRENT
BIN. I/0 >=1 LED-
PRESET & MATRIX
& DIFF.CURRENT
1
0 BIN. I/0
PRESET
BLOCKING 4 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & BLOCKING
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
4
PLEASE NOTE:
MD226, MD227 ADDITIONALLY INCLUDE
THE BINARY OUTPUT CT SATURATION
1 2 3
FOR DETAILD BASIC CALCULATION LOGIC PHASE OVERLAPPING RESTRAINT CT SATURATION
CIRCUIT: see MD321 87T LOGIC DIAGRAMM AT AT
PROCESSING / DETAIL MD224, MD225, MD226, MD227 ONLY. MD226, MD227 ONLY.
MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 49 MD211/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
I0 Zero-sequence current filtering (software-filtering); enabled via settings
Transformer vector group adjustment by software; see settings

Note: no hardware-interposing c.t.s necessary
Compensator-factor for c.t.-secondary currents; see settings
Programmable
software-matrix for LED-indications of
LED- the LED-indications LED- PROCESSING
MATRIX (row 2...14) of DISPLAY (row 2...14)
PROCESSING

TRIP-
MATRIX

FFT 2H> FFT: 2. H. > set; see setting for 2.H.filter for transformer energizing
FFT 5H> FFT: 5. H. > set; see setting for 5.H.filter for transf. saturation by over-voltage
|ISYSTEM1|+|ISYSTEM2|
Restraint current: IRESTRAINT =
1 1
BIAS
BIAS characteristic (differential current <-> restraint current)

DIFF.CURRENT FUNCTION OUTPUT: Differential current > set
BLOCKING
FUNCTION OUTPUT: Blocking of tripping by 2. or 5. Harmonic filter or
by ext. applied blocking signal
FFT 1H>> The high-set feature deactivates the higher harmonics (2.H.,5.H.) blocking
HIGH SET of tripping (tripping is enabled)
MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 50 MD221/MD224/MD225/MD226/MD227 87T 2-PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

5.4.2. MD321
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
I SYSTEM1 L1
PROCESSING
I SYSTEM1 L2
SYSTEM1 I SYSTEM1 L3
AUX.INPUT1
TRANS-
FORMER AUX.INPUT2
1
(OPTIONAL)
I SYSTEM2 L1
I SYSTEM2 L2
SYSTEM2
I SYSTEM2 L3
GEN.
G
TEST
3~
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
1 MD321 COVERS ALL TRANSFORMER OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
VECTOR GROUPS (NO HARDWARE
ALARM
INTERPOSING C.T.s)
CONTACTS
Trip
LEGEND Diff.Curr.
Block.

VERSION 2
MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 51 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
1
I SYSTEM1 L1 FFT 1H
FFT 1H>>
I SYSTEM1 L2 I0 HIGH SET &
I SYSTEM1 L3 1
I SYSTEM2 L1 BIAS
I SYSTEM2 L2 I0 FFT 1H
I SYSTEM2 L3 &
CT SATURATION 3
AUX.INPUT1
AUX.INPUT2 FFT 1H FFT 2H>
1
FFT 5H>
L1
L2 2
L3 2
TEST
BIN. I/0
TRIP LED-
PRESET
>=1 DISPLAY
1 &
0 & TRIP
BLOCKING
DIFF.CURRENT
BIN. I/0 >=1 LED-
PRESET & MATRIX
& DIFF.CURRENT
1
0 BIN. I/0
PRESET
BLOCKING 4 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & BLOCKING
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
1
FOR DETAIL:
see MD321 87T LOGIC DIAGRAMM
PROCESSING / DETAIL
1 2 3
FOR DETAILD BASIC CALCULATION LOGIC PHASE OVERLAPPING RESTRAINT CT SATURATION
CIRCUIT: see MD321 87T LOGIC DIAGRAMM AT AT
PROCESSING / DETAIL MD324, MD325, MD326, MD327 ONLY. MD326, MD327 ONLY.
MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 52 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Logic Diagram Processing

Fig. 53 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Logic Diagram Processing / Detail

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
1 1 function 1 1" 1 0"
via notebook:
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MD321

OUTPUT all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation)
1 all FUNCTION OUTPUTS disabled (test-operation) LEDs enabled only.
0
Zero-sequence current filtering (software-filtering); enabled via settings

I0
(or via ext. Digital Inputs AUX.IN1" or AUX.IN2"
Transformer vector group adjustment by software; see settings
Note: no hardware-interposing c.t.s necessary.
Example: Yd5 formula: IR adjusted = IS IR
Compensator-factor for c.t.-secondary currents; see settings
Programmable LED-indications
software-matrix for of
MATRIX (row 2...14) of DISPLAY (row 2...14)
PROCESSING

TRIP-
MATRIX

FFT 2H> FFT: 2. H. > set; see setting for 2.H.filter for transformer energizing
FFT 5H> FFT: 5. H. > set; see setting for 5.H.filter for transf. saturation by over-voltage
|IA|+|Ia|
|ISYSTEM1|+|ISYSTEM2|
Restraint current: IRESTRAINT =
1 1
BIAS
BIAS characteristic (differential current <-> restraint current)

DIFF.CURRENT FUNCTION OUTPUT: Differential current > set
BLOCKING
FUNCTION OUTPUT: Blocking of tripping by 2. or 5. Harmonic filter or
by ext. applied blocking signal
FFT 1H>> The high-set feature deactivates the higher harmonics (2.H.,5.H.) blocking
HIGH SET of tripping (tripping is enabled)
MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 54 MD321/MD324/MD325/MD326/MD327 87T Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

DRS PROCESSING / MD321
RESULT: ACTUAL SET VALUE

ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE

Set Value
BIAS
6,0

Transf.-Differential-Protection DRS VE2 BIAS=60%
5,0
MD221/MD224/MD226/MD231/MD234/
MD236/MD321/MD324/MD326/MD331/ TRIP BIAS=50%
MD334/MD336/MD341/MD344/MD346
4,0
BASIC SET
BIAS=40%
VALUE
OPERATE SLOPE ACC.
VALUE TO SET VALUE
3,0 BIAS=30%
BIAS
Set
Set Diff
2,0
Diff
0,6 FIXED SLOPE
0.6
0,5
0.5 (BIAS= 0,3)
0,4
0.4
0,3
0.3
1,0
0,2
0.2
0,1
0.1 NO TRIP
0,0
0,0 1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0 9,0 10,0

FIXED SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
INPUT: INPUT:
|FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3)| Rated Current of
+ |FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3)| Protection Relay
+ ... (1AAC resp. 5AAC)
|FFT 1.H. (ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1 + ...)|
DIFF. PROT. TRIP

|FFT 1.H. (ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1 + ...)| > (ACTUAL SET VALUE)
(for phase L1)
ACT. SET VALUE
MD321 87T STANDARD BIAS CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 55 MD321 87T Standard Bias Characteristic

DRS PROCESSING / MD325/MD327
RESULT: ACTUAL SET VALUE

ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE
6,0
BIAS - Characteristic with Set Value

BIAS
5,0
Transf.-Differential-Protection DRS VE2 SLOPE ACC.
MD225/MD227/MD235/MD237/MD325/ TO SET
MD327/MD335/MD337/MD345/MD347 VALUE BIAS BIAS=60%

4,0
BASIC SET BIAS=50%
TRIP
VALUE
OPERATE
BIAS=40%
3,0 VALUE
FIXED BIAS=30%
Set
SetDiff SLOPE
2,0 Diff
0,6 (BIAS= 0,3)
0.6
0,5
0.5
0,4
0.4
0,3
0.3
1,0
0,2
0.2
0,1
0.1
NO TRIP
0,0
0,0 1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0 9,0 10,0

FIXED
SLOPE
(BIAS= 0)
INPUT: INPUT:
|FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM1 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3)| Rated Current of
+ |FFT 1H of (ISYSTEM2 L1 resp. L2 resp. L3)| Protection Relay
+ ... (1AAC resp. 5AAC)
|FFT 1.H. (ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1 + ...)|
DIFF. PROT. TRIP

|FFT 1.H. (ISYSTEM1 L1 + ISYSTEM2 L1 + ...)| > (ACTUAL SET VALUE)
(for phase L1)
ACT. SET VALUE
MD325/MD327 87T BIAS CHAR. WITH REDUCED INFERENCE

OF RESTRAINT CURR.
Fig. 56 MD325/MD327 87T Bias Char. With Reduced inference of Restraint Curr.

L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
SYSTEM1
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
IL1 3
3
4 1A
DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
IL3 IL2 7 1A OUT 03 6
IL1 I SYSTEM1 L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14 5A
I5 11
COMPACT2A
15 OUT 06
AUX. 12
16 1A
INPUT1 17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS-
DRS-
(OPT.) 19 1A 15
FORMER 20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
Yy0 22 1A X5
AUX. 23 5A
I8
24 1
INPUT2 OUT 09
25 1A 2
26 5A
(OPT.) 27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10
SYSTEM2 I SYSTEM2 L1 29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
OUT 12 8
IL1 I SYSTEM2 L2 1
9
2 U1
IL1 OUT 13 10
I SYSTEM2 L3 3 11
IL3 IL2 U2 OUT 14
4 12
LEGEND:
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
G 7 15
OPERATION (NO FAULT CONDITION
GEN.
3~ U4 OUT 16
8 OF MAIN TRANSF.). THEREFORE THIS
(FAULT) RECORD WAS NOT INITIATED
BY PROTECTIVE FUNCTION MD321.
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
WIRING: ACC. TO WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 0" (i.e. Yy0)
MD321 VECTOR GROUP VERIFICATION EXAMPLE:

VECTOR GROUP OF MAIN TRANSFORMER = 0".
Fig. 57 MD321 Vector Group Verification Example: Vector Group Of Main Transformer = ,,0.

L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
SYSTEM1
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
IL1 3
3
4 1A
DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
IL3 IL2 IL1 7 1A OUT 03 6
I SYSTEM1 L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14 5A
I5 11
AUX.
COMPACT2A
15 OUT 06 12
INPUT1 16 1A
13
17 5A
TRANS- 18 I6 OUT 07 14
(OPT.)
DRS-
FORMER 19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
Yd1 21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
SYSTEM2 I 10
30 X8 7
IL1 OUT 12 8
I SYSTEM2 L2 1
9
IL1 2 U1
OUT 13 10
I SYSTEM2 L3 3 11
IL3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
IL2 5
LEGEND:
13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
G 7 15
GEN. 3~ U4 OUT 16
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 1" (i.e. Yd1)

Fig. 58 MD321 Vector Group Verification Example: Vector Group Of Main Transformer = ,,1

L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
SYSTEM1
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
IL1 3
3
4 1A
DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
IL3 IL2 7 1A OUT 03 6
IL1 I SYSTEM1 L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14 5A 11
AUX. I5
COMPACT2A
15 OUT 06 12
INPUT1 16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS-
DRS-
(OPT.) 19 1A 15
FORMER 20 5A
I7 OUT 08 16
21
Yd5
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
OUT 10 4
SYSTEM2 28 1A
5
I 10
IL3 X8 7
OUT 12 8
I SYSTEM2 L2 1
9
2 U1
IL1 OUT 13 10
150 I SYSTEM2 L3 3 11
IL2 4 U2 OUT 14 12
LEGEND:
5 13
IL1 6 U3 THIS RECORDOUT 15 REGULAR
SHOWS 14
G 7 15
GEN. 3~ U4 OUT 16
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
FOR MD321!


L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
SYSTEM1
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
IL1 3
3
4 1A
DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
IL3 IL2 7 1A OUT 03 6
IL1 I SYSTEM1 L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14 5A 11
I5
COMPACT2A
15 OUT 06 12
AUX.
16 1A 13
INPUT1 17 5A
I6
18 OUT 07 14
TRANS-
DRS-
(OPT.) 19 1A 15
FORMER 20 5A
I7 OUT 08 16
21
Yy6 22 1A X5
AUX. 23 5A
I8
24 1
INPUT2 OUT 09
25 1A 2
26 5A 3
SYSTEM2 (OPT.) 27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10
IL3 I SYSTEM2 L1 29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
IL2 OUT 12 8
I SYSTEM2 L2 1
9
180 2 U1
IL1 OUT 13 10
I SYSTEM2 L3 3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
IL1 5
LEGEND:
13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
G 7 15
GEN. OUT 16
3~ 8 U4 OF MAIN TRANSF.). THEREFORE THIS
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
FOR MD321!
VECTOR GROUP SHOWN: 6" (i.e. Yy6)


L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
SYSTEM1
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
IL1 3
3
4 1A
DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
IL3 IL2 7 1A OUT 03 6
IL1 I SYSTEM1 L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14 5A 11
I5
COMPACT2A
AUX.
15 OUT 06 12
16 1A 13
INPUT1 17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS-
DRS-
(OPT.) 19 1A 15
FORMER 20 5A
I7 OUT 08 16
21
Yd7 22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
SYSTEM2 I 10
X8 7
IL2 I SYSTEM2 L2 1 OUT 12 8
IL3 U1 9
2
IL1 OUT 13 10
I SYSTEM2 L3 3 11
210 4 U2 OUT 14 12
LEGEND:
IL1 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
G 7 15
GEN. 3~ U4 OUT 16
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
FOR MD321!


L1 L2 L3 + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
SYSTEM1
1 1A + - GND 1
I SYSTEM1 L1 2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
IL1 3
3
4 1A
DC OUT 02 4
I SYSTEM1 L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
IL3 IL2 7 1A OUT 03 6
IL1 I SYSTEM1 L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14 5A 11
I5
COMPACT2A
AUX.
15 OUT 06 12
16 1A 13
INPUT1 17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS-
DRS-
(OPT.) 19 1A 15
FORMER 20 5A
I7 OUT 08 16
21
Yd11 22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
SYSTEM2 I 10
X8 7
IL1 OUT 12 8
I SYSTEM2 L2 1
9
IL2 2 U1
IL1 OUT 13 10
I SYSTEM2 L3 3 11
330 4 U2 OUT 14 12
LEGEND:
IL3 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
G 7 15
GEN. 3~ U4 OUT 16
VECTOR GROUP ONLY!
FOR MD321!


5.5. FUNCTION
Differential protective functions are provided as a selective unit protection system against winding
short circuits and depending on system grounding also against earth faults. The measuring principle
is based on the current vector differential computation within the protected zone of the relevant sets
of CTs.
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times per cycle. By means of the Fourier-Analysis
st nd th
(DSP) the corresponding vectors (value and phase) for 1 , 2 and 5 harmonic are computed and transferred to
the CPU
The CPU evaluates for each sample instant the differential signals for each phase and checks whether the actual
setting value has been exceeded (please also refer to the BIAS characteristic graph). If during 11 consecutive
samples (0.9 cycles) the values are above the setting a trip signal will be initiated.
By this the trip operating time consists of following single time values:
a)
Fourier-Coefficient of the differential signal reaches and exceeds the actual setting value:
Duration: 1 ... 12 Samples (= 1.66 20ms, in case of a 50 Hz-system), depending on the size of the differential
signal, respectively the ratio to the setting value.
b)
Safety time: 11 consecutive samples = 0.9 cycles.
Note: During the safety time the CPU is checking for any blocking conditions which can be in detail as follows:
nd
- 2 harmonic is exceeding the setting value (transformer inrush current)
th
- 5 harmonic is exceeding the setting value (transformer overfluxing due to overvoltage)
- Blocking input of the function is set, e.g. via an external auxiliary contact or a logic function
- C.T. saturation detection: will result in an change of the BIAS-characteristik (see MD326, MD327)
c)
Output relay: approximately 5 ms
d)
The sum of times is typically smaller than 30 ms.
e)
Accelerated-Tripping-Feature: Decision is done by evaluation of higher harmonics resp. signal quality; waiting time
is set to zero if specific preconditions are fulfilled.
Tripping Logic:
The trip conditions per phase are indicated in detail in the respective logic diagrams.
The vector group compensation is digitally computed according to the vector group setting ensuring that the
currents of all transformer windings are correctly in phase for the subsequent evaluation.
Any zero sequence currents of the protected plant are compensated either by the zero sequence current
compensation setting ON or via the EXTERNAL input signal in accordance to the neutral isolator position.
The transformer ratio and the CT ratios are considered by the "CT ratio compensation system 2-1".
The current vectors are now phase-wise added to the differential current and the basic harmonic, the
nd th
2 harmonic and the 5 harmonic quantities are phase-wise computed.
If during 11 consecutive samples (0.9 cycles) the values are above the setting a "Trip" and "Differential current"
signal will be initiated.
Bias Current / Stabilising:

st
The bias currents are phase-wise computed from the 1 harmonic currents of all windings of the transformer
differential protection and the tripping conditions for each phase are illustrated in the following graph.
Special case:
Functions MD**6 and MD**7 -additionally include a C.T. saturation detection feature. If a C.T.-saturation is
detected then the BIAS-characteristic automatically will be switched to a 65% - gradient.
Precondition: C.T. Saturation Detection must be active (set value "Saturation Protection" > 0).

Please Note:
Fig. 5-1: Transformer-Differential-Protection:
Standard BIAS-Characteristic for the functions:
MD221, MD224, MD226, MD231, MD234, MD236, MD321, MD324, MD326, MD331, MD334,
MD336, MD341, MD344, MD346
Fig. 5-2: Transformer-Differential-Protection:

Characteristic with reduced influence of restraint current for the functions:
MD225, MD227, MD235, MD237, MD325, MD327, MD335, MD337, MD345, MD347

Fig. 5-1: Standard BIASCharacteristic
Fig. 5-2: Characteristic with reduced influence of restraint current

Higher harmonics blocking

nd th
The Trip of a phase is blocked when the relation between the 2 and the basic harmonic or the 5 harmonic and
the basic harmonic parameter setting value is exceeded. This way a false trip during transformer energizing (2nd
th
harmonic) resp. transformer overexcitation (5 harmonic) is prevented.
Please Note:
For the functions MD221, MD231, MD321, MD331, MD31 the higher harmonics blocking is phase selective, i.e.
each phase is considered independently from the others; for the functions MD224, MD225, MD234, MD235,
MD324, MD325, MD334, MD335, MD344, MD345 the higher harmonics blocking is either phase selective or phase
overlapping according to the respective parameter setting.
The phase overlapping mode means that when the higher harmonics content has been exceeded in one phase
also the other two phases are blocked automatically.
High set differential stage (in reference to the higher harmonics blocking and if applicable with reference to C.T.
saturation detection)
Currents containing higher harmonics can also develop during system faults. Therefore when the differential
current "high set differential stage" parameter is exceeding the set value blocking of the trip is being phase-wise
and independent of the higher harmonics content resp. if applicable the status of the C.T.-saturation detection
circuit, de-blocked and tripping initiated. The function output Blocking" signals the condition of the trip blocking.
CT saturation detection
The transformer differential protective functions MD**6 and MD**7 include an automatic CT saturation detection
(phase selective BIAS-change in case of CT saturation due to a high through fault current with DC offset).
The C.T.-saturation detection feature is based on sample values which are evaluated by a special logic. It takes
approx. 2 ms to detect an outzone fault with C.T.-saturation.
In this case the BIAS-characteristic is changed automatically to a 65% gradient course which originates from the
center of the coordinate system.
Preconditions:
- Set value "Saturation Detection" > 0 (note: "0" means that the feature is switched off)
- Fault is of "outzone" type
All Differential Protective Functions with CT-saturation detection have an additional digital output: "CT saturation",
in order to differentiate between "Interlock 2.H./5.H." and "CT Saturation".
Digital Outputs of Functions MD**6 and MD**7

- Trip (CB trip)
- Diff. Current (differential current is above set value)
- Interlock 2.H./5.H. (2.Harm. above set value, or 5.Harm. above set value)
- CT Saturation (CT saturation was detected during "outzone" fault)
Please note:
The digital output "CT saturation" informs that a CT saturation during an "outzone" fault has been detected. As
a consequence the BIAS-characteristic will automatically change to a slope of 65%.
There will no direct (digital) blocking of tripping (as it is the case for example with "Interlock 2.H./5.H".
A trip of the Differential Protective Function even in case of CT-saturation could be possible in the following cases:
- Set value "CT Saturation" is zero (= "CT Saturation"- feature is switched off).
- Differential Current exceeds the set value "High Set OC".
- Fault is of "inzone" type (saturation detection must not respond in case of "inzone")
- "Outzone"-fault with excessive CT saturation (CT saturates immediately). In this case the detection
logic could be not working properly (not enough samples), or the 65%-BIAS characteristic is not
sufficient anymore for preventing a maltrip. Please mind: It is not possible resp. it does not make
sense to detect a CT saturation which is approx. 0% or 100%.

Trip reset

5.5.1. Detailed Description of CT Saturation Detection Feature
5.5.1.1. Transformer Differential Protective Functions with CT Saturation Detection
MD226
MD227
MD236
MD237
MD326
MD327
MD336
MD337
MD346
MD347
5.5.1.2. CT Saturation Detection Principles
Logic
The differential and the restraint currents are analyzed by a special logic circuit, sample by sample,
separately for every phase. CT Saturation will be detected within approx. 2 ms.
If a CT Saturation is detected the BIAS-Characteristic is changed to 65 %.
Note: The Differential Protective - function will not be blocked absolutely (for safety reason).
The logic circuits respond to CT-Saturation in case of outzone faults only.
5.5.1.3. Explanation of CT Saturation Detection
5.5.1.3.1. Precondition: Outzone Fault.
Please see Disturbance Record below:

Note: This Record was saved by a MD326 Transformer Differential Protection.

Analysis of Record:
a)
The record shows an Outzone Fault.
The first two recorded curves show the phase currents of phase L1.
Current of phase L1 HV-side (red line: CT-saturation
Current of phase L1 LV- side (black line): no CT-saturation.
b)
Recorded curves no.3 and 4 (actually these lines are calculated by the DRWIN Operating Program):
These curves show the Differential Current and the Restraint Current (which is used for the
BIAS-characteristic).
Black line: Differential current (absolute value of vector difference of the phase currents)
Red line: Restraint current (sum of absolute values of the phase currents)
Please note:
Curve no. 3 and 4 are shown as absolute values in this diagram (rectified values).
c)

The CT saturation detection logic analyzes the curves no. 3 and 4.

The result is a digital CT-saturation bit (please compare Digital Output track no. 4/ counting from
top of the Record/ " = black line"). The activation of the CT-saturation bit changes the BIAS-characteristic to 65 %.
Please note: The CT saturation detection feature just changes the BIAS characteristic, there is no digital blocking
applied to the differential protection function (as it would be the case for example with the Inrush Detection
feature).
d)
Please note that the CT-saturation detection circuit is very fast. It takes approx. 2 ms to detect a CT-saturation.
The saturation bit ends approx 1,1 periods after the last detected CT-saturation in order to avoid
malfunction resulting from (for example) unsymmetrical DC-components.
e)
Conclusion:
CT-saturation is detected very fast and reliably.

5.5.1.3.2. Precondition: Inzone Fault
For comparison we also include a Recorded Curve showing an Inzone Fault with CT-saturation.
Result:
As you can see the Protective Functions trips immediately because we have an Inzone Fault.
See digital tracks no. 1 and 2.
Note: The CT saturation is the same as we had in the former case.
Result:
Reliable and fast tripping in case of inzone fault even in case of heavy CT saturation.
OK.

5.6. COMMISSIONING

Pre-Commissioning:
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry and the operating value and
the bias slope set according to requirements.
The vector group parameters have to be set according to the transformer vector group and also it has to be
considered that system 1 is the reference system.
The zero sequence current filter for system 1, system 2, system 3 and system 4 are to be set to ON
or OFF or for "EXTERNAL" input. Using the external input contact the correct function via the "Binary
In/Output pre-selection" has to be verified.
nd th
The parameters for the inrush blocking (2 harmonic, 5 harmonic, high set differential stage) are either set to the
existing values to the proposed default values of the User program.
The CT ratio compensation "System 2-1" is set according to following formula.
Iw2
CT ratio compensation A
Iw1 RT1,2
Iw1................. CT primary ratio system 1

Iw2................. CT primary ratio system 2
RT1,2............. Transformer ratio system 1/system 2
Analogous when applicable "CT ratio compensation system 3-1" and the "CT ratio compensation
system 4-1" are being calculated accordingly.
To check the function with a relay test set, e. g. the CT inputs for system 1 phase L1 the test current
is injected and raised up to the operation of the relay thereby observing the operating value with respect to the
operating characteristic.
Please note that with the zero sequence current filter activated a single phase injected test current is evaluated
rd
only by 2/3 of its actual value. The operating value should be recorded into the commissioning test sheets.
The injected test current is now reduced and the reset value of the function recorded.
Please note that the external injected current values can be displayed and compared with the internal measured
values, i.e. phase and differential currents, in the User operating program display Window
The same is to be carried out for the other two phases of system 1 and the measured values recorded.

Now the test current injection should be carried out on phase L1 in system 2.
Please note that for an uneven vector group value (delta connection of system 2) injected current is evaluated by
A 3 and by even vector group (star connection) evaluated by factor A.
Check the operating- and reset values as with system 1 for all 3 phases and record the result in the test sheets.
The same tests as per system 2 should also be performed for system 3 and system 4 if applicable.
Measuring with twice the differential current setting injection in system 1 and the resulting operating time of the
protective function should to be carried out for each phase either via a timer or the "Recorded Curves" in the User
program to record the measured values.
A phase-wise check of the inrush blocking should be carried out by single phase injection of a one-way rectified DC
current signal on system 1 regarding blocking and the high set differential stage operation according to the set
parameters.
plant requirements.
After the tests any temporary setting changes should be restored to the original parameter settings.
Commissioning Tests:
During commissioning the function of the protection scheme is tested during normal service conditions.
If possible following tests under operating conditions are recommended:
- Short Circuit Test for an Internal Fault
Install a short circuit with a suitable cross section between all phases inside the protected zone.
Note: Due to safety reasons it is recommended to take precautions against excitation system faults
(regulator failure, wrong connections, etc.) and the inadvertent opening of the short circuit.
Suitable safety precautions are, for example, the activation of an overcurrent- and overvoltage function.
Preferably the tests are carried out with reduced settings and only after life trip checks,
e. g. excitation contactor trip, etc.!
Connect measuring instruments into the CT circuits and/or display the actual measured values window in the
User program.
Start up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation to produce operation of the
differential protection. Record the operating values.

- Short Circuit Test for a Through Fault
Install a short circuit with a suitable cross section between all phases outside the protected zone so that the
two sets of CTs can be provided with the test current flow (system 1 and system 2) and raise the excitation
to produce up to nominal current thereby the differential protection has to be stable (differential current 5%
In). Select the display of the actual measured values window in the User program (Notebook) and record
these values. The same procedures should be adopted for the other windings of the generator-
transformer/transformer unit.
- Transformer Energising Tests
All protective systems have to be restored to the original service values. When the transformer
is energised for the first time the configured LED indications should be observed. The differential protection
nd th
must not operate during energising otherwise the it has to be investigated whether the 2 and 5 harmonic
settings are adequate or a real fault is existing by referring to the Recorded Curves of the User program. In
case of on-load tap changer transformer types these tests should be repeated for different tap positions and
possible other parameter settings of the inrush restraint settings.


ME... OUT OF STEP PROTECTION
6. ME... OUT OF STEP PROTECTION
6.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available ME . . . Out of Step Protective Functions
Abbreviations: C2 ... DRS-COMPACT2

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: ME 311/ ME312 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

"Out of Step" for Three Phase Systems Generator, MHO 1073 ME311 78G C2
"Out of Step" for Three Phase Systems Motor, MHO 1128 ME312 78M C2

6.2. TECHNICAL DATA
6.2.1. Out of Step Protection With Circular MHO Characteristic for 3-Pase Systems
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: ME 311/ ME312 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

"Out of Step" for Three Phase Systems Generator, 1073 ME311 78G C2
MHO
"Out of Step" for Three Phase Systems Motor, 1128 ME312 78M C2
MHO
The "Out of Step" protective functions ME311 (Out of Step Relay for Generators) and ME312 (Out of Step
Relay for Motors) are 3-phase / 1-stage "Out of Step Feature" relay functions with configurable blocking
settings during unsymmetrical load currents and decrease of the minimum set values of the positive
sequence generator current and voltage. They are based on the computation of the time sequence and the
complex evaluation of the MHO characteristic settings based on the time event whereby the evaluation is
according to the rate of change of the impedance vector of the positive sequence current.

ME311/ ME312
Technical Data
Inputs
Analog: Current phase L1
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Phase to phase voltage L1-L2
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous alarm
Time delayed trip
Alarm: Negative phase sequence current blocking
Setting Parameters
Base point (R1): -100 ... 100 Ohm in 0,1 Ohm steps
Offset (R1 R2): 10 ... 250 Ohm in 0,1 Ohm steps
Blinder slope: 20 ... 90 Grad in 0,1 Grad steps
Circle diameter: 10 ... 500 Ohm in 0,1 Ohm steps
Circle centre: -250 ... 250 Ohm in 0,1 Ohm steps
Slip pulse number: 1 ... 20
Time window t1: 0,01 ... 1.00 s in 0,01 s steps
Slip cycle T1: 0,10 ... 20,00 s in 0,01 s steps
Time window t2: 0,01 ... 1.00 s in 0,01 s steps
Slip cycle T2: 0,10 ... 20,00 s in 0,01 s steps
Activation time T3: 1,0 ... 60,0 s in 0,1 s steps
Negative phase sequence: 10 ... 20 % s in 0,5 % steps
Current interlock: 0,00 ... 4,00 xIn in 0,05 xIn steps
Trip: Instantaneous / delayed
Current direction: Direction 1 / Direction 2
Phase rotation: Clock wise / counter clock wise


Slip pulse [number of current slip]
System impedance In [Ohm] (absolute value of the impedance vector),
whereby 1 p.u. = 57.7 Ohm = phase voltage / phase
current (in relation to the relay nominal values
(100V/1A respectively 100V/5A).
Impedance angle in [degrees] (angle of the impedance vector)
Time running [Yes / No]; the time starts when crossing R1 and ends
either with a trip or a function reset when one of the
necessary conditions are no longer fulfilled
Positive sequence current in [A]
Positive sequence voltage in [V]
Negative phase sequence current In [%], in relation to the relay nominal values (1A
respectively 5A).
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 cycles
2% In

6.3. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

6.3.1. ME311
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 + GND 1
I L1 2 I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3 3
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 4 I2
5
5 OUT 03 6
I L3 6 I3 7
7 OUT 04 8
8 I4 9
9 OUT 05 10
10 I5
DRS- OUT 06
11
12
COMPACT2A
11 13
12 I6 OUT 07 14
13 15
14 I7 OUT 08 16
15 X5
16 I8 1
17 OUT 09 2
18 I9 3
19 OUT 10 4
I 10 5
20 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
GEN.
G TEST (opt.)- 2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
+
3~ BLOCKING (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + -A OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
LEGEND: X7
6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 2
-UAKB Transducer 1 TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
Transducer 2
BUS
4 Tx- 9
Shaft Current
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Rotor E/F 6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface Rx+ 12

9 13
RS422/485 chain line data interface Rx-
10 14
MODBUS control system interface GND
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232 X10
DRS-Cable No. TID-006--
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
ME311 78MHO WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 63 ME311 78MHO Wiring Diagram

6.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS

6.4.1. ME311
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
U L1L2
PROCESSING
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN. G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 87 Alarm
78 Trip

VERSION 2
ME311 78MHO LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 64 ME311 78MHO Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ACTUAL NUMBER OF SLIP
ABS [IMPEDANCE VECTOR]
ANGLE [IMPEDANCE VECTOR]
TIME START
NOTEBOOK POS.PHASE SEQU.CURRENT
POS.PHASE SEQU.VOLTAGE
NEG.PHASE SEQU.CURRENT
U L1L2 U1
U1 =Z1
U L2L3 |U1|<
I1
POS.PHASE
U L3L1 SEQU.VOLT.
I L1
I L2 I1
POS.PHASE |I1|< >=1
I L3 SEQU.CURR.
I2
NEG.PHASE |I2|>
SEQU.CURR.
Z1
FOR DETAILS PLEASE SEE
BLOCK
FIG.
6-5 / 6-6 / 6-7 /
6-8 / 6-9 / 6-10
78MHO ALARM
TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0 78MHO TRIP DISPLAY
PRESET
1
0
BLOCKING ALARM
>=1 LED-
BIN. I/0 & MATRIX
& ALARM
PRESET
1
BIN. I/0
0
PRESET
TRIP 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
ME311 78MHO LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 65 ME311 78MHO Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
U1
POS.PHASE Calculation of POSITIVE PHASE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE U1
SEQU.VOLT.
I1
POS.PHASE Calculation of POSITIVE PHASE SEQUENCE CURRENT I1
SEQU.CURR.
I2
NEG.PHASE Calculation of NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE U1
SEQU.CURR.
|U1|< Check |U1|< set

|I1|< Check |I1|< set
|I2|> Check |I2|> set
U1
=Z1 Calculation of impedance vector Z1
I1
Alarm-output of function 78MHO: alarm starts when Z1 crosses

78MHO ALARM
the vertical blinder R1.
78MHO TRIP Trip-output of function 78MHO: trip when Z1 crosses vertical blinder R2
resp. if Z1 leaves the impedance circle.
Programmable
software-matrix for LED-indications of
MATRIX DISPLAY (row 2...14)
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

ALARM FUNCTION OUTPUT: 78 Alarm
TRIP FUNCTION OUTPUT: 78 Trip
ME311 78MHO LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 66 ME311 78MHO Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

GENERATOR
GEN. INDUCED GEN. DIRECT-
VOLTAGE AXIS REACT.
TRANSFORMER EXTERNAL SYSTEM GRID
IMPEDANCE REACTANCE (LINE) VOLTAGE
EP UGRID
xd UGEN xT zS
~ ~
MODEL OF
P.T.
IMPEDANCES
PROT.RELAY
zTOTAL
~ ~
ACT. VOLT.
VALUES / SLIP
EP UGEN UGRID
X zS
IMPEDANCE
DIAGRAM
P.T. xT zTOTAL
PROT.RELAY
R
xd
ME311 78MHO THEORIE OF OUT OF STEP-FUNCTION

Fig. 67 ME311 78MHO Theorie Of ,,Out Of Step- Function

IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM
X [p.u.]
zS
2 xT ADAPT.
xT
p

R [p.u.]
-0.5 0.5
xd
IMP. CIRCLE
BASE
CENTER
POINT
(R1)
IMP. CIRCLE DIAMETER

IMPEDANCE
CIRCLE
3 xd ADAPTED
-0.5
OFFSET (R1-R2)
-1.0
VERTICAL BLINDER R2
VERTICAL BLINDER R1
LEGEND
xd adapted transient generator reactance
xT adapted transformer reactance
zS adapted external system impedance (line)
rotor angle (between Ep and Uline): 120/240
p phase angle (between Ep-Uline and Igenerator)
R1 distance between coordinate zero-point and blinder R1
R1-R2 distance between blinder R1 and blinder R2
[p.u.] refered to RELAY NOM. VALUES/
all imp. set values to be adapted to RELAY NOM. VALUES
ME311 78MHO CALCULATION OF SET VALUES

Fig. 68 ME311 78MHO Calculation Of Set Values

IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM
X
LOCUS
TRIP = INSTANTANEOUS: TRAJECTORY OF (IMP. VECTOR)
TRIP ON BLINDER EXIT LOCUS DURING SLIP
START
(GEN. NOM.
TRIP = DELAYED: OPERATION)
TRIP ON MHO-EXIT
SLOPE ANGLE OF
BLINDER R1
p (& BLINDER R2)
R
-0.5 BASE POINT 0.5
(R1):
IMP. CIRCLE
ACTUAL NUMBER
POSITION
CENTER
OF SLIP IS
INCREMENTED BLINDER R1
IMP. CIRCLE DIAMETER

IMPEDANCE
CIRCLE
-0.5
OFFSET(R1-R2)
DISTANCE:
BLINDER R1R2
-1.0
VERTICAL BLINDER R2
VERTICAL BLINDER R1
ME311 78MHO TRIP CONDITION SETTING

Fig. 69 ME311 78MHO Trip Condition Setting

6 1
LOCUS
7 (IMP. VECTOR)
5 2
4 3
R
IMP.
CIRCLE
VERTICAL BLINDER R2 VERTICAL BLINDER R1
1 LOCUS AT NOM. OPERATION OF GENERATOR

2 LOCUS ENTERS IMPEDANCE CIRCLE
3 LOCUS CROSSES BLINDER R1 (1. SLIP STARTS)
4 LOCUS CROSSES BLINDER R2 (INSTANTANEOUS TRIP)
5 LOCUS LEAVES IMPEDANCE CIRCLE (DELAYED TRIP)
6 LOCUS ENTERS IMPEDANCE CIRCLE
7 LOCUS CROSSES BLINDER R1 (1. SLIP ENDS; 2. SLIP STARTS)
ME311 78MHO DEFINITION OF SEQUENCE

Fig. 70 ME311 78MHO Definition Of Sequence

X
VALID SEQUENCE: LOCUS
A->B->C->D->E START
R
D C
E B
A
IMPED.
CIRCLE
LOCUS
R2 R1 START
FIG. 6-9 ME311 78MHO TRIP CONDITION FULFILLED
LOCUS
START
IMPED.
CIRCLE
R2 R1
FIG. 6-10 ME311 78MHO NO RELEASE OF TRIP COMMAND

Fig. 71 ME311 78MHO Trip Conditions

TRAJECTORY OF X TRAJECTORY OF X
IMPEDANCE IMPEDANCE
VECTOR VECTOR
t1 ... Slip no. 1 t1 ... Slip no. 1

t2 ... Slip no. 2-20 t2 ... Slip no. 2-20
min. time max. time
START START
(NOMINAL (NOMINAL
OPERATION) OPERATION)
R R
IMPEDANCE IMPEDANCE
CIRCLE CIRCLE
R2 R1 R2 R1
Fig. 6-9 ME311 78MHO TIME SLOT t1 t2 Fig. 6-10 ME311 78MHO SLIP CYCLE T1 T2
TRAJECTORY OF X
IMPEDANCE
VECTOR
T3
LOCK-UP TIME
max. time
IMPEDANCE
CIRCLE
R2 R1
Fig.6-11 ME311 78MHO LOCK-UP TIME T3
Fig. 6-9/10/11: ME311 78MHO DEFINITION OF TIME SETTINGS

Fig. 72 ME311 78MHO Definition Of Time Settings

6.5. FUNCTION
6.5.1. ME311/ ME312
The out of step protective functions ME311 and ME312 (Out of Step Relay) are 3-phase/1-stage "Out of Step"
relays with blocking features during unsymmetrical load currents and configurable minimum values of the generator
current and generator voltage. The measuring is based on the computation of the trajectory change of the complex
impedance vector (MHO) whereby its determination is derived from the positive sequence quantities.
Depending on the external power system parameters and the connected generators dynamic incidences, e.g.
switching operations, load changes, short circuits, auto reclosing, etc. may cause oscillating system conditions
which can endanger system stability. These consisting load oscillations are endangering power system stability and
especially critical are real power swings which may lead to pole slipping of the generators. Since during pole
slipping generally the machine current is a multiple of the rated current and in addition the direction of the load
current can change from forward to reverse power it may lead to very high mechanical stresses on the generators.
The ME311 relay resp. the ME312 was designed to fulfil the practical requirements of system operation and the
parameter setting possibilities will comply even for the highest demands. The application is especially
recommended for complex tasks and should several function stages be required, i.e. more than one operating
characteristic respectively power swing polygons, several software function stages (ME311 resp. ME312) can
easily be configured and combined.
Particularly to following characteristics is being referred to (please also see Setting Parameters):
- Trip: Enables a smooth tripping of the circuit breaker at already reduced current values
in case the trip output parameter is configured to time delayed.
After the function internal recognition of a pole slip condition during crossing of R2
either an instantaneous or a time delayed trip can be initiated when leaving the
impedance circle.
- Slip pulse number: 1 ... 20 configurable pole slips;
st
The initiation for the 1 pole slip during crossing of R1 and the trip output is set at
the last pole slip when crossing R2 respectively leaving the leaving the impedance
circle.
- Time window t1, t2: The minimum time for crossing the load blinder range between R1 and R2 which
st
can be individually configured for the 1 slip (generally with a longer delay) and the
subsequent slips (usually with shorter time delays); after expiry of this time the
function is reset, i.e. no trip and started again.
- Slip cycles T1, T2: The maximum time for the whole slip cycle (from R1 to R2)which can be
st
individually configured for the 1 slip (generally with a longer delay) and the
subsequent slips (usually with shorter time delays); after expiry of this time the
function is reset, i.e. no trip and started again.
- Activation time T3: Total time of all pole slip incidents and after expiry of this time the function will be
reset, i.e. no trip and is starting again.
- Neg. ph. sequence load: The maximum permissible unbalanced load (current) because the
out of step disturbance is considered in principle as a symmetrical occurrence.
- Current interlock: The minimum positive sequence current value for trip enabling of the function
since the out of step disturbance is considered in principle as a symmetrical
occurrence thereby preventing false
trips during external short circuits, etc.
- Current direction: Enables in a comfortable way to adjust the CT secondary current direction via the
software without having to change the external wiring.
- Rotating field direction: Enables in a comfortable way to adjust the phase rotation via the software without
having to change the external wiring.

- Blocking input: Provides blocking of the protective function via an external input contact or the
User program with a notebook.
- Test input: Enables testing of the function during maintenance but preferably via notebook
operation.
Explanation of the protective function according to the logic diagram (please also refer to Fig. "ME311 78 MHO
LOGIC DIAGRAM/ PROCESSING"):
The generator phase currents as well as the phase to phase voltages are evaluated for all phases
since the function is designed for 3-phase systems. Consequently for the current and voltage values the positive
sequence components are computed (I1, V1) and in addition also the negative phase sequence current value (I2) is
considered which at last is applied for the blocking feature.
The result: Positive sequence phase currents and positive sequence phase to phase voltages are computing the
positive sequence impedance (Z1).
It should explicitly be noted that the relay function ME311 resp. ME312 is based onto a three phase measuring and
not onto a customary single phase measurement especially applied in the American Region.
The latter simplification may lead to false functioning and/or trips according to the type of fault
and the involved phases and is only permissible by strict adherence to symmetrical phenomena.
A further increased functional safety of the ME311 resp. ME312 results in a standard and a much differentiated
parameter setting possibility of this function which will fulfil even the highest demands.
The computed positive sequence impedance (Z1) is the complex impedance vector (locus) which progression is
evaluated to recognise a pole slip condition of the generator. The rate of change of the impedance vector is shown
in a simplified model of the impedance locus which is illustrated in the following graph showing the distribution of
the impedances with respect to the generator, generator-transformer and the external power system:
~
~
EP xd xT zs ULINE
EXTERNAL
SYSTEM
TRANSFORMER REACTANCE GRID
GENERATOR IMPEDANCE (LINE) VOLTAGE
EP ... Rotor EMF
xd ... Transient Generator Direct-Axis Reactance
... Protection Relay (location of VT)

Impedances of The Generator The Generator-Transformer And The Power System

The generator impedance Z consists essentially of the transient direct axis reactance X d', the transformer
impedance of the reactance XT and the power system impedance ZS. In case of the system impedance may vary
the smallest value should be selected.
The corresponding impedance vector diagram is shown in Fig.: ME311 78 MHO Theory of the "Out of Step"
Function.
The protection relay is positioned at the generator leads, i.e. respectively at the there located CTs and VTs. For
this reason the co-ordinate zero point is placed at this position. The reverse reach of the relay is measuring into the
generator and the forward reach includes the generator-transformer respectively the power system. For the various
applications different positions for the power swing locus are requiring discriminative setting configurations which
can easily accommodated by the DRS protection system. In this case simply two ME311 software relays are to be
configured whereby each of them can be set completely independent from the other one (ME311 functions with
regard to the trip outputs are using the same internal trip channels).
For stability considerations of a generator connected to the power system and therefore also
for pole slipping conditions the so-called rotor angle is decisive. Traditionally it is distinguished between the inner
rotor angle i, the outer rotor angle a and the sum of the rotor angle .
The relation is show in Fig.: "ME211 78 MHO Computation of the Setting Values".
The angle between the generator leads voltage (VGen) and the inner generator EMF (Ep) is the inner rotor angle i.
The angle between the system voltage VNet (this is the theoretical voltage source of the "rigid" power system) and
the inner generator EMF (Ep) is the rotor angle sum ,
which is primarily interesting for stability considerations. From the impedance vector diagram (please also refer to
Fig.: ME311 78 MHO Theory of the "Out of Step" Function) one can easily recognise that this angle (together with
the difference of the voltage absolute values of both voltage sources and the impedances between them)
determines the compensating current between the inner generator voltage and the system voltage. During normal
operation of the generator and with a stable power system this angle will be determined from the system load
conditions (real- and reactive power output of the generator and external power consumption)
and therefore is to a large extent constant. However, during pole slipping of the generator this angle is changing
continuously and is approaching all values between 0 and 360. This will result in an oscillation of the generator
current vector which thereby is passing through all 4 power quadrants whereby the beat frequency is in accordance
to the rate of change of the rotor angle.
In principle we have two voltage sources which are connected via the sum of impedances whereby the voltage
vector of the rigid power system remains constant and the voltage vector of the inner generator EMF is rotating
through 360.
What is happening now with the impedance vector in respect to the time event is shown in Fig.
"ME311 78 MHO Trip Conditions".

Compare: 78G .... 78M:

What is the difference between 78G and 78M?
The following discussion references a Generator/ Motor Unit of a Pumping Power Station whose turbine by
means of change of phase rotation (phase rotation is changed from "right" to "left" by exchanging two phases) also
can be used for pumping operation. In this case we need two "Out of Step" functions (78G, 78M) in order to
protect the unit in both operating conditions.
a)
The impedances are the same for generator/ motor.
As a result the impedance diagramm will also be the same.
Therefore the settings refering to impedances (blinders, impedance circle, ...) will be the same.
Note: The starting point for the impedance locus will be for generator operation at the right side
of the diagramm, for motor operation at the left side of the diagramm.
b)
In principle also the set value for the "Current Direction" and the sequence of phases should be thesame for
generator/ motor operation.
Please note: this statement is valid only if the direction of rotation of the machine is the same for
generator- and motor operation. This is not the case in TBI. As already mentioned in TBI the sequence of phases is
changed by special circuitbreakers in case of motoroperation
Therefore in TBI the set value for the "Sequence of Phases" has to be changed for motoroperation (from "right" to"
left"). Note: the Analog-Input-Matrix for the 78M function is the same as for 78G (because the sequence change is
already covered by the set value "Sequence of Phases").
The set value for "Current direction" will be the same (but of course when changing from generator to motor
operation the actual current direction will change, but not the set value for current direction/ acc. to the design of
the 78M-protective function).
c)
In principle during generator operation the impedance locus during slipping is moving from blinder 1 to blinder 2,
but during motor operation the locus is moving from blinder 2 to blinder 1.
Explanation (in principle):
In generator mode during slipping the generator speeds up, however in motor mode the motor during slipping
slows down. As a result the locus moves clockwise in generator mode and counterclockwise in motor mode. This is
already taken into consideration by the two versions of 78 (78G, 78M).
In principle there has just to be used the proper version (78G or 78M), the settings should be same.
In TBI the direction of rotation of the machine is changed by phase reversal switch. Therefore in TBI the setting for
sequence of phases ("Phase Rotation") has to be changed too. All other settings will stay.
Conclusion with reference the practical Set-Value-Calculation Example (see below):
The settings for 78G and 78M will be in principle the same. In TBI the sequence of phases will be changed by the
phase reversal switch therefore we will have to consider two exceptions:
a.)
In our practical Set-Value-Calculation - Example the sequence of phases will be changed. Therefore the set value
"Phase Rotation" also has to be changed:
78G: set value "Phase Rotation" = Right
78M: set value "Phase Rotation" = Left
b.)
Analog-Input Matrix for voltage and current signals:
78G: current/ phase/ L1, L2, L3
voltage/ phase-phase/ L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1
78M: current/ phase/ L1, L2, L3
voltage/ L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1
Note: the analog input matrix will not be changed in TBI because the sequence of phases during G/M - mode is
already taken into consideration by the set value "Phase Rotation".

c.)
Input Matrix for Digital Inputs:
78G: "Blk. 78G-B" ... 78G will be blocked when Phase reversal switch in motor position
78M: "Blk. 78M-B" ... 78M will be blocked when Phase reversal switch in generator position

Practical Set-Value-Calculation Example
The "Out of Step" function is one the most complex protective function, causing a challenge for the design-
engineer to calculate proper set values. For this reason in the following there is included a practical example how to
calculate the settings.
The example refers to the Pumping Power Station TBI (Tong Bai) which utilizes a pumping turbine, that means that
the turbine also can used for pumping operation (by changing the sequence of phases).
In order to cover both modes of operation there have been implemented two "Out of Step" protective functions
(78G, 78M).
Nachfolgend ein Auszug aus der diesbezglichen "Setting Calculation":
>>Start<<
Data of Generator/Motor:
Rated power: Generator mode: 334 MVA

Motor mode: 336 MW
Rated phase-phase voltage: 18kV 5 %
Rated phase current: Generator mode: 10713A 5 %
Motor mode: 10777A 5 %
Rated phase current: Generator mode: 10713A 5 %
Motor mode: 10777A 5 %
C.T. sec. current: Generator/ Motor mode:
C.T. 16000A/1A: 0,67A
Rated power factor: Generator mode: 0,9
Motor mode: 0,975
Rated frequency: Nominal operation: 50 Hz
Startup: 0 ... 51 Hz
Direct axis reactance: 1,14 p.u. unsaturated
0,917 p.u. saturated
Transient direct axis reactance: 0,297 p.u. unsaturated
Subtransient direct axis reactance: 0,22 p.u. unsaturated
Quadr. axis reactance: 0,757 p.u. unsaturated
Subtrans. quadr. axis reactance: 0,175 p.u. unsaturated
Data of Main Transformer:
Power: 360MVA
Impedance: 14 %
Phase-phase voltage: 520kV 8 x 1,25 %/18V
Vecor group: Yd11
Phase current: 399,7A AC/ 11547A AC
C.T. sec. current: Main Transformer HV-side:
C.T. 1250A/1A: 0,32A
C.T. 2000A/1A: 0,2A
Main Transformer LV-side:
C.T. 16000A/1A: 0,72A
Data of 525kV-System:
Phase-phase voltage: 525kV

Short circuit power: 1000MVA

Impedance [p.u.]: Big Mode: X0: 0,16
X1=X2: 0,07
Small Mode: X0: 0,30
X1=X2: 0,13
Calculation of set values:
The generator current is
Sg 334000kVA
Igp 10713 A
Vgp 3 18kV 3
For this purpose a current transformer with a CT ratio of 16000A/1 A is selected and so the generator CT
secondary current is calculated
Igp 10713A
Igs 1A 0.67 A
CTratio 16000 A
Data for the current and voltage transformer (valid for all conversions):
16000 A 18000V
CTRe lay , VTRelay
1A 100V
1.
With the given data, the conversion factors from [p.u] values to protection relay inputs (including compensation
factor for different p.u. references and c.t. ratings), and the absolute impedance values are calculated:
a) for generator:
(18000V ) 2 16000 A 100V

2
VGen CTRe lay
FGen 86,23
S Gen PTRe lay 334000000VA 1A 18000V
The secondary transient reactance (at relay inputs) of the generator is:
X d sec xd F 0.297 86.23 25,61

' '
c) for transformer:
2
U Transf CTRe lay (18000V ) 2 16000 A 100V
FTransf 80
STransf PTRe lay 360000000VA 1A 18000V
The transformer secondary reactance (at relay inputs) is:

uK 14
X T ,sec F 80 11,2
100 100
d) for 525kV-System:
given:
Positive Sequence Impedance (z1):
z S 0.07 e j 75
[p.u.] = 0.018+j 0.067 [p.u.]
given:
S (short circuit power of grid) = 1000 MVA
given:
Voltage = 525 kV (phase phase voltage)
Calculation (525kV-System):
First we have to calculate the impedance in absolute values of the grid (at 525 kV side):
2
U Grid j 75 (525000V ) 2
Z system at525kVside zS . 0,07.e 19,29.e j 75
( absolute_ value) S Grid 1000000000VA
.
Second we have to transform this impedance from the Main Transformer HV-side to the Main Transformer LV-side:
U MainTransformerLVside 18000V 2
Z system at18kVside ( ) 2 .Z system at525kVside ( ) 19,29.e j 75 0,023.e j 75
U MainTransformerHVside ( absolute_ value) 520000V
Third we finally have to transform the impedance to the c.t. resp. p.t. secondary values (relay input values):
CTRe lay 16000 A 100V

Z systematrelayinputside .Z system at18kVside .0,023.e j 75 2,044.e j 75 (0,529 j1,974)
PTRe lay 1A 18000V
2.
The total impedance is calculated (absolute values as seen at the sec. side of p.t. and c.t.):
Z jX d jX T Z S j 25,61 j11,2 0,529 j1,974 (0.529 j38,78) 38,78 e j 89 )

'
The base point R1 is (formula according to the picture below):

Z 38,78
tan(30) tan(30)
Xd ' 25,61
R1 2 2 11,63
tan(arg( Z )) sin(arg( Z )) tan(89) sin(89)
X
Note: diagram is
not to scale. zS
30
xT
=120
z R1
R
xd'
The offset is (R1-R2):
Z 38,78
tan(30) tan(30)
' R1 R 2' 2 2 2 2 22,39
sin(arg( Z )) sin(89)
The slope is equal to angle of the system impedance:
slope arg( z ) 89
The impedance circle diameter is calculated:
imp. circle diam. 3 X d '2 X T 3 25,61 2 11,2 99,23
Therefore the impedance circle centre is:
imp. circle diam. 99,23

imp. circle cent . 2 X T 2 11,2 27,21
2 2
The slip pulse number has to be chosen according to the allowed number the generator is getting out of step, for
example
Slip pulse numbers=2

Time Slot t1 (minimum time for the first slip between crossing of the impedance vector the right-hand and the left-
hand boundary lines.) is selected to be:
t1=0,1s
note: if the timeslot for the locus to pass from Blinder1 to Blinder2 (120 rotor angle to 300 rotor
angle) is below t1 then the event is not considered to be a valid slip (acc. to 78).
Slip Cycle T1 (Maximum time for the first slip-cycle):
T1=3s
note: if the timeslot for the locus to pass from Blinder1 to Blinder1 (whole circle) is above T1 then
the event is not considered to be a valid slip (acc. to 78).
Time Slot t2 and Slip Cycle T2:
t2=0,1s, T2=2s (usually the following slips need less time in relation to the first one)
Lock up Time T3 (Maximum time for the total sequence starting with the first slip):
T3=5s
The maximum permissible negative phase sequence is selected to be:
Neg. Phase Sequ.=10%
Current Interlock:
Current Interlock 1.2 I N 1.2 1A 0.8 A
This is the minimum value of the positive sequence current to enable the function. Bear in mind, that the
customer wish has to be considered. On the one hand, the function shoud trip at slip cycles with high current,
on the other hand there should be trips for all slip cycles. For the second case the Current Interlock has to
be selected to be 0 A.
Trip:
Trip=delayed The relay trips, when the impedance vector leaves the
impedance circle. This helps to spare the circuit breaker.
Current Direction:
Direction 1/Direction 2
The impedance phasor will be displayed in the window for the internal measuring values. For normal
conditions the phasor should be in the right area of the impedance diagram with angles of about 0 degree. If
there is an angle of about 180 degree, the setting of the parameter is wrong and has to be changed.

The setting for direction will be same for 78G and 78M.
Phase Rotation:
Right/ Left:
Generator operation: Right

Motor operation: Left.
This setting can be checked by the value of the negative phase sequence. In normal condition the
negative phase sequence is about 0%. For a value of 100% the setting has to be changed.
The picture below shows the DRSWIN Protective Function Relay Parameters windows for 78G and 78M of TBI
Pumping Power Station:

6.6. COMMISSIONING

6.6.1. ME311 Protective Function
Pre-Commissioning:
The function ME311 can generally only be verified during the pre-commissioning tests due to reasons of the
extensive complexibility thereby requiring a three phase test equipment which can also carry out dynamic
simulations with a corresponding long time preparation for these tests.
Therefore two variants of tests to simplify the function tests and to verify the correct operation are recommended
which do not require too much effort.
A. Simplified Function Test / Method No 1
The impedance vector is shifted within the impedance circle from left to right (R axis = Re (Z);
X axis = Im (Z)) at the R axis from the right outside the impedance circle (please also refer to the setting
parameters) and shifted to the left by continuously reducing the voltage up to a negative value.
Should the relay test set not be able to produce negative voltage values (the angle changes from 0 to 180) the
voltage polarity has to be changed manually and its amplitude raised again.
However for this simplified test method some setting parameters have to be changed temporarily:
Circle centre: Preferably 0 Ohm;

It has to be ensured that the locus is having a transition according
to the specified sequence (see logic diagrams).
Slip pulse number: 1
Time window t1: 0.01 s;
Since this is a minimum value for the test the smallest possible setting is selected
to prevent a function reset because of minimum time duration.
Time window t2: Can be left to the original setting because of slip pulse number = 1.
Slip cycle T1: 20 s;
Since this is a maximum value for the test the largest possible setting is selected
to prevent a function reset because of maximum time exceeded.
Slip cycle T2: Can be left to the original setting because of slip pulse number = 1.
Activation time T3: 60 s;
to prevent a function reset because of maximum time exceeded (in principle also
20 s would be sufficient since T1 has then already expired).
Current interlock: 0A
Current direction: According to the injected test current
Phase rotation: According to the injected test current
By a 1 xIn rated protection relay, for example following current- and voltage values are injected:
Voltage: 3 x 100 V (phase to phase voltage)

Current: 3 x 1 xIn (phase currents)
Note: Since the impedance vector has to be moved along the R axis the
angle between the phase voltage (not the phase to phase voltage) and the
phase current has either to be 0 or 180.

Monitoring of the tests with the Actual Measured Values Window:

Slip pulse [Number of the current pole slip]
System impedance In [Ohm]; the absolute value of the impedance
vectors, whereby 1 p.u. = 57.7 Ohm = phase voltage /
phase current with respect to the relay nominal values
Impedance vector angle In [Degrees] (angle of the impedance vector)
Time running [Yes / No]; the timing starts when crossing R1 and
ends with a trip or a reset when one of the necessary
conditions are no longer fulfilled (function reset)
Positive sequence current In [A]
Positive sequence voltage In [V]
Negative phase sequence In [%], in relation to the relay nominal values (100V/1A
respectively 100V/5A).
st
Slip pulse: Shows only 1 slip since after the 1 pole slip already a trip is being initiated
(according to set value).
Slip impedance: When injecting 3 x 100 V phase to phase voltage and 3 x 1 xIn phase
current the absolute value of the impedance vector is 57.7 Ohm
(impedance = phase voltage / phase current).
Note: For the computation of the complex impedance vector the positive sequence
st
values of the 1 harmonic of current and voltage are applicable, i.e. the relay
evaluates all three phases.
Impedance angle: Shows at the beginning of a pole slip 0 and then 180.
Time running: Changes after crossing the blinder R1 from right from to left from "Yes" to "No".
Positive sequence current: Should be a constant display of 1 A (by correct phase rotation according to the
"phase rotation" setting value).
Positive sequence voltage: Should be a constant display of 100 V of the phase to phase voltages (by correct
phase rotation according to the "phase rotation" setting value).
Unbalanced load: Should be a constant display of 0 % (since the injected current system is
symmetrical)
Alarm / Trip:
st
The instantaneous operation is initiated at the 1 slip during crossing of R1 and the trip is carried out with the last
st
pole slip (in this case it is 1 slip) when crossing R2 ("instantaneous trip") respectively when leaving the impedance
circle ("delayed trip")...
Note: Please also refer to the setting parameter "Trip: Instantaneous / Delayed".
.

B. Simplified Function Test / Method No 2
The impedance vector is shifted continuously within the impedance plane (R axis = Re (Z); X axis = Im (Z))
whereby during a 360 revolution first the two load blinders are crossed in the specified direction within the
impedance circle and then outside the impedance circle is returning to its point of origin. This way the specified
operating sequence of the ME3111 function has been fulfilled.
With modern relay test sets it is easy to shift the impedance vector whereby it is recommended to keep the voltage
vector angle constant and rotate the current vector.
It is of advantage to illustrate the movement of the impedance vectors on a hand-sketch. This

way the progression of the vector absolute value can easily estimated during the tests. It is noted that the test can
only be carried out correctly when the impedance circle centre is not located at the mid-point of the coordinate
system of the impedance plane but off-set either in the positive- or negative direction (if necessary a temporary
shift has to be configured). Also it has to be made certain that the impedance vector is located outside of the
impedance circle prior to the test and then shifted within the impedance circle by choosing the required phase
rotation. The return trajectory of the impedance vector should however be outside the impedance circle.
For this simplified test method some setting parameters have to be changed temporarily:
Circle centre: Has not to be 0 Ohm;

The circle must be shifted either in the positive- or negative direction and it has to
be established that the locus is following the required trajectory (please refer to the
logic diagrams).
Slip pulse number: About 1...3;
When a higher number is selected an excessive operating time may occur during
the test (please also refer to the "Activation Time T3" setting value).


Activation time T3: 60 s;
Current interlock: 0A
Current direction: According to the injected test current
Phase rotation: According to the injected test current (generally: clock-wise )
By a 1 xIn rated protection relay, for example following current- and voltage values are injected:
Voltage: 3 x 100 V (phase to phase voltage)

Current: 3 x 1 xIn (phase currents)

Note: The current amplitude has to be chosen such that at the

start of the test the impedance vector is rotating outside the actual impedance
circle, e.g. at the right side of the impedance circle and is subsequently entering
the impedance circle by crossing both load blinder slopes and leaving on its return
path the impedance plane.
The phase rotation of the impedance vector, either clock-wise or anticlock-wise,

depends on the location of the impedance circle, i.e.
whether positioned above or below the R axis.
Please note in this context the interrelations in the respective logic diagrams.
The rotation of the impedance vector is performed by rotating the current vector
Note: The phase rotation of the impedance vector is always in opposite direction to
the rotation of the current vector.
Monitoring of the tests with the Actual Measured Values Window:

Slip pulse [Number of the current pole slip]
System impedance In [Ohm]; the absolute value of the impedance
vectors, whereby 1 p.u. = 57.7 Ohm = phase voltage /
phase current with respect to the relay nominal values
Impedance vector angle In [Degrees] (angle of the impedance vector)
Time running [Yes / No]; the timing starts when crossing R1 and
ends with a trip or a reset when one of the necessary
conditions are no longer fulfilled (function reset)
Positive sequence current In [A]
Positive sequence voltage In [V]
Negative phase sequence In [%], in relation to the relay nominal values (100V/1A
respectively 100V/5A).
Slip pulses: Shows the number of pole slips; this counter is activated during each crossing of
the blinder R1 from right to left.
Slip impedance: When injecting 3 x 100 V phase to phase voltage and 3 x 1 xIn phase
current the absolute value of the impedance vector is 57.7 Ohm
(impedance = phase voltage / phase current).
Note: For the computation of the complex impedance vector the positive sequence
st
values of the 1 harmonic of current and voltage are applicable, i.e. the relay
evaluates all three phases.
Impedance angle: Shows at the beginning of a pole slip 0 and is then rotating during the slip
(rotation of the impedance vector) continuously through 360.
Time running: Changes after crossing the blinder R1 from right from to left from "Yes" to "No".
Positive sequence current: Should be a constant display of 1 A (by correct phase rotation according to the
"phase rotation" setting value).
Positive sequence voltage: Should be a constant display of 100 V of the phase to phase voltages (by correct
phase rotation according to the "phase rotation" setting value).
Unbalanced load: Should be a constant display of 0 % (since the injected current system is
symmetrical).

Alarm / Trip:
st
The instantaneous operation is initiated at the 1 slip during crossing of R1 and the trip is carried out with the last
st
pole slip (in this case it is 1 slip) when crossing R2 ("instantaneous trip") respectively when leaving the impedance
circle ("delayed trip")...
Note: Please also refer to the setting parameter "Trip: Instantaneous / Delayed".

IMPORTANT:
After completion of the pre-commissioning tests all setting parameters have to be restored to the original service
operating values.
Commissioning Tests
A real pole slip during commissioning is for various reasons mostly not possible (system stability, etc.).
Therefore it is recommended that during normal service operation of the generator the "window display for the
actual relay-internal computed values" should be taken to analyse the actual computed values and to verify their
plausibility, especially:
-System impedance
-Impedance vector angle
-Positive sequence current
-Positive sequence voltage
-Negative sequence current
Further also the digital inputs
-Blocking input
-Test input
And the digital outputs
-Alarm
-Trip
-Annunciation: Negative phase sequence interlock
Should be checked via the menu item: "System"/"Binary In/Output Selection".

6.7. CALCULATION EXAMPE FOR SETTING PARAMETERS
Recommend Procedures To Calculate The Setting Parameters

For The "Out of Step" Protective Function ME311
Generator-, Transformer- and Power System Data (according to the data sheets of the Manufacturer):
Note: All particulars in reverence to the generator nominal values (=100%).
xd = 33 % ... Transient generator direct axis reactance

XT = 15 % ... Transformer reactance
zS = 24 % ... external power line impedance (grid system)
Determination of the protection relay internal range for the rotor angle Alarm:
= 120 ... 240 [degrees electrical]
Note: Rotor angle ... the angle between vectors EP and VLine
EP ... the induced stator voltage of the synchronous generator (EMF)
VLine ... power system voltage
Adaptation of the impedance values respectively the setting parameters:

Note: This adaptation is necessary when: 1 p.u. protection relay 1 p.u. generator.
a)
The nominal values for the protection relay:
1 p.u. relay: 1A; 100V (fixed) or

5A; 100V (fixed)
b)
In our example we assume that the rated values of the generator do not correspond with the nominal rating of the
protection relay:
1 p.u. generator: Arbitrary assumption: 0.8A; 115V.
c)
Result:
An adaptation is necessary.
Adaptation factor = A = (Vgenerator nominal/Vrelay nominal) x (Irelay nominal/Igenerator nominal) =

= (115V/ 100V) x (1A/0,95A) = 1.09
d)
With this adaption factor A are now corrected in order to obtain the "adapted impedance values" respectively the
final setting parameters for the ME311 function:
xd set = 33 % x 1.09 = 36 %
XT set = 15 % x 1.09 = 16.4 %
zS set = 24 % x 1.09 = 26.2 %

~
~
EP xd xT zs ULINE
EXTERNAL
SYSTEM
TRANSFORMER REACTANCE GRID
GENERATOR IMPEDANCE (LINE) VOLTAGE
EP ... Rotor EMF
xd ... Transient Generator Direct-Axis Reactance
... Protection Relay (location of VT)


ME... UNDER EXCITATION PROTECTION
7. ME... UNDER EXCITATION PROTECTION
7.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available ME . . . Protective Function Types

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: ME . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Under excitation for single phase systems, rotor angle, excitation 1041 ME121 40 C2,M
current AC
current DC
Under excitation for three phase systems, rotor angle, excitation 1027 ME321 40 C2,M
current AC
current DC
Under excitation for three phase systems, MHO characteristic, 1070 ME323 40 C2,M
excitation current AC
excitation current DC

7.2. TECHNICAL DATA
7.2.1. Under Excitation for Single Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: ME121 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

current AC
2- stage under excitation protection for single phase systems with rotor angle measuring and consideration of the
rotor current (AC).
ME121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Generator current phase L1
Rotor current (AC)
Generator voltage L1-L2
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (>)
Blocking input stage 2 (> & IExcitation<)
Test input stage 1 (>)
Test input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (>)
Trip stage 1 (>)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Quadrilateral reactance: 0.5 ... 5.0 p.u. in 0.01 p.u. steps
Power system reactance: 0.0 ... 0.2 p.u. in 0.01 p.u. steps
Voltage direction: Direction 1 / Direction 2
Operating value stage 1: 30 ... 150electrical in 1 steps
Tripping time stage 1: 0 ... 30 sec in 0.05 steps
Operating value stage 2: 0.1 ... 0.5 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Tripping time stage 2: 0 ... 3.0 sec in 0.05 sec steps

Rotor angle: In electrical degrees

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In
Rotor angle: 2% electrical of rotor angle

7.2.2. Under Excitation for Single Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: ME122 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

current DC
2-stage under excitation protection for single phase systems with rotor angle measuring and consideration of the
rotor current (DC).
ME122
Technical Data
Inputs
Rotor current (DC Input)
Blocking input stage 2 (> & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Trip stage 1 (>)
Setting Parameters
Quadrilateral reactance: 0.5 ... 5.0 pu in 0.01 pu steps
Power system reactance: 0.0 ... 0.2 pu in 0.01 pu steps
Operating value stage 1: 30 ... 150electrical in 1 steps
Operating value stage 2: 10 ... 220 xIn DC in 1 xIn DC steps
Rotor current configuration: 1.5 ... 96 ADC/V
in 0.1 ADC/V steps
Rotor current offset: 0.000 ... 4.995 V in 0.005 V steps

Measuring

Reset ratio: 0.97

2% In

7.2.3. Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: ME 321 FNNR TYPE ANSI Applicati

on
current AC
2- stage under excitation protection for three phase systems with rotor angle measuring and consideration of the
rotor current (AC).
ME321
Technical Data
Inputs
Rotor current (AC)
Generator voltage phase L2-L3
Outputs
Trip stage 1 (>)
Setting Parameters
Quadrilateral reactance: 0.5 ... 5.0 p.u in 0.01 p.u. steps
Operating value stage 1: 30 ... 150 in 1 steps
Operating value stage 2: 0.1 ... 0.5 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps

Measuring

Reset ratio: 0.97

2% In

7.2.4. Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: ME 322 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

current DC
2- stage under excitation protection for three phase systems with rotor angle measuring and consideration of the
rotor current (DC).
ME322
Technical Data
Inputs
Rotor current (DC)
Outputs
Trip stage 1 (>)
Setting Parameters
Quadrilateral reactance: 0.5 ... 5.0 p.u. in 0.01 p.u. steps
Operating value stage 1: 30 ... 150 in 1 steps
Operating value stage 2: 10 ... 220 xIn DC in 1 xIn DC steps
in 0.1 ADC/V steps


Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

7.2.5. Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring AC)

excitation current AC
2-stage MHO under excitation protection with consideration of the rotor current.
Instantaneous operation stage 1 when the locus is entering the reactance circle.
Instantaneous operation stage 2 when the locus is entering the reactance circle
and simultaneous decrease of the minimum permissible rotor current (measurement
of the rotor current: AC).
ME323
Technical Data
Inputs
Rotor current (AC)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (impedance circle)
Blocking input stage 2 (impedance circle & I Excitation <)
Test input stage 1 (impedance circle)
Test input stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (impedance circle)
Trip stage 1 (impedance circle)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Centre point (reactance circle):0.5 ... 5.0 p.u. in 0.05 p.u. steps
Diameter (reactance circle): 0.1 ... 3.0 p.u. in 0.05 p.u. steps
Voltage direction:Direction 1 / Direction 2
Operating value stage 2: 0.10 ... 0.50 xIn AC
in 0.01 xIn AC steps

Z (absolute value of the impedance vector): in Ohm

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In
6% of impedance setting value

7.2.6. Under Excitation for Three Phase Systems (Excitation Current Measuring DC)

excitation current DC
3-stage MHO underexcitation protection with consideration of the rotor current.

Instantaneous operation stage 1 when the locus is entering the reactance circle..
Instantaneous operation stage 2 when the locus is entering the reactance circle.
and simultaneous decrease of the minimum permissible rotor current (measurement
of the rotor current: DC).
ME324
Technical Data
Inputs
Rotor current (DC)
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (impedance circle)
Blocking input stage 2 (impedance circle & I Excitation <)
Test input stage 1 (impedance circle)
Test input stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Outputs
Binary: Instantaneous operation stage 1 (impedance circle)
Trip stage 1 (impedance circle)
Instantaneous operation stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Trip stage 2 (impedance circle & IExcitation <)
Setting Parameters
Centre point (reactance circle): 0.5 ... 5.0 p.u. in 0.05 p.u. steps
Diameter (reactance circle): 0.1 ... 3.0 p.u. in 0.05 p.u. steps
Operating value stage 2: 10 ... 220 xIn DC in 0.01 xIn DC steps
in 0.1 ADC/V steps

Z (absolute value of the impedance vector): in Ohm

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


7.3.1. ME121
1-PH + - BATT.
16 2/3 Hz 3-PH
L1 L3 50 Hz X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
R T 1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
EXC. 6 I2
TRANSF. 5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
MAIN 18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANSF. IExc. AC 19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
IG L1 X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
UG L1L3 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
G 9 X6
GEN. ROTOR 10 U5 1
2~ OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 - IN 08 4
6
2
TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
ME121 UNDEREXCITATION 1-PH. DC WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 73 ME121 Underexcitation 1-PH. DC Wiring Diagram

7.3.2. ME122
+ - BATT.
3-PH 50Hz
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1-PH
1 1A + - GND 1
16 2/3 Hz OUT 01
2 5A
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
L1 L3 EXC. 4 1A 110V...220VDC
5 5A DC OUT 02 4
R T TRANSF. I2
6 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11
12
5A
I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A 13
16 1A
17 5A
TRANSF. 19 1A 15
20 5A
I7 OUT 08 16
21
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
I9 3
27
OUT 10 4
IG L1 28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
RMEAS OUT 12 8
1
UG L1L3 U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
G 9 X6
GEN. ROTOR 10 U5 1
2~ OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
4...20mA 12 - IN 06 15
MEASURING 13 + OUT 24 16
mV TRANSDUCER mA 14 - IN 07
mV mA X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
note: see also ME322 -
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
BUS
Anschlusskonfiguration 4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
fr 4...20mA 5 GND 10
6
UAKB
TRANS-
7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
9 13
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
ME122 UNDEREXCITATION 1-PH. DC WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 74 ME122 Underexcitation 1-PH. DC Wiring Diagram

7.3.3. ME321
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03
8 5A
6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
11
IExc. AC 14
15
5A
I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS- 15
19 1A
FORMER 20 5A OUT 08 16
21 I7
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10
IG L1 29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
UG L2L3 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
G 9 X6
GEN. ROTOR 10 U5 1
3~ OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
DRS INPUT IG L1 11 14
+
PHASORS: 12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7 6
UG L2L3 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
OPTIONAL MODULE: 6
UAKB
TRANS-
-UAKB Transducer 1 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
Transducer 2
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
Shaft Current 9 13
10 Rx-
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 12 Tx+
Tx- 16
MODBUS control system interface
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
ME321 78 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. AC WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 75 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Wiring Diagram

7.3.4. ME322
L1 L2 L3
+ - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
TRANS- OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
FORMER 14 5A 11
I5
15 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
IG L1 24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
RSHUNT 27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
G ROTOR 5 13
UG L2L3 6 U3 OUT 15 14
3~ 1
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
GEN. 8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
IG L1 10 IN 05 13
-
11 + OUT 23 14
DRS INPUT 12 - IN 06 15
PHASORS: 13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
LEGEND: X2
15 +
1 Measuring shunt 16 IN 08 4
-
(DC-EXC. CURRENT)
UG L2L3 X7
2 There are 2 meas. transducers 6
inside the DRS COMPACT EXTERNAL DEVICE: 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
(UAKB) + 2
MEASURING TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+
8
mV DUCER 1
MOD-
which are programable. TRANSDUCER 2

BUS
mV mA 4 Tx- 9
Input signal: mA, mV,...
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Input Range: 4...20mA DC,
4..20mA 6
UAKB
0...20mA DC, 0...10V, ... TRANS-

7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
Output (fixed): 1...5V DC.
8 +5
RS422/485
3 IN 09...malfunction of Anschlusskonfiguration Rx+ 12

fr 4...20mA 9 13
meas. transducer 10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
OPTIONAL MODULE:
12 Tx+
-UAKB Transducer 1 Tx- 16
Transducer 2 13
Shaft Current 14 ROTOR E/F SI01
Rotor E/F
UAKB-
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) FAULT IN09 X9
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system
interface
RS422/485 chain line data interface FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
ME322, ME324 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. DC WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 76 ME322, ME324 Underexc. 3-PH. DC Wiring Diagram

7.3.5. ME323
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
IExc. AC 14 5A 11
I5
15 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS- 15
19 1A
21 I7
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10
IG L1 29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
UG L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
G 9 X6
GEN. ROTOR U5 1
10
3~ OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
LEGEND: 6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
Transducer 2 4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
Shaft Current 5 GND 10

6
UAKB
Rotor E/F TRANS-

7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 9 13
RS422/485 chain line data interface 10 Rx-
GND 14
MODBUS control system interface 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
ME323 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. AC WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 77 ME323 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC Wiring Diagram

7.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS

7.4.1. ME321
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
IG L1
PROCESSING
EXC.
TRANSF.
IExc.AC
MAIN
TRANSF.
UG L2L3
G
GEN.
3~ ROTOR
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional)
TRIP
BLOCK. ST.1
COMMANDS
(optional)
OUTPUT CB1
BLOCK. ST.2 CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
(optional)
CONTACTS
Alarm 1St.
LEGEND Trip 1St.


VERSION 2
ME321 78 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. AC LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 78 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR ANGLE IN DEGREE

NOTEBOOK
IG L1
UG IG . xq*) >
3
UG L2L3 UG L2L3 > yes
IG . xline* )
70% . UG Nom
no BLK
IExc.AC Prot. Function
&
TEST ST.1
|IExc/AC| <
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2 >=1
&
& ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 LED-
0 DISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1 >
& TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
ALARM ST.2 MATRIX
BLOCK. ST.2 >=1
&
BIN. I/0 & ALARM ST.2
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0 1
TRIP ST.2 0
t2 >
FUNCTION & TRIP ST.2
OUTPUT
1
TRIP-
0
)
MATRIX
* xq= fictitious, for better adaptation
on the unit requirements
(see power diagram of the gen.)
To be coordinated with Exc. System
xline= real
Rotor Angle Limiter Settings.
Please note: settings have to be
referred to prot. relay nom. values! PROCESSING
ME321 78 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. AC LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 79 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH.AC Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: ME321
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
UG IG . xq*) Calculation of Rotor Angle

3
IG . xline*)
> > SET
|IExc/AC| < |IExc.AC| < set value
Programmable
software-matrix for LED-indications
LED- the LED-indications LED- of
MATRIX DISPLAY PROCESSING
(row 2...14) of
PROCESSING (row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

ALARM ST.1 > SET
ALARM ST.2 ( > SET ) & (|IExc.AC| < set)
TRIP ST.1 t1 > set
TRIP ST.2 t2 > set
ME321 78 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. AC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 80 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

VOLTAGE DIAGRAM
OF A SALIENT POLE MACHINE
(SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR):
DEF. OF ROTOR ANGLE (THEORY)
+
Iq xq
Iq xd Id xd
E 1,5
I xd
I xq
1,0
U
I Iq
0,5

Id
+j 1,0 0,5 0,5 1,0 -j

Iq(xd-xq)
xd-xq
U
xq
-
LEGEND
U generator voltage
I generator current
E magnet wheel voltage (corresponds with sum of magnetic flux e)
xd direct-axis syncronous reactance
xq quadrature-axis syncronous reactance
inner rotor angle
phase angle
ME321 78 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. AC THEOR. DEFINITION OF ROTOR ANGLE

Fig. 81 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Theor. Definition Of Rotor Angle

CALCULATION OF ROTOR ANGLE

OF SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR/
SET VALUE FOR ME321
EP
j.Igen.xq
i i+a
Ugen 1
a
Ugrid
-j.Igen.xline
Igen
LEGEND
Ugen generator voltage (for example: UL1) 1

Igen generator current (for example: IL1)
EP magnet wheel voltage (corresponds with sum of magnetic flux Qe)
i inner rotor angle
(between gen. internal volt. and terminal volt.) = load angle of the machine
a outer rotor angle
i+a sum of rotor angle
(between gen. internal voltage and grid voltage)
phase angle
1 Note: DIAGRAM USES UL1

DRS INPUT USES UL2L3 IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE MULTIPL. BY (j)
ME321 78 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. AC CALCULATION OF ROTOR ANGLE

Fig. 82 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-Ph. AC Calculation Of Rotor Angle

POWER DIAGRAM
OF SALIENT POLE MACHINE
(SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR):
CALCULATION OF ROTOR ANGLE (EXAMPLE)
ACTIVE POWER
ACTIVE CURRENT
cos
underexcited overexcited
1,0
0,9 0,9
0,8
I e)
wi th IN
0,6 rre sp . 0,6 0,6
(c o
E /x d
0,4 I=1

xd-xq I=0,5
Iq
1 xd
1,6 1,4 1,2 1,0 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0
underexcited overexcited REACTIVE POWER
REACTIVE CURRENT
xd-xq U
U
xq .xd xd
U
xq
1 ... ROTOR ANGLE

(BETWEEN GEN. INTERNAL VOLT. AND TERMINAL VOLT.) = LOAD ANGLE.
ME321 78 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. AC

EXAMPLE: CALC. OF ROTOR ANGLE USING THE GEN. POWER DIAGRAM
Fig. 83 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH.AC Example: Calc. Of Rotor Angle Using The Gen. Power Diagram

POWER DIAGRAM
OF A SALIENT POLE MACHINE
(SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR)
Active Power (p.u.)

UNDEREXC. LIMITING
REGULATOR OF EXC. SYSTEM 1
PROTECTION SYSTEM 1,0

TRIP 2
0,9 0,9
0,9
0,8 0,8
0,8
0,7 0,7
0,7
on
0,6 0,6
erati
0,6
Trip
0,5 0,5 0,5

al Op
0,4 0,4 0,4

Norm
5
5
0,3 5
0,3 0,3
0,2 0,2 0,2
0,1 4 0,1 0,1
6
-1,0 -0,9 -0,8 -0,6 -0,5 -0,4 -0,3 -0,2 -0,1 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
1/xq fictitious excitation Reactive Power (p.u.)
1/xq fictitious protection 3
specification of gen. operating range by generator manufacturer

(allowed operating range)
Sample in practice:
Set
1 Value Excitation: given by setting of Underexcitation Limiting Regulator of
the excitation
Set
2 Value Protection: Tripping by protection system
1/x
3 q fictitious ... Fictitious xq for the optimum adaptation of the set points
on the unit requirements

4 Fictitious inner rotor angle
Note:
5 These limits apply only if the real xN is assumed to be zero (incl. Main Tr.!).
6 Note: Radius of circle = 0,1 p.u. / xq
TRIP of first stage if: |UG/xq IG| < (0,1 p.u. / xq)
[UG , IG in p. u., related to relay nominal current]
ME321 78 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. AC

EXAMPLE: CALC. OF ROTOR ANGLE SET VALUES
USING GEN. POWER DIAGRAM
Fig. 84 ME321 78 Underexc. 3-PH. AC Example: Calc. Of Rotor Angle Set Values Using Gen. Power Diagram

7.4.2. ME322
IG L1
11
OUT 22 12
13
OUT 23 14
15
OUT 24 16
X2
15 +
16 - IN 08 4
G RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
ROTOR X7
GEN. 3~ RSHUNT 1
6
RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
IEXC 2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
VSHUNT 6
UAKB
TRANS-
EXTERNAL DEVICE: 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
+ 8 +5
RS422/485
EXAMPLE: MEASURING Rx+ 12
TRANSDUCER 4..20mA
9 13
0...10V DC Rx-
IEXC = 0...1000A DC (nom. exc. curr.) mV mA 10 14
- 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04 GND
VSHUNT = 0...10V DC (RSHUNT = 0,01) Tx+ 15
12 16
Output of meas. transducer = 4...20mA 13 Tx-
Input of DRS-COMPACT2A / UAKB = 4...20mA (used range 4...7,2mA) 14 ROTOR E/F SI01
Output of DRS-COMPACT2A / UAKB = 1...5V DC (corr. with 4...7,2mA input) UAKB-

IN09 X9
Input VE2 / slow input 03 (SI03) = 1...5V DC FAULT
SOFTWARE CONVERSION (VE2 FIRMWARE): 1...5V DC 0...200A DC (by CAN BUS
setting) FRONTSIDE
CANH
CANL
GND
GND
X10
NC
NC
NC
NC
RS 232 NC
(Note: setting can be chosen between 0...200A DC = OK for underexc. protection;
for all exc. currents > 200A the indication on notebook-screen (INTERNAL X11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MEASURED VALUES-window) will be limited at 200A/ will show 200A)
0A DC 200A DC 500A DC 1000A DC

Rotor current:
(=nom. exc. curr.)

Shunt-voltage
(RSHUNT = 0,01) 0V DC 2,0V DC 10V DC
input of ext. meas. transducer:
Output of ext. meas. transducer

(0...10V 4...20mA)
input of DRS-COMPACT2A resp. 4mA DC 7,2mA DC 20mA DC
input of meas. transducer UAKB:
Output of programable meas.

transducer UAKB 1V DC 5V DC
(4...7,2mA 1...5V DC):
Indicated rotor current on notebook-

screen (INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE-
window) presupposing the set values
ROTOR CURRENT COMP. = 50A and 0A DC 200V AC
ROTOR CURRENT OFFSET = 1V: LIMIT for
indicated rotor current indication on
notebook-
Available setting range for screen.
OPER. VALUE ST. 2": 0...200A DC
0...20% of nom. exc. curr. which is 0A DC = 0% 200A DC = 20% of
perfect for underexc. prot. purposes OK: nom. exc. curr.
For example:
chosen setting
(5...10% of nom IEXC)
ME322 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. DC SETTING EXAMLPE FOR SLOW INPUT SI03

Fig. 85 ME322 Underexc. 3-PH. DC Setting Example For Slow Input SI03

ME322/ OPTION:
SUPERVISION OF MEAS. TRANSDUCER-CIRCUIT OF ROTORCURRENT
0 200A DC 1000A DC
ROTOR CURRENT:
see draw. SETTING

EXAMPLE for details
VE2-input voltage:
Please note: 5V DC
min. input voltage = 1V (regular operation) 1V
conclusion: input volt. < 1V malfunciton
of meas. transducer-circuit.
LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING:
ME322 1
SI03 1...5V ALARM
( ROTOR- DC UNDEREXC. TRIP
CURR.)
BLK!
MU120 2
UNDERVOLTAGE
(opt.) CHECK: UDC < 1V OUT
WARNING:
MEAS. TRANSDUCER- WARNING
CIRCUIT
IS FAULTY!
PROCESSING
LEGEND:
1 Software-relay UNDEREXC. 3-PH. DC
input signal must be 1...5V DC (regular operation)
2 Software-relay UNDERVOLT.. DC
input voltage must be 1...5V DC (regular operation)
practical setting (example): 0,5V/ undervoltage WARNING
ME322 UNDEREXC. 3-PH. DC SUPERVISION OF

MEASURING TRANSDUCER FOR ROTORCURR.
Fig. 86 ME322 Underexc. 3-PH. DC Supervision Of Measuring Transducer For Rotorcurr.

7.4.3. ME323
DRS-
COMPACT2A
L1 L2 L3
PROCESSING
IG L1
IExc.AC
ME323 (Relais1) [STANDARD]

TRANS-
FORMER
UG L2L3
G
GEN. ROTOR
3~
ME323 (Relais2) [OPTION]
TEST ST.1
TEST ST.2
OPTIONAL
(APPLIES TO ME323/ BLOCK. ST.1
RELAY1 & RELAY2)
BLOCK. ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
LEGEND OUTPUT CB1

CONTACTS CB2
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS-COMPACT2A Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
VERSION 2
ME323 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. AC LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 87 ME323 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
|Z| Impedance Distance to the
Center of the Impedance
Circle ( = Relay Operating
NOTEBOOK Characteristic)
full load
Z
IG L1 X over-excited
Z
Z
UG L2L3 R inside circle
Z
Relais2 /Stage1 part load

under-excited
IExc.AC (opt.) 2
|IExc.AC|<
Relais1 /Stage1
(standard) 1
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2 >=1
&
& ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 LED-
0 DISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1>
& TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET &
1
0 LED-
ALARM ST.2 MATRIX
BLOCK. ST.2 >=1
&
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0 1
TRIP ST.2 0
t2 >
OUTPUT
1
TRIP-
0
PROCESSING
MATRIX
1 Standard-Impedance-Circle: 2 Optional (add.) Impedance-Circle:

1.stage: Z inside circle use additional Software Relay ME323
2.stage: (Z inside circle) & ( IExc.<)
2 more stages.
ME323 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. AC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 88 ME323 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC Logic Diagram Processing

7.4.4. ME324
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
IG L1
IExc.DC
ME323 (Relais1) [STANDARD]

TRANS-
FORMER
RSHUNT
UG L2L3
G
GEN. ROTOR
3~
ME323 (Relais2) [OPTION]
TEST ST.1
TEST ST.2
OPTIONAL
(APPLIES TO ME323/ BLOCK. ST.1
RELAY1 & RELAY2)
BLOCK. ST.2
TRIP
COMMANDS
LEGEND OUTPUT CB1

CONTACTS CB2
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS-COMPACT2A Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
VERSION 2
ME324 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. DC LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 89 ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. DC Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
|Z| Impedance Distance

NOTEBOOK
full load
Z
IG L1 X over-excited
Z
Z
UG L2L3 R inside circle
Z

under-excited
IExc.DC (opt.) 2
IExc.DC <
Relais1 /Stage1
(standard) 1
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2 >=1
&
& ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 LED-
0 DISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1>
& TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET &
1
0 LED-
ALARM ST.2 MATRIX
BLOCK. ST.2 >=1
&
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0 1
TRIP ST.2 0
t2 >
OUTPUT
1
TRIP-
0
MATRIX
1 Standard-Impedance-Circle:
1.stage: Z inside circle
PROCESSING 2 Optional (add.) Impedance-Circle:
use additional Software Relay ME323
2.stage: (Z inside circle) & ( IExc.<)
2 more stages.
ME324 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. DC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 90 ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO3-PH. DC Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE MODULE: ME323, ME324
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function ME323
1
0
Z inside under-excitation detected

Z calculation of phasor Z circle (ALARM starts)
full load
Z
X over-excited
R
Z check: Z inside circle = under-excitation
(loss of field)
(opt.) under-excited
Relais1 /Stage1
(standard)
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX

ALARM ST.1 FUNCTION OUTPUT: Stage1 ALARM
ALARM ST.2 FUNCTION OUTPUT: Stage2 ALARM
TRIP ST.1 FUNCTION OUTPUT: Stage1 TRIP
TRIP ST.2 FUNCTION OUTPUT: Stage2 TRIP

ME323, ME324 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. AC, DC LOGIC DIAGRAM

PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 91 ME323, ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC, DC Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

STANDARD APPLICATION USING

1 SOFTWARE RELAY ME323
R
xd
2
center =
xd xd
+
2 2 xd
2
diameter
xd
SOFTWARE RELAY ME323:
diameter = xd [p.u.] range: 0,1...3,0 p.u.

xd xd
center = + [p.u.] range: 0,5...5,0 p.u.
2 2
tstage1 = 0s range: 0...30s
ME323, ME324 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. AC/DC

CALCULATION OF SET VALUES
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1
Fig. 92 ME323,ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC / DC Calculation Of Set Values Application Example 1

NON-STANDARD APPLICATION USING

2 SOFTWARE RELAYS ME323
R
xd
2 center of
center of circle 2 =
circle 1 =
xd 1
xd xd 2
+
2
+
2 2
diameter of
circle 2 =
1 1 [p.u.]
diameter of
circle 1 =
xd [p.u.]
1 2
1st SOFTWARE RELAY ME323: 2nd SOFTWARE RELAY ME323:
diameter of circle 1 = xxdd[p.u.]

xd
diameter of circle 2 = 1xd[p.u.] 1
2 2 2 2
centre of circle 1 = [p.u.] + centre of circle 2 = [p.u.] +
tstage1 = 0,5s tstage1 = 0s

(of ME323/ relay no.1) (of ME323/ relay no.2)
ME323, ME324 40MHO UNDEREXC. MHO 3-PH. AC/DC

CALCULATION OF SET VALUES
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2
Fig. 93 ME323, ME324 40MHO Underexc. MHO 3-PH. AC / DC Calculation Of Set Values Application Example 2

7.5. FUNCTION
The under excitation function provides protection against disturbance in the excitation system of synchronous
machines thereby preventing possible mechanical damages due to load oscillations in the power system by
initiating a short time trip signal to the respective circuit breaker.
7.5.1. ME121/ ME122/ ME321/ ME322 Functions
As a trip criterion the rotor angle and the excitation current Ie of the protected synchronous generator are
evaluated whereby following logic functions are applicable:
Rotor angle >Limit (rotor angle conditions are exceeded) initiates an alarm and a
long time delayed trip
Rotor angle >Limit and excitation current Ie<Ie,Limit (rotor angle exceeded and low excitation current)
initiates an alarm and a short time delayed trip.
The rotor angle i of the generator is computed from the generator current Igen and the
generator voltage Vgen according to the simplified vector diagram.
R o to rEM F
Igen X. q
i
V gen
a
-Igen X
.n

Igen V sys tem
Fig. 7-1
The practical definitive stability condition of the generator with the overall static rotor angle
between the rotor voltage Ep and the rigid power system voltage Vnet is computed as the sum
of the inner rotor angle i and the outer rotor angle a.
As shown on the above graph the outer rotor angle is derived from the power system reactance
Xn, i.e. the reactance between generator leads and the rigid power system.
This reactance is evaluated according to the power system values whereby for short
transmission lines the short circuit reactance of the generator-transformer is applicable.

In the arithmetical process of evaluating the different function variants for three phase systems the secondary
CT/VT signals are sampled 12 times each cycle, e.g. phase current L1 and
the phase to phase voltage V L2-L3. With the aid of the parameters Xq und Xn the vector Ep
and Vnet is computed with the Fourier Transformation according to value and phase angle position and thereby the
rotor angle is determined.
Also the value of the generator voltage is evaluated and in case of being smaller than 70 V secondary the
protective function will be blocked.
For models in single phases systems according to the above vector diagram the phase displacement of the current
Igen and the reactance Xq, respectively Xn by displacing the
phase voltage by 90 (corresponds to a displacement of 3 sample intervals) are considered
and in the same way the rotor angle is being evaluated.
After each sample interval of the computed rotor angle there is a comparison with the
configured trigger value and when being exceeded 24 times in a consecutive sequence
the instantaneous initiation is carried out for stage 1 and the time delay for stage 1 is initiated.
In case of the trigger value being exceeded during the whole delay range a tripping signal will
be given.
Depending on the selected function variant the excitation current is either measured by a CT signal or evaluated
from a rotor current shunt via a measuring transducer and as a DC
voltage transferred to a slow analogue input of the protective system.
In the first case the excitation current value is determined with the Fourier Transformation and
in the second one the excitation current is evaluated in a DC voltage stage.
Again, the computation is carried out for each sample interval, i.e. 12 times each cycle and the
calculated rotor current value compared with the configured setting parameter. Should during 24 consecutive
cycles this value be exceeded and also the rotor angle trigger level is above its setting, i.e. stage 1 initiated, then
the starting signal for stage 2 is set and the time delay stage 2
triggered. In case of the stage 2 setting value remains above the trigger value during the whole time delay of stage
2 a trip signal is initiated. Of course the starting- and trip stages are only set when not being suppressed by the
aforementioned 70V undervoltage interlock or a blocking signal. Also when applying a test signal at the
corresponding function input a test algorithm is
started independent from the measured values which eventually is producing a function trip.

7.5.2. ME323 / ME324 Functions
The MHO functions ME323 and ME324 are computing the complex impedance vector on the basis of the generator
current and of phase L1 and the phase to phase voltage L2-L3.
Tripping conditions are derived when the impedance vector is entering the impedance circle
defined by the setting parameters (1. stage) whereas the 2. stage is in addition also considering the excitation
undercurrent value. The excitation current measuring is performed on the AC side for function ME323 and on the
Dc side for function ME324.
Details:
Display Window:
"Impedance Distance" (refer to internal display window) means:

Distance of the Impedance Point to the Centre of the Impedance Circle. (Distance between Locus and Centre of
Impedance Circle).
That means this value has to be compared with the radius of the circle.
The Circle Reactance is the "Impedance Distance" to the centre of the reactance circle (actually
the Impedance Circle and not the border of the circle.
The display range is up to 10.5 p.u., i.e. above this value a >Display Range is indicated.
The display Circle Reactance is in principle a radius whereas the corresponding parameter setting
Diameter is actually the diameter. So the two values cannot be compared directly.
Note to the Setting Parameters:
Offset = xd /2 (direct axis reactance in p.u. divided by 2);

CAUTION: For GE relays the offset means the distance to the outer
limit of the reactance circle whereas for the DRS System the distance
to the circle centre is applicable.
Recommended Settings:
These recommendations are based on the GE Study GER-3183.
A. Single Stage Solution (With 1 Impedance Circle):
Ensures a certain trip for excitation faults at all power system load conditions but tends to false tripping in case of
stable rotor oscillations.
Therefore loss of synchronism is not definitely recognised under all possible load conditions.
Recommended Settings:
Offset = xd/2 (transient direct axis reactance in p.u. divided by 2);

CAUTION: For GE relays the offset means the distance to the outer
limit of the reactance circle whereas for the DRS System the distance
to the circle centre is applicable.
DRS setting value "Centre" thus: Setting Centre = x d/2 + xd/2 ...[p.u.]
Circle diameter = xd (direct axis reactance in p.u.),

Note: the "Protective Function Measured Values" window (see DRSWIN)
shows the distance between the impedance locus (actual) and the center of the

reactance circle; this value therefore should not be compared with the set value
"Diameter" but rather with the radius of the reactance circle.
t = 0 sec.
B. Enhanced Solution (With 2 Impedance Circles):
In this case two impedance circles are applied, i.e. in case of the DRS Protection System two software functions
are used and each being configured with one impedance circle.
The first stage circle corresponds exactly to the Single Solution as per Item A., however with a time delay of t =
0.5 sec.
The second circle having a diameter of 1p.u. and a time delay of t = 0 sec. represents the operating characteristic
of stage 2.
The advantage of this solution in comparison with the Single Solution according to A.:
No possible false trips during stable rotor angle oscillations or in case of oscillations
limited by the excitation regulator.
To achieve this feature the trip criteria for the larger impedance circle are time delayed,
say, 0.5 0.6 sec., and in case higher delays are selected the generator mechanical
withstand capabilities have to be considered.
The smaller operating circle with a diameter of 1p.u. has always a zero time delay.
DRS Parameters:
Circle for 1. Stage (Large Circle):

Setting value centre point = xd/2 + xd/2 ...[p.u.]
Setting value circle diameter = xd ...[p.u.]
Setting value time delay = 0.5 sec.
Circle for 2. Stage (Small Circle):

Setting value centre point = xd/2 + 1/2 ...[p.u.]
Setting value circle diameter = 1 ...[p.u.]
Setting value time delay = 0 sec.
C. Comparison with Conventional Rotor Angle Evaluation (Setting = Rotor Angle):
In principle both methods (rotor angle und MHO) are based exactly on the same physical criterions, i.e. the
impedance circle can be converted into the loading characteristic of the
machine (mirror image of the unit impedance circle). It has to be considered that with our standard rotor angle
protective functions xq (and not xd) is applied. However, on the other
hand, that is completely irrelevant since for practical reasons a fictive most suitable x q
setting is chosen anyhow.

7.6. COMMISSIONING

7.6.1. ME121/ ME122/ ME321/ ME322 Protective Functions
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external wiring connections have to be checked.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external connections.
The parameters xq and xn as well as the operating values and time delays of stage 1 and 2
have to be set to the computed values.
The generator loading diagram has to be considered to determine the reactance setting
values as outlined in the diagram below.
underexcited overexcited
1
limit

V2 /xq
Thereby: p........ relative real power in p.u. (also outlined below)

q........ relative reactive in p.u.( also outlined below)
As shown on the above load diagram the power rating of the machine depends onto the
-Maximum excitation current
-Maximum stator current, respectively the maximum turbine rating

-Practical stability vector and

-Minimum excitation current
To obtain the reactance setting value xq a straight line as close as possible to the loading
diagram is drawn and the crossing with the represents the 1/x q value.
Please note that this fictive reactance xq is generally not identical to the real reactance
xq of the specified xq by the generator manufacturer, the latter being not suitable for practical
protection applications since it does not represent the optimum configuration of the required protective function
range.
To adapt the computed reactance value to the relevant CT and VT ratios a configuration
factor F is determined according to following formula:
Un UW,s IW,p
FF . .
UW,p 100 In
With Vn Generator nominal voltage (V)

VTp VT rated primary voltage (V)
VTs VT rated secondary voltage (V)
In Generator nominal current (A)
Ip CT primary rated current (A)
Thus the reactance setting Xq,n is calculated as follows:
xq,n xq.F
The power system reactance Xn is adapted with the same factor.

Also the configuration of the rotor angle has to be verified according to the above load
diagram whereby it has to be realised that the rotor angle measurement in the above diagram
is displayed for the inner rotor angle only and considering the usual system reactance an
increase of the angle by about 5 has to be taken into account.
When setting the rotor angle also the characteristic of the excitation limiter settings are having
an influence and therefore the configured values have to be selected accordingly to provide an
an ample safety margin.
The operating value for the excitation undercurrent interlock either for AC- or DC evaluation
should be selected to approximately 10% of the nominal off-load excitation current.
Finally, the DRS System outputs for the LED matrix and the tripping matrix are to be set
according to plant requirements.
Protective function tests are preferably performed with the plant out of service and, e.g. with
the relay test set a test current is injected into phase L1 and the nominal secondary test
voltage applied to phase L2-L3 whereby the phase angle between voltage and current has to
be known and/or adjustable. The value of the rotor angle is to be verified by selecting the software option actual
measured values in the relay window.

Between the injected test signals current I and voltage V and the displayed rotor angle there is a relation as per
the formula below:
p p
arctan 2 arctan 2
u u
q q
xq xn
Following definitions are applicable:
U.I.cos
p ..............relative real power in P.U.
Un.In
U.I.sin
p ........... relative reactive power in P.U.
Un.In
U
u ........... relative generator voltage in P.U.
Un
xq ....... ........... set quadrilateral reactance in P.U.
xn .................set power system reactance in P.U.
In, Un ...........relay rated current respectively voltage (1 or 5A, 100 V)
The display should be checked according to the calculation of the above formulas and by
changing the phase angle and /or current the function is tested up to the operating value.
Record these values into the commissioning sheets.
Inject a current signal above the configured trigger value for the excitation current according
to the selected excitation current measurement (AC or DC). By reducing the excitation current
with stage 1 initiated the operating value of stage 2 is determined. To determine the reset value
the excitation current is slowly increased until stage 2 is reset.
Record the operating- and reset values of stage 2 into the commissioning test sheet.
Please note that depending on the excitation current evaluation method the optional excitation
current actual measured values may be displayed in the relay- or PROCESSING window.
Also the other external measured values, i.e. CT currents and VT voltages, can be displayed in
the User program.
Check the trip- and alarm signals and the LED indications according to the configuration and
the circuit diagrams.
The time delay of the protective function should be verified with 1.5 times the operating value
and recorded into the commissioning sheets.
For each stage the configured blocking inputs should be checked by applying the corresponding external signal
whereby the trip outputs have to reset.

The configured function test for each stage can be checked for each stage by setting the test
signal input and the respective function stage has to operate without any external CT/VT inputs.
Caution should be taken since during the tests that also other protective functions may operate
which have to be blocked during the test procedure.
After pre-commissioning all modified test parameters setting must be configured to the original plant parameter
settings.
Primary Commissioning Tests:
During the primary tests the function of the protective system is checked during normal
operating conditions. As far as the power system stability permits following load tests are recommended:
- On-Load Tests:
Block protection trips of the under-excitation protection.

Connect external measuring instruments, e.g. wattmeter to the CT and VT circuits
if required.
Load internal measured values of the User program.
Start up the generator and synchronise to the power system and load the generator
up to the maximum stable real- and inductive power capability.
Via the option "actual measured values" the measured angle is compared with the
calculated one as per above formula and double checked with the readings of the
external wattmeter.
By controlling the reactive power into the capacitive range the indicated rotor angle
has to increase otherwise the function polarity voltage direction has to be changed.
Now the setting Xn is set to zero and at 4 loading conditions being preferably in the capacitive region the
rotor angle display is compared with the computed values and
the angle determined in the generator loading diagram.
For each test rotor angle, real power, reactive power and the generator voltage should
be recorded into the commissioning test sheets.
A plausibility check of the rotor current displayed in the DRS System is to be checked
with the excitation system instrument indications.
After re-configuration of the Xn value o the original setting the dynamic interaction of
the under-excitation protection and the excitation rotor angle limiter controls have to
be to be tested by a swift manual shift into the not permissible negative reactance
region whereby no protection initiation has to occur.
Check the possible function blocks from the external plant and re-configure the
protection trips.
If feasible shut down the generator via a protection trip.
Remove any external measuring instruments and restore all test parameters to
their required original settings.

MF... OVER/UNDERFREQUENCY / FREQUENY GRADIENT / VECTOR
SHIFT
8. MF... OVER/UNDERFREQUENCY / FREQUENY GRADIENT /

VECTOR SHIFT
8.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MF . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
FNNR ... Function Number (VE-internal number of the protective function)
TYPE ... Function Type (short denomination of the protective function)
ANSI ... ANSI Device Number (international protective function number)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MF . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Frequency protection, 1-stage 1022 MF111 81 C2,M,L
Frequency protection, 2- stage 1023 MF121 81 C2,M,L
Frequency protection, 4- stage 1024 MF141 81 C2,M,L
Frequency gradient 1075 MF112 81 C2,M
Voltage Vector Surge 2036 MF311 C2,M,L

SHIFT
8.2. TECHNICAL DATA
8.2.1. MF111
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MF111 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

1-stage frequency function selectable for over- or underfrequency detection.
MF111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: -
Note: There is no definite allocation of the analogue input required.
ATTENTION: The respective synchronising channel is applied automatically
(V respectively I channel).
Pleas note: It has to be ensured that the synchronising channels regarding the
requirements of the frequency protection are selected correctly.
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Parameter Settings
Minimum voltage: 60 ... 100 V in 1 V steps
Maximum voltage: 100 ... 140 V in 1 V steps
Operating value: 10 ... 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz - steps
Type: Over/under detection
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec - steps

Frequency: in Hz

SHIFT
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0,1% of Set Value
Operating time: 20 ms ... 85 ms (depending on the rate of frequency
change).
Condition: SYNC channel must be active for
approximately 1 sec.
Accuracy: Typical 0.01 Hz

SHIFT
8.2.2. MF121

2-stage frequency function selectable for over- or underfrequency detection per stage.
MF121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: -
Binary: Blocking input stage 1
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Parameter Settings
Operating value step 1: 10 ... 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz - steps
Type Step 1: Over/under detection
Operating time Step 1: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec - steps
Operating value Step 2: 10 ... 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz - steps
Type Step 2: Over/under detection
Operating time Step 2: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec - steps

Frequency: in Hz

SHIFT
Measuring
change).

SHIFT
8.2.3. MF141

4-stage frequency function selectable for over- or underfrequency detection per stage.
MF141
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: -
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Test input stage 3
Test input stage 4
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Alarm stage 3
Trip stage 3
Alarm stage 4
Trip stage 4

SHIFT
Parameter Settings
Operating value stage 1: 10 ... 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz - steps
Type stage 1: Over/under detection
Operating time stage 1: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec - steps

Frequency: in Hz
Measuring
change).

SHIFT
8.2.4. MF112

Frequency gradient 1075 MF112 81 C2,M
1-stage frequency gradient function for negative or positive gradients.
MF112
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: -
Please note: It has to be ensured that the synchronising channels regarding
the requirements of the frequency protection are selected correctly.
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Parameter Settings
Operating value: 0.1 ... 15 Hz/s in 0.1 Hz/s Schritten
Note:
Recommended range for 50 Hz systems: 0.1 ... 11
Hz/s;
Recommended range for 60 Hz systems: 0.1 ... 13
Hz/s.
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec - steps
Evaluation time constant: 1 ... 15 cycles in 0.5 cycle - steps

Frequency gradient: in Hz/s

SHIFT
Measuring
Reset ratio: < 0,1 Hz/s
Operating time: Depending on the setting parameter "evaluation time
constant"
Accuracy: Typical 0.1 Hz/s (depending on the setting parameter
" evaluation time constant ")

SHIFT
8.2.5. MF311
Voltage Vector Surge 2036 MF311

available for:
a)
DRS LIGHT L
see: Digital Sudden Load Loss Relay
Type DRS-LP824
DRS_KER3.VE
b) M, C2
DRS MODULAR/ DRS COMPACT2A
3-phase, 1-stage voltage vector shift function with common instantaneous - and time delayed
trip outputs.
MF311
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: V1
V2
V3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Vector shift trip
Parameter Settings
Vector shift: 2 ... 30 phase angle shift
in 1 - steps
Trip delay: 1 ... 3 cycles
in steps of 1 period
Blocking U<: 10 ... 120 V in 0.5 V - steps
Mode: 1-phase
3-phase

Vector shift: Vector change V1 [in el.] :
The last peak value is stored for 10 sec.
Vector change V2 [in el.] .] :
Vector change V3 [in el.] .] :

SHIFT
Measuring
Operating time: Setting (in cycles) + 1 sample
Setting (in cycles) + 12 samples
Note: Operating time can vary up to a maximum of 11
samples according to
value of the phase shift.
Accuracy: Typical 1 el.

SHIFT

8.3.1. MF111/ MF112/ MF121/ MF141
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
2 1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
(optional) 4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
I5
15 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 2 OUT 12 8
1
U1 9
U L1L2 2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
(standard)
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
-
3 + OUT 19 6
4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
-
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
LEGEND: 9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
OPTIONAL MODULE: 11 OUT 23 14
+
-UAKB Transducer 1 12 - IN 06 15
Transducer 2 13 + OUT 24 16
Shaft Current 14 - IN 07
Rotor E/F X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) -
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface X7
RS422/485 chain line data interface 6
MODBUS control system interface 2
TRANS-
1 IMPORTANT NOTE: THE ACTUAL SYNCHRONIZATION- 3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
CHANNEL WILL BE USED AUTOMATICALLY FOR
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
FREQUENCY DETECTION! 6
UAKB
TRANS-
TAKE CARE TO USE A PROPER VOLTAGE 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
CHANNEL FOR SYNC! Rx+ 12

9 13
2 SYNC CHANNEL FOR DRS-INTERNAL USE: 10 Rx-
GND 14
PREFERED = V-CHANNEL; I-CHANNEL IS SECOND 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
CHOICE ONLY. Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MF112 FREQUENCY GRADIENT WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 94 MF112 Frequency Gradient Wiring Diagram

SHIFT
8.3.2. MF311
For a detailed description of the Protective Function Module "MF311" please see the DRS LIGHT Device
Description "Digital Unit Decoupling Relay/ Type DRS-LP824"
File: "DRS-LP824_Unit_Decoupling_e.pdf".

SHIFT
8.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS

8.4.1. MF112
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
1
V L1L2
PROCESSING
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
1 THIS FUNCTION AUTOMATICALLY USES
THE ACTUAL SYNC-CHANNEL (U resp. I)
TRIP
AS PROTECTIVE FUNCTION INPUT. COMMANDS
PLEASE MAKE SHURE TO DEFINE
OUTPUT CB1
PROPER SYNC-CHANELS. CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
DRS DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM CONTACTS
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY Alarm
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS-COMPACT2A Trip
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
PROCESSING
VERSION 2
MF112 FREQUENCY GRADIENT LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 95 MF112 Frequency Gradient Logic Diagram

SHIFT
NOTEBOOK
CALC. OF
set value FREQ. GRAD.
EVALUATION TIME CONSTANT df/dt
1 Calculation of
V L1L2 CALC. OF FREQ.
f
FREQU. GRAD. = df/dt
(average value acc. to GRAD. > set value
OPER. VALUE
EVALUATION TIME CONSTANT)
V< set value

MIN. VOLT. SETTING
&
V> set value
MAX. VOLT. SETTING
ALARM
LED-
DISPLAY
TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM LED-
BLOCK. ST.1 >=1 MATRIX
&
& ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0
TRIP 1
0
t1>
& TRIP
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
TRIP-
0
MATRIX
1 DRS-INTERNAL SYNC-CHANNEL
WILL BE USED AUTOMATICALLY
(U resp. I)! PROCESSING
MF112 FREQUENCY GRADIENT LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 96 MF112 Frequency Gradient Logic Diagram Processing

SHIFT
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MF112
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MF112
1
0
CALC. OF FREQ. GRADIENT [Hz/s]

FREQ. GRAD. Note: max. allowed frequency change
df/dt 11Hz/s (50Hz Systems) resp.
13Hz/s (60Hz Systems)
valid for frequencies close to nom. frequency.
Accuracy: approx. 0,1Hz/s
(dependig on set value
AVERAGE TIME CONST. choose as long
as possible in order to get best accuracy!)
f
OPERATE REGION
EXAMPLE:
(TRIP)
set = 1Hz/s
FREQ.
GRAD. > set value
OPER. VALUE
50Hz
NO TRIP
time
MATRIX
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MF112 FREQUENCY GRADIENT LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 97 MF112 Frequency Gradient Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

SHIFT
8.5. FUNCTION
8.5.1. MF111/ MF121/ MF141
Electric plant and machinery are generally designed for only a small operating range regarding
the rated frequency. Therefore, any inadmissible deviations from the nominal frequency have
to be monitored and subsequently corrected by suitable corresponding control- and switching operations to ensure
frequency stabilisation into the nominal range and/or initiating plant shut
down of the endangered equipment
The measuring principle of the frequency protection is based upon an evaluation of the rate of change of the phase
angle for the voltage vector by comparing the actual synchronising frequency f o, i.e. 1/12 of the with the
configured nominal frequency of the protection system.
Hence, according to the relation
2f. t
f is computed to the known sample interval t and the actual measured frequency calculated
as follows.
f1 f0 f
For the practical execution of the above described method the connected measured voltage
is sampled 12 times each cycle. To suppress the influence of higher harmonics due to superimposed power system
control signals the measured values are directed to a digital filter
th
(Thompson low-pass of the 5 order, limiting factor of 1.2 times nominal frequency). Subsequently via the Fourier
Transformation the amplitude and the voltage vector phase position
is determined and the frequency computed according to the above formula whereby for each sample interval a new
a new frequency value is available. The final frequency is computed from
a mean value for a period of 3 cycles (= 36 single values) and when the measured signal is between the parameter
settings minimum amplitude and maximum amplitude the initiating conditions for a function stage are fulfilled
and will be set provided that no blocking signal is present. When the initiation continues during the whole time
delay the corresponding trip output
delivered.

SHIFT
8.5.2. MF311
Application:
The vector shift function is provided as an on-line protection for generators with a relative
small power rating in case of system disturbances, e.g. emanating from a system auto
reclosing or external short circuits. During a system disturbance an instant unloading of a generator (equivalent to a
full load rejection) may occur causing a sudden phase change
of the generator voltage vector. On the other hand the synchronising torque is lost at the
position of the network short circuit and the recurring system voltage after fault clearing can
be asynchronous to the generator voltage whereby the vector shift function is inhibiting a
re-synchronising of the generator to the power system under such conditions.
Please note that the vector shift function is preferably applied for smaller generator ratings
and is basically evaluating the vector shift of the generator voltage due to de-loading of the
machine during system disturbances.
Under special network conditions, i.e. long grading times in conjunction with low rotor inertia
a significant speed increase corresponding to a phase shift may occur during certain types
of system faults. Such a continuous voltage vector angle change should not primarily be the
trip criteria for the vector shift function even though depending on the selected settings a vector angle shift is
indicated. In the extreme case with a relative fast speed increase even possible false tripping can take place during
a load rejection. As a general rule only the original phase
shift happening directly after an auto reclose sequence or a system fault should be taken for
the evaluation. Please note that for large generators, e.g. turbine generator in a nuclear power plant the influence
of a speed rise to the phase angle must be considered all the time. For this
purpose the ELIN out of step protection relay type MSTAB was developed which covers each
and every power system operating condition.
Significance of the Parameter Settings:
a)
Vector shift setting:
Phase angle change, respectively a vector shift of the generator voltage leading to a trip.
Note: It is a direct instantaneous trip without any time delay, i.e. a very fast function.
Please note:
During a real phase shift the function always is measuring the same value for a phase angle
change (also refer to the display window of the DRS internal computed values) independent
whether 1 or 3 cycles are configured.
For a definite frequency threshold response, whereby the phase angle is changing continuously, there are
differences since for higher function settings a comparison with more recent cycle events is carried out and thereby
increasing the actual computed phase angle.
b)
Time delay setting:
This setting defines the duration where the configured vector shift has to be above the set value
to initiate a trip sequence (result of the Fourier Analyses).
Please note:
The real operating time is resulting from following considerations:

After a phase shift (depending on how much the vector shift setting has been crossed by the actual vector shift) it
takes about 1 ... 12 samples before the Fourier Analyses feature will detect
a transgression of the parameter setting, i.e. Fourier is slowly integrating the phase angle according to its
algorithm. Only from then on the vector shift time delay is initiated.
With a setting = 1 from this moment on the phase angle configuration has to be exceeded during
12 consecutive samples to initiate a trip output. As indicated the vector shift function is extremely fast compared
with other protective functions and therefore only a trip signal is generated without any prior initiation.

SHIFT
In praxis this will result in following tripping times:

Setting = 1 cycle:
Internal trip delay = 13 ... 24 samples, typical 20 samples (... corresponding to 33 ms at 50 Hz)
Setting = 2 cycles:
Internal trip delay = 25 ... 36 samples, typical 32 samples (...corresponding to 53 ms at 50 Hz)
EW = 3 Per.:
Internal trip delay = 37 ... 48 samples, typical 44 samples (...corresponding to 73 ms at 50 Hz)
The external tripping time (relay output) is approximately 5 ms longer.
c)
"Blocking V<" Setting:
Generally the function is blocked for very low voltage signals to prevent false tripping when the
excitation is switched off, etc.
A second application may arise that during a rapid increase or decrease of the generator voltage
the Fourier Analyses will compute a phase shift which cannot be neglected and may lead to false tripping during
start-up or shut-down of the generator unit. For this case the "V<" would have to be set relatively high. Also it has to
be considered that during external system disturbances the generator voltage should not decrease to this setting
value to ensure correct function operation
under all conditions.
Note:
When the actual voltage is smaller than the value V min Sync selected in the page0 the function
is blocked due to the absence of the Sync-Bit.
Note:
During a real phase shift of the generator voltage the Fourier evaluation will temporarily compute
a frequency- and amplitude deviation for a maximum of 1 cycle even though the amplitude and
frequency remain constant. This would result in a possible false trip but is being eliminated via
suitable firmware measures.
Note:
Either phase to phase or phase to neutral voltages can be applied to the relay function which
has to be considered when configuring the V< setting.
d)
"Mode" setting:
"Mode" = 1-phase:
At least one of the three voltage inputs has to show a phase shift larger than the setting value
(1 out of 3).
One, two or three input voltages can be applied to the vector shift function. But please note that
also in the single phase mode all 3 voltages are measured but it is sufficient when only one voltage will show a
vector shift.
The "1-phase" mode is under normal operating conditions with symmetrical voltages sufficient.
"Mode" = 3-phase:
All three input voltages have to show a vector shift above the setting value (3 out of 3) and therefore all 3 voltages
have to be connected to the relay.
This mode is recommended to prevent false tripping due to external disturbances, e.g. negative
phase sequence quantities, etc.
Internal Measured Values Window "Phase Shift"
The window display will always indicate the maximum value encountered during the last
10 seconds.

SHIFT
Due to the relative fast tripping time (30 ... 70 ms at 50 Hz) no other useful display would
be suitable.
Therefore during declining signal conditions the display will still remain for 10 seconds
whereas for rising values the indication is changing continuously.
In case of no valid computations, e.g. blocking input, etc. the window will show "0.0 degree".
This display has precedence against the 10 s stored value, i.e. the measured value immediately
changes to the "0.0 degree".
Blocking input
During trips of the generator CB by other protective functions a rapid speed increase of the
generator in case of a full load rejection can take place and depending on the configuration
of the vector shift function a subsequent false trip may occur resulting in a possibly confusing entry into the system
event records.
It is therefore recommended that already during the design stage a CB Open blocking input should be included.
With the generator CB in the open position there is no vector shift due to the absence of a
load current. However, during speed increase there may be a phase angle shift of the
generator voltage.
Function Input Matrix
It is recommended to use all 3 voltage inputs and for safety reasons during the primary commissioning tests the
Mode parameter setting can be configured to "1-phase" for the
time being.
Should this setting proves to be too sensitive (many negative phase sequence system
event, etc.) the configuration "3-phase" has to be selected. This setting minimises the
probability of a false trip due to unbalanced load conditions during certain power system
faults. This configuration will also block the protective function in case of a phase voltage loss.
"V<" Setting
This parameter setting should be selected low enough so that the value is not reached
during external system faults whereby a vector shift may occur and unintentional blocking
of the function is initiated. It should be noted that a setting value below the minimum voltage
configured for the Sync. Channel in Page0 has no meaning since the missing Sync-Bit is
preventing a trip of the vector shift function anyhow.
Also the setting should be high enough that it is not exceeded during low excitation conditions
of the generator during turbine start-up.
"Vector Shift" Setting
This setting configuration depends on the phase angle displacement of the generator voltage encountered during
an auto reclosing condition or system fault whereby the HV circuit breaker
is tripped.
High rated power systems: Setting = approximately 6.

Low rated power systems: Setting = approximately10 ... 12.
During the on-load checks it has to be tested that when connecting or disconnecting larger consumer circuits the
vector shift function settings will not produce any false trips.
Therefore a vector shift condition should preferably be detected only above a power change of
about 20%. Consequently it is advised that the power regulation of a network node should be
configured to a minimum real power flow of approximately 20 %.
The same applies fort he speed control (real power) and the excitation control (reactive power).
Trip Matrix

SHIFT
Only parallel operation: Trip of the generator CB

System parallel- and island operation: Trip of the HV CB

SHIFT
8.5.3. MF112
Frequency Gradient:
Represents the frequency rate of change per time interval in Hz/s.
It has to be noted that the maximum frequency gradient evaluation for the PROCESSING is not a
constant Hz/s value but a percentage value with respect to the frequency.
Evaluated is a maximum number of 22% of frequency changes per second, i.e. for example
by 50Hz a change of 11Hz/s.
The DRS system configuration window for the frequency gradient displays a maximum range
of 0 ... 15 Hz/s and the practical available setting range is, as outlined above, 22% maximum
of the frequency change within a second and therefore as follows:
0 11 Hz/s for 50 Hz systems
0 13 Hz/s for 60 Hz systems
As indicated the recordable frequency change in absolute values is higher for increasing
frequencies and lower for falling ones. This fact should be considered when determining the
the parameter settings especially when very high values of the gradient and larger time delays
are required and preferred.
Accuracy:
Approximately 0.1 Hz/s depending on the evaluation time which should be chosen as long
as possible.
Tripping Direction:
The relay function is operating in either direction for frequency decrease or increase and
therefore it has to be realised that also during a fast recovery to the nominal frequency
a trip sequence may be initiated.

SHIFT
8.6. COMMISSIONING

8.6.1. MF111/ MF121/ MF141
Pre-Commissioning:
First of all the correct external wiring connections have to be verified.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external connections whereby due to the particularity of the
frequency protection the measuring channel cannot be allocated freely but
is set during the design stage to a fixed synchronising channel.
For the operating value and the time delay the necessary required parameters have to be set
and by defining the permissible minimum and maximum amplitude the RMS effective measuring range is
determined. According to the desired functionality an over- or under function evaluation
is being selected.
The function outputs are to be configured in the LED- and trip matrix according to requirements.
Function tests are preferably performed with the plant out of service and to verify the correct
operation a relay test set with a variable voltage amplitude of, say 0 -150 volts and an adjustable
frequency range is to be connected to the respective input channels.
The signal amplitude is raised to nominal voltage and by de-activating any blocking inputs the
frequency is slowly adjusted to cause operation of the tested stage according to the set direction.
Record the operating and reset values into the commissioning sheets by changing the frequency accordingly.
Again alter the frequency until the function operates and then reduce the amplitude of the frequency generator until
the protective function resets. Enter the amplitude value into the commissioning sheets. Now the amplitude should
be raised again until the undervoltage interlock
resets and the test result recorded in the commissioning sheets.
During these tests the function indications, alarms and trip signals are to be observed as well as the frequency
values displayed on the menu item Actual Measured Values.
To verify the time delay the operating frequency setting should be shifted by 0.1 Hz and with a
suitable timer the trip delay measured and recorded in the test sheets.
The other frequency stages are checked the same way as outlined above.
Check the trip- and alarm signals as well as the LED indications according to the configured
parameter settings and the circuit diagrams.
The function blocking feature has to be tested for each stage during an active trip signal output
whereby the function stage has to reset when applying the blocking input.
Subsequently check the configured test feature for each stage and the respective protective
function stage has to operate without any external VT signal.
Please note that during this test procedure other protective functions may operate without any
counter measures taken and should be blocked by applying the respective User application of
the DRS System.

SHIFT
After the tests any possible necessary parameter setting changes have to be restored to
the original service value.
During the primary checks the function of the protection system is tested in a normal unit
off-load operating condition. As far as service operation permits following tests should be
carried out:
- Speed Regulation:
Disable external trips of the frequency protection.

Disable any external blocking inputs.
Run up the generator to rated speed and raise excitation to nominal voltage.
Insert a multimeter into the VT circuits to measure the frequency.
Regulate generator speed into desired direction until operation of the respective
frequency stage and record the values.
Test all other stages as indicated above.
Restore the external trip outputs of the frequency protection.
If system conditions permit shut down the generator via a frequency protection trip.

SHIFT
8.6.2. MF112
Frequency Gradient:
During secondary pre-commissioning it has to be noted:
a)
The voltage injection with a test set, e.g. Omicron, has to be applied to the Sync-channel of the
DRS Protective System (Sync-channel: Internal DRS synchronising reference channel for the Fourier Analysis).
b)
The frequency change has to be continuously adjusted during the whole time delay and not in
sudden steps.
Note: Sudden frequency changes are practically not possible due to the generator inertia and
will only conditionally be accepted by the firmware of the protection system. Further it should
be realised that in case of a unique instantaneous frequency change the time delay will not
expire causing only an alarm initiation.
c)
The maximum rate of frequency shift must not be exceeded, i.e. a maximum of 22% frequency
change per second.
d)
The pre-configured and permissible frequency range for the generator and the DRS System must
not be exited during the whole time delay setting.
e)
The function caculates for every "EVALUATION TIME CONSTANT" (= period of time acc. to the set value
"Evaluation Time Constant") the average FREQUENCY GRADIENT. In order to get a trip command the average
frequency gradients have to be above the set value "Operating Value" during the whole "Operating Time" (= set
value).

SHIFT

MI... CURRENT IDMT / VOLTAGE RESTRAINT OVERCURRENT /
MOTOR OSCILLATION
9. MI... CURRENT IDMT / VOLTAGE RESTRAINT OVERCURRENT /

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.1. OVERVIEW
List of the available MI . . . CURRENT IDMT/ VOLTAGE RESTRAINT OVERCURRENT / MOTOR

OSCILLATION - Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MI . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

IDMT current, 1-phase, 2-stage 1038 MI125 50/51 C2,M,L
INVERSE DEFINITE MINIMUM TIME
IDMT current, 3-phase, 2-stage, 1037 MI325 50/51 C2,M,L
INVERSE DEFINITE MINIMUM TIME,
Separate trip outputs.
Note: MI327 is the preferred function with common outputs
different to MI325.
Please Note: The logic of the IDMT characteristic MI325 slightly
differs from the MI327 having separate- and common outputs
respectively.
MI325: The 3 phases are treated completely separate with
regard of the settings, blocking inputs and trip outputs just like 3
single phase functions.
nd
MI327: The initiation of the 2 stage for a phase is blocking the
st
internal trip of the 1 stage for the same phase. However an
st
external trip command can still be generated by the 1 stage
when another phase is operating (common trip signal for all 3
phases).

MOTOR OSCILLATION

Common outputs.
different to MI325.
Note: There was an error regarding the previous denomination in
the PROCESSING file: MI326 but from version 5.17 the
nomenclature is in the PROCESSING file: MI327.
Also: Observe notes for MI325!
Voltage Restraint Overcurrent 1081 MI318 50/51 C2,M
Motor oscillation protection is available on the PROCESSING 1045 MI119 C2,M
from
Firmware version 5.24 onwards.

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.2. TECHNICAL DATA
9.2.1. Overcurrent IDMT 1-phasig 2-stufig
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MI125 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

IDMT current, 1 phase, 2 stage 1038 MI125 50/51 C2,M,L
INVERSE DEFINITE MINIMUM TIME
1 phase, 2 stage Inverse Definite Minimum Time current function.
MI125
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 0.05 ... 2 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Time multiplier stage 1: 0.050 ... 1.000 s in 0.005 s steps
Characteristic: extremely/very/normal/long IDMT
Operating value stage 2: 1 ... 31 xIn in 1 xIn steps
Definite time delay stage 2: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.2.2. Overcurrent IDMT 3 Phase, 2 Stage

IDMT Current, 3 phase, 2 stage, 1037 MI325 50/51 C2,M,L
Separate outputs.
different to MI325.).
Please Note: The logic of the IDMT characteristic MI325 slightly
differs from the MI327 having separate- and common outputs
respectively.
MI325: The 3 phases are treated completely separate with
regard of the settings, blocking inputs and trip outputs just like 3
single phase functions.
nd
MI327: The initiation of the 2 stage for a phase is blocking the
st
internal trip of the 1 stage for the same phase. However an
st
external trip command can still be generated by the 1 stage
when another phase is operating (common trip signal for all 3
phases).
3-phase 2 stage Inverse Definite Minimum Time current function.
MI325
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage1 L1
Trip stage1 L1
Initiation stage1 L2
Trip stage1 L2
Trip stage1 L3
Trip stage2 L1
Trip stage2 L2
Trip stage2 L3

MOTOR OSCILLATION
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1/ phase 1: 0.05 ... 2 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Time multiplier stage 1/ phase 1: 0.050 ... 4.000 s in 0.025 s steps
Characteristic/ phase 1: extremely/very/normal/long IDMT
Operating value stage 2/ phase 1: 1 ... 50 xIn in 0,1 xIn steps
Definite time delay stage 2/ phase 1: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

MOTOR OSCILLATION

Common outputs.
different to MI325.
Note: There was an error regarding the previous denomination in
the PROCESSING file: MI326 but from version 5.17 on the
nomenclature is in the PROCESSING file: MI327.
Also: Observe notes for MI325!
3-phase, 2-stage inverse Definite Minimum Time current function with common outputs.
MI327
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage1
Trip stage1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2

MOTOR OSCILLATION
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.2.3. Voltage Restraint Overcurrent

Voltage Restraint Overcurrent 1081 MI318 50/51 C2,M
This is a 3 phase Voltage Restraint Overcurrent protection with an independent time delayed
operating characteristic. In case of a phase to phase voltage drop for the allocated phase
current evaluation the operating current will be proportionally reduced according to the function restraint
characteristic
MI318
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage L1-L2
Voltage L2-L3
Voltage L3-L1
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 1 ... 5 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Nominal voltage: 70 ... 140 V in 1 V steps
Time delay: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.2.4. Motor Oscillation Protection

Motor oscillation protection 1045 MI119 C2,M
For PROCESSING from firmware version 5.24 onwards.
This function protects traction converter units used in railway systems supply against not permissible power
oscillations which cannot be detected by the overcurrent protection.
MI119
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Motor current
DC input: "Fou Evaluation" (from the control system)
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Measuring alarm ("Fou Evaluation ")
Setting Parameters
Oscillations/min: 1 ... 10 Pend./min in 1 Pend./min steps
Oscillation current amplitude: 0.1 ... 1 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Current gradient: 0.05 ... 0.40 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Gradient Fou: 0.1 ... 2 %/s in 0.05 %/s steps
Measuring accuracy: 0.1 ... 5 %/V in 0.02 %/s steps
Voltage at 0 %:: 0.2 ... 4.8 V in 0.005 V steps

MOTOR OSCILLATION

Oscillations Number of oscillations within the last
60 s time window
Minimum current in [A]
Current minimum of the actual oscillation movement
Maximum current in [A]
Current maximum of the actual oscillation movement
Current gradient in [A/s]
Rate of change for the motor RMS current
value
Fou gradient in [%/s]
Rate of speed change from the set frequency value of
the control system
Fou in [%]
Set frequency of the control system
Measuring
Reset ratio: not applicable since only trip output
Operating time: 2 cycles?
2% In

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.3. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

9.3.1. MI325/ MI327/ MI125
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
I5
15 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
1
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ TEST ST.2 (opt.)
+
4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) 6 - IN 03 9
-
7 + OUT 21 10
+
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) 8 - IN 04 11
-
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
1 MI325, MI327 only! RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
6
2
TRANS-
LEGEND: 3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
OPTIONAL MODULE: 5 GND 10

UAKB
TRANS-
Transducer 2 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
Shaft Current
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
Rotor E/F 9 13
10 Rx-
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 12 Tx+
RS422/485 chain line data interface Tx- 16
13
MODBUS control system interface 14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MI325 IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 98 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. Wiring Diagram

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.3.2. MI318
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
+ - GND 1
I L1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
OUT 03 6
MAIN I L3 7
TRANSF. OUT 04 8
9
OUT 05 10
DRS- OUT 06
11
12
COMPACT2A OUT 07
13
14
15
OUT 08 16
X5
1
OUT 09 2
3
OUT 10 4
5
OUT 11 6
X8 7
1
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
G U5 1
GEN. 10
3~ X4
OUT 17 2
3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
DESIGN OF GEN.
R 7 + OUT 21 10
NEUTRAL POINT: ISOLATED OR 8 IN 04 11
-
EARTHED VIA 9 + OUT 22 12
RESISTOR 10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
1 DRS STANDARD 12 - IN 06 15
APPLICATION 13 + OUT 24 16
USING Uph-ph 14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
6
RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
LEGEND:
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
OPTIONAL MODULE: 9
Tx-
GND
Transducer 2
Shaft Current 11
Rotor E/F +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) Rx- 13
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface GND 14
RS422/485 chain line data interface Tx+ 15
MODBUS control system interface Tx- 16
X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MI318 VOLT. RESTRAINED O/C WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 99 MI318 Volt. Restrained O/C Wiring Diagram

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.3.3. MI119
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
ASYNCHRON- 9 X6
M U5 1
MOTOR 10
3~ X4
OUT 17 2
3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
R 7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
LEGEND: RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
OPTIONAL MODULE: 6
Transducer 2 3
TRANS-
SI02 8
DUCER 1 Tx+
MOD-
Shaft Current
BUS
4 Tx- 9
Rotor E/F
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) TRANS-

X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
RS422/485 chain line data interface Rx+ 12

MODBUS control system interface 9 13
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MI119 MOTOR OSCILLATION WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 100 MI119 Motor Oscillation Wiring Diagram

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS

9.4.1. MI325/ MI327/ MI125
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I L1
I L2
I L3
1
GEN.
G
3~
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
1 MI325, MI327 only! OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 51 Alarm
51 Trip

VERSION 2
MI325 IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 101 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. Logic Diagram

MOTOR OSCILLATION
NOTEBOOK
|IL1| > 1,05 * PHASE A

I L1 tTRIP STAGE 1
(Oper. Val.
set characteristic Ph.A
St.1 Ph.A)
set TMS St.1 Ph.A
|IL2| > 1,05 * t = tTRIP

I L2
(Oper. Val.
STAGE 1
St.1 Ph.B)
IL1 / IL1set
|IL3| > 1,05 * tTRIP 1 = TMSSt.1 Ph.A * (K /

I L3 ((IL1 / IL1 set) ** E - 1))
(Oper. Val.
St.1 Ph.C)
1 explan: see LOGIC DIAGRAM VE2/ LEGEND
4
PHASE B
|IL1| >
(Oper. Val. PHASE C
St.2 Ph.A)
t > TIME DELAY St.2 PH.A &
|IL2| >
(Oper. Val. t > TIME DELAY St.2 PH.B
St.2 Ph.B) &
t > TIME DELAY St.2 PH.C

|IL3| > &
(Oper. Val.
St.2 Ph.C)
2 2 2
BIN. I/0
TEST PRESET
ST.1 1
0 LED-
2 DISPLAY
2 ALARM
ALARM ST.1
ST.1 3
BIN. I/0 2
BL. >=1
>=1
>=1
PRESET &
&&
ST.1 &&
& ALARM
ALARMST.1
ALARM ST.1
ST.1
1
0
TRIP ST.1
ALARM ST.1 3
BIN. I/0 >=1
>=1
TEST >=1 & LED-
PRESET &&
ST.2 &&
& TRIP ST.1
ALARM
ALARM ST.1
ST.1 MATRIX
1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
0
1
ALARM
ALARM ST.2
ST.1 4
0
BIN. I/0 >=1
>=1
>=1
BL. PRESET &
&&
&&
& ALARM
ALARMST.2
ALARM ST.1
ST.1
ST.2
1
0
TRIP ST.2
ALARM ST.1 4 TRIP-
FUNCTION >=1
>=1
>=1 MATRIX
&
&&
OUTPUT &&
& TRIP ST.2
ALARM ST.1
ALARM ST.1 2
1
0
2 all ALARM- and TRIP-signals
available separately for phases
L1, L2, L3 for both stages at
TRIP-MATRIX and LED-MATRIX.
PROCESSING 3
4
1.stage: INVERSE TIME O/C
2.stage: DEFINITE TIME O/C
IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. WITH PHASE-SEPARATED OUTPUTS

LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 102 IDMT Overcurr. 3-PH.2-ST. With Phase-Separated Outputs Logic Diagram / Processing

MOTOR OSCILLATION
NOTEBOOK
|IL1| > 1,05 * PHASE A

I L1 tTRIP STAGE 1
(Oper. Val.
set characteristic Ph.A
St.1 Ph.A)
set TMS St.1 Ph.A
|IL2| > 1,05 * t = tTRIP

I L2
(Oper. Val.
STAGE 1
St.1 Ph.B)
IL1 / IL1set
|IL3| > 1,05 * tTRIP 1 = TMSSt.1 Ph.A * (K /

I L3 ((IL1 / IL1 set) ** E - 1))
(Oper. Val.
St.1 Ph.C)
1 explan: see LOGIC DIAGRAM VE2/ LEGEND
4
PHASE B
|IL1| >
(Oper. Val. PHASE C
St.2 Ph.A)
t > TIME DELAY St.2 PH.A
|IL2| >
(Oper. Val. t > TIME DELAY St.2 PH.B
St.2 Ph.B)
t > TIME DELAY St.2 PH.C

|IL3| >
(Oper. Val.
St.2 Ph.C)
2 2 2
BIN. I/0
TEST PRESET
ST.1 1
0 LED-
DISPLAY
ALARM ST.1 3
BIN. I/0 2
BL. >=1
PRESET &
ST.1 & ALARM ST.1
1
0
TRIP ST.1 3
BIN. I/0 >=1
TEST PRESET & LED-
ST.2 & TRIP ST.1 MATRIX
1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
0
1
ALARM ST.2 4
0
BIN. I/0 >=1
BL. PRESET &
& ALARM ST.2
ST.2
1
0
TRIP ST.2 4
TRIP-
FUNCTION >=1 MATRIX
&
OUTPUT & TRIP ST.2
2
1
0
all ALARM- and TRIP-signals
PROCESSING
2
are summed up for phases
L1, L2, L3 at TRIP-MATRIX 3 1.stage: INVERSE TIME O/C
and LED-MATRIX. 4 2.stage: DEFINITE TIME O/C
MI327 IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. WITH PHASE COMMON OUTPUTS

FOR ALL PHASES LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 103 MI327 IDMT Overcurr. 3-PH. 2-ST. With Phase Common Outputs For All Phases Logic Diagram / Processing

MOTOR OSCILLATION
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI325, MI327, MI125
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MI325,
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation) MI327,
1
0
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS disabled (test-operation) MI125
|IL1| > 1,05 * Measuring range of 1.stage starts at |IL1| = 1,05 * |Iset|.
(Oper. Val. Note: |IL1| <= 1,0 reset alarm (reset energy capacity memory variable to 0).
St.1 Ph.A)
1,0 < |IL1| < 1,05 keep old (= freeze energy capacity memory variable)
tTRIP
STAGE 1
1 |IL1| <= 1,05 * |Iset| alarm is resetted
1.717,98 sec.
2 1,0 < |IL1| < 1,05 keep old
5
3 |IL1| > 1,05 pick-up = alarm
4
4 tTRIP-range: (1per.) ... (1.717,98 sec.)
5
Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve Characteristics (IEC)
1 per FORMULA (IEC255-4, BS142)
IL1 / IL1set
1 1,05 * IL1 / IL1set tTRIP = TMS * (K / (( I / Iset) ** E-1))
NOTE: STAGE 2 ALARM BLOCKS
1 2 3
STAGE 1 TRIP! (IDMT-CHARACT.)
IEC Curves where:

K E
CHARACTERISTIC tTRIP trip time
Extremly Inverse 80 2 TMS time multiplier setting (st.1)
Very Inverse 13,5 1 I input current
Normal Inverse 0,14 0,02 Iset pickups current setpoint
Long Inverse 120 1
K, E constants (see left!)
Programmable
MATRIX (row 2...14) of DISPLAY PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MI325 IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 104 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

MOTOR OSCILLATION
LONG INVERSE O/C

IEC CURVES
1000
t[s]
100
TMS = 1,0 O/C-SET VALUE

3 OF STAGE 2
1
10
TMS = 0,5
TMS = 0,1
0,1
0,01
0.001
1 10 I/Iset 2
2
100
STAGE 1 STAGE 2
LONG INVERSE DEF. TIME
FORMULA: STAGE 2
tTRIP. = TMS * (120
.
/ ((I / Iset) ** 1-1)) TAKES OVER
(DEF. MIN. TIME)
1 ALARM OF STAGE 2 3 TMS TIME MULIPLIER SETTING
BLOCKS TRIP OF STAGE 1
2 SCALE OF AXIS VALID FOR STAGE 1 ONLY!
MI325 IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. IEC/ LONG INVERSE-CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 105 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. IEC/ Long Inverse-Characteristic

MOTOR OSCILLATION
NORMAL INVERSE O/C

IEC CURVES
1000
t[s]
100
O/C-SET VALUES
10 FOR STAGE 2
3
TMS = 1,0
TMS = 0,5
1
TMS = 0,1
0,1
0,01
0.001 2
1 10 I/Iset 100
STAGE 1 STAGE 2
NORMAL INVERSE DEF. TIME
FORMULA: STAGE 2
tTRIP = TMS * (0,14 / ((I / IEW) ** 0,02-1)) TAKES OVER
(DEF. MIN. TIME)
1 WARNUNG STUFE 2 3 TMS TIME MULIPLIER SETTING
BLOCKIERT AUSLSUNG DER STUFE 1
2 ACHSENSKALIERUNG NUR FR STUFE 1 GLTIG!
MI325 IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. IEC/ NORMAL INVERSE-CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 106 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. IEC/ Normal Inverse-Characteristic

MOTOR OSCILLATION
VERY INVERSE O/C

IEC CURVES
1000
t[s]
100
10
TMS = 1,0 O/C-SET VALUE

FOR STAGE 2
1
TMS = 0,5
TMS = 0,1
0,1
0,01
0.001
1 10 I/IEW 2
100
STAGE 1 STAGE 2
VERY INVERSE DEF. TIME
FORMULA: STAGE 2
tTRIP = TMS * (13,5 / ((I / IEW) ** 1-1)) TAKES OVER
(DEF. MIN. TIME)
1 ALARM OF STAGE 2 2 SCALE OF AXIS VALID FOR STAGE ! ONLY!
BLOCKS TRIP OF STAGE 1 3 TMS TIME MULIPLIER SETTING
MI325 IDMT OVERCURR. 3-PH. 2-ST. IEC/ VERY INVERSE-CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 107 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Overcurr. IEC / Very Inverse-Characteristic

MOTOR OSCILLATION
EXTREMLY INVERSE O/C

IEC CUINVERSE
EXTREMLY RVES O/C
IEC CURVES
1000
1000
t[s]
t [s]
100
100
10
10
TMS = 1,0
1
1 TMS = 0,5
O/C-SET VALUE
FOR STAGE 2
TMS = 0,1
0,1
0,1
0,01
0,01 1
0.001
0,001
1
1
10
10
I/Iset 2
100
100
STAGE 1 I /2Iset
STAGE
EXTREMLY INVERSE DEF. TIME
FORMEL: STAGE 2
tTRIP = TMS * (80 / ((I / Iset) ** 2-1)) TAKES OVER
(DEF. MIN. TIME)
1 ALARM OF STAGE 2 2 SCALE OF AXIS VALID FOR STAGE 1 ONLY!
BLOCKS TRIP OF STAGE 1 3 TMS TIME MULIPLIER SETTING
MI325 IDMT STROM 3-PH. 2-ST. IEC/ EXTREMLY INVERSE-CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 108 MI325 MI327 MI125 IDMT Strom IEC/ Extremly Inverse-Characteristic

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.4.2. MI318
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
I L1 I1
I L2 I2
I L3 I3
U1
U L1L2
1 U2
U L2L3
U3
U L3L1
G
GEN.
3~
DESIGN OF GEN.
R NEUTRAL POINT:
ISOLATED OR
EARTHED VIA RESISTOR
1 DRS STANDARD TEST TRIP

APPLICATION
(OPTIONAL) COMMANDS
USING Uph-ph
BLOCKING OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
(OPTIONAL)
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 51 Alarm
51 Trip

VERSION 2
MI318 VOLT. RESTRAINED O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 109 MI318 Volt. Restrained O/C Logic Diagram

MOTOR OSCILLATION
NOTEBOOK
I L1
CHOOSE
I L2 I > RESTRAINED
MAX. OF
I L3 SET VALUE
IL1,IL2,IL3
BASIC SET VALUE

OPERATE VALUE RESTRAINED
SET VALUE
MULTIPLIER
SET VALUE: 1,0

NOM.VOLTAGE 0,9
U L1L2
CHOOSE
U L2L3 0,1
MIN. OF Uph-ph / Uph-ph nom.
U L3L1 UL1L2,UL2L3,UL3L1 0,1 0,8 1,0
SEE: VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
TEST
BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET DISPLAY
1
0
BLOCKING >=1 ALARM

&
BIN. I/0 LED-
& ALARM
PRESET MATRIX
1
>=1
0 & BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP 1
0
t > tset
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MI318 VOLT. RESTRAINED O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 110 MI318 Volt. Restrained O/C Logic Diagram Processing

MOTOR OSCILLATION
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI318
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MI318
1
0
MULTIPLIER VOLTAGE RESTRAINED-CHARACTERISTIC.

1,0 Uph-ph actual (measured) phase-phase voltage.
0,9
Uph-ph nom nominal phase-phase voltage of generator
(=SET VALUE: NOMINAL VOLTAGE).
MULTIPLIER used to calculate the RESTRAINED SET VALUE
0,1 according to formula:
Uph-ph / Uph-ph nom.
0,1 0,8 1,0
SEE: VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
RESTRAINED SET VALUE = OPERATE VALUE x MULTIPLIER
BASIC SET VALUE

OPERATE VALUE
Set value (see Relay parameters): System nom. voltage.
Multiplication
CHOOSE
MAX. OF The maximum current signal is chosen only and used for further computation.
IL1,IL2,IL3
CHOOSE
MIN. OF The minimum voltage signal is chosen only and used for further computation.
UL1,UL2,UL3
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX

MI318 VOLT. RESTRAINED O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 111 MI318 Volt. Restrained O/C Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

MOTOR OSCILLATION
VOLTAGE RESTRAINED
CHARACTERISTIC
OPERATE VALUE MULTIPLIER
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGE (ACTUAL)
RATED PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGE (SET VALUE)
MI318 VOLT. RESTR. O/C VOLTAGE RESTRAINED CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 112 MI318 Volt. Restr. O/C Voltage Restrained Characteristic

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.4.3. MI119
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
I L1 I1
PROCESSING
M ASYNCHRON-
3~ MOTOR
TEST TRIP
(OPTIONAL) COMMANDS
BLOCKING OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
(OPTIONAL)
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 51 Alarm
51 Trip

VERSION 2
MI119 MOTOR OSCILLATION LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 113 MI119 Motor Oscillation Logic Diagram

MOTOR OSCILLATION
NOTEBOOK
IRMS
IRMSmax
I L1
Calculate RMS
1 1 1
2 2 2
IRMSmin
(IL1(RMS)max -
IL1(RMS)min)
> set value
Oscill. current value
set value grad IL1(RMS) > set
Fou &
value current gradient
set value Fou Calulate grad Fou > blocking
coming
grad Fou
from
central Increase Oscill Counter by 0,5
system osc.! (corresp. with osc)
Oscill. Counter > set value

Oscillations/min
TEST
BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET Reset Oscill. Counter DISPLAY
1 MEAS. ALARM
0
Fou > 4,5V DC
>=1 &
BLOCKING Fou < 0,5V DC
BIN. I/0 MEAS. ALARM, LED-

PRESET MATRIX
1
0
1
& BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP 1
0
t > tset
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MI119 MOTOR OSCILLATION LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 114 MI119 Motor Oscillation Logic Diagram Processing

MOTOR OSCILLATION
LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
1
via notebook:
1 function 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective
function MI119
1
0
IRMS
RMSmax
RMS value of IL1.

Osc. counter is increased by 0,5 if (RMSmax RMSmin) > set.
t Check is done every oscillation.
RMSmin
Details: see drawing Oscillation detection.
grad IL1(RMS) > set In order to get a valid oscillation (counter increases by 0,5) the gradient
value current gradient
must be > set.
Details: see drawing Oscillation defection.
grad fou > blocking Oscillattions may be caused by changing the Motor - Speed setting
(by operators). In this case the Osc. Counter is resetted and additional
blocked for 10sec.
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX

MI119 MOTOR OSCILLATION LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 115 MI119 Motor Oscillation Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

MOTOR OSCILLATION
Explanation: Gradient Fou
1. Gradient Fou is used for blocking (Grad. Fou > set).

If exeeded: a) Block of TRIP
If exeeded: b) Reset Oscill. Counter to 0 for 10 sec.
Note: Gradient Fou Blocking is retriggerable.
2. Gradient Fou is calculated by the PROCESSING

using the DC input (slow Input / see Input Matrix of the Prot. Function)
and the set values Meas Sens. and Volt. at 0%.
Result of calculation: Gradient Fou
3. Meaning of Gradient Fou:

A changing of the set value for Motor Speed (by Operators) results in changes of the
Motor Speed probably accompanied by oscillations until the new speed is settled.
These oscillations depend on the change rate of the speed setting (speed setting = DC-Input)
resp. the Gradient Fou (= calculated by PROCESSING using the DC input).
Oscillations are more probable with high gradients of fou.. These oscillations are considered
to be normal operation conditions, therefore the tripping is blocked for 10s and the Osc
Counter is resetted to 0 osc.
4. Meas. Sens. [%/s]:

defines how to calculate
the difference of the motor - speed - set value using the Slow Input /DC input) signal.
Note: this input signal is just a speed difference, not a speed gradient! The gradient is calculated
by the PROCESSING.
5. Volt. at 0%: level of the DC input signal at nom speed setting (supplied by plant operators).
Note: corresponds with nom. speed of motor.
6.) Grad. Fou:

time constant for calculation of Fou:
Approx. 1sec.
DC-input = set value for delta Motorspeed

(coming from control room)
+2%
+1%
-1%
grad. Fou BLOCK BLOCK

(calculated by VE) starts starts
for 10s for 10s
set of
grad. Fou
oscill. expected/ oscill. expected/

(= normal (= normal
operation) operation)
10s 10s
block block
MI119 MOTOR OSCILLATON

EXPLANATION of grad fou - BLOCKING
Fig. 116 MI119 Motor Oscillation Explanation of ,,grad fou - Blocking

MOTOR OSCILLATION
IMOTOR(RMS-value)
max 2
max 1
delta IRMS
min 1 min 2
grad I
1 1 t
2 2
oscillation oscillation
delta IRMS =IRMS max - IRMS min

...must exceed set value Osc Curr. Value.
grad I [ARMS/sec]
during oscillation the change rate (increase or decrease) of the RMS
value of the motorcurrent must exceed the set value Curr. Grad.
Oscil. Counter: every oscillation the above conditions are checked.

If fullfilled (and no blocking) then the Oscill. Counter is increased by 0,5
oscillations.
Note: Oscillations which are older than 1min. are taken out from the Counter.
Counter is resetted by a) TRIP b) BLOCK
MI119 MOTOR OSCILLATION

OSCILLATON COUNTER DEFINITION
Fig. 117 MI119 Motor Oscillation Oscillation Counter Definition

MOTOR OSCILLATION
Setting Example MI119
Denomination of Set Value Setting Remark
Oscillations / min 8
Osc. Curr. Value 0,3A = 30% In c.t. nom. current = 1A
Curr. Grad 0,12A = 12% In c.t. nom. current = 1A
Gradient Fou 0,7%/s nom speed of motor = 100%
Meas. Sens. 1,5%/V Input (delta--speed):
0,5V-2,5% speed
2,16Vnom.speed
4,5V+3,5% speed
INPORTANT NOTE:
Input < 0,5VDC or
input > 4,5VDC
Volt. at 0% 2,15V results in "Meas Alarm" !
MI119 MOTOR OSCILLATION SETTING EXAMPLE

Fig. 118 MI119 Motor Oscillation Setting Example

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.5. FUNCTION
9.5.1. MI125/ MI325/ MI327
IDMT Overcurrent Protection:
MI125 ... 1 phase, 2 stages

MI325 ... 3 phase, 2 stage, separate outputs
MI327 ... 3 phase, 2 stage, common outputs
Applicable for all IDMT overcurrent functions the operating characteristic is:
st
1 stage: IDMT ... Inverse Definite Minimum Time
nd
2 stage: Definite Time
Function (from 5.17 onwards):

st
As soon as stage 2 is initiated the 1 stage trip is being blocked, although internally the function
is still measuring but is blocked. Thus the operating characteristic will be according to a "Definite Minimum Time"
setting whereby high fault currents will not have any influence on the definite
time delayed trip in order to obtain proper protection co-ordination.
st
Note: The blocking logic, i.e. stage 2 initiation is preventing operation of the 1 stage is also
applicable for the test inputs in case of secondary injection tests.
MI325:
The function performs as 3 single phase relays their settings being completely independent from
each other.
MI327:
Initiation of stage 2 in one phase is blocking the trip of stage1 in the same phase via function internal measures.
However, since the external alarm and trip outputs are common an overcurrent condition in another phase which is
not being blocked may still lead to a tripping
of stage 1.

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.5.2. MI318
Voltage Restraint O/C
This is a 3 phase Voltage Restraint Overcurrent protection with an independent time delayed
operating characteristic. In case of a phase to phase voltage drop for the allocated phase
current evaluation the operating current will be proportionally reduced according to the function characteristic.
Explanation regarding basic function: Please also refer to VC O/C (MQ312).
Characteristic:
A generator usually has an operating range of Vn+/-10% and therefore also In+/-10%.
For a Vn-10% condition In+10% is generally valid since P=constant and the slope of
the voltage characteristic up to 90% of nominal voltage and 100 % current, please also
refer to the LOGIC DIAGRAMS. Within the range of Vn+/-10% the operating value is not
being altered.
The start of the slope increase is set to 10% voltage and 10% current.

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.5.3. MI119
Availability of the Function:

VE1
PROCESSING from version 5.24 on
Function:
The relay function evaluates one of the three phase currents
Application:
This function protects traction converter units used in railway systems supply against not permissible power
oscillations which cannot be detected by the overcurrent protection.
Function:
This function evaluates the RMS value of the phase current whereby one phase is used as a
reference for the asynchronous motor (50 Hz/ 3 phase). When the oscillating amplitude exceeds
the configured value a trip output signal is generated as outlined below.
Details of Setting Values:
Oscillations per minute:

The number of full oscillations can be recognised for a + or sequence and the definition of an
oscillating condition is described below.
Oscillation Amplitude:
The setting value is the difference of the RMS current during an oscillation process and strictly speaking not the
amplitude but he difference between the maximum and the minimum current values is considered.
Only when during a half oscillation the setting value is exceeded the oscillation counter will
be increased by a factor of 0.5.
Example: Rated current = 1 A RMS,
Oscillation of the motor current between 0.5 A RMS and 0.8 A RMS:
Therefore the oscillation amplitude should be adjusted to 0.3 A.
Setting example: 33 % of the nominal motor current.
Current Gradient:
Speed rate of change of the motor current RMS value.
Only when this current gradient is exceeded during a power swing it will be evaluated as
an oscillation.
Note: The PROCESSING Program computes the slope of the slope between the starting point and the
specific oscillation current, i.e. the maximum and the minimum of the oscillating motor RMS current value.
Setting Example: 12% of the rated motor current per second.
Gradient Fou:
The rate of speed change for the frequency target by the station control system.
This can accept either positive or negative values but only the absolute value is considered.
Note: The control system is determining a frequency change but not a change of the angular velocity.
The gradient is computed by the PROCESSING program on the basis of the required frequency change
and the slow input SI01 measures the frequency setting change initiated by the control system
which is a frequency control and not a speed control command.
For the protective function only the frequency rate of change is considered and when the value
is exceeded then the counter is reset to zero and remains the same for 10 seconds.
It is assumed that short time oscillations are a normal operating condition during large changes
of the frequency control value and must not be considered as an oscillation configured in the
DRS Protection System.

MOTOR OSCILLATION
The "gradient Fou" is also be retriggered and the time constant for the computation of the
Degree Fou is actually about 1 second but may be set higher due to some time constants
of the motor which can be between 5 ... 10 s.
Setting Example: 0.7 %/s.
Measuring Sensitivity:
This does not concern the Fou gradient but only the input matrix / SI01:
Target change for the frequency.
The units are in %/V (and not %/s / V).
Setting example (also see below): 1.5 %/V.
Voltage at 0%:
As outlined above.
Setting example:
0.5V corresponds to -2.5 %
4.5V corresponds to +3.5%
Therefore the zero point lies at a voltage of: 2.16V.
The measuring sensitivity fort his example will result in: 1.5 %/V
Explanation of Inputs:
Motor Current:
One selectable phase of the motor current
(asynchronous motor 3-phase, 50 Hz).
DC Input: "Fou Target" coming from the control system:

Speed rate of change for the frequency target by the control station.
Explanation of Outputs:
Trip:
Motor oscillation has been recognised.
Measuring Fault:
Refers to the DC input: "Fou Target" coming from the control system.
This DC signal (SI) should always be between 0.5V DC and 4.5 V DC
even during standstill of the motor otherwise an alarm annunciation
Measuring Fault will be given.
Recommendation: Supervision of the measuring transducer loop, etc.
(transducer failure, wire break, ) with the aid of the DRS-WIN
measured values window display.
Features of the Protective Function:
The PROCESSING program is counting all oscillations from 0 % of the motor nominal current onwards,
i.e. the minimum value.
The oscillation counter is evaluating in 0.5 steps (half oscillations). For each half oscillation
following criteria have to be fulfilled:
Oscillation current amplitude >
Current gradient >
Gradient Fou <.

MOTOR OSCILLATION
st
For each half oscillation the 1 minute window is starting to run separately. After expiry of this
period the corresponding half oscillation is deducted from the counter values and if no other subsequent
oscillations are taking place it can be observed that the counter will slowly tend to
zero (except there was a trip then the counter is immediately reset).
The oscillation counter is only adding when during an oscillation the RMS current differential
value is exceeding the set oscillation current amplitude whereby the reference point will be the
last measured current minimum or current maximum. The oscillation or half oscillation can either
start from the + or - direction.
Applying the blocking- ort he test input will reset the oscillation counter to 0.

MOTOR OSCILLATION
9.6. COMMISSIONING
!!! Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!!!
9.6.1. MI325/ MI327/ MI125
Please refer to document "MI Current DT".
9.6.2. MI318
Please refer to document "MI Current DT".

It should be noted that the actual current setting during the primary short circuit tests have
to be lowered to about 10% according to the "Voltage Restraint Characteristic".
9.6.3. MI119
-Secondary Tests:
With a suitable test set inject a variable single phase current according to the characteristic
(please also refer to Item "Function MI119"):
Inputs
Analogue: Motor current
DC input: "Fou Target" (from control system)
Test input
Note:
By simultaneous varying of the DC input "Fou Target " a reset of the oscillation counter is achieved. After resetting
the counter to "0" the relay function will remain blocked for 10 s,
i.e. the counter will remain at zero during the next 10 seconds.
Note:
When on the "Fou Target" DC input there is no signal present the function will produce a
"Measuring Fault" alarm:
This DC signal (SI) should always be between 0.5V DC and 4.5 V DC
even during standstill of the motor otherwise an alarm annunciation
Measuring Fault will be given.
Check of the displayed function computed values:

Oscillations Number of oscillations within the last
60 seconds
Minimum current in [A]
Current minimum of the actual
oscillation
Maximum current in [A]
Current maximum of the actual
oscillation
Current gradient in [A/s]
Rate of speed change of the motor
RMS current value
Take a plausibility check of the displayed values.
On-load Commissioning Tests:
Check the input values via the Measured Values window of the DRS System.

MI... OVER/UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME (DT)
10. MI... OVER/UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME (DT)
10.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MI . . . Over/Undercurrent DT Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MI . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 1 stage, 0.1-5A 1005 MI111 50/51 C2,M,L
Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 1 stage, 1-15A 1047 MI112 50/51 C2,M,L
Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 2 stage, 1007 MI121 50/51 C2,M,L
0.1-5A/ 0.1-30A
Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 2 stage, 1- 1049 MI122 50/51 C2,M,L
15A/ 1-50A
Over/undercurrent protection 3 phase, 1 stage, 0.1-5A/ 10s, 1004 MI311 50/51 C2,M
separate outputs.
Note: Preferred type see MI313 (common outputs).
Over/undercurrent protection 3 phase, 1 stage, 1-15A/ 10s, 1046 MI312 50/51 C2,M
separate outputs.
Over/undercurrent protection 3 phase, 1 stage, 0.1-5A/ 10s, 1055 MI313 50/51 C2,M,L
common outputs.
Note: MI313 is preferred to MI311 (common outputs).
Over/undercurrent protection 3 phase, 1 stage, 1-15A/ 10s, 1056 MI314 50/51 C2,M,L
common outputs.
Over/undercurrent protection, DT characteristic, 3 phase, 2 1006 MI321 50/51 C2,M
stage,
0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-30A /10s, separate outputs.
stage,
1-15A/10s // 1-50A /10s, separate outputs.

Over/undercurrent protection, DT characteristic, 3 phase, 2 1052 MI323 50/51 C2,M,L

stage,
0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-30A /10s, common outputs.
Over/undercurrent protection, DT characteristic, 3 phase, 2 1054 MI324 50/51 C2,M,L;
stage, VE1,PROCE
1-15A/10s // 1-50A /10s, common outputs. SSING
stage, extended time delay.
Fast overcurrent "Quick Current I>>>" ; is preferably 1091 MI113 50 C2,M
used as transformer tank protection for the German Railway
System (DB).
Caution: This is an oversampling function!
Caution: This function must only be conditionally used with other
functions and has not to be combined with frequency functions
due to a possible frequency jitter!
Generally valid: Do not combine with functions using higher
harmonics. Due to the sampling jitters, which are created in
conjunction with the oversampling mode, a resulting tolerance
range of the Fourier evaluation will occur.
Should a combination with such functions be absolutely
necessary then in each particular case the correct response of
all functions involved has to be thoroughly tested during which
the "Quick Current I>>>" function is to
be always active.
Current, DC, 2 stage 1050 MI120 50/51 C2,M
Directional overcurrent protection DT characteristic, 1039 MI132 50/51 C2,M,L
1 phase, 3 stage for single phase systems, respectively two
phase traction generators,
0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s
1 phase, 3 stage, extended time delay,
0.1-5A/180s // 0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s
3 phase, 3 stage,
0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s.

10.2. TECHNICAL DATA
10.2.1. Over/Undercurrent DT 1 Phase, 1 Stage

Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 1 stage, 0.1-5A 1005 MI111 50/51 C2,M,L
1 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection.
MI111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0.1 ... 5 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Type: Over-/under detection
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 1 stage, 1-15A 1047 MI112 50/51 C2,M,L
MI112
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating time: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 2 stage, 1007 MI121 50/51 C2,M,L
0.1-5A/ 0.1-30A
MI121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating time stage 1: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


Over/undercurrent protection 1 phase, 2 stage, 1- 1049 MI122 50/51 C2,M,L
15A/ 1-50A
MI122
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


Over/undercurrent protection 3 phase, 1 stage, 0.1-5A/ 10s, 1004 MI311 50/51 C2,M
separate Outputs
Note: Preferred type see MI313 (common Outputs).
3 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, separate outputs.
MI311
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation phase L1
Trip phase L1
Initiation phase L2
Trip phase L2
Initiation phase L3
Trip phase L3
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


Over/undercurrent protection 3 phase, 1 stage, 1-15A/ 10s, 1046 MI312 50/51 C2,M
separate Outputs
Note: Preferred type see MI314 (common Outputs).
MI312
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


Over/undercurrent protection 3 phase, 1 stage, 0.1-5A/ 10s, 1055 MI313 50/51 C2,M,L
common outputs.
3 phase, 1 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, common outputs.
MI313
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


Over/undercurrent protection 3 phase, 1 stage, 1-15A/ 10s, 1056 MI314 50/51 C2,M,L
common outputs.
MI134
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

10.2.4. Over/Undercurrent DT 3 phase, 2 stage

stage,
0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-30A /10s, separate outputs.
MI321
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 1 ... 5 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Operating time stage 1: 0 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Operating value stage 2: 1 ... 30 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


stage,
1-15A/10s // 1-50A /10s, separate outputs.
MI322
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1 L1
Trip stage1 L1
Initiation stage 1 L2
Trip stage 1 L2
Trip stage 1 L3
Trip stage 2 L1
Trip stage 2 L2
Trip stage 2 L3
Setting Parameters

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


stage,
0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-30A /10s, common outputs
3 phase, 2 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection,
common outputs.
MI323
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


stage, extended timing range,
3 phase, 2 stage definite time current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection, common outputs with
an extended time delay for stage 1.
MI326
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2
Setting Parameters
Operating time: 0 ... 180 s in 1 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


stage,
1-15A/10s // 1-50A /10s, common outputs.
MI324
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage1
Initiation stage2
Trip stage2
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

10.2.5. Fast Overcurrent Function, 1 phase, 1 stage
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Fast overcurrent "Quick Current I>>>"; is preferably 1091 MI113 50 C2,M
used as transformer tank protection for the German Railway
System (DB).
Caution: This is an oversampling function!
Caution: This function must only be conditionally used with other
functions and has not to be combined with frequency functions
due to possible frequency jitter!
Generally valid: Do not combine with functions using higher
harmonics. Due to the sampling jitters which are created in
conjunction with the oversampling mode it will result into a
tolerance range of the Fourier evaluation.
Should a combination with such functions be absolutely
necessary then in each particular case the correct response of
all functions involved has to be thoroughly tested whereby "
Quick Current I>>>" is always active.
1 phase, 1 stage fast overcurrent definite time delay function (DT) with instantaneous actual
value computation.
MI113
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Setting Parameters
Reset delay: 0.1 ... 0.5 s in 0.01 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: Not applicable since no time delay
Operating time: 10 ms including relay outputs
2% In

10.2.6. Over/Undercurrent DC Input, 2 stage

Current, DC, 2 stage 1050 MI120 50/51 C2,M
2 stage definite time DC current function (DT) selectable for over- or under detection.
MI120
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input for current [0 ... 5 V]
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Measuring accuracy: 0.10 ... 10 A/V in 0.01 A/V steps
Voltage at 0 Amps: 0 ... 4.995 V in 0.005 V steps

DC mean value: in [A]
DC instantaneous value: in [A]
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

10.2.7. Directional Overcurrent DT 1 Phase, 3 Stage

1 phase, 3 stage,
for single phase systems, respectively two phase traction
generators,
0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s
1 phase, 3 stage directional overcurrent function (DT).
MI132
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage (in phase with current)
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Test input stage 3
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Initiation stage 3
Trip stage 3
Setting Parameters

Angle: In [Degrees]

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


1 phase, 3 stage, extended time delay range, for single phase
systems, respectively two phase traction generators.
0.1-5A/180s // 0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s
1 phase, 3 stage directional overcurrent function (DT) with extended time delay for stage 1.
For single phase systems, respectively double phase systems, i.e. railway traction application.
MI133
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage (in phase with current)
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Test input stage 3
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 3
Initiation stage 3
Setting Parameters

Angle: In [Degrees]

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


3 phase, 3 stage,
0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s // 0.1-5A/10s.
3 phase, 3 stage directional overcurrent function DT.
MI332
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Test input stage 3
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Initiation stage 3
Trip stage 3
Setting Parameters

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


10.3.1. MI111/ MI112/ MI121/ MI122/ MI311/ MI312/ MI313/ MI314 MI321/ MI322/ MI323/ MI324/ MI326
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
1 26 5A
27 I9 3
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
-
2 5 + OUT 20 8
+
-
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
-
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
1 FOR ACTUAL NUMBER OF PHASES: 12 - IN 06 15
SEE LIST OF MODELS ON LOGIC DIAGRAM. 13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
2 FOR ACTUAL NUMBER OF STAGES: X2
15 +
SEE LIST OF MODELS ON LOGIC DIAGRAM. 16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
LEGEND: 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
2
TRANS-
OPTIONAL MODULE: 3 SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
-UAKB Transducer 1 4 Tx- 9

OPTIONAL MODULE
Transducer 2 5 GND 10
Shaft Current 6
UAKB
TRANS-
Rotor E/F 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) Rx+ 12

9 13
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 10 Rx-
RS422/485 chain line data interface GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
MODBUS control system interface 12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DEF. TIME OVER-/UNDER-CURRENT:

MI111 CURRENT 1-PH. 1-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR AVAILABLE MODELS: SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 119 Def. Time Over- / Under-Current: MI111 Current 1-PH. 1.ST. Wiring Diagram

10.3.2. MI120
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03
8 5A
6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
I L1 X5
22 1A
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
-
5 + OUT 20 8
+
-
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
-
9 + OUT 22 12
1A AC 10 - IN 05 13
resp. 11 + OUT 23 14
4...20mA DC 12 - IN 06 15
5A AC 13 OUT 24
+ 16
I L1 MEAS. TRANSDUCER 14 - IN 07
X2
...A ACmA DC 15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
LEGEND:
2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS

OPTIONAL MODULE
6
UAKB
Shaft Current TRANS-

Rotor E/F 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 9 13
GND 14
RS422/485 chain line data interface 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MI120 CURRENT DC 2-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 120 MI120 Current DC 2-ST. Wiring Diagram

10.3.3. MI113
+ - BATT.
L1
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
I3
DRS-
9 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
9
COMPACT2A
12 I4
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
+
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
LEGEND: 16 IN 08 4
-
OPTIONAL MODULE: X7
6
-UAKB Transducer 1 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
Transducer 2 2
TRANS-
Shaft Current 3 SI02 8
DUCER 1 Tx+
MOD-
BUS
Rotor E/F 4 Tx- 9

OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB

TRANS-
SI03
RS422/485 chain line data interface DUCER 2 +5 11
8
RS422/485
MODBUS control system interface Rx+ 12

9 13
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MI113 CURRENT I>>> (QUICK CURRENT) WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 121 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Wiring Diagram

10.3.4. MI132
R T + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
IR 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03
8 5A
6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
I4 9
DRS-
12
13 1A
OUT 05 10
MAIN 14 5A 11
COMPACT2A
15 I5
TRANSF. OUT 06 12
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
DIR. 1 *) 26 5A
3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
IR I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U R-T U1 9
IR 2 OUT 13 10
U R-T 3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U3 OUT 15 14
G 6
15
7
GEN. 2~ OUT 16 16
8 U4
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
TEST STAGE1 (opt.) + 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
-
5 + OUT 20 8
*) DEFINITION TEST STAGE3 (opt.) + 6 - IN 03 9
DIR. DIR.2 -
7 + OUT 21 10
SEE DRAWING BLOCKING ST.1 (opt.) + 8 - IN 04 11
-
DEF. OF DIR 9 + OUT 22 12
BLOCKING ST.2 (opt.) + 10 - IN 05 13
-
11 + OUT 23 14
BLOCKING ST.3 (opt.) + 12 - IN 06 15
-
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
LEGEND: 6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
OPTIONAL MODULE

6
UAKB
Rotor E/F TRANS-

7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
GND 14
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 122 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Wiring Diagram

10.3.5. MI332
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
MAIN I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
IL1 22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
DIR. 1 *) OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
IL1 IL2 IL3 X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
UL1L2 U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
G U5 1
GEN. 10
3~ X4
OUT 17 2
3
1 + OUT 18 4
-
3 + OUT 19 6
-
5 + OUT 20 8
-
7 + OUT 21 10
*) DEFINITION BLOCKING ST.1 (opt.) + 8 - IN 04 11
-
DIR.1 DIR.2 9 + OUT 22 12
SEE DRAWING BLOCKING ST.2 (opt.) + 10 - IN 05 13
-
11 + OUT 23 14
DEF. OF DIR BLOCKING ST.3 (opt.) + IN 06
- 12 - 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
NOTE: X2
15 +
SEQU. OF PHASES: L1 L2 L3 16 IN 08 4
-
(PHASE ROTATION: RIGHT) RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
6
LEGEND: 2
TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
OPTIONAL MODULE: DUCER 1

BUS
4 Tx- 9
-UAKB Transducer 1
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Transducer 2 6
UAKB

7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
Rotor E/F 8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
10 Rx-
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface GND 14
15
12 Tx+
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MI332 DIR. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 123 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-St. Wiring Diagram

10.4. LOGIC DIAGRAMS

10.4.1. MI111/ MI112/ MI121/ MI122/ MI311/ MI312/ MI313/ MI314 MI321/ MI322/ MI323/ MI324/ MI326
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
I L1
I L2
PROCESSING
1
I L3
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
2
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
1 FOR ACTUAL NUMBER OF PHASES:
TRIP
SEE LIST OF MODELS BELOW! COMMANDS
2 FO- ACTUALNAUMBER OF STAGES: OUTPUT CB1
SEE LIST OF MODELS BELOW! CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY 51 Alarm
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS COMPACT 2 51 Trip

VERSION 2

MI111 CURRENT 1-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 124 MI111 MI121 MI311 MI313 MI314 MI315 MI321 MI322 MI323 MI324 MI326 Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
ALARM
(|FFT 1.H.| of IL1 ) < (set value
STAGE 1 2
set value: OPERATE VALUE ST.1)
PH. L1
>=1
Type = PH. L2
(|FFT 1.H.| of IL1 ) > (set value
OVER- PH. L3
OPERATE VALUE ST.1)
I L1 DETECTION
I L2 1 Type = ALARM
(|FFT 1.H.| of IL1 ) < (set value
I L3 1 UNDER- STAGE 2 2
OPERATE VALUE ST.2)
DETECTION PH. L1
>=1
PH. L2
PH. L3
OPERATE VALUE ST.2)
L1
L2
TEST ST.1 L3
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST.2
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2 >=1
&
& ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 LED-
0 DISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1>
& TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
ALARM ST.2 MATRIX
BLOCK. ST.2 >=1
&
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0 1
TRIP ST.2 0
t2 >
OUTPUT
1
TRIP-
0
MATRIX
1 NUMBER OF PHASES
PROCESSING
DEPENDS ON TYPE OF RELAY.
(SEE LIST OF MODELS ON 2 SHOWN:
LOGIC DIAGRAM) 3-PH. RELAY WITH
SUMMED UP OUTPUTS.

MI111 CURRENT 1-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 125 Def. Time Over-/Under-Current: MI111 Current 1-PH. 1-ST. Logic Diagram / Processing For Available Models:
See ,,Logic Diagram

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI111...MI326
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS disabled (test-operation) MI326
Type =
OVER- OVER- or UNDERCURRENT - relay function to be choosen via set value.
DETECTION
Type =
UNDER-
DETECTION
The measured current signal IL1 is analyzed by use of
FAST FOURIER TRANSFORMATION (FFT).
OPERATE VALUE ST.1)
The relay function uses the 1.Harmonic of IL1 only.
MI326 MODEL-NUMBERS (FIRMWARE-FUNCTIONS) EXAMPLE:
consecutive number
number of stages
number of phases
type of function (e.g. I current)
microprocessor - based hardware
MATRIX
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX


MI111 CURRENT 1-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM LEGEND / PROCESSING
Fig. 126 Def. Time Over-/Under-Current: MI111 Current 1-PH. 1ST. Logic Diagram Legend / Processing For Available Models:
See ,,Logic Diagram

10.4.2. MI113
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
L1
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 50 ALARM
50 TRIP
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
PROCESSING VERSION 2
MI113 CURRENT I>>> (QUICK CURRENT) LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 127 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Logic Diagram

CALIBRATION OF SET VALUE:

SET I>>> CORRESPONDS WITH RMS-VALUE OF CONTINUOUS COURSE OF CURRENT SIGNAL
I
RMS-VALUE
CALIBRATION IS OPTIMIZED FOR 16 2/3Hz - CURRENTS (SINE WAVE). AT 50Hz - SIGNALS THE
ACCURACY IS STILL BETTER 3%.
set value
t
OVERSAMPLING-
RATE IS CONSTANT
(NOT DEPENDING
ON FREQUENCY OF
CURRENT)
FREQUENCY OF
CURRENT 16 2/3...60 Hz
VERIFICATION OF TRIP TIME (<10ms)
set value
1 IN ORDER TO GET A TRIP
TIME 10ms: SINE WAVE
MUST NOT START AT 0dg.
t
0 90 180
5ms 5ms 1
SINE WAVE TO
START ABOVE SAMPLES OUTPUT
set RELAY
IN ORDER TO
GET CORRECT
TRIP TIME
(10ms)
MI113 CURRENT I>>> (QUICK CURRENT) DEFINITION OF FUNCTION

Fig. 128 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Definition Of Function

NOTEBOOK
OVERSAMPLING 1
(INSTANTANEOUS VALUES)
PROCESSING-
I
INTERNAL DC-OFFSET
CORRECTION
I > Iset 2
I
set
5ms 5ms
TEST
DETECTION OUTPUT
BIN. I/0 OF I > RELAY
PRESET
1 TRIP TIME 10ms
0 LED-
DISPLAY
BLOCKING TRIP
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 &
& TRIP LED-
0
MATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
FUNCTION
0
OUTPUT
1
0
1 NOTE: THIS IS AN OVER-SAMPLING- TRIP-

MODE FUNCTION. COMBINATION OF MATRIX
THIS FUNCTION WITH REGULAR
PROCESSING
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS IS
RESTRICTED! WILL RESULT IN
EXTENDED LOAD FOR CPU!
2 SEE DEFINITION OF FUNCTION
MI113 CURRENT I>>> (QUICK CURRENT) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 129 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE MODULE: MI113
CALC. INTERNAL

PRESET
1
0
via notebook: 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
OVERSAMPLING MI113 USES AN OVERSAMPLING MODE IN ORDER TO QUICKEN

(INSTANTANEOUS
VALUES) TRIPPING.
BECAUSE OF (TRIP-TIME) (1/2-PERIOD) A DC-OFFSET WOULD

PROCESSING-INTERNAL
AFFECT THE TRIGGERING AND HAS TO BE FILTERED OUT BY
DC-OFFSET CORRECTION
FIRMWARE.
I > Iset
FOR DEFINITION OF FUNCTION MI113 PLEASE SEE PAGE
I DEFINITION OF FUNCTION.
set
5ms 5ms
DETECTION OUTPUT
OF I > RELAY
TRIP TIME 10ms
Programmable
LED-indications
software-matrix for
of
MATRIX DISPLAY
PROCESSING
(row 2...14) of
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING

TRIP-
MATRIX

MI113 CURRENT I>>> (QUICK CURRENT) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 130 MI113 ,,Current I>>> (Quick Current) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

10.4.3. MI120
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
1
I L1
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
2 3
1A AC 4...20mA DC 4
5
resp. MEAS. TRANSDUCER resp.
6
5A AC ...A ACmA DC 0...20mA DC EURAX. 1...5V DC TRIP
MEAS. resp. COMMANDS
TRANS- 0...5V DC OUTPUT CB1
DUCER CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
LEGEND CONTACTS
51 Alarm
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
1 2 3 4 5 SETTING RANGES:
1 2 3 4 5 6
required primary set value set value

current range EURAX EURAX Meas. Voltage at
C.T. nom 0...0,4A AC Input Output Sensitivity 0 Ampere
EXAMPLE: 1: C.T. = 1A nom 0...0,4A AC 4...20mAC 1...5V DC 0,1A/V 1V 7 No LIFE ZERO
2: C.T. = 1A nom 0...40A AC 4...20mAC 1...5V DC 10A/V 1V (no supervision of
3: C.T. = 1A nom 0...50A AC 0...20mAC 0...5V DC 7 10A/V 0V meas. transducer
4: C.T. = 5A nom 0...200A AC 4...20mAAC 1...5V DC 50A/V 1V circuit possible)
MI120 CURRENT DC 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAMM

Fig. 131 MI120 Curent DC 2-ST. Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
|IL1| > set value

OPERATE VALUE ST.1
|IL1| > set value

EURAX
OPERATE VALUE ST.2
MEAS. 1...5V DC
DC TRANS- I L1
resp.
DUCER set value
(positioned 0...5V DC
TYPE
inside DRS (SI03)
COMPACT)
set value
MEAS. SENSITIVITY
set value
TEST ST.1 VOLTAGE AT 0 AMPERE
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST.2
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2 >=1
&
& ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 LED-
0 DISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1>
& TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
ALARM ST.2 MATRIX
BLOCK. ST.2 >=1
&
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0 1
TRIP ST.2 0
t2 >
OUTPUT
1
TRIP-
0
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MI120 CURRENT DC 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 132 MI120 Current DC 2-ST. Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CHECK: Actual value > set value.

|IL1| > set value
NOTE: Actual value is taken from SI03 (Slow Input 03)
OPERATE VALUE ST.1
which is dedicated for DC-input signales.
set value
Over- or undervoltage according to setting.
TYPE
set value Conversion between output signal of EURAX-measuring transducer

MEAS. SENSITIVITY (1...5V DC = input of software relay) and c.t. -secondary current.
set value
VOLTAGE AT 0 AMPERE
Zero-point calibration of EURAX-measuring transducer (see also above).
MATRIX
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MI120 CURRENT DC 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 133 MI120 Current DC 2-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

MI120/ OPTION
SUPERVISION OF MEAS. TRANSDUCER-CIRCUIT
FOR MI120
^ 1...5V DC)
Applicable only if chosen: 4...20mA (=
[NOTE: 0...20mA => no supervision possible!]
Supervision principle:
Min. input voltage = 1V DC (regular operation).

If <1V DC => malfunction of meas. transducer circuit.
LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING:
1...5V DC MI 120 1
DIG. OUT
SI03 corresp. with IL1> or IL1<
(Slow input 03) 0...40A
PROT. RELAY ALARM TRIP
(for example)
OPTIONAL:
BLK!
OPTIONAL:
LOGIC-
MU 120 2 FUNCTION 2
Undervoltage DC
check: UDC < 1V DIG. OUT
WARNING
Meas. transducer circuit WARNING
is faulty!
LEGEND:
1 Software relay Over-/Undervoltage DC
Input signal must be 1...5V DC (regular operation)
2 Software relay Undervoltage DC is used for

supervision of meas. transducer.
Practical setting (example):
0,5V/ Underdetection => Warning
MI120 CURRENT DC 2-ST. SUPERVISION OF

MEAS. TRANSDUCER FOR PHASE-CURRENT
Fig. 134 MI120 Current DC 2-ST. Supervision Of Meas. Transducer For Phase-Current

10.4.4. MI132
L1 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
DIR. 1
IR
U R-T
G
GEN. 2~
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.3
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
TRIP
(OPTIONAL) COMMANDS
BLOCK. ST.3 OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
(OPTIONAL)
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
51 Alarm
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 135 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ANGLE (IR, UR-T)
NOTEBOOK
IR UR-T DIR.1 ALARM ST.1

IR
&
U R-T (IR ,UR-T)
DIR.2 ALARM ST.2
&
|IR| > OPERATE VALUE ST.1

ALARM ST.3
BIN. I/0
TEST PRESET
ST.1
1
0 >=1 ALARM ST.1
&

BL. PRESET >=1
ST.1 &
1
0
TRIP ST.1
t > tSET ST.1 TRIP

ST.1 & TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
TEST PRESET LED-
ST.2 DISPLAY
1
0 >=1 ALARM ST.2
&

BL. PRESET >=1
ST.2 &
1
0
TRIP ST.2
TRIP LED-
t > tSET ST.2 MATRIX
ST.2 & TRIP ST.2
BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0
TEST PRESET PRESET
ST.3
1 1
0 >=1 ALARM ST.3 0
&

BL. PRESET >=1
ST.3 &
1
TRIP ST.3 TRIP-
0
MATRIX
t > tSET ST.3 TRIP
FUNCTION ST.3 & TRIP ST.3
OUTPUT
1
0
PROCESSING
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 136 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MI132 MI133
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MD321
1
UR-T
Calculation of angle between IR and UR-T
IR
Angle between IR and UR-T

This angle corresponds with the PHASE ANGLE j (IR ,UR): =j
Please note: this is a 1-phase system (railway power station) !
(IR ,UR-T)
The angle is indicated in the Internal Measured Value-window
on the notebook-screen.
DIR.1 = -100...+10 corresponds with j = -100...+10
DIR.2 = +80...+190 corresponds with j = +80...+190
MATRIX
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX
ALARM ST.1 ALARM ST.1"-Signal going to LED-MATRIX

ALARM ST.1 ALARM ST.1"-Signal going to TRIP-MATRIX
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 137 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

R T
THEORY:
MAIN
TRANSF.
PHASORS TAKEN MOVE VOLT. ROTATE PHASORS
FROM DIAGRAM: PHASORS: DIAGRAM 180C:
PHASE R
R R
UR UT UR
IR IT
UR-T EARTH
DIR. 1 DIR. 2 UR-T UR-T
UR
UT UR UT
UT This point
is NOT
EARTH-POT.
T T
G PHASE T
GEN. This point
2~ is NOT
PHASE T-POT.
UR = UR - 0 = UR
UR-T = UR - UT
DIRECTION 1:
IR IT
UR-T
UR IR
G
2~
UT IT
DIRECTION 2: IR IT
UR-T
UR IT
G
2~
UT IR
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DEFINITION OF DIRECTIONS

Fig. 138 MI132 MI133 Dir. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. Definition Of Directions

VECTOR GRAPHICS
DEFINITION: RELATION:
L1 L3 UR-T
IR
MAIN IR UR UR-T
TRANSF.
(IR, UR-T)
Legend:
Dir.1 1 INDICATED ANGLE (IR, UR-T) =
UR-T
2 PHASE ANGLE (IR, UR) =
Dir.2 IR IT
IT UT FORMULA in order to understand the
meaning of the indicated angle
G UR-T = UR - UT (DRSWIN/ Protective Function
Measured Values - window):
GEN. 2~
1 2
(INDICATED ANGLE ) = (PHASE ANGLE)
(IR,UR-T) (UR/ IR)

=0
Please mind:
=+10 a) Phase-Difference-Angle = (u) (i)
therefore: current vector = reference vector.
b) Indicated Angle :
D , U E ED
1 Indication is not affected by the set values

L T
.
Direction 1" bzw. Direction 2".

( I NG C A
REF
IN by
A DI
c) Current flow: from terminal no. 3 to no.1

SW T )
IN
R R-
(of DRS COMPACT2 Protection Relay)

=+10
R
=0
2
(I L SE
IR UR-T DRS-COMPACT2A
U
AN HA
G-
E
R)
P
G
DEF. OF: DIR.1/DIR.2

R,
G+
=+80 DIR.1
=+80 IR
G-
M+
=-100
IR =-100
DIR.2
M-
M+ IR
LEGEND:
=+190
G+ ... GEN.OPER./
OVEREXC.
G- ... GEN.OPER./
UNDEREXC.
M+ ... MOTOR OPER./
OVEREXC.
M- ... MOTOR OPER./
=+190 UNDEREXC.
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DEF. OF RANGES OF DIR.1/ DIR.2
Fig. 139 MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DEF. Of Ranges Of DIR. 1 / DIR.2

L1 L3
R T
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
SHOWN: DIR.1
UR UR-T IR
DIR. 1 IR
IR I1
UR-T
U R-T U1
IR IT
UT IT
G
GEN. 2~
IR DRS-COMPACT2/
DRS FAULT RECORD 1
UR-T
1 Note: DRS-COMPACT1
CURRENT INVERSED.
DRS MOD.:
SAME AS DRS-COMPACT2.
MI132 MI133 DIR. O/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DRS FAULT RECORD / DEF. OF SIGN
Fig. 140 MI132 MI133 Dir. 0/C 1-PH. 3-ST. DRS Fault Record / Def. Of Sign

10.4.5. MI332
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
I L1 I1
I L2 I2
I L3 I3
DIR. 1
U1
U L1L2
U2
U L2L3
U3
U L3L1
G
GEN.
3~
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.3
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
TRIP
(OPTIONAL) COMMANDS
CONTACTS CB2
(OPTIONAL)
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
67 Alarm
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
PROCESSING
VERSION 2
MI332 DIR. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 141 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NOTEBOOK ANGLE SYSTEM1
ANGLE SYSTEM2
ANGLE SYSTEM3
I L1 IL1 SYSTEM1 DIR.1 *) ALARM ST.1

I L2 &
I L3 UL2L3 1
*) SEE DRAWG.
(IL1 ,UL2L3) DIR.2 *) ALARM ST.2
& DEF. OF
RANGES OF
|IL1| > OPERATE VALUE ST.1 DIR.1/DIR.2
|IL1| > OPERATE VALUE ST.2
ALARM ST.3
SYSTEM2 DIR.1
UL3L1
ALARM ST.1
&
2
IL2 (IL2 ,UL3L1) DIR.2 ALARM ST.2

&
U L1L2 |IL2| > OPERATE VALUE ST.1
ALARM ST.3
UL1L2 SYSTEM3 DIR.1 ALARM ST.1

&
3
IL3 (IL3 ,UL1L2) DIR.2 ALARM ST.2

&
BIN. I/0
TEST PRESET |IL3| > OPERATE VALUE ST.2
ST.1 ALARM ST.3
1 |IL3| > OPERATE VALUE ST.3
0
BIN. I/0
PROCESSING
BL. PRESET
ST.1 >=1 ALARM ST.1
1
&
0
& ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0 >=1
TEST &
PRESET
ST.2 1
TRIP ST.1
0
t > tSET ST.1 TRIP
ST.1 & TRIP ST.1
LED-
BIN. I/0
BL. DISPLAY
PRESET
ST.2 >=1 ALARM ST.2
1 &
0
& ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0 >=1
&
TEST PRESET
ST.3 TRIP ST.2
1
TRIP LED-
0 t > tSET ST.2
ST.2 & TRIP ST.2 MATRIX BIN. I/0
PRESET
BIN. I/0
BL. PRESET 1
ST.3 >=1 ALARM ST.3 0
1 &
0
& ALARM ST.3
FUNCTION >=1
&
OUTPUT
TRIP ST.3 TRIP-
1 MATRIX
ST.3 & TRIP ST.3
MI332 DIR. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 142 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MI332
1
IL1
UL2L3 Calculation of angle of SYSTEM1 uses IL1 and UL2L3
SYSTEM1 Angle between IL1 and UL2L3

1
This angle 1 corresponds with (PHASE ANGLE j + 90) : 1 = j + 90
1
The angles 1, 2, 3 are indicated in the Internal Measured Value-window
(IL1 ,UL2L3)
on the notebook-screen.
SYSTEM1: 1= j1=
DIR.1 SYSTEM2: 2= 1 -10...+100 corresponds with j 2 = 1 -100...+10
SYSTEM3: 3= j3=
SYSTEM1: 1= j1=
DIR.2 SYSTEM2: 2= 1 +170...+280 corresponds with j2= 1 +80...+190
SYSTEM3: 3= (-80) j3=
MATRIX
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

1
Assuming a symmetrical power system (for explanation only)
MI332 DIR. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 143 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

L1 L2 L3
MAIN THEORY:
TRANSF.
PHASORS TAKEN MOVE PHASE ROTATE PHASORS

FROM DRAWING: VOLT. PHASORS: DIAGRAM 180C:
UL3L1
PHASE L1
This point is NOT
UL1L2 UL2L3 POTENTIAL
EARTH-POT.
EARTH
POTENTIAL L1
DIR. 1 DIR. 2 UL1
UL2
UL3L1 UL1 UL1L2 UL3L1 UL1 UL1L2
UL3 UL2 UL3
UL3 UL3
UL2 UL2
IL1 IL2 IL3 L3 L2
UL2L3 UL1 UL2L3
This point is NOT
G PHASE L3-POT.
GEN.
3~ UL1 = UL1-0 = UL1 - 0 = UL1
UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2
UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2
DIRECTION 1: UL1L2
IL1
IL1 UL1
UL1L2
G
GEN.
3~
DIRECTION 2: UL1L2
UL1
IL1
UL1L2
G
GEN.
3~
IL1
MI332 DIR. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. DEFINITION OF DIRECTIONS

Fig. 144 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Definition Of Directions

VECTOR GRAPHICS
DEFINITION: RELATION:
L1 L2 L3
IL1
IL1
MAIN
TRANSF. (IL1, UL2L3)
UL3L1 IL1 UL1L2
UL2L3
IL3 IL2 INDICATED ANGLE by
Term. X1/1 DRSWIN/ PROTECTIVE FUNCTION
UL1L2 Term. X1/3 MEASURED VALUE WINDOW
Dir.1 UL2L3
UL1
Dir.2 IL1 IL2 IL3 FORMULA in order to understand the

SYSTEM1 meaning of the indicated angle
(DRSWIN/ Protective Function Measured
SYSTEM2 Values - window):
G SYSTEM3
GEN. 1
3~ (INDICATED
2
ANGLE SYSTEM1) - 90 = PHASE ANGLE
1
(IL1,UL2L3) (UL1/ IL1)
EXAMPLE: 1 Please mind:
GEN.NOM.OPER. a) Phase-Difference-Angle = (i) (u)
=+90
POWER FACTOR = 1 therefore: voltage vector = reference vector.
ANGLE INDICATED: 90 =+100
b) Indicated Angle :
Indication is not affected by the set values
1 Direction 1" bzw. Direction 2".
c) Current flow: from terminal no. 3 to no.1
(of DRS COMPACT2 Protection Relay)
ED
G AT
.
IC
by
LE
D
SW 3 )
IN
2L
=+10
AN
REF
IN
D UL
=0
L1
,
DRS-COMPACT2
(I
DEF. OF: DIR.1 / DIR.2

UL1
G SE
IL1 G-
,U E
AN HA
)
L
P
L1
L1
G+
(I
=+170 DIR.1
=+80 IL1
G-
M+
=-100
IL1 =-10
DIR.2
M-
M+ IL1 LEGEND:
G+ ... GEN.OPER./OVEREXC.
=+190 G- ... GEN.OPER./UNDEREXC.
M+ ... MOTOR OPER./OVEREXC.
M- ... MOTOR OPER./UNDEREXC.
ANGLE INDICATED BY
DRSWIN OPERATING PROGRAM/
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION
MEASURED VALUES WINDOW
PHASE ANGLE (UL1,IL1)
=+280(=-80)
MI332 DIR. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. DEF. OF RANGES OF DIR.1 / DIR.2

Fig. 145 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. Def. Of Ranges Of Dir. 1 / Dir. 2

SHOWN: DIR.1
L1 L2 L3 IL1
DRS- SYSTEM1:
COMPACT2A
I L1 I1
I L2 I2 UL2L3
DIR. 1 I L3 I3
SYSTEM2:
UL3L1
IL1 IL2 IL3
U L1L2 U1
IL2
UL1L2 U L2L3 U2
U L3L1 U3 SYSTEM3:
UL1L2
G
GEN.
3~
IL3
SEQU. OF PHASES: L1 L2 L3
IL1
DRS-COMPACT2/
DRS FAULT RECORD
UL2L3
MI332 DIR. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. DRS FAULT RECORD / DEF. OF SIGN
Fig. 146 MI332 Dir. O/C 3-PH. 3-ST. DRS Fault Record / Def. Of Sign

10.5. FUNCTION
10.5.1. MI111/ MI112/ MI121/ MI122/ MI311/ MI312/ MI313/ MI314 MI321/ MI322/ MI323/ MI324/ MI326/
MI132/ MI133/ MI332
Over- and undercurrent DT protection is applied where a defined time delayed disconnection of the protected plant
is required when the setting limits are exceeded or reaching below the limit.
Besides the simple current applications the use, for example, as generator winding short circuit protection of
generators is also the scope of this function.
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle. Out of this the amplitude
of the fundamental harmonic for each phase is determined according to the standard algorithm
(Fourier Transformation).
At each sample interval the computed amplitude value is checked regarding the initiation conditions, i.e. the set
operating value being either in the over- or under detection mode.
If the initiating conditions are fulfilled during 24 consecutive intervals (2 cycles) the function
is started and the time delay initiated. After expiry of the configured time delay a trip signal
will be produced whereby the delay is according to the DT characteristic independent of the
input signal amplitude.

10.5.2. MI113
The fast overcurrent function MI113 without any adjustable time delay has a tripping time of a typical 10 ms
including the output relays whereby about 5 ms are required for the input signal evaluation and the remaining 5 ms
represent the operating time of the output relays.
This trip time is independent from the current frequency and the PROCESSING Basis Sample Rate because
for the function an own oversampling algorithm is applicable.
Caution: This function must only be conditionally used with other functions and has not to be combined with
frequency functions due to possible frequency jitter!
Generally valid: Do not combine with functions using higher harmonics. Due to the sampling jitters which are
created in conjunction with the oversampling mode it will result into a tolerance range of the Fourier evaluation.
Should a combination with such functions be absolutely necessary then in each particular case the correct
response of all functions involved has to be thoroughly tested whereby MI113 is always active.
Further, it has to be realised that this function is using up to 40% of the processor resources due
to the oversampling mode.
The preferred applications are traditionally the 16 2/3 Hz traction systems where the operating
times for normal overcurrent functions are relatively large (typical 2 cycles).
Also for 50 Hz systems the function MI113 is operating within half a cycle which is why the usual
Fourier Algorithm cannot be applied. Therefore MI113 is using a special oversampling algorithm.
The measured values processing is based on the instantaneous values which requires a very
extensive interference signal eliminating routine since the filter effect of the Fourier Analyses is
not available for this function.
When checking the tripping time during secondary injection tests it has to be noted that the current sinus wave
should be starting by 90 otherwise it will take another few milliseconds
until the setting value is approached (Note: instantaneous values are considered!).
The current setting (see "Operating Value") is regarded as an RMS value, respectively is
calibrated as an RMS value. The instantaneous measured values are function-internally converted into RMS values
and then compared with the setting configuration.
This conversion is exactly correct by 16 2/3 Hz at 50 % the deviation is about 3 %. During tests
correlation can easily be verified with the aid of the DRSWIN measured values window
st
(Note: this window shows in principle the 1 harmonic of the Fourier analyses converted to
the RMS value).
Summary: Even though this function is evaluating the instantaneous values the setting is still
be given as a RMS value.
"Reset Delay" setting:

During zero crossings of the current sinus wave the instantaneous values are tending to zero
whereby especially for 16 2/3 Hz systems a chatter of the trip output may occur but the parameter
reset delay will overcome this time margin.
Offset compensation:
Due to internal device tolerances an additional offset for the measured current input signal can
be possible. Since contrary to the Fourier algorithm the extreme short operating time is incorporated into the
computation result it is necessary to perform a compensation for this. The latter is done automatically and on a
digital basis.
The offset compensation will remain the same when sending new setting data to the DRS.
However in case of auxiliary supply interruptions for the DRS-COMPACT it is necessary to
adjust the offset again which will only take about 1 ... 5 s after which the function MI113 is
in full service conditions.
Result: By the offset compensation it is ensured that even for small settings an over-reaction
of the function will not happen.

10.6. COMMISSIONING
10.6.1. All above mentioned functions
!!! Note: During All Commissioning Activities The Relevant Safety Regulations
Have to Be Strictly Observed and Applied!!!
Pre-Commissioning:
At first the correct external wiring connections have to be verified.
The parameter settings fort he operating value and time delay have to be configured to the
determined values ( Time Grading).
The relay outputs are to be configured in the LED matrix and the trip matrix according to requirements.
Function tests by secondary injection are preferably performed with the primary plant out
of service.
With a test set inject a current into the CT input of, e.g. phase L1 and slowly regulate the
current until the function operates.
Note the operating value in the commissioning test sheets.
Adjust the test current into the opposite direction until the function resets and enter the value
into the commissioning test sheets.
Please also compare the external input quantities with the internal measured values on the
window display of the DRS User program.
Apply the same procedures for the other phases and/or stages and record the test results into
the commissioning test sheets.
Observe the trip and alarm signals, respectively the LED indications according to the parameter
settings and the circuit diagrams.
Check the operating time at 1.5 times the setting for each phase and stage with a suitable
timer and enter the results into the test sheets.
Check the configured function blocks for each stage by applying the blocking signal when the protection is
operating and the function trip output has to reset.
Check the configured function test feature for each stage by initiating the test signal and the
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without any external current input.
After pre-commissioning all modified test parameters must be re-configured to the original plant parameter settings.

During primary tests the function of the protection system is verified during the plant in service
and following check should be carried out when operating conditions permit:
- Short Circuit Test:
Apply a short circuit of adequate rating located at a position where primary current can
flow through the respective CT set.
Disable protection trips.
Insert measuring instruments into the CT/VT and/or open the internal measured values window in the DRS
User program.
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation until operation
of the function, if necessary with reduced setting.
Record operating values.
For multi-stage protective functions also test each stage the same way.
Restore protection trips.
If possible shut down the generator via a live protective function trip and remove the short circuit.

ML... OVERLOAD
11. ML... OVERLOAD
11.1. OVERVIEW
List of the available ML . . . Overload Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: ML . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Overload, 1 phase, thermal replica, inverse time 1013 ML121 49 C2,M,L

ML... OVERLOAD
11.2.1. Overload 1 Phase
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: ML121 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

1 phase overload function with an I t characteristic with consideration of the cooling medium
temperature provided with an alarm- and trip stage. Depending on the selected operating performance of the
overload protection (relative- or absolute value measuring) the adjustable temperature settings in the DRS menu
for the function are either configured as percentage
values of the temperature limit in % or as absolute temperature values in degrees.
ML121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current of protected object
DC input "cooling media temperature"
Test input
Heating/cooling (0/1)
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Measuring fault
Setting Parameters
CT ratio compensation: 0.4 ... 2 in 0.01 steps
Formula:
Generator nominal current = CT ratio compensation x
relay nominal current
Pre-loading: 0 ... 100 % in 5 % steps
Note: Pre-loading with reference to the
over temperature limit
Heating time constant:1 ... 100 min in 0.5 minute steps
Cooling time constant:1 ... 100 min in 0.5 minute steps
Temperature limit:10 ... 100 degrees, respectively %
in 1 degree, respectively % steps
Temperature alarm: 25 ... 150 degrees, respectively %
Temperature trip: 25 ... 150 degrees, respectively %
Cooling medium temperature: Pre-set/measuring

ML... OVERLOAD
Temperature pre-set: -30 ... +50 degrees in 1 degree steps

Note :If applicable
if parameter "Cooling medium temperature" is set
to "measuring".
Measuring sensitivity: 10 ... 500 mV/degree
Note :If applicable in 1mV/degree steps
Gradient: positive/negative
Note :If applicable
Voltage at 0 degrees: 0.700 ... 4.800 V
Note :If applicable in 0.005 V steps

Heating: In degrees (absolute temperature)
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

ML... OVERLOAD
11.2.2. Overload 3 phase
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: ML321 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

3 phase overload function with an I t characteristic with consideration of the cooling medium
temperature provided with an alarm- and trip stage. Depending on the selected operating performance of the
overload protection (relative- or absolute value measuring) the adjustable temperature settings in the DRS menu
for the function are either configured as percentage
values of the temperature limit in % or as absolute temperature values in degrees.
Ml321
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
DC input "cooling media temperature"
Test input
Heating/cooling (0/1)
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Measuring fault
Setting Parameters
CT ratio compensation: 0.4 ... 2 in 0.01 steps
Formula:
Generator nominal current = CT ratio compensation x
relay nominal current
Pre-loading: 0 ... 100 % in 5 % steps
Note: Pre-loading with reference to the
over temperature limit
Heating time constant: 1 ... 100 min in 0.5 minute steps
Cooling time constant: 1 ... 100 min in 0.5 minute steps
Temperature limit: 10 ... 100 degrees, respectively %
Temperature alarm: 25 ... 150 degrees, respectively %
Temperature trip: 25 ... 150 degrees, respectively %
Cooling medium temperature: Pre-set/measuring
Temperature pre-set: -30 ... +50 degrees in 1 degree steps
Note :If applicable
Temperature pre-set: 10 ... 500 mV/degrees
Note :If applicable in 1mV/degree steps

ML... OVERLOAD
Gradient: positive/negative
Note :If applicable
Voltage at 0 degrees: 0.700 ... 4.800 V
Note :If applicable in 0.005 V steps

Heating: In degrees (absolute temperature)
Note:
Always the largest phase current is displayed.
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

ML... OVERLOAD

11.3.1. ML121/ ML321
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2 DC
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
DRS-
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14 5A 11
I5
15 OUT 06
COMPACT2A
12
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
PROTECTED U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
OBJECT 3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
2 5 13
Temp. sensor 6 U3 OUT 15 14
resp. meas. 7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
transducer 8
1 9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
BLOCKING (opt.) 4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
+
HEATING/COOLING (opt.) 6 - IN 03 9
-
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
LEGEND: 14 - IN 07
X2
1 Measuring transducer 15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
2 for details se drawing: ML321 OVERLOAD RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
3-PH. CONNECTION OF TEMP. SENSOR 6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
BUS
OPTIONAL MODULE

6
UAKB
Rotor E/F TRANS-

7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
GND 14
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
ML321 OVERLOAD 3-PH. WIRING DIAGRAM

ML121 OVERLOAD 1-PH. WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 147 ML321 Overload 3-PH. / ML121 Overload 1-PH. Wiring Diagram

ML... OVERLOAD

11.4.1. ML121/ ML321
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I L1
I L2
ANALOG
INPUTS
I L3
(CURR.)
PROTECTED
OBJECT
2
ANALOG
EURAX
TEMP. SLOW INPUT 03

1 [mA] (TEMP. OF
[] COOLANT)
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
3 HEATING/COOLING
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
DRS- TRIP
DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
PROCESSING CPU+DSP - BOARD/ CONTACTS CB2
VERSION 2
ALARM
1 Measuring transducer, for example CONTACTS
temp. mA, or Alarm
temp. , or ... Trip
2 Measuring transducer, for example

(4...20mA) (1...5V DC), or
(PT 100) (1...5V DC), or ...
3 HEATING operation of
protected object
COOLING no operation of
protected object
ML321 OVERLOAD 3-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM

ML121 OVERLOAD 1-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 148 ML321 Overload 3-PH / ML121 Overload 1-PH.. Logic Diagram

ML... OVERLOAD
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
LOADING [C]
(ABSOLUTE TEMP. OF PROT. OBJECT)
NOTEBOOK
LOADING (ABS. TEMP. [C])

set value OPERATION
ALARM TEMP. set value ALARM
IL1 IL1
LOAD SETTING STARTING
IL2 IL2 POINT
LOAD SETTING
IL3 IL3 set value 4
LOAD SETTING THERMAL LIMIT
PRELOADING 3 (NOM. OPERATION)
set value TEMP. PRESET 2

PRELOADING
L1 TIME [sec]
L2
L3
LOADING PH. L1
COOLANT TEMP. [C]
MEAS.
(measured) COOLING LOADING PH. L2
COOLANT TEMP. [C]: MED. TEMP.

PRESET LOADING PH. L3
set value TEMP. PRESET
1...4,75V DC
(SI03)
CHOOSE > (ALARM TEMP.)
TEST
max. of
BIN. I/0 (LOADING L1/L2/L3) > (OPER. TEMP.)
PRESET
1
0
BLOCKING LOADING TIME CONST. depending on:

BIN. I/0 TEMP. TEMP.
PRESET
1 LED-
HEATING COOLING
0 DISPLAY
HEATING/
TIME TIME TIME TIME
COOLING CONST. CONST.
BIN. I/0
PRESET ALARM
1 >=1 LED-
0 &
& ALARM MATRIX BIN. I/0
PRESET
FUNCTION TRIP 1
OUTPUT >=1 0
&
1 & TRIP
0
PROCESSING TRIP-
MATRIX
LEGEND:
1 (TRANSF. NOM. CURRENT) = (LOAD SETTING) x (RELAY NOM. CURRENT)
2 This PRESET value to be used if no measuring input or if TEMP. SENSING CIRCUIT is faulty (input signals (>4,75V DC) or (<1V DC))
3 PRELOADING-set value is given as [%] of THERMAL LIMIT-set value.
4 THERMAL LIMIT-set value is an overtemperature [C]
5 COOLING MED. TEMP.-set value is an absolute temp. value [C] (see also MEAS. TRANSDUCER)
ML321 OVERLOAD 3-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

ML121 OVERLOAD 1-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 149 ML321 Overload 3-PH. / ML121 Overload 1-PH. Logic Diagram / Processing

ML... OVERLOAD
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: ML321, ML121
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function ML321
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation) ML121
1
0
Ratio compensation for c.t.

LOAD SETTING...set value
IL1
IL1...gen. current (c.t. secondary)
LOAD SETTING
FORMULA: ITransf. nom. = LOAD SETTING x IRelay nom.
EXAMPLE: assume: ITransf. nom. < IRelay nom. set value LOAD SETTING < 1.
LOADING-characteristic depends on:

set value: TIME CONSTANT (Heating/ Cooling)
set value: THERMAL LIMIT (overtemperature)
set value: PRELOADING (% of THERMAL LIMIT)
measuring value: COOLING MED. TEMP. (temp. of coolant)
Please see details:

drawing ML321 ML121 OVERLOAD DEFINITION OF SET VALUES

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED-
PROCESSING-board
DISPLAY
(row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

ML321 OVERLOAD 3-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

ML121 OVERLOAD 1-PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 150 ML321 Overload 3-PH. / ML121 Overload 1-PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

ML... OVERLOAD
ML321 ML121 DEFINITION OF SET VALUES

LOADING [C]
see set value OPERATION

final temp.
TRIP TEMP. depending
5
nom. LOADING
ALARM TEMP. on IL1
7
(@ transformer
nom. current)
LOADING 4
starting point
set value 1
THERMAL LIMIT [C]
( max. permissible temp. rise
set value 3 caused by current of protected object)
PRELOADING [%]
set value 2
TEMP. PRESET [C]
Heating time TIME [sec]

constant 6
1 THERMAL LIMT [C]...temp. difference between (LOADING = 0) and (LOADING = nom.)

LOADING = 0... PRELOADING = 0; TEMP. PRESET = 0; IL1 = 0 for infinte time.
LOADING = nom. ... IL1 = IL1 nom (nom. current of protected object) for infinite time.
2 TEMP. PRESET [C]... influence of temp. of coolant of protected object.

Note: There are 2 possibilities to take into consideration the coolant temperature:
a) Measuring of coolant temperature by using a measuring transducer/ via SI03 (Slow Input 03). Set value
a) COOLING MED. TEMP. must be set to MEASURED. Please pay attention to the belonging set values:
a) MEAS. SENSIVITIY; GRADIENT; VOLTAGE AT 0 DEG.
a) In case of malfunction of the meas. transducer the algorithm of ML321/ ML121 will automatically
a) change over to (b)... see below! Therefore the set value TEMP. PRESET also must be filled in
a) correctly (default).
b) Fixed preset of coolant temp (no actual measuring). Set value COOLING MED. TEMP. must be set to
b) PRESET. Please pay attention to the belonging set value: TEMP. PRESET. The set values MEAS.
b) SENSITIVITY, GRADIENT, VOLTAGE AT 0DEG. will not be used.
3 PRELOADING... applies if the protection is reset or if the aux. supply was interupted. In this case the
LOADING is resetted too. For safety reason the set value PRELOADING was added in order to cope
with an already loaded (hot) protected object. Should be set according to the LOADING of an average
(typical) operation condition. PRELOADING will lose its influence after approx. 3 time constants.
4 >>starting point<< after reset or power up of the prot. relay the INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE-window
will show the calculated LOADING-value which depends on the actual coolant temp. resp.
TEMP. PRESET-set value and on the PRELOADING-set value.
5 LOAD SETTING... ratio comp. for c.t. FORMULA: ITransf. nom. = LOAD SETTING x IRelay nom.
6 HEATING TIME CONSTANT... thermal time constant (during operation of protected object)
COOLING TIME CONSTANT... thermal time constant (protected object is switched OFF)
Note: in order to use the COOLING TIME CONSTANT-feature the dig input HEATING/ COOLING
must be wired!
7 ALARM TEMP./ OPER. TEMP... Alarm/ Trip. These set values correlate with the indicated temp. value on
the notebook screen (see INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE-window).
ML321 ML121 OVERLOAD DEFINITION OF SET VALUES

Fig. 151 ML321 ML121 Overload Definition Of Set Values

ML... OVERLOAD
ML321/ OPTIONAL MODULES

CONNECTION OF TEMP. SENSOR
APPLICABLE FOR DRS-COMPACT2" ONLY!
EURAX 604 3
(MEAS. TRANSDUCER)
8 z2
SI03
10 z4
12 d2
14 IN09 2
d4
11
OUT 22 12
13
OUT 23 14
15
OUT 24 16
X2
15 +
IN 08 4
16 - DEVICE FAIL. 5
X7 OUT 31
6
1 DEVICE STOP
OUT 32 7
2
eIEGL23
3 8
eIU124
OPTIONAL MODULES Tx+
MOD-
BUS
THERMO REMOTE TEMP. DC CURRENT [4...20mA,...]
4 Tx- 9
PT100 COUPLER DETECTOR or DC VOLTAGE [1...5V DC,...] 5 GND 10
6
7 11
+ 8 +5
RS422/485
+
Rx+ 12
9 1
SI03 13
10 Rx-
-
EURAX
- 14
0% 0%
11 GND
Tx+ 15
100% 12 16
13 Tx-
IN09 2
100% 14
FRONTSIDE
X9
RS 232
3
X10
LEGEND:
1 Meas. transducer type EURAX 604; used to connect the temp. signal to the
PROT. RELAY CPU (=PROCESSING) via SI03 (Slow Input 03)
2 IN09: Temp. sensing circuit is faulty.
Note 1: IN9 is an internal input only, not wired to external terminals.
Note 2: not used for ML321 usually. ML321 has an integrated software supervision
(see trip matrix inputs!) for detection of temp. sensing circuit faults (broken wire,
shortcircuit, supply fail,...)
3 Meas. transducer type EURAX 604 is programable. Type of input signal can be
chosen. Output signal = 1...5V DC.
ML321 ML121 OVERLOAD 3-PH. CONNECTION OF TEMP. SENSOR

Fig. 152 ML321 ML121 Overload 3-PH. Connection Of Temp. Sensor (Eurax)

ML... OVERLOAD
ML321/ OPTIONAL MODULES

CONNECTION OF TEMP. SENSOR
FOR DRS-COMPACT2A
11
OUT 22 12
13
OUT 23 14
DC CURRENT 15
[0...20mA, 4...20mA] OUT 24 16
PT100 PT100 oder DC VOLTAGE DC VOLTAGE
2-WIRE 3-WIRE [0...60mV DC] [0...10V DC] X2
15 +
IN 08 4
16 - RELAY FAIL. 5
X7 OUT 31
6
1 RELAY STOP. 7
+ + 2 OUT 32
MEAS.-
DC DC 3 TRANSD.1
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
- -
BUS
4 1
Tx- 9
5 10
OPTIONAL MODUL
3 GND
6
UAKB
MEAS.-
7 TRANSD.2
SI03 11
8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
9 13
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04 15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAIL. IN09 X9
2
FRONTSIDE
RS 232 X10
LEGEND:
1 The DRS COMPACT- internal module type UAKB contains two identical measuring
transducers (Measuring Transducer 1 and Measuring Transducer 2). In our example
we will use Measuring Transducer no. 1.
2 IN09: Temp. sensing circuit is faulty.

Note 1: IN9 is an internal input only, not wired to external terminals of
DRS COMPACT.
Note 2: not used for ML321 usually. ML321 has an integrated software supervision
(see trip matrix inputs!) for detection of temp. sensing circuit faults (broken wire,
shortcircuit, supply fail,...)
3 Meas. transducer type UAKB is programable. Type of input signal can be
chosen. Output signal = 1...5V DC.
ML321 ML121 OVERLOAD 3-PH. CONNECTION OF TEMP. SENSOR

Fig. 153 ML321 ML121 Overload 3-PH. Connection Of Temp. Sensor (UAKB)

ML... OVERLOAD
ML321 ML121 SETTING EXAMPLE (RELAY NOM. CURR.: 1A)
1. LOAD SETTING
Assume: nom. operation = 0,83A (ct. sec.) set = 0,83
2. PRELOADING
Assume: average LOAD of prot. object = 30% of nom. LOADING set = 30%
3. HEATING TIME CONST.

Definition: after 1 time constant, the temperature will reach (1 1/e) = 63% of final temp.
temp.
100%
63%
time
1 time_constant
4. COOLING TIME CONST.

Depends on cooling conditions when protected object not in operation. If unequal to (3.)
then it is also necessary to wire the digital input HEATING/COOLING.
5. THERMAL LIMIT
Amount of temp. rise based on nom. current assuming no PRELOADING and assuming
COOLING MED. TEMP. = 0
6. ALARM TEMP.
Corresponds with the indicated temp. on notebook screen (LOADING) please open
the INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE- window (DRSWIN). Example: set = 105deg. (nom = 100deg.)
7. OPER. TEMP. (TRIP TEMPERATURE)

Corresponds with the indicated temp. on notebook screen (LOADING) please open
the INTERNAL MEAS. VALUE- window (DRSWIN). Example: set = 115deg.
8. COOLING MED. TEMP

If not measured set = preset
If measured set = measured
9. TEMP. PRESET
Applies only if the cooling temp is not measured (or if malfunction of meas. transducer).
Corresponds with temp. of coolant (during normal operation). Example: set = 40deg.
10. MEAS. SENSITIVITY / GRADIENT / VOLT AT 0DEG.

Applies only if coolant temp. is measured (via meas. transducer).
Example: coolant temperature range = -40deg. ... +110deg.
1V DC...4,75V DC (output of meas. transducer) SLOW INPUT SI03 of VE2
MEAS. SENSITIVITY set = 25mV/deg.
GRADIENT set = positive
VOLTAGE AT 0 DEG. set = 2V
Coolant temp.:
-40deg. 0deg. +110deg.
Output of meas. transducer SI03:

+1V DC +2V DC +4,75V DC
Conversion:
1deg. 25mV.
ML321 ML121 SETTING EXAMPLE

Fig. 154 ML321 ML121 Setting Example

ML... OVERLOAD
11.5. FUNCTION
Overload
Overload functions are applied to monitor the protected object against not permissible over heating in case of
sustained overload conditions whereby the temperature rise is an exact
thermal image of the protected plant and when exceeding the configured value an alarm-
and trip output will be initiated.
By a simplified model the heating of load current flow through a winding is according to
following relation:
2

I
t

(t ) Limit 1 e E

(1)

I 0
Thereby is
(t ) .... Temperature of the winding after time t when loaded
E ....... Thermal heating time constant of the winding
I........ Current flow through the winding
I0........ Nominal current of the winding
Limit Maximum over-temperature of the winding which is reached during
service with nominal current after about 4 time constants
When also considering the temperature of the cooling medium TCM then following relation
for the absolute temperature T(t) at time t after commencing load current is according to
following formula:
2

I
t

T (t ) TCM Limit 1 e E

(2)

I 0
By similar considerations the cooling of the winding at zero current this formula applies
t

(t ) 0 .e A
(3)
(t ) .... Temperature of the winding after time t with zero load current 0
...... Temperature of the winding when switching to zero current
A ....... Thermal cooling time constant of the winding
With consideration of the cooling medium temperature TCM for the absolute
temperature T(t) at time t after switching off there is following relation:
t

T(t ) TKM 0 .e A
(4)

ML... OVERLOAD
The heating- and cooling time constants can vary for several reasons, e.g. no cooling water circulation, no
ventilation, etc.
For the application of the thermal overload protection there are basically 2 different operating
modes possible. On one hand the usual evaluation know for many protection relays which are
matching the relative heating of the protected object is applicable (relative measuring) and on
the other hand with the additional inputs of measuring elements or the known cooling medium temperature an
absolute measurement of the heating conditions of the monitored machinery
is obtained by the DRS function.
Relative Measuring:
This method relies on the fact that after approximately 3 to 4 time constants the limit of the
permissible temperature has been reached and a stationary heating of the machine is established when
operating with nominal current.
Different cooling conditions are not considered in this mode and therefore formulas (1) and (3) apply. All
function settings are this way to be considered as a relative configuration regarding the permissible
temperature limit selectable between 1% and 100%.
Absolute Measuring:
For practical considerations the cooling of the machine has a definite influence on the
heating process. Therefore, e.g. in case of transformer windings, the absolute temperature
evaluation via suitable transducers or additional thermal image load current heating (oil pocket) is obtained
by adding these quantities to the load current temperature rise.
Thus the temperature computed by the I t values plus the added cooling medium temperature is
representing the absolute temperature of the winding according to formulas
(2) and (4). For this method the function setting is to be entered in degrees.
To evaluate the load current heating the function current signals are sampled 12 times each cycle. By squaring and
averaging the RMS value of the signal is determined and aligned with
the CT ratio compensation I0/In (I0 = secondary rated current, In = function nominal current).
With a simple differential equation the derived temperature rise after each time interval t
on the basis of the measured current as well as from the previous temperature value samples
is illustrated in the formula below and calculated as follows.
1
2
Ia
Limit a t (5)
E I0

Ia....... Current within the sample interval
I0....... Continuous rated load current
a...... Temperature of the previous sample interval
When the computed temperature is exceeding the trigger value of the temperature alarm setting
an appropriate annunciation is initiated and by a further temperature increase eventually a trip
output is given when the tripping temperature is reached. The tripping time t a during stationary operating
conditions, i.e. no current change during the measuring time, with the set temperature trip value T Tr is according to
following formula:
1
t a E .ln (6)
TTr TKM I0 2
1 - .
Grenz I

ML... OVERLOAD
I Load current of the protected object

Io Nominal current of the protected object

ML... OVERLOAD
11.6. COMMISSIONING

Overload
Pre-Commissioning:
The input matrix, LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be configured according to the external circuitry and the
plant requirements. Also the function parameters have to be set according to the
data of the protected object.
The compensation of the relay rated current to the nominal current of the protected object is
carried out via the parameter setting CT ratio compensation as per the formula below:
Ie
Compensation =
In
Ie Nominal current of protected object
In Nominal current of protective function
With the parameter "Pre-set" the thermal replica of the protected object can be provided with
an initial loading value which is accepted after each system start, i.e. each system reset after
parameter setting changes, loss of DC auxiliary supply, etc.
The heating- and cooling time constants are separately configurable and will be activated according to the
operating mode via suitable external input contacts.
The parameter "Temperature Limit is during heating approached after a few time constants.
The method for considering the cooling medium temperature can be selected via the menu item
Cooling Medium Temperature. When Measuring is chosen the cooling medium temperature
can be included with Pt 100 elements via measuring transducers.
In case of Pre-set is selected the temperature configured with the parameter setting Temperature Pre-set is
used for the assessment of the cooling medium temperature.
By a wire break or short on the cable connection to the Pt 100 element a measuring
fault alarm is initiated and the overload protection is continuing the computations
with the parameter Pre-set configured temperature value until the fault is rectified.
The characteristic of the measuring transducer is configured via 3 additional parameter:

With the "Measuring Sensitivity" menu the slope of the transducer characteristic is
determined by the mV/degree setting.
The gradient of the characteristic, either rising or falling, is set in the "Gradient" menu.
The transducer voltage output value at 0C is configured with the parameter "Voltage
at 0 Degrees".
Secondary injection tests for overload functions are generally very time consuming due
to the slow response times of the protection. When injecting higher current values to speed
up the test procedure care should be taken as not to overload the current input CTs which
have a maximum continuous rating of 4 x In.

ML... OVERLOAD
The function tests are preferably carried out with the primary plant out of service.
With a relay test set inject the test current into the first phase input, e.g. with 3 times
the setting value Ie and verify the current indication via the menu option "System,
Analogue Values".
Switch off the test current and check whether the Pre-loading is at 0 and the parameter
Cooling Medium Temperature is the target value 0 and send the parameter set of the overload protection to the
DRS. Inject the previously adjusted test current again and record the operating time.
The operating time is calculated according to formula (6) by applying following values:
TTr = Limit........... i.e. operating temperature equals the heating temperature limit
TCM = 0.................... i.e. cooling medium temperature with pre-set value 0
I/I0 = 3....................... i.e. test current equals 3 times the current setting
1 9
ta E.ln E.ln E. 0,118
1 8
1
9
Verify the temperature rise via the menu item "Actual Measured Values" in the display window
of the protective function and record the operating time as well as the injected current value
Switch off the test current and observe the decrease of the temperature indication.
The temperature value after 1 time constant is derived according to formula (4)
T ( A ) 0 e 1 0 0.368
i.e. that after 1 time constant when switching off the injected current the temperature display
must only be approximately 37% of the value at the instant of operation. Enter the temperature
value into the commissioning test sheets.
The same procedure should be applied for the other phases and the measured results noted
in the sheets.
After secondary injection tests all modified test parameters should be re-configured to the required original service
settings.
In case of an external cooling medium temperature evaluation a variable resistor decade can
be inserted into this circuit instead of the temperature element. Carry out the wire resistance-
and the amplification matching according to the measuring transducer specification by checking the resistance
value in relation with the temperature in the "Actual Measured Values" window.
Check the alarm- and trip signals and the LED indications according to the parameter settings
and the circuit diagrams.
A test of the configured function blocking input for each stage should be done in conjunction with a continuous
initiated trip signal whereby the trip signal is has to reset.
Checking of the configured relay test input by applying a test signal for each stage can be verified without any

ML... OVERLOAD
settings have to be set to the original values and restored after the tests to the plant setting values according to
system requirements.
On-Load Commissioning Tests:
During the on-load checks the correct response of the protective function is verified under
regular operating conditions. Practically special operating tests during commissioning of a
thermal function are hardly possible due to the large operating times. It is therefore advised
that during the heat run of the generator or transformer following observations should be
performed:
Insert measuring instruments into the CT circuits and verify the external measured
values with the indication in the User program.
Compare the values of the external meters with the internal DRS indication display.
Check the window display of the internal temperature measurement especially in
the stable range regarding the margin to the operating value.

ML... OVERLOAD

MN... NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE
12. MN... NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE
12.1. OVERVIEW
List of the available MN . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MN . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Negative phase sequence protection DT characteristic, 1015 MN211 46 C2,M,L
1 stage, 2-50%, 0-30s
suitable for three phase systems without neutral
(2 current inputs)
1 stage, 2-50%, 0-30s
suitable for three phase systems with neutral
(3 current inputs)
2 stage, 2-50%, 0-30s
(2 current inputs)
2 stage, 2-50%, 0-30s
(3 current inputs)
Negative phase sequence protection inverse time characteristic 1017 MN222 46 C2,M
(thermal)
(2 current inputs) and separate setting parameters
for alarm- and trip temperature
(thermal)

12.2.1. Negative Phase Sequence 1 Stage DT/ Without Neutral
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MN211 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

1 stage, 2-50%, 0-30s
(2 current inputs)
2 phase, 1 stage definite time (DT) negative phase sequence function.
MN211
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 50 % in 0.5 % steps

Negative phase sequence: in %
relating to the function nominal current
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

12.2.2. Negative Phase Sequence 1 Stage DT / With Neutral

1 stage, 2-50%, 0-30s
(3 current inputs)
MN311
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Alarm
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 2 ... 50 % in 0.5 % steps

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

12.2.3. Negative Phase Sequence 2 Stage DT / Without Neutral

2 stage, 2-50%, 0-30s
(2 current inputs)
MN221
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Alarm stage 1
Trip stage 1
Alarm stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

12.2.4. Negative Pase Sequence 2 Stage DT / With Neutral

2 stage, 2-50%, 0-30s
(3 current inputs)
MN321
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Alarm stage 1
Trip stage 1
Alarm stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters

of the function nominal current
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

12.2.5. Negative Phase Sequence Inverse Time (Thermal) / Without Neutral

(thermal)
2 phase negative phase sequence function with thermal overload characteristic and
alarm- and trip stage.
MN222
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Setting Parameters
CT ratio compensation: 0.4 ... 2 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Formula:
Generator rated current = CT ratio compensation x
function nominal current
Continuous NPS load: 2 ... 25 % in 0.5 % steps
Note: The generator rated current (=100%) related to
the maximum permissible negative phase sequence
current (=continuous NPS) determines the setting
value
Time constant: 1 ... 50 minutes in 1 minute steps
Alarm output: 5 ... 100 % in 1 % steps
Note: 100 % of the configured continuous permissible
NPS
Trip output: 5 ... 100 % in 1 % steps
NPS


Negative phase sequence: In % of the function nominal current
Note: Although a compensation factor is given (see
setting values) this negative phase sequence display
is referring to the relay nominal values.
In %
Loading: of the continuous permissible NPS generator
withstand.
Note: The displayed "Loading" is considering the CT
ratio compensation factor.
Formula: Generator rated current = compensation x
relay nominal current.
Example:
Thus, when the ratio compensating factor is
decreased then the "Loading" indication value will rise
faster.
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

12.2.6. Negative Phase Sequence Inverse Time (Thermal) / With Neutral

(thermal)
3 phase negative phase sequence function with thermal overload characteristic and
alarm- and trip stage.
MN322
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Setting Parameters
CT ratio compensation: 0.4 ... 2 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps
Formula:
Generator rated current = CT ratio compensation x
function nominal current
Continuous NPS load: 2 ... 25 % in 0.5 % steps
Note: The generator rated current (=100%) related to
the maximum permissible negative phase sequence
current (=continuous NPS) determines the setting
value
Time constant: 1 ... 50 minutes in 1 minute steps
Alarm output: 5 ... 100 % in 1 % steps
NPS
Trip output: 5 ... 100 % in 1 % steps
NPS


Negative phase sequence: In % of the function nominal current
Note: Although a compensation factor is given (see
setting values) this negative phase sequence display
is referring to the relay nominal values.
In %
Loading: of the continuous permissible NPS generator
withstand.
Note: The displayed "Loading" is considering the CT
ratio compensation factor.
Formula: Generator rated current = compensation x
relay nominal current.
Example:
Thus, when the ratio compensating factor is
decreased then the "Loading" indication value will rise
faster.
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


12.3.1. MN211/ MN221
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
I5
15 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ 2 TEST ST.2 (opt.)
+
4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
1 2 BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
1 Note: Gen.neutral must not be earthed! 12 - IN 06 15
If earthed: use MN311, MN321! 13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
2 MN221 only! 15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
LEGEND: X7
6
OPTIONAL MODULE:
2
8
3 SI02
Tx+
Transducer 2 DUCER 1
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
Shaft Current
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Rotor E/F 6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03
11
8 +5
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
RS422/485 chain line data interface 9 13
10 Rx-
MODBUS control system interface GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MN211 NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 1-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 155 MN211 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. / MN221 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Wiring Diagram

12.3.2. MN311/ MN321
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2
5 5A
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
I 6 COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ 2 TEST ST.2 (opt.)
+
4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
2 BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
1
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
1 Note: Gen. neutral may be earthed. 13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
(MN311, MN321 measure all 3 phase currents). X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
2 MN321 only! RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
6
2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS

OPTIONAL MODULE
Shaft Current 6
UAKB
TRANS-
Rotor E/F 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485

9 13
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE

Fig. 156 MN311 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. Wiring Diagram / MN321 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Wiring Diagram

12.3.3. MN222
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
1 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
1 Note: Gen.neutral must not be earthed! 13 + OUT 24 16
If earthed: use MN322! 14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
LEGEND: -
OPTIONAL MODULE: X7
6
Transducer 2 2
TRANS-
Shaft Current 3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
Rotor E/F 4 Tx- 9

OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
UAKB
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface TRANS-

7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
RS422/485 chain line data interface 8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MN222 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 157 MN222 INV. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Wiring Diagram

12.3.4. MN322
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2 DC
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
1
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
1 Note: Gen. neutral may be earthed! 14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
LEGEND: 16 IN 08 4
-
OPTIONAL MODULE: X7
Transducer 2 2
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
Rotor E/F
BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 5 GND 10

6
UAKB

RS422/485 chain line data interface 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
MODBUS control system interface Rx+ 12

9 13
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MN322 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 158 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Wiring Diagram


12.4.1. MN211/ MN221
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I L1
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
1 Note: Gen.neutral must not be earthed!

If earthed: use MN311, MN321!
2 MN221 only!
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1 TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT CB1
2
(OPTIONAL) ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Alarm
Trip

VERSION 2
MN211 NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 159 MN211 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. Logic Diagram / MN221 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NEG.PHASE SEQU. CURR. = I2

NOTEBOOK
I L1 IL1
CALCULATION of:
CALCULATION of: IL2 |I2| =
IL2 = - IL1 - IL3 |(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
I L3 IL3 |(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
1
2
Alarm st.1 LEGEND:

|IL2| > (Operate Value st.1) 1 Assume: I0 = 0
(ZERO SEQU. CURR.
equals 0) because
TEST ST.1 gen-neutral is isolated.
Alarm st.2
BIN. I/0 |IL2| > (Operate Value st.2) Note:
PRESET I0 = 1/3 * (IL1 + IL2 + IL3) = 0.
1 3
0 2 a = 1.ej.2 /3 = -1/2 + j. 3/2
a = 1.ej.4/3 = 1-2 - j. 3/2
TEST ST.2
3 BIN. I/0 ALARM ST.1
PRESET
>=1
1 &
& ALARM ST.1
0
LED-
BLOCK. ST.1
DISPLAY
BIN. I/0 TRIP ST.1
PRESET t1 >
& TRIP ST.1
1
0
LED-
BLOCK. ST.2 ALARM ST.2 MATRIX
3 BIN. I/0 >=1
&
PRESET & ALARM ST.2
1 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
1
TRIP ST.2 0
FUNCTION 3
OUTPUT t2 >
& TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
LEGEND:
3 MN221 only.
PROCESSING
MN211 NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

MN221 INEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 160 MN211 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MN211, MN221
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MN211,
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation) MN221
1
0
The generator neutral point is not earthed.

CALCULATION of: Therefore I0 (ZERO SEQU. SYSTEM CURR.) = 0 (assume: no E/F of gen.).
IL2 = - IL1 - IL3

IL1 + IL2 + IL3 = 3 * I0 IL2 = - IL1 - IL2
CALCULATION of:
NPS-CURR: I2. j.X
|I2| = I2 = |IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3| / 3 a

|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| = where: a = 1.ej.2/3 = -1/2 + j. 3/2 120 2/3
|(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
a = 1.ej.4/3 = 1/2 - j. 3/2
R
240 4/3 1
Note: Calibration: 100% NPS 1A
IL1 = 1A
a
NPS 1A
IL2 = 1A IL3 = 1A
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX

MN211 NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 161 MN211 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. / MN221 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

12.4.2. MN311/ MN321
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
1 Note: Gen. neutral may be solidly

earthed, because MN311, MN321
measure all 3 phase currents.
2 MN321 only!
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.1 TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT CB1
2
(OPTIONAL) ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Alarm
Trip

VERSION 2


CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NEG.PHASE SEQU. CURR. = I2

NOTEBOOK
I L1 CALCULATION of:
|I2| = I2
I L2
|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
I L3 |(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
1
Alarm st.1
|IL2| > (Operate Value st.1) LEGEND:
1 a = 1.e = -1/2 + j. 3/2
j.2 /3
a = 1.ej.4/3 = -1/2 - j. 3/2

TEST ST.1
Alarm st.2
BIN. I/0 |IL2| > (Operate Value st.2)
PRESET
1 2
TEST ST.2
2
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST.1
PRESET
>=1
1 &
& ALARM ST.1
0
LED-
BLOCK. ST.1
DISPLAY
BIN. I/0 TRIP ST.1
PRESET t1 >
& TRIP ST.1
1
0
LED-
BLOCK. ST.2 ALARM ST.2
2 MATRIX
BIN. I/0 >=1
&
PRESET & ALARM ST.2
1 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
1
TRIP ST.2 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT 2
t2 >
& TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
LEGEND:
2 MN321 only.
PROCESSING

Fig. 163 MN311 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. / MN321 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MN311, MN321
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MN311,
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation) MN321
1
0
CALCULATION of:
NPS-CURR: I2. IMPEDANCE
|I2| = I2 = (IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3 a

|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| = where: a = 1.ej.2 /3 = -1/2 + j. 3/2 120 2 /3
|(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
a = 1.ej.4 /3 = 1/2 - j. 3/2
REAL
Note: Calibration: 100% NPS confirms 1A 240 4 /3 1
IL1 = 1A
a
(NPS-current) = 1A
IL2 = 1A IL3 = 1A
G
GEN. Generator-neutral may be earthed. All 3 phase currents are measured.
3~
I0 0 is allowed.
Note: If gen. neutral is isolated MN211, MN221 may be used as well.
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX

Fig. 164 MN311 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 1-St. / MN321 Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. 2-St. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

12.4.3. MN222
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I L1
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
1 Note: Gen.neutral must not be earthed!

If earthed: use MN322!
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Alarm
Trip

VERSION 2
MN222 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 165 MN222 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURRENT

(related to GEN-NOMINAL)
LOAD (note: 100% final rotor temp. at
NOTEBOOK cont. unbal. load)
I L1 IL1 CALCULATION of:

CALCULATION of: IL2 |I2| =
IL2 = - IL1 - IL3 |(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
I L3 1 IL3 |(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
2
LOAD (relay-internal calculated temp of rotor) 1 Assume: I0 = 0
4 100% rotor temp. corresponds with set value (ZERO SEQU. CURR.
Cont. Unbal. Load equals 0) because
4 set value NPS Trip
gen-neutral is isolated.
Trip
100% Note:
of max. Alarm I0 = 1/3 * (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)
allowed 4 set value NPS Alarm
= 0.
rotor
temp. 2 a = 1.ej.2/3
= -1/2 + j. 3/2
|I2| / (CT Ratio Comp.)
a = 1.ej.4/3
TEST
= -1/2 - j. 3/2
BIN. I/0 |I2| / (CT Ratio Comp.)
PRESET 3
1
0
ALARM LED-
>=1 DISPLAY
&
BLOCKING & ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
MATRIX BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
3 Set value CT Ratio Compensation adapts the

4 see MN222 DEFINITION OF SET VALUES
I2-current to the realy-internal mathm. algorithms
PROCESSING
so the same percentage-values for Cont. Unbal.
Load can be used even if GEN nom. current and
RELAY-nom current are different.
FORMULA: (CT Ratio Comp.) = (Gen.Nom.Current) / Relay Nom. Current)
MN222 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 166 MN222 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MN222
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MN222
1
0
Explanation: see LOGIC DIAGRAMM/ PROCESSING

4 note
|IL2| / (CT Ratio Comp)
LOAD (relay-internal calculated temp of rotor) I2-current results in a temperature rise of the gen. rotor
100% rotor temp. corresponds with set value
Cont. Unbal. Load
= LOAD.
set value NPS Trip
Trip
100%
See also: MN222 DEFINITION OF SET VALUES
of max. Alarm
allowed set value NPS Alarm
rotor
temp.

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED-
PROCESSING
DISPLAY
(row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

MN222 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING/ LEGEND
Fig. 167 MN222 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

12.4.4. MN322
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
1 Note: Gen. neutral may be earthed!
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Alarm
Trip

VERSION 2
MN322 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 168 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURRENT

(related to GEN-NOMINAL)
LOAD (note: 100% final rotor temp. at
NOTEBOOK cont. unbal. load)
I L1 1 IL1 CALCULATION of:

IL2 |I2| =
I L2
|(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.)| =
I L3 IL3 |(IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3)| / 3
2
LOAD (relay-internal calculated temp of rotor) 1 All 3 phase currents
4 100% rotor temp. corresponds with set value have to be measured

Cont. Unbal. Load
because the gen. neutral
4 set value NPS Trip
is earthed (I0 may esist).
Trip
100% Note:
of max. Alarm I0 = 1/3 * (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)
allowed 4 set value NPS Alarm 0.
rotor 2 a = 1.ej.2/3
temp. = -1/2 + j. 3/2
|I2| / (CT Ratio Comp.) a = 1.ej.4/3
TEST = -1/2 - j. 3/2
BIN. I/0 |I2| / (CT Ratio Comp)
PRESET 3
1
0
ALARM LED-
>=1 DISPLAY
&
BLOCKING & ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
MATRIX BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
3 Set value CT Ratio Compensation adapts the

4 see MN322 DEFINITION OF SET VALUES
I2-current to the relay-internal mathm. algorithms
PROCESSING
so the same percentage-values for Cont. Unbal.
Load can be used even if GEN nom. current and
RELAY-nom current are different.
FORMULA: (CT Ratio Comp.) = (Gen.Nom.Current) / Relay Nom. Current)
MN322 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 169 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MN322
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MN322
1
0
Explanation: see LOGIC DIAGRAMM/ PROCESSING note

|IL2| / (CT Ratio Comp)
LOAD (relay-internal calculated temp of rotor) I2-current results in a temperature rise of the gen. rotor
100% rotor temp. corresponds with set value
Cont. Unbal. Load
= LOAD.
set value NPS Trip
Trip
100%
See also: MN322 DEFINITION OF SET VALUES
of max. Alarm
allowed set value NPS Alarm CAUTION:
rotor LOAD will be set to ZERO if :
temp. 1. BLOCK OF FUNCTION
|I2| / (CT Ratio Comp.) 2. SEND PARAMETERS

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED-
PROCESSING-board
DISPLAY
(row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

MN322 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 170 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

LOAD (relay internal calculated temperature of rotor)

note: 100% of final rotor temp. is reached if Cont. Unbal. Load (=set value) is applied to the stator.
NPS Trip: 110% of max. allowed

rise of rotor temperature
rotor temp.
because of I2 of gen. stator
For example:
NPS Trip = 110% = set.
110%
100%
90%
of max.
allowed 100% of max. allowed rotor temp. NPS Alarm: 90% of max. allowed
rotor For example: rotor temp.
temp. Cont. Unbal. Load = 5% (of gen. nom. For example:
current) results in 100% final rotor temp. NPS Alarm = 90% = set.
The resulting rotor temperature at I2 = 5%
will be the 100% reference for the
NPS Alarm and NPS Trip set values.
EXAMPLE:
Gen. nom. current: 2500A

C.T. nom current: 3000/1A
CT Ratio Comp.: 2500/3000 = 0,8
Max. allowed cont. I2-current for the gen.: 5% (related to gen. nom. (I1-) current)
Settings (example only):
CT Ratio Comp. = 0,8

Cont. Unbal. Load = 5% ( 100% final temp. reference)
Time Constant acc. to rotor temp. characteristic.
NPS-Alarm: 90% (referred to 100% temp. reference)
NPS-Trip: 110% (referred to 100% temp. reference)
MN322 INV. TIME NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR. DEFINITION OF SET VALUES
Fig. 171 MN322 Inv. Time Neg. Phase Sequ. Curr. Definition Of Set Values

12.5. FUNCTION
12.5.1. DT Charakteristik: N211/ MN221/ MN311/ MN321
External single pole short circuits in solidly- or low impedance earthed power systems as well
as two phase short circuits, transmission line conductor break and faults on circuit breaker
poles are causing very high unsymmetrical loading of the generators.
Every unsymmetrical rotating field for high impedance grounded systems can be divided into
a positive- and a negative phase sequence current component whereby the negative phase sequence system will
induce a rotor current with twice the nominal frequency leading to a
non-permissible overheating of the damper winding.
The negative phase sequence protection is evaluating this dangerous situation and is initiating
a generator shut down in case of the NPS component is exceeding the permissible value.
To determine the negative phase sequence component the NPS of the generator current is computed. According to
the method of the symmetrical components the NPS system is:
I2
1
3
(
IL1 a2IL 2 aIL3 ) and a
1
2
j
2
3
IL1, IL2, IL3............ Phase currents

I2............................ Negative phase sequence current
For isolated- and high impedance grounded generator neutrals following formula applies
IL1 IL 2 IL3 0
and subsequently for the negative phase sequence system.
1 3
I2
j
(bIL1 IL3 ) with b j
3 2 2
For the rotor heating the NPS system value is the major component of the temperature rise.
1
I2 bIL1 IL3
3
The factor b represents a phase shift of the unit vector by -60 electrical.
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle. By means of the Fourier Analysis (DSP) the
st
corresponding vectors (value and phase) for the 1 harmonic is computed
and transferred to the CPU.
For each sample interval and phase the CPU is evaluating the negative phase sequence component and also for
each sample interval the amplitude value regarding the initiating
conditions, .i.e. 24 consecutive samples (=2 cycles ) above the setting value, is checked
and if exceeded the initiation is started and after the set time delay a trip signal is given.
The alarm and any possible trip outputs will reset when during 25 consecutive sample
intervals (2 cycles) the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled (trip output extension).
Note: 37 consecutive samples at DRS-LIGTH and DRS-COMPACT1/VE1.

12.5.2. Inverse Time Characteristic: MN222/ MN322
External single pole short circuits in solidly- or low impedance earthed power systems as well
as two phase short circuits, transmission line conductor break and faults on circuit breaker
poles are causing very high unsymmetrical loading of the generators.
Every unsymmetrical rotating field for high impedance grounded systems can be divided into
a positive- and a negative phase sequence current component whereby the negative phase sequence system will
induce a rotor current with twice the nominal frequency leading to a
non-permissible overheating of the damper winding.
The negative phase sequence protection is evaluating this dangerous situation and is initiating
a generator shut down in case of the NPS component is exceeding the permissible value.
To determine the negative phase sequence component the NPS of the generator current is computed. According to
the method of the symmetrical components the NPS system is:
I2
1
3
(
IL1 a2IL 2 aIL3 ) with a
1
2
j
2
3
IL1, IL2, IL3............ Phase currents

I2............................ Negative phase sequence current
For isolated- and high impedance grounded generator neutrals following formula applies
IL1 IL 2 IL3 0
And subsequently for the negative phase sequence system
1 3
I2
j
(bIL1 IL3 ) with b j
3 2 2
For the rotor heating the NPS system value is the major component of the temperature rise.
1
I2 bIL1 IL3 (1)
3
The factor b represents a phase shift of the unit vector by -60 electrical.
The temperature rise of the rotor, respectively the damper winding itself according to a
simplified model is illustrated in the following formula:
2

I 2
t
(t ) Limit

1 e (2)

I 2,0
Thereby is
(t ) .... Temperature of the winding at time t after NPS current begin
....... Thermal heating time constant of the winding
I2 ....... Negative phase sequence current flow through the winding
I2,0 .... Permissible continuous NPS current of the winding
Limit Maximum temperature rise of the winding with the permissible NPS current
which is reached during operation after approximately 4 time constants

All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle. By means of the Fourier Analysis (DSP) the
st
corresponding vectors (value and phase) for the 1 harmonic is computed
and transferred to the CPU.
For each sample interval and phase the CPU is evaluating the negative phase sequence component.
With a simple differential equation the derived temperature rise after each time interval t
on the basis of the measured NPS current as well as from the previous temperature value samples is illustrated in
the formula below and calculated as follows
1
2
I 2, a
Limit a t

I 2, 0

I2,a..... Negative phase sequence current of the sample interval
I2,0..... Configured permissible continuous NPS current
a...... Temperature of the previous sample interval
After each sample interval the temperature value regarding the initiating conditions, i.e. a
st
value above the operating setting is monitored and when exceeded a 1 stage alarm or a
nd
2 stage trip output is given.
The alarm and any possible trip outputs will reset when during 25 consecutive sample
intervals (2 cycles) the initiating conditions are no longer fulfilled (trip output extension).
Note: 37 consecutive samples at DRS-LIGTH and DRS-COMPACT1/VE1.

12.6. COMMISSIONING

12.6.1. DT Characteristic: N211/ MN221/ MN311/ MN321
Pre-Commissioning:
plant requirements. Also the function parameters have to be set according to the
data of the protected object. For this the generator rating for the negative phase sequence current
withstand capability which is obtained from the data sheets of the machine is to be configured in
% of the generator nominal current as follows:
ING
I2,Re l / % I2,Gen / %.
INW
I2,Rel/%......... Function setting in %
I2,Gen/%....... Generator NPS current in %
ING................ Generator nominal current
INCT............... Primary current rating of the connected CT
With a relay test set inject the test current into the first phase input and raise the current to produce operation of the
function.
Please note that the injected current Ie is shown in the DRS function menu "Actual Measured
Values" and the displayed NPS current value Is is according to the formula below.
1
Is .Ie
3
Record the operating value into the commissioning test sheets.
Reduce the test current until the function resets and note the value into the commissioning test sheets.
The external injected values can be displayed in the User program window.
in the sheets.

With 1.5 times the setting value check the function operating time for each phase and stage by
using a timer and record the values in the commissioning sheets.
plant requirements.
During the primary tests the function of the protection system is checked under regular
service and as far as power system operation permits following tests are recommended:
Short Circuit Test:
Apply a two-pole short circuit of adequate rating located at a position where

primary current can flow through the respective CT set.
Insert measuring instruments into the CT circuits and/or open the internal measured
values window in the DRS User program.
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation until operation
of the function, if necessary with reduced setting.
If possible and when power system conditions permit shut down the generator
via a live protective function trip and remove the short circuit.

12.6.2. Inverse Time Characteristic: MN222/ MN322
Pre-Commissioning:
plant requirements. The function parameters are to be set according to the required machine data. At first the CT
Ratio Compensation has to be determined:
IG
Compensation =
IR
IG Rated generator current
IR Nominal current of the protective function
The values for the continuous NPS load and the time constants are to be taken from the machine data sheet
specifications. For the alarm- and trip load the required values are configured in % of the temperature limit Limit .
With a relay test set inject the test current into the first phase input and raise the current to produce operation of the
function.
Please note that the injected current Ie is shown in the DRS function menu "Actual Measured
Values" and the displayed NPS current value Is is according to the formula below.
1
Is .Ie
3
Switch off the test current and operate the RESET key to restore the NPS thermal loading of the negative phase
sequence protective function.
CAUTION: The RESET key may only be operated during the secondary injection tests and not
during the primary checks since the protective function will have an interrupt which can cause
an inadvertent protection trip!
Switch on the pre-adjusted test current again and measure the tripping time delay.
The operating time ta is calculated according to the formula
1
t a .ln (6)
I 2
1 - 2,0
I2
I2 Injected negative phase sequence current

I2.o Continuous permissible NPS loading

By injecting following values:
I2/I2,0 = 3 ...............i.e. the test current is 3 times the nominal current
1 9
t a ln ln 0.118
1 8
1
9
Check the load increase via the menu option "Actual Measured Values" in the display
window of the DRS function and record the operating time as well as the injected current
in the sheets.
settings have to be set to the original values and restored after the tests to the plant setting values according to
system requirements.
During the primary tests the function of the protection system is checked under regular
service and as far as power system operation permits following tests are recommended:
Short Circuit Test:
Apply a two-pole short circuit of adequate rating located at a position where

primary current can flow through the respective CT set.
Insert measuring instruments into the CT circuits and/or open the internal measured
values window in the DRS User program.
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation to verify the NPS
current temperature rise according to the configured characteristic.
Record the test results.
If possible and when power system conditions permit shut down the generator
via a live protective function trip and remove the short circuit.


MP... POWER
13. MP... POWER
13.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MP . . . - Power Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MP . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Power, over/under detect., directional, 1 phase, 1 stage 1067 MP111 32 C2,M,L
Real power directional protection, 3 phase, 1 stage 1019 MP311 32 C2,M,L
Reverse power protection, 1 phase, 1 stage 1129 MP112 32 C2,M
Reverse power protection, 3 phase, 1 stage 1021 MP312 32 C2,M,L
Power measuring, 1 phase 1083 MP101 32 C2,M,L
Power measuring, 3 phase 1082 MP301 32 C2,M,L

MP... POWER
13.2.1. Active Power Protection 1 Phase, 1 Stage
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MP111 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Power, over/under detect., directional, 1 phase, 1 stage 1067 MP111 32 C2,M,L
1 phase, 1 stage DT delayed power function selectable for over- or under detection.
MP111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 150 % in 1 % steps
Power direction: Direction 1/Direction 2
CT error compensation : -10 ... +10 deg. in 0.1 deg. steps

Apparent power: In VA
Real power: In W
Reactive power: In VAr
cos phi: -
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% of current

MP... POWER

3 phase, 1 stage DT delayed power function selectable for over- or under detection.
MP311
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input phase L1
Current input phase L2
Voltages input system 12
Blocking input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 150 % in 1 % steps
Phase rotation: Right/Left

Real power: In W
cos phi: -
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% of current

MP... POWER

3 phase, 2 stage DT delayed power function selectable for over- or under detection per stage.
MP321
Technical Data:
Inputs
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 2 ... 150 % in 1 % steps
Type stage 1: Unter-Erfassung/ber-Erfassung
Operating value stage 2: 2 ... 150 % in 1 % steps
Type stage 2: Unter-Erfassung/ber-Erfassung

Real power: In W
cos phi: -

MP... POWER
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% of current

MP... POWER
13.2.4. Reverse Power Protection 1 Phase, 1 Stage

Reverse power protection, 1 phase, 1 stage 1129 MP112 32 C2,M
1 phase, 1 stage DT delayed power function for reverse power detection.
MP112
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: -5,0 ... 0.2 % in 0.1 % steps

Real power: In W
cos phi: -
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% of current

MP... POWER
13.2.5. Reverse Power Protection 3 Phase, 1 Stage

Reverse power protection, 3 phase, 1 stage 1021 MP312 32 C2,M,L
3 phase, 1 stage DT delayed power function for reverse power detection.
MP312
Technical Data:
Inputs
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: -5,0 ... 0.2 % in 0.1 % steps
Type: Unter-Erfassung/ber-Erfassung

Real power: In W
cos phi: -
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% of current

MP... POWER
13.2.6. Power Measuring 1 Phase

Power measuring, 1 phase 1083 MP101 C2,M,L
1 phase power measuring function for railway traction without outputs.
MP101
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage
Outputs
Analogue: Power (analogue output of internal measured value)
Setting Parameters

Real power: In W
cos phi: -
Measuring
2% of current

MP... POWER
13.2.7. Power Measuring 3 Phase

Power measuring, 3 phase 1082 MP301 C2,M,L
3 phase power measuring function without outputs.
MP301
Technical Data:
Inputs
Outputs
Analogue: Power (analogue output of internal measured value)
Setting Parameters

Real power: In W
cos phi: -
Measuring
2% of current

MP... POWER

13.3.1. MP312
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. 3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
LEGEND: RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
Transducer 2 TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
Shaft Current 4 9
Tx-
Rotor E/F
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) TRANS-

7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface +5
8
RS422/485
RS422/485 chain line data interface Rx+ 12

9 13
MODBUS control system interface 10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MP312 REV. POWER 3-PH. 1-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 172 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Wiring Diagram

MP... POWER

13.4.1. MP312
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
U L1L2
PROCESSING
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Alarm
Trip

VERSION 2
MP312 REV. POWER 3-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 173 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Logic Diagram

MP... POWER
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
APPARENT POWER
REAL POWER
REACTIVE POWER
NOTEBOOK POWER FACTOR
IF: Set Value PHASE ROTATION = RIGHT

U L1L2 calculate PSS (POS.SEQUENCE SYSTEM)
U L2L3 U1 (PPS)
resp.
U L3L1
IF: Set Value PHASE ROTATION = LEFT U2 (NPS)
calculate NPS (NEG.SEQUENCE SYSTEM)

I L1 calculate PSS (POS.SEQUENCE SYSTEM)
I L2 I1 (PPS)
resp.
I L3
IF: Set Value PHASE ROTATION = LEFT I2 (NPS)
calculate NPS (NEG.SEQUENCE SYSTEM)
IF: Set Value POWER DIRECTION = DIRECTION2

ANGLES OF CURRENT PHASORS +180
CALCULATION of:
APPARENT POWER
(ANGLES OF REAL POWER 2
CURRENT PHASORS)
minus REACTIVE POWER 3
(Set Value C.T.Error Comp.) POWER FACTOR
TEST
(REAL POWER) < (OPERATE VALUE) LED-
BIN. I/0
PRESET see 1 2 DISPLAY
1
0
ALARM
BLOCKING >=1
&
BIN. I/0 & ALARM
PRESET LED-
MATRIX BIN. I/0
1 >=1
& PRESET
0
TRIP 1
0
t>
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
1 Note: Set Value Range = MATRIX
-5,0% -0,2% Pnom
2 SIGN:
- REVERSE POWER PROCESSING 3 SIGN:
- OVEREXCITED
+ FORWARD POWER
+ UNDEREXCITED
MP312 REV. POWER 3-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 174 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Logic Diagram / Processing

MP... POWER
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MP312
NOTEBOOK DISPLAY
Online simulation Online-indication of DRS-internal

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
The Rev. Power-protection MP312 utilizes the

calculate PSS (POS.SEQUENCE SYSTEM)
POSITIVE SEQUENCE SYSTEM
(condition: PHASE ROTATION = right).
IF: Set Value PHASE ROTATION = LEFT
If PHASE ROTATION = left NEG. PHASE
calculate NPS (NEG.SEQUENCE SYSTEM) SYSTEM has to be calculated in order to get a
correct result.
IF: Set Value POWER DIRECTION = DIRECTION2 During normal operation forward power of
ANGLES OF CURRENT PHASORS +180
generator the NOTEBOOK DISPLAY-window
should show a positive ACTIVE POWER-value.
If not: please change set value POWER
DIRECTION from Direction 1 to Direction 2.
Note: This feature spares you to change the wiring
of the C.T.
(ANGLES OF This feature cmpensates for C.T.-errors.

CURRENT PHASORS)
minus How to choose the set value:
(Set Value C.T.Error Comp.)
a) Generator synchronized to grid
b) Close turbine (max. reverse power) and adjust excitation in such
way that REACTIVE POWER becomes zero.
Read the indicated value on the notebook screen REAL POWER
(it shows a neg. value).
c) Increase the REACTIVE POWER by increasing the excitation.
Change the set value C.T.Error Comp. until you get the same
indication for REAL POWER as noticed at (b).
Please note:
(REAL POWER) < (OPERATE VALUE)
Sign of REAL POWER:
+ forward power
- reverse power
./.
MP312 REV. POWER 3-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND page 1/2
Fig. 175 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend page1/2

MP... POWER
./. (cont.)
LEGEND PROCESSING
CALCULATION of: Please note:

APPARENT POWER
If you choose to see these DRS internal calculated values as Secondary
REAL POWER
Values (=standard) then the %-numbers are referred to relay nom.values.
REACTIVE POWER
POWER FACTOR

(row 2...14) of PROCESSING
LED-
MATRIX
LED- (row 2...14)
DISPLAY
TRIP-
MATRIX
MP312 REV. POWER 3-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND page 2/2
Fig. 176 MP312 Rev. Power 3-PH. 1-St. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend page 2/2

MP... POWER
13.5. FUNCTION
Directional- and Reverse Power
Directional power functions can be integrated into a protective scheme for various application possibilities
according to plant requirements.
As a maximum power protection to evaluate over power conditions by increasing water head and/or non-
permissible opening of the turbine regulator in generator mode.
As pump power monitoring in conjunction with a frequency function in pump storage systems.
As reverse power protection for water power machines with a higher operating value or as very
sensitive adjustable functions in case of steam turbine sets.
As minimum power protection in pump storage systems to guard against non-permissible closure
of the guide vanes by the governor control to prevent turbulences with subsequent dangerous overheating in the
spiral casing.
With the method of the symmetrical components it can be derived that the power computation of
a three phase system can be reduced to the evaluation of the positive sequence power only.
The algorithm of the directional power- and reverse power function therefore determines from the 12 samples each
cycle the positive phase sequence component of the current I1, respectively the
voltage V1 according to the formulas
I1 IL1 a2IL2 aIL3
V1 VL1L 2 a 2VL 2 L3 aVL3L1
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle and from this with
the Fourier Analyses (DSP) the corresponding vectors, i.e. value and phase angle, for the
st
1 harmonic are computed and transferred to the CPU.
At each sample interval the CPU determines the values for apparent power, real power, reactive power and cos
thereby checking whether the computed real power value is approaching the setting either in the under- or over
detecting mode according to configuration.
When the operating conditions are fulfilled during 24 consecutive samples (= 2 cycles) the initiating signal for the
directional power function is given and the time delay started.
The special sensitive function applicable for steam turbine sets requires a longer averaging of the
measured value until the initiation is started due to the very low setting configuration.
After expiry of the set time delay the trip signal output is activated whereby the DT characteristic
is operating independent from the signal value.

MP... POWER
13.6. COMMISSIONING

Real- and Reverse Power
Pre-Commissioning:
Also the function parameters have to be set according to the data of the protected object
whereby it should be considered that for the operating value PE a calibration has to be
carried out according to the formula below.
PB
PE (%)
PN
Thereby is
PB Primary power operating value in kW

PN Primary function power rating in kW
According to the function requirements an over- or under evaluation is to be selected.
plant requirements.
Function tests are preferably performed with the primary plant out of service.
In case of a 3 phase relay test set is available the external test connections have to be made
according to the configured input matrix of the protective scheme.
Inject three phase symmetrical current and voltage and regulate the test voltage up to nominal
rating.
The measured power by the function can be displayed via the option Actual Measured Values and compared with
the injected power values.
A wrong power direction can either be corrected by changing the polarity of the external CT connections or by
setting the function parameter Current Direction in the opposite way.
An incorrect phase rotation can either be rectified by crossing the external VT connections or
by modifying the Phase Rotation parameter.
The power value is now adjusted in the operating direction by changing the test current or the
phase angle accordingly whereby any possible external blocking inputs should be disabled.
Enter the results into the commissioning test sheets.
The Actual Measured Values display of the real power Pm(%) is related to the injected
current I and voltage V according to following formula:
V I
Pm (%) 3 cos
VN I N

MP... POWER
IN Function rated current

VN Function rated voltage
Alter the injected value to the function reset direction and record the reset value in the test sheets.
To check the function with a single phase test set inject the current into, say phase L1 and the
voltage into system 1 and adjust the values in the operating direction accordingly whereby any possible external
blocking inputs should be disabled.
The relation between the injected quantities V and I and the displayed real power value Pm(%) is as follows:
V I
Pm (%) cos
6 VN I N
IN Function rated current

VN Function rated voltage
Note the operating value in the commissioning sheets.
Change the injected value to the function reset direction and record the reset value in the
test sheets.
Please consider that all external measured values can internally be displayed in the
User program.
Carry out the same checks for the other phases and stages and record the values obtained in
the test sheets.
Check the trip and alarm signals, respectively the LED indications according to the parameter
Check the operating time at 1.1 times the setting for each phase and stage with a suitable
timer and enter the results into the test sheets ein.

- On-Load Checks:
Block protection trips of the directional power function.

Insert measuring instruments, e.g. a Wattmeter, into the CT/VT circuits and/or display
the internal measured values in the User program.
Start up the generator, synchronise to the power system and load the unit.
Via the menu option "Actual Measured Values" compare the power readings with the
measurements of the Wattmeter or Control Room instrument.
Configure the function with the parameter "Current Direction" or "Phase Rotation" to
the actual external connections.
If necessary re-adjust the measured value via the CT Error Compensation parameter.
Raise or lower the generator power output in the operating direction.
Possibly reduce the operating value for these tests and disable any external blocking
inputs.
Record the operating values into the test sheets.
For multistage functions proceed in a similar way with the other stages.
Restore the original parameter settings and re-activate the trip outputs of
the power function.
If system conditions permit shut down the unit via a protection trip.

MP... SUDDEN LOAD LOSS
14. MP... SUDDEN LOAD LOSS
14.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MP . . . Sudden Load Loss Protective Function

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MP . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Sudden load loss interlock 1084 MP319 32 C2,M,L

14.2.1. Sudden Load Loss Function

Sudden load loss interlock 1084 MP319 32 C2,M,L
3 phase, 1 stage sudden load loss function with blocking provisions during unsymmetrical
load currents.
MP319
Technical Data:
Inputs
Voltage input system 1-2
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
NPS load interlock
Setting Parameters
Monitoring time: 0.02 ... 10.00 s in 0.02 s steps
Impedance circle R1: 5 ... 99 Ohm in 0.1 Ohm steps
Impedance ring R1-R2: 1 ... 99 Ohm in 0.1 Ohm steps
NPS load: 10 ... 20 % in 0.5 % steps
Blocking time: 0.1 ... 30 s in 0.1 s steps
Phase rotation: Right / Left

System impedance: In Ohm
NPS load: In %
Delay time in progress: Yes / No

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% of current


14.3.1. MP319
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2
5 5A
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
LEGEND: X7
6
OPTIONAL MODULE:
2
8
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
Transducer 2
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
Shaft Current
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Rotor E/F 6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
10 Rx-
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MP319 POWER SWING BLOCKING WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 177 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Wiring Diagram


14.4.1. MP319
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
U L1L2
PROCESSING
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Alarm
Trip

VERSION 2
MP319 POWER SWING BLOCKING LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 178 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE
NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURR.
NOTEBOOK SUPERVISION TIME STARTED
U L1L2
U L2L3 U1
POS.PHASE U1
U L3L1 SEQU.VOLT. =Z1
I1
I L1
I L2 I1
POS.PHASE
I L3 SEQU.CURR. RESET PROT.
FUNCTION!
I2
NEG.PHASE |I2|>
SEQU.CURR.
FOR DETAILS PLEASE SEE

FIG. X
FIG.
LOCUS Z1
R
R2
R1 ALARM
&
TRIP = BLOCK OF IMPEDANCE PROTECTION
2
TEST
BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET BLOCK BY I2 > & DISPLAY
1
0
ALARM
BLOCKING
>=1
BIN. I/0 &
& ALARM LED-
PRESET
MATRIX
1 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
1
TRIP 1
>=1 1 0
&
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT 2
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
1 Note: THE TRIP OUTPUT IS

JUST APPLIED AS A
BLOCKING INPUT FOR THE Note: THE LENGTH OF THE
PROCESSING
2
IMPEDANCE PROTECTION OUTPUT SIGNAL IS
SYSTEM. DETERMINED BY THE SET
VALUE RECLAIM TIME
MP319 POWER SWING BLOCKING LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 179 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Logic Diagam /Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
SOFTWARE-MODULE: MP319
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
I1 Calculation of POSITIVE PHASE I2 Calculation of NEGATIVE PHASE

POS.PHASE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEG.PHASE SEQUENCE CURRENT
SEQU.CURR. SEQU.CURR.
I1 = (IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3 I2 = (IL1 + a.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3
U1
Calculation of POSITIVE PHASE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE
POS.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT. U1 = (UL1L2 + a.UL2L3 + a.UL3L1) / 3
|I2|> Check |I2|> set
U1
=Z1 Calculation of impedance vector Z1
I1
FOR DETAILS PLEASE SEE Check sequence and timing of LOCUS-trajectory.

X
FIG. Make trip decision.
FIG. LOCUS Z1 For details please see:
R Fig.
R2
Fig.
R1 ALARM
TRIP = BLOCK OF IMPEDANCE PROTECTION
RESET PROT. Protective Function MP319 is resetted if [NPS-current > set] is detected because
FUNCTION! the Power Swing-procedure is agreed to be a symmetrical phenomenon.
Alarm-output of function 78MHO: alarm starts when Z1 crosses
78MHO ALARM the vertical blinder R1.
Trip-output of function 78MHO: trip when Z1 crosses vertical blinder R2
78MHO TRIP
resp. when Z1 enters the inner circle.
MATRIX DISPLAY
(row 2...14) of (row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MP319 POWER SWING BLOCKING LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 180 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM:
CIRCLE SEQUENCE:
R1
1
LOCUS START
3 2
CIRCLE
R2
4
LEGEND:
1 LOCUS AT NORMAL OPERATION OF GENERATOR
2 LOCUS ENTERS CIRCLE R1 ALARM
3 SUPERVISION TIME (MIN. TIME): Requires the impedance phasor (LOCUS) to pass through
the circular ring (R1-R2) longer than this time, thus the function is activated and the output of
the protective function may be set (if no other blocking active).
4 LOCUS ENTERS CIRCLE R2 TRIP (if no blocking is active).
MP319 POWER SWING BLOCKING DEFINITION OF SEQUENCE

Fig. 181 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Definition of Sequence

IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM:
X
LOCUS START
R1
3
ALARM 1
R2
TRIP 2
TIMING OF SEQUENCE:
1 ALARM
t
START
R1 (LOCUS CROSSES CIRCLE R1)
3 SUPER-
VISION
TIME
t
R2 (LOCUS CROSSES
CIRCLE R2)
SET VALUE
SUPERVISION TIME
2 TRIP = BLOCK OF
IMPEDANCE PROTECTION SYSTEM
ACTUAL (=OK.)
2 TRIP
LENGTH OF TRIP SIGNAL GIVEN BY SET VALUE RECLAIM TIME

(DURATION OF BLOCKING SIGNAL FOR IMPEDANCE PROTECTION).
RELAY
READY
AGAIN
MP319 POWER SWING BLOCKING TIMING OF SEQUENCE

Fig. 182 MP319 Power Swing Blocking Timing of Sequence

14.5. FUNCTION
Power Swing Blocking Function MP319:
The purpose of the sudden load loss interlock function MP319 is the blocking of distance protection relays in case
of system load oscillations.
The logic diagram, Item 1.4, shows the basic operation of the MP319 function.
On the impedance plane two circular characteristics with the centre point at the coordinate origin are defined via
the parameter settings of the User program with a radius R1 and R2 whereby R1
is the outer circle.
During a load oscillation the impedance locus is entering the circular characteristic R1 from the outside and may
reach circle R2 within a preset minimum time interval (please refer to setting
values) after which the MP319 will initiate a blocking command to the distance protection.
Pre-condition No. 1 is however that the impedance locus requires a certain minimum time to
pass through the R1-R2 defined impedance ring. A sudden change of the impedance locus
outside R2 and entering R1 is not considered as a power oscillation but rather refers to an external system short
circuit, etc.
In this case the function must not block the distance protection under any circumstances. The
setting value Monitoring Time is determining the minimum time for crossing the impedance
ring R1-R2. If this time is exceeded a function reset will take place.
Pre-condition No. 2 is that the setting value for the maximum permissible NPS load has not been
reached (please refer to Negative Phase Sequence Load configuration).
A real power oscillation can basically be considered a symmetrical occurrence without any excessive NPS
components.
NPS function calibration for setting value and display window:
Single phase injection of 1 A with the other two phases at zero:
Display shows: 0.33 A which exactly corresponds to the NPS current component.
Three phase injection of a symmetric 3 phase system ( 3 x 1 A) with an anti-clockwise phase
rotation will result in a display: 1 A.
The window display shows the "NPS Load" in %, the power oscillation starting "Delay Time in Progress" Yes / No
and also the system impedance which is displayed in Ohm whereby following
calibration is applicable:
Injection:
Current = Phase current = 1 A
(Note: 3 phase current has to be symmetrical, otherwise block by NPS
Voltage = Phase to phase voltage = 100 V
Display = Computed impedance = phase voltage / phase current = 57.7V/1A

= 57.7 Ohm
For 5 A rating a nominal impedance value of 57.7 Ohm/5
= 11.5 Ohm is indicated
Note: The same calibration also applies for the setting value

Setting Values:
Setting Parameters
NPS load: 10 ... 20 % in 0.5 % steps
Monitoring time:
For the impedance locus when crossing the R1-R2 ring from the outside to the inside this time duration has to be at
least required to initiate the function otherwise when the passed time is too
short the function will reset.
Impedance circle R1:

Outer characteristic of both circles defining the impedance ring.
Impedance ring R1-R2:

Distance between R1 and R2, i.e. difference between radius R1 and radius R2.
Caution: Not to be considered as radius R2!
NPS Load:
The value corresponds to the NPS current system. When exchanging two of the three phases
the negative phase sequence load will be 100 %.
The MP319 function is blocked during NPS load conditions, respectively then the distance
protection will not be blocked.
Blocking time:
This setting specifies the trip output duration of the MP319, i.e. the blocking command for the
distance protection relay.
Operating sequence:
When the impedance locus enters circle R1 the MP319 function is initiated and by crossing
circle R2 the trip, i.e. blocking command is given whereby the time duration is defined by the
Blocking Time parameter configuration.
Phase rotation:
The phase rotation encountered during normal operating conditions in relation to the current
input matrix of the MP319 function.

14.6. COMMISSIONING

Pre-Commissioning:
With a relay test set inject following 3 phase symmetrical quantities:

- Phase currents
- Phase to Phase voltages
Inputs
Test input
Shifting the impedance vector by slowly increasing the test current and keeping the test voltage constant function
initiation and trip is to be confirmed.
The impedance locus has to cross the setting characteristic from outside to the inside whereby
it has to be considered that for crossing R1-R2 a minimum time is required (Monitoring Time) to
produce an output otherwise when crossing too fast the function will reset.
Note:
By single phase current injection the NPS interlock will respond thereby causing either function
block or function reset.
Note:
The phase rotation has to be considered and if necessary the corresponsing parameter setting
modified according to requirements.
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
NPS load interlock
The correct function operation can be verified with the aid of the window display of the internal
measured values:

System impedance: In Ohm
NPS load: In %
Delay time in progress: Yes / No
If required a temporary change of the setting parameters should be done to carry out the tests
and to verify the various operating sequences more comfortably:

Setting Parameters
NPS load: 10 ... 20 % in 0.5 % steps
Check the analogue inputs with the "Internal Measured Values" of the User program. The phase
rotation can be confirmed by activation of the icon Read Fault Record in the PROCESSING window.
Note: For this menu item it should be considered that curve sections are read which have to be
combined to obtain the whole characteristic. Therefore by this way of curve issue there will be
periodic discrepancy portions which do however not represent the real signal trace.
An on-load function operation can be performed by temporary setting change and
by shifting the reactive load current with the excitation system accordingly.


MQ ... INADVERTENT ENERGISING/VOLTAGE CONTROLLED
OVERCURRENT
15. MQ ... INADVERTENT ENERGISING/VOLTAGE CONTROLLED

OVERCURRENT
15.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MQ . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MQ . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Inadvertent energising 1076 MQ311 27/50 C2,M,L
Voltage controlled overcurrent 1080 MQ312 27/51 C2,M,L

OVERCURRENT
15.2.1. Inadvertent Energising
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MQ311 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Inadvertent energising protection 1076 MQ311 27/50 C2,M,L
3 phase, 1 stage inadvertent energising current function with voltage interlock.
MQ311
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value I: 0.1 ... 5 xIn in 0.05 xIn steps
Operating value U: 10 ... 120 V in 0.5 V steps
Operating time delay: 0.1 ... 1 s in 0.05 s steps
Reset time delay: 0.5 ... 10 s in 0.05 s steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

OVERCURRENT
15.2.2. Voltage Controlled Overcurrent
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MQ312 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Voltage controlled overcurrent 1080 MQ312 27/51 C2,M,L
3 phase DT characteristic voltage controlled overcurrent function.
MQ312
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Voltage interlock: 20 ... 120 V in 1 V steps
K factor: 0.1 ... 1 in 0.01 steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

OVERCURRENT

15.3.1. MQ311
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2
5 5A
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
1 21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. 3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
1 CURRENT DIRECTION DOES NOT MATTER 12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
LEGEND: 14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
OPTIONAL MODULE: 16 IN 08 4
-
-UAKB Transducer 1 RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
Transducer 2 X7
6
Shaft Current 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
Rotor E/F 2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-

BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
UAKB
TRANS-
MODBUS control system interface 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
9 13
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MQ311 INADVERTENT ENERGIZING WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 183 MQ 311 Inadvertent Energizing Wiring Diagram

OVERCURRENT
15.3.2. MQ312
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2
5 5A
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3
MAIN 8 5A
9 I3 7
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
1 3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
G U5 1
GEN. 10
3~ X4
OUT 17 2
3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
R DESIGN OF GEN. STARPOINT: 7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
ISOLATED OR
9 + OUT 22 12
EARTHED VIA RESISTOR 10 IN 05 13
-
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
1 DRS STANDARD APPLICATION USING Uph-ph 13 + OUT 24 16
(GEN. STARPOINT NOT EARTHED) 14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
LEGEND: -
OPTIONAL MODULE: X7
6
Transducer 2 2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
Rotor E/F 4 Tx- 9

OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
UAKB

7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MQ312 VOLT. CONTR. O/C WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 184 MQ312 Volt Contr. O/C Wiring Diagram

OVERCURRENT

15.4.1. MQ311
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
U L1L2
PROCESSING
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Trip

VERSION 2
MQ311 INADVERTENT ENERGIZING LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 185 MQ311 Inadvertent Energizing Logic Diagram

OVERCURRENT
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2 U>
U L2L3 U> >=1

2 &
U L3L1 U>
TEST
BLOCKING
1
t > PICK-UP t < DROP-OFF
DELAY DELAY U > BLOCKING
FOR I > TRIP
= ACTIVE!
I L1 BLOCK. OF I > TRIP

I>
BECAUSE U > WAS FIRST
I L2
I> >=1 TRIP &
I L3
I>
TEST BLOCKING
LED-
BIN. I/0 TRIP I > DISPLAY
PRESET
1
0 INADVERTENT
ENERGIZATION
BLOCKING DETECTED
TRIP! LED-
BIN. I/0 MATRIX
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0
1
0
TRIP
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1 & TRIP TRIP-
0 MATRIX

1 SEE DIAGRAM: MQ311: INADVERTENT ENERGIZING
PROCESSING
TIMING SEQUENCE/ EXAMPLES

2 IN ORDER TO KEEP TIMERS RESET DURING BLOCK.-MODE
MQ311 INADVERTENT ENERGIZING LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 186 MQ311 Inadvertent Energizing Logic Diagram / Processing

OVERCURRENT
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MQ311
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MQ311
1
0
I> |I| > OPERATING VALUE I
U> |U| > OPERATING VALUE U
t > PICK-UP
DELAY
BLOCKING OF I > BY U >
STARTS AFTER PICK-UP DELAY TIME OF U>
t < DROP-OFF
DELAY
BLOCKING OF I > BY U >
ENDS AFTER DROP-OFF DELAY TIME OF U>
Programmable
LED-indications
software-matrix for
of
MATRIX DISPLAY
PROCESSING
(row 2...14) of
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING

TRIP-
MATRIX

TRIP FUNCTION OUTPUT: Trip INADVERTENT ENERGIZING
MQ311 INADVERTENT ENERGIZING LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 187 MQ311 Inadvertent Energizing Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

OVERCURRENT
UGEN
SET VALUE U
U>
BLOCK OF I > BY U >
PICK-UP DROP-OFF- PICK-UP DROP-OFF-

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY
IGEN
BLOCK BLOCK
SET VALUE I
I>
TRIP COMMAND ISSUED

1
I > & NO BLOCK = TRIP I > & NO BLOCK = TRIP
1 INADVERTENT ENERGIZATION = I > & U > AT SAME TIME STARTING TRIP!
MQ311 INADVERTENT ENERGIZING TIMING SEQUENCE / EXAMPLES

Fig. 188 MQ311 Inadvertent Energizing Timing Sequence / Examples

OVERCURRENT
15.4.2. MQ312
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
I L1 I1
I L2 I2
I L3 I3
U1
U L1L2 1 DRS STANDARD
1 U2 APPLICATION
U L2L3 USES Uph-ph
U3
U L3L1
U1
U L1
2 NON-STANDARD
2 U2 APPLICATION
U L2 USES Uph
U3
U L3
G TEST
GEN. (OPTIONAL)
3~
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
R DESIGN OF GEN. STARPOINT:

TRIP
1 GEN.STARPOINT COMMANDS
ISOLATED OR OUTPUT CB1
EARTHED VIA RESISTOR CONTACTS CB2
(DRS STANDARD): ALARM
USE PHASE-PHASE VOLT. CONTACTS
2 GEN.STARPOINT EARTHED 51 Alarm
(OPT.): 51 Trip
USE PHASE-GND VOLT.
LEGEND
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
MQ312 VOLT. CONTR. O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 189 MQ312 Volt. Contr. O/C Logic Diagram

OVERCURRENT
NOTEBOOK
I L1 IL1>Iset
I L2 IL2>Iset
I L3 IL3>Iset
IL1>k.Iset >=1
&
IL2>k.Iset
&
IL3>k.Iset
&
U L1L2 UL1L2<Uset
U L2L3 U < Uset
UL2L3<Uset >=1
U L3L1 UL3L1<Uset
TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
PRESET
1
0
>=1 ALARM
&
BLOCKING & ALARM LED-
BIN. I/0 MATRIX
PRESET >=1
&
1
BIN. I/0
0
PRESET
TRIP 1
0
t > tset
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MQ312 VOLT. CONTR. O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 190 MQ312 Volt. Contr. O/C Logic Diagram Processing

OVERCURRENT
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MQ312
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MQ312
1
IL1>Iset Check: |IL1| > OPERATE VALUE (=setting)
IL1>k.Iset Check: |IL1| > OPERATE VALUE k-Factor (see settings)
UL1L2<Uset Check: |UL1L2| < VOLTAGE LIMIT (=setting)
t > tset Check: t > TIME DELAY (=setting)
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX

MQ312 VOLT. CONTR. O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 191 MQ312 Volt. Contr. O/C Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

OVERCURRENT
VOLT. CONTR. O/C DEFINITE TIME

TRIP CHARACTERISTIC
TRIP
if
TRIP
U < Uset
tset
ALARM ALARM
if
U < Uset
I
k x Iset Iset
OPERATE VALUE
VOLTAGE LIMIT
(OPERATE VALUE) x (k-FACTOR)
TIME DELAY
(DEFINITE TIME CHARACTERISTIC)
MQ312 VOLT. CONTR. O/C TRIP CHARACTERISTIC

Fig. 192 MQ312 Volt. Contr. O/C Trip Characteristic

OVERCURRENT
15.5. FUNCTION
15.5.1. MQ311
The inadvertent energising function MQ311 is a 3 phase, 1 stage current protection provided
with a voltage interlock.
Principle:
Accidental energising of the generator unit at standstill, i.e. the power system voltage is
suddenly applied under short circuit conditions and limited only by the generator-transformer
impedances thereby causing an instantaneous high short circuit current inrush is detected by
this protective function.
The function is monitoring the system conditions during synchronising and on-load operation
and in case of an non-permissible V/I relation a protection trip is immediately initiated.
The inadvertent energising protection is basically an overcurrent function which is time delayed blocked
at rising voltages and time delayed de-blocked during falling system voltages (please
also refer to the LOGIC DIAGRAMS).
Therefore the function is only active for a short time during generator excitation start-up and is
subsequently blocked (time delayed) until the unit is taken out of service.
Algorithm:
Please see figures above:

When one of the three input voltages is exceeding the setting Operating Value V the current function
will remain active within the configured time delay Delay on Pick-up.
Subsequently the current function is blocked and can also be defined as BLOCK ON Delay.
As soon as the three input voltages are falling below the set value the internal function block is
de-activated and can therefore be denominated as a BLOCK OFF Delay.
In case of no function block and one of the three currents is larger than the "Operating Value I"
an instantaneous trip signal is immediately given.
Recommendation for Protection Design (Please Note!):
Without special measures there is a chance for a maltrip in case of a temporary grid fault.
Lets consider an example:

a) Grid voltage decreases below set value because of grid fault, current stays above setting
b) "Drop-off" delay will start.
c) During "Drop-off"-delay the grid-fault is cleared and the voltage comes up again, current still
above setting.
d) "Pick-up" Delay starts immediately, causing the function to activate! Maltrip!
Please note the rule: "Safety first" therefore the "Drop-off" blocking state is
overruled by the "Pick-up"-delay state immediately.
Function trips because current above setting and no blocking during "Pick-Up"!
Solution:
a) Digital Input "CB is on" blocks the protective function (blocking must be delayed).

OVERCURRENT
This solution is highly recommended. Most reliable solution, will work in all cases of
grid faults.
b) Setting change. This solution is suitable only if the versions of grid faults resp. the
voltage and current values are exactly predictable.

OVERCURRENT
15.5.2. MQ312
The voltage controlled overcurrent function MQ312 is a 3 phase overcurrent protection with a voltage
controlled definite time delayed (DT) operating characteristic.
Principle:
Change of the time-current characteristic at a definite set voltage value and it should be noted that the
function is operating differently to the Voltage Restraint O/C (MI318) which is altering the
operating characteristic continuously with respect to the voltage.
When one of the three input voltages drops below the Voltage Limit setting the internal operating value
is changing from
"Operating Value"
to
"Operating Value x K Factor"
Input Values fort he voltage controlled overcurrent function:
a) Generators with solidly earthed neutrals are using the phase to neutral voltages whereby
the recommended setting Voltage Limit is approximately 60% nominal covering phase to
phase and phase to earth faults.
b) For impedance earthed or ungrounded generator neutrals the recommended phase to phase
voltage Voltage Limit setting is approximately 30 % of the nominal voltage rating whereby the
function is operating only in case of phase to phase faults.
Definition of this Function for the DRS System:
The operating characteristic change does not depend on a current/time curve but is fixed to a
definite time delayed overcurrent performance which is reducing the current setting should the
system voltage decrease below a defined level.
The application of this DRS System function is in general for generator units having a neutral
impedance grounding, i.e. neutral distribution transformer earthing, a neutral earthing resistor, or
for ungrounded systems. This means that the parameter setting Voltage Limit is using the phase to
phase voltage values thereby operating for phase to phase short circuit faults. The recommended setting
for the voltage limit is about 30% nominal and for the K factor configuration
approximately 0.4
Characteristic:
The function is representing a relation between the phase currents and the phase to phase voltages.
The internal characteristic change from the current setting I to K x I is common for all three phases in
case of one of the three phase to phase voltages falls below the configured Voltage Limit value
meaning that in each chase the smallest phase to phase voltage and the highest
phase current are considered.

OVERCURRENT
15.6. COMMISSIONING

15.6.1. MQ311
3 phase, 1 stage inadvertent energising current function with provided with a

voltage interlock.
Pre-Commissioning:
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Test input
With a relay test set inject a single phase or a three phase test current above the setting parameter "Operating
Value I" until the function operates.
With a relay test set inject a single phase or a three phase test current above the setting parameter "Operating
Value I" and at the same time a three phase test voltage below the
setting parameter Operating Value V until the function operates.
With a relay test set inject a single phase or a three phase test voltage above the setting parameter Operating
Value V and after the Delay on Pick-up time apply one ore more
phase currents above the configured "Operating Value I" setting. The relay function is
blocked and cannot operate.
Note: The current function time delayed blocked after raising the generator voltage during
start-up and time delayed re-activated after de-excitation of the generator.
The tests can therefore be finalised by two ways:

a)
Currents and voltages are switched off simultaneously ... no trip.
b)
The voltage is switched off and only after expiry of the Delay on Drop-off setting the test
current is switched off ... trip.
Note: During generator standstill where the voltage is zero the function is always active!

OVERCURRENT
Note:
Setting Parameters
Operating value V: 10 ... 120 V in 0.5 V steps
Delay on pick-up: 0.1 ... 1 s in 0.05 s steps
Delay on drop-off: 0.5 ... 10 s in 0.05 s steps
During short circuit tests this instantaneous function can be verified just like a normal over-current protection, i.e.
with a short circuit by zero system voltage the function is active.
During the voltage- and on-load tests the required correct function de-activation (blocking) can
also be observed.

OVERCURRENT
15.6.2. MQ312
3 phase voltage controlled overcurrent protection with a DT characteristic.
During short circuit tests this function can be verified just like a normal over-current protection.
Please also refer to Section "MI Current DT".
It should be considered that during short circuit tests the actual current setting will be reduced
by the K Factor x Operating Value according to voltage controlled overcurrent characteristic.
Setting Parameters
Voltage interlock: 20 ... 120 V in 1 V steps
K factor: 0.1 ... 1 in 0.01 steps

OVERCURRENT

MR... ROTOR EARTH FAULT / ROTOR INSULATION
16. MR... ROTOR EARTH FAULT / ROTOR INSULATION
16.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MR . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MR . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Rotor earth fault protection (eIEGL) 1030 MR111 40 C2,M
Rotor earth fault protection 1062 MR112 40 C2,M
Rotor insulation protection (high resistance) (MIEGL) 1040 MR121 40 C2,M
Note: The new version of the rotor insulation protection has to be
used for all new schemes!
Rotor insulation (UAKB) 1092 MR131 40 C2A, M
1. Stage: 1 100 kOhm / 0 840 s
2. Stage: 1 20 kOhm / 0 99 s
Remark: Hardware auxiliary module "UAKB" is necessary.

16.2.1. Rotor Earth Fault
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MR111 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Rotor earth fault protection (eIEGL) 1030 MR111 40 C2,M
1 stage rotor earth fault function.
Caution: The maximum permissible capacitance to ground which is galvanic

connected to the rotor measuring circuit has to be 2 F.
MR111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input rotor-ground resistance
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 500 ... 5000 Ohm in 10 Ohm steps

Insulation level: In Ohm
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 3 cycles typical
Accuracy: +/- 70 Ohm within the range 2 ... 2.5 kOhm
+/- 200 Ohm within the range 1 ... 3 kOhm
+/- 1 kOhm within the range 0.6 ... 4 kOhm


Rotor earth fault protection 1062 MR112 40 C2,M
1 stage rotor earth fault function with external attenuator box.

MR112
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input rotor-ground resistance
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters

Insulation level: In Ohm
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 3 cycles typical
Accuracy: +/- 70 Ohm within the range 2 ... 2.5 kOhm
+/- 200 Ohm within the range 1 ... 3 kOhm
+/- 1 kOhm within the range 0.6 ... 4 kOhm

16.2.2. Rotor Insulation

Rotor insulation protection (high resistance) (MIEGL) 1040 MR121 40 C2,M
Note: The new version of the rotor insulation protection has to be
used for all new schemes!
2 stage high resistance rotor earth fault function (rotor insulation).

MR121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input "Rotor Insulation"
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 1
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 20 ... 100 kOhm in 1 kOhm steps
Operating value stage 2: 4 ... 25 kOhm in 1 kOhm steps

Insulation level: In kOhm
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: typical 0.5 ... 3 min.
Accuracy: Typical better than 3 % (referred to the range limit
value)


Rotor insulation (UAKB) 1092 MR131 40 C2A, M
1. Stage: 1 100 kOhm / 0 840 s
2. Stage: 1 20 kOhm / 0 99 s
Remark: Hardware auxiliary module "UAKB" is necessary.
2-stage high impedance rotor earth fault (rotor insulation).
Caution: maximum allowed capacity of measuring unit, which is connected galvanically with the plant part:
10 F.
Remark: Hardware auxiliary module "UAKB" is necessary
Remark:
Detailled description of auxiliary module "UAKB": see
"Description of axiliary module UAKB
Universal Ankoppel Baustein CIC-012-A"
Important: This description also contains information about various variants of rotor earth fault
protection with UAKB (depending on mode of excitation system, etc.) and about further functions of UAKB
module (measuring transducer, shaft current, etc.).

MR131
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC-input "UAKB"-output signal
(corresponds to rotor - earth resistor)
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 1
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 1 ... 100 kOhm in 1 kOhm - steps
Operating time stage 1: 0 ... 840 s in 0,5 s - steps
Operating value stage 2: 1 ... 20 kOhm in 1 kOhm - steps
Operating time stage 2: 0 ... 99 s in 0,5 s - steps

Insulation level: In kOhm
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: typ. 300 ms ... 2 s, depending on
rotor-earth capacity.
Accuracy: typ. better than 3 % (related to range end value)


16.3.1. MR111 (0 ... 150 VAC)
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 + - GND 1
2 I1 DC OUT 01 2
24V...48VDC 3
3 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
4 I2
5
EXC. 5 OUT 03 6
TRANSF. 6 I3 7
7 OUT 04 8
8 I4 9
TRANS- 2 9 OUT 05 10
FORMER 10 I5
DRS- OUT 06
11
12
COMPACT2A
11 13
12 I6 OUT 07 14
13 15
14 I7 OUT 08 16
15 X5
16 I8 1
17 OUT 09 2
18 I9 3
G 19
OUT 10 4
GEN. ROTOR 5
3~ 20 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
FOR MAINTENANCE 3 11
WORKS AT ROTOR 4 U2 OUT 14 12
CIRCUIT SWITCH OFF 5 13
AUX. SUPPLY M.C.B. 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
1 EXC. TRANSFORMER PHASE-PHASE VOLT.: U4 OUT 16 16
8
MAX. 150VACRMS (0...150VACRMS). 9 X6
NOTE: IF V > 150VACRMS use IEGL400"! U5 1
10
IF V > 400VACRMS use IEGL850"! OUT 17 2
X4 3
2 choose: 50 or 60Hz 1 OUT 18 4
TEST ST.1 + +
choose: 110 or 220VAC (optional) 2 - IN 01 5
-
TEST ST.2 3 + OUT 19 6
3 adjust eIEGL23": +
4 IN 02 7
(optional) - -
a) 50/60Hz 5 + OUT 20 8
BLOCK. ST.1 +
(Jumper X5 or X6) 6 - IN 03 9
(optional) -
7 + OUT 21 10
b) 110VAC BLOCK. ST.2 +
8 - IN 04 11
(Jumper X2 = 2-3) (optional) -
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
Aux. Supply 11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
110/220VAC/ 50Hz only 13 OUT 24
+ 16
50(60)Hz SAFE AC 3 14 - IN 07
60Hz only X2
15 +
X1 1 3 4 2
16 IN 08 4
1 PANEL -
IEGL150" X7
SHIELD 6
X1 50Hz X1 1
VAC 16 20 2
220
eIEGL23
14 60Hz 3 8
eIU124
Tx+
OPTIONAL MODULES
MOD-
VAC
BUS
15 4 Tx- 9
13 19
5 GND 10
6
110VAC 220VAC 7
only only X1 11 12 10 6
+5 11
8
RS422/485
4 FUSE Rx+ 12
9 13
6A Rx-
10
EURAX
14
MIEGL
11 GND
Tx+ 15
12 16
HV-FUSES INSIDE OF EXC. CUBICLE. POWER STATION 13 Tx-
TEST VOLT. OF CABLES ACC. NOM. EARTH POTENTIAL 14
ROTOR VOLTAGE!
X9
FRONTSIDE
NOTEBOOK X10
RS 232
MAINTENANCE
MR111 ROTOR E/F PROTECTION RANGE: 0,5...5k

SUITABLE FOR EXC. SYSTEMS WITH EXC. TRANSFORMER PHASE-PHASE
VOLTAGES UP TO 150VACRMS (0...150VACRMS) WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 193 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55k Suitable For Exc. Systems With Exc. Transformer
Phase-Phase Voltage Up To 150VACRMS (0.150VACRMS) Wiring Diagram

16.3.2. MR111 (150 ... 400 VAC)
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 + - GND 1
2 I1 DC OUT 01 2
24V...48VDC 3
3 110V...220VDC
I2 DC OUT 02 4
4 5
EXC. 5 OUT 03 6
TRANSF. 6 I3 7
7 OUT 04 8
8 I4 9
9 OUT 05 10
DRS-
2
I5 11
10 OUT 06 12
TRANS-
COMPACT2
11 13
FORMER
12 I6 OUT 07 14
13 15
14 I7 OUT 08 16
15 X5
16 I8 FOR MAINTENANCE 1
17 OUT 09 2
WORKS AT ROTOR
18 I9 3
CIRCUIT SWITCH OFF OUT 10 4
19 AUX. SUPPLY M.C.B. 5
I 10
G 20
EXC. TRANSFORMER
OUT 11 6
GEN. ROTOR X8 7
3~ 1
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.: OUT 12 8
U1 MAX. 400VACRMS 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 (150...400VACRMS).
NOTE: IF V > 400VACRMS 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
4 ROTOR E/F PROT. 5 use IEGL850! 13
OUT OF SERVICE 6 U3 IF V < 150VACRMS OUT 15 14
NORMAL OPERATION = 7 use IEGL150! 15
U4 OUT 16 16
CONTACTS OPEN; 8 3 EXT. PANEL IEGL400"
9 X6
CLOSED = USUALLY MOUNTED
OUT OF SERVICE. 10 U5 1
INSIDE EXC. CUBICLE. OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
+
(optional) 4 - IN 02 7
+ - -
DC AUX. VOLT. +
(110/220/24VDC) -
7 + OUT 21 10
BLOCK. ST.1 +
8 - IN 04 11
Aux. Supply: 230VAC (optional) -
9 + OUT 22 12
50(60)Hz SAFE SUPPLY BLOCK. ST.2 +
10 - IN 05 13
(optional) -
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
3
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
PANEL IEGL400" X2
suitable for Exc. Transformer
15 +
1 16 IN 08 4
Phase-Phase Voltages 150...400VAC -
Draw.no.: 4628390 RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
X1 X1 SHIELD 6
7 11 2
eIEGL23
8 12 3 8
eIU124
Tx+
OPTIONAL MODULES
MOD-
4
BUS
R R 4 Tx- 9
not con- 5 GND 10
nected 6
X1 9 10 1 2 5 6 13 7 11
8 +5
RS422/485
FUSE FUSE Rx+ 12

POWER 9 13
6A 6A Rx-
STATION 10
EURAX
14
MIEGL
11 GND
EARTH 15
12 Tx+
POTENTIAL Tx- 16
HV-FUSES INSIDE OF EXC. CUBICLE. 13
TEST VOLT. OF CABLES ACC. NOM. ROTOR VOLTAGE! 14
X9
FRONTSIDE
NOTEBOOK DRS-CABLE no. TID-006--
X10
MAINTENANCE RS 232

Fig. 194 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55k Suitable For Exc Systems With Exc. Transformer
Phase-Phase Voltages Up To 400VACRMS (150400VACRMS) Wiring Diagram

16.3.3. MR111 (400 ... 850 VAC)
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 + - GND 1
2 I1 DC OUT 01 2
24V...48VDC 3
3 110V...220VDC
I2 DC OUT 02 4
4 5
EXC. 5 OUT 03 6
TRANSF. 6 I3 7
7 OUT 04 8
8 I4 9
9 OUT 05 10
DRS-
2
I5 11
10 OUT 06 12
TRANS-
COMPACT2
11 13
FORMER
12 I6 OUT 07 14
13 15
14 I7 OUT 08 16
15 X5
16 I8 1 FOR MAINTENANCE 1
17 OUT 09 2
WORKS AT ROTOR
18 I9 3
CIRCUIT SWITCH OFF OUT 10 4
19
AUX. SUPPLY M.C.B. 5
20 I 10
G 2 EXC. TRANSFORMER
OUT 11 6
GEN. ROTOR X8 7
3~ 1
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.: OUT 12 8
U1 MAX. 850VACRMS 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 (400...850VACRMS).
NOTE: IF V < 400VACRMS 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
4 ROTOR E/F PROT. 5 use IEGL400! 13
OUT OF SERVICE 6 U3 IF V < 150VACRMS OUT 15 14
7 use IEGL150! 15
NORMAL OPERATION = OUT 16
U4 16
CONTACTS OPEN; 8 3 EXT. PANEL IEGL850"
9 X6
CLOSED = USUALLY MOUNTED
OUT OF SERVICE. 10 U5 1
INSIDE EXC. CUBICLE. OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
+
+ - -
DC AUX. VOLT. +
(110/220/24VDC) -
7 + OUT 21 10
BLOCK. ST.1 +
8 - IN 04 11
Aux. Supply: 230VAC (optional) -
9 + OUT 22 12
50(60)Hz SAFE SUPPLY BLOCK. ST.2 +
10 - IN 05 13
(optional) -
11 + OUT 23 14
3 12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
PANEL IEGL850" X2
suitable for Exc. Transformer
15 +
16 IN 08 4
1 Phase-Phase Voltages 400...850VAC -
Draw.no.: 4628385 RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
X1 X1 SHIELD 6
7 11 2
eIEGL23
8 12 3 8
eIU124
Tx+
OPTIONAL MODULES
4
MOD-
BUS
R R 4 Tx- 9
not con- 5 GND 10
nected 6
X1 9 10 1 2 5 6 13 7 11
8 +5
RS422/485
FUSE FUSE Rx+ 12

POWER 9 13
6A 6A Rx-
STATION 10
EURAX
14
MIEGL
11 GND
EARTH 15
12 Tx+
POTENTIAL Tx- 16
HV-FUSES INSIDE OF EXC. CUBICLE. 13
TEST VOLT. OF CABLES ACC. NOM. ROTOR VOLTAGE! 14
X9
FRONTSIDE
NOTEBOOK X10
RS 232
MAINTENANCE

Phase Phase Voltages Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Wiring Diagram

16.3.4. MR121 (0 ... 400 VAC)
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 + - GND 1
2 I1 DC OUT 01 2
24V...48VDC 3
3 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
4 I2
5
EXC. 5 OUT 03 6
TRANSF. 6 I3 7
7 OUT 04 8
8 I4 9
9 OUT 05 10
2 10 I5 DRS- OUT 06
11
12
COMPACT2
11 13
12 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS- 15
13
FORMER OUT 08 16
14 I7
15 X5
16 I8 1
17 OUT 09 2
18 I9 3
19 OUT 10 4
5
20 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
G 2 U1
OUT 13 10
GEN. ROTOR 3
3~ U2
11
4 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 OPTIONAL: ROTOR 1 OUT 18 4
TEST ST.1 + +
E/F PROTECTION (optional) 2 - IN 01 5
-
SWITCHED OFF TEST ST.2 3 + OUT 19 6
+
DURING STANDSTILL (optional) 4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
BY AUX. CONTACT BLOCK. ST.1 +
6 - IN 03 9
OF FIELD BREAKER. (optional) -
7 + OUT 21 10
BLOCK. ST.2 +
2 EXC. TRANSFORMER 8 - IN 04 11
(optional) -
9 + OUT 22 12
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.: 10 IN 05 13
-
MAX. 400VAC. 11 + OUT 23 14
NOTE: IF V > 400VAC 12 - IN 06 15
use: ext. panel IEGL850" 13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
+ module MIEGL850"! 15
X2
+
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
LEGEND: 8
eIEGL23
3
eIU124
Tx+
OPTIONAL MODULES
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULES: AUX. SUPPLY: 5
GND 10
-MIEGL rotor isolation supervision SAFE AC 6
-eIEGL rotor earth fault protection 230VAC 7
-EURAX signal transducer +5 11
8
RS422/485
-eIU124 shaft current supervision P Rx+ 12

9 13
1 10 Rx-
EURAX
14
MIEGL
N GND
12 Tx+
SHIELD 14
X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006-- RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MR121 ROTOR E/F (INSULATION SUPERVISION) RANGE: 4...100k

SUITABLE FOR EXC. SYSTEMS WITH EXC. TRANSFORMER
PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGES UP TO 400VAC WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 196 MR121 Rotor E/F (Insulation Supervision) Range: 4100k Suitable For Exc. Systems with Exc. Transformer
Phase-Phase Voltages Up To 400VAC Wiring Diagram

16.3.5. MR121 (400 ... 850 VAC)
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 + - GND 1
2 I1 DC OUT 01 2
24V...48VDC 3
3 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
4 I2
5
EXC. 5 OUT 03 6
TRANSF. 6 I3 7
7 OUT 04 8
8 I4 9
9 OUT 05 10
DRS-
2
11
10 I5
TRANS- OUT 06 12
COMPACT2
11 13
FORMER
12 I6 OUT 07 14
13 15
14 I7 OUT 08 16
15 X5
16 I8 1
17 OUT 09 2
18 I9 3
19 OUT 10 4
5
I 10
G 20 OUT 11 6
GEN. ROTOR X8 7
3~ 1 OUT 12 8
3 U1 9
4
2 OUT 13 10
FUSE 1 X1
3 11
PANEL 4 U2 OUT 14 12
2
6A R IEGL850" 5 13
3 suitable for Exc.
6 U3 OUT 15 14
4 Transf. Phase-
4 Phase Voltages 7 15
R OUT 16 16
FUSE 5 400...850VAC
8 U4
1 OPTIONAL: ROTOR Draw.no.: 4628385
6 13 9 X6
E/F PROTECTION 6A
5 10 U5 1
SWITCHED OFF DURING OUT 17 2
STANDSTILL BY AUX. X4 3
CONTACT OF FIELD +
BREAKER (I.E. FOR -
MAINT. PURPOSES) +
-
5 + OUT 20 8
2 EXC. TRANSFORMER BLOCK. ST.1 +
6 - IN 03 9
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.: (optional) -
7 + OUT 21 10
BLOCK. ST.2 +
MAX. 850VAC. 8 - IN 04 11
(optional) -
NOTE: IF V < 850VAC 9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
PANEL IEGL850" 4 HV-FUSES OUT 23
11 + 14
CAN BE OMITTED INSIDE OF 12 - IN 06 15
(SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM UPTO 400VAC) EXC. 13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
3 ADDITIONAL EXT. PANEL IEGL850" IN CUBICLE. 15
X2
+
CASE OF HIGH EXC. VOLTAGE; 16 IN 08 4
5 POWER -
USUALLY MOUNTED IN EXC. CUBICLE. RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
STATION X7
6
EARTH 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
POTENTIAL 2
8
eIEGL23
3
eIU124
Tx+
OPTIONAL MODULES
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND: AUX. SUPPLY: 5 GND 10
OPTIONAL MODULES: SAFE AC 6
-MIEGL rotor isolation supervision 230VAC 7 11
8 +5
-eIEGL rotor earth fault protection
RS422/485
P Rx+ 12
-EURAX signal transducer 1
9 13
10 Rx-
EURAX
-eIU124 shaft current supervision 14

MIEGL
N GND
11 15
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 12 Tx+
Tx- 16
RS422/485 chain line data interface SHIELD 14
X9
5
FRONTSIDE
DRS-CABLE no. TLD-006--
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE

Fig. 197 MR121 Rotor E/F (Insulation Supervision) Range: 4100k Suitable For Exc. Systems With Exc. Transformer
Phase-Phase Voltages Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Wiring Diagram

16.3.6. MR131 (UAKB)
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03
EXC. 8 5A
6
TRANSF. 9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
TRANS- OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
FORMER 17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10
G 29 OUT 11 6
GEN. ROTOR X8 7
3~ 1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
3
2 OUT 13 10
FUSE
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
6A R 2 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
3 7 15
R 2 OUT 16 16
FUSE 8 U4
1 OPTIONAL: ROTOR 9 X6
E/F PROTECTION 6A
10 U5 1
SWITCHED OFF DURING OUT 17 2
STANDSTILL BY AUX. X4 3
CONTACT OF FIELD +
BREAKER (I.E. FOR -
MAINT. PURPOSES) +
-
5 + OUT 20 8
2 PRE-RESISTOR MOUNTED IN BLOCK. ST.1 +
6 - IN 03 9
EXCITATION CUBICLE (optional) -
7 + OUT 21 10
BLOCK. ST.2 +
8 - IN 04 6 PLEASE NOTE: 11
3 HIGH VOLTAGE FUSE IN (optional) -
9 + OUT 22 12
EXCITATION CUBICLE 10 IN 05 USE MODULE 13
-
4 HV-FUSES 11 + TYPE MIEGL850" OUT 23 14
INSIDE OF 12 - IN 06 (TYPE MIEGL NOT 15
EXC. 13 + PERMISSIBLE). OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
CUBICLE. X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
5 POWER -
STATION X7
LEGEND: 6
EARTH 1 RELAY STOP OUT 32 7
OPTIONAL MODULE: POTENTIAL 2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
Transducer 2 AUX. SUPPLY:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Shaft Current SAFE AC 6
UAKB
Rotor E/F 230VAC 7

TRANS-
SI03
DUCER 2
+5 11
RS422/485
P Rx+ 12
9 13
10 Rx-
RS422/485 chain line data interface N 14
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
SHIELD UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
5
FRONTSIDE
DRS-CABLE no. TLD-006--
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MR131 ROTOR E/F (INSULATION SUPERVISION) UAKB

WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 198 MR131 Rotor E/F (Insulation Supervision) UAKB Wiring Diagram


16.4.1. MR111 (0 ... 150 VAC)
L1 L2 L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
(INCL. EXC. TRANSF.)
COMPLETELY ISOLATED DRS-
FROM GROUND.
COMPACT2A
EXC.
PROCESSING
TRANSF.
1
MAIN
TRANSF.
G
GEN. ROTOR
3~ INTERFACE SLOW INPUT
MODULE no.01: ACTUAL
eIEGL23 MEASURED
FOR VALUE OF
ROTOR E/F ROTOR E/F
2
PROT.
PANEL IEGL150" 3
eIEGL23
Aux. Supply 4 SI01

230VAC
IN10
NOTE:
ROTOR E/F
PROT. OUT OF
1 EXC. TRANSF. PHASE-
SERVICE. NOTE:
PHASE VOLT.: MAX.
USE SIGNAL
150V (0...150VACRMS) TEST ST.1 FUNCTION
PANEL IEGL150" (optional) (MB111) TO
RECOMMENDED FOR PROCESS THIS TRIP
EXC. TRANSF. PHASE- TEST ST.2 ALARM COMMANDS
PHASE VOLTAGES: (optional) OUTPUT CB1
0...150VACRMS CONTACTS CB2
BLOCK. ST.1
2 SERIES RESONANCE ALARM
CIRCUIT (closed in case (optional) CONTACTS
of ROTOR E/F)
BLOCK. ST.2 Alarm 1St.
3 RESONANCE VOLTAGE (optional) Trip 1St.
in case of ROTOR E/F Rotor E/F
out of
LEGEND service

VERSION 2

VOLTAGES UP TO 150VACRMS (0...150VACRMS) LOGIC DIAGRAM
Phase Phase Voltages Up To 150VACRMS (0150VACRMS) Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [ ]

NOTEBOOK
2
DC-VOLTAGE
eIEGL23
SI01 CALCULATION OF
(DC-INPUT) ROTOR INSULATION [ ]
5V
BY USING THE OUTPUT
DC-VOLTAGE OF
DC-VOLTAGE
MODULE eIEGL23.
1
1V
ROTOR-INSULATION
1k 5k
RESULT: ROTOR INSULATION VALUE []
INSULATION VALUE < OPER. VALUE (set)

TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0
DISPLAY
PRESET
1
0
>=1
& ALARM
BLOCKING & ALARM

LED-
BIN. I/0
MATRIX
PRESET >=1
&
1 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
TRIP 1
0
t > tset
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
1 THE VOLT. SIGNAL FOR DC-INPUT SI01" IS 2 p.c.b mounted inside DRS-COMPACT2.
PROVIDED BY THE INTERFACE MODULE
eIEGL23 (SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM).

VOLTAGES UP TO 150VACRMS (0...150VACRMS) LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Phase Phase Voltages Up To 150VACRMS (0150VACRMS) Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MR111
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MR111
1
0
DC-VOLTAGE THE OUTPUT DC-VOLTAGE OF THE

INTERFACE-MODULE eIEGL23 IS CONVERTED
5V
INTO A ROTOR-INSULATION VALUE [ ].
RANGE: 500...5000
1V
ROTOR-
1k 5k INSULATION
ROTOR E/F PROTECTION MODULE eIEGL23 IS POSITIONED INSIDE

eIEGL23
DRS-COMPACT2. IT IS DESIGNED FOR APPLICATION WITH THE

EXTERNAL PANEL(S) IEGL850, IEGL400, IEGL150.
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX



VOLT. UP TO 150VACRMS (0...150VACRMS) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 201 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55k Suitable For Exc. Systems With Exc. Transformer Phase
Phase Volt. Up To 150VACRMS (0150VACRMS) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

16.4.2. MR111 (150 ... 400 VAC)
L1 L2 L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
FROM GROUND.
COMPACT2
EXC.
PROCESSING
TRANSF.
1
MAIN
TRANSF.
G
GEN. ROTOR INTERFACE SLOW INPUT
3~ MODULE no.01: ACTUAL
eIEGL23 MEASURED
FOR VALUE OF
ROTOR E/F ROTOR E/F
2 PROT.
PANEL IEGL400" 3
Aux. Supply
eIEGL23
4 SI01
230VAC
1 EXC. TRANSF. USE SIGNAL

PHASE-PHASE FUNCTION
ROTOR E/F (MB111) TO
VOLT.: MAX. 400V OUT OF SERVICE
(150...400VACRMS) PROCESS THIS
ALARM
2 PANEL IEGL400" TEST ST.1
RECOMMENDED FOR (optional)
EXC. TRANSF. PHASE- TRIP
PHASE VOLTAGES: TEST ST.2 COMMANDS
150...400VACRMS (optional) OUTPUT CB1
3 SERIES RESONANCE CONTACTS CB2
BLOCK. ST.1
CIRCUIT (closed in case ALARM
(optional) CONTACTS
of ROTOR E/F)
4 RESONANCE VOLTAGE BLOCK. ST.2 Alarm 1St.
in case of ROTOR E/F (optional) Trip 1St.
Rotor E/F
out of
LEGEND service
COMPACT2 TYPE: DRS-COMPACT2
CPU+DSP - BOARD/


CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [ ]

NOTEBOOK
2
DC-VOLTAGE
eIEGL23
SI01 CALCULATION OF
(DC-INPUT) ROTOR INSULATION [W]
5V
BY USING THE OUTPUT
DC-VOLTAGE OF
DC-VOLTAGE
MODULE eIEGL23.
1
1V
ROTOR-INSULATION
1k 5k
RESULT: ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [ ]

TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0
DISPLAY
PRESET
1
0
>=1
& ALARM
BLOCKING & ALARM

LED-
BIN. I/0
MATRIX
PRESET >=1
&
1 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
TRIP 1
0
t > tset
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP-
PROCESSING MATRIX

Fig. 203 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55kk Suitable for Exc. Systems With Exc. Transformer

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0

5V
RANGE: 500...5000
1V
ROTOR-
1k 5k INSULATION

eIEGL23
DRS COMPACT2. IT IS DESIGNED FOR APPLICATION WITH THE

Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX

ALARM ST.1 FUNCTION OUTPUT: Alarm
TRIP ST.1 FUNCTION OUTPUT: Trip


Fig. 204 MR111 Rotor E/F Protection Range: 0,55k Suitable For Exc. Systems with Exc. Transformer
Phase Phase Volt. Up To 400VACRMS ( 150400VACRMS) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

16.4.3. MR111 (400 ... 850 VAC)
L1 L2 L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
FROM GROUND.
COMPACT2
EXC.
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
1
MAIN
TRANSF.
G
GEN. ROTOR INTERFACE SLOW INPUT
3~ MODULE NO.01: ACTUAL
eIEGL23 MEASURED
FOR VALUE OF
ROTOR E/F ROTOR E/F
1 PROT.
PANEL IEGL850" 3
Aux. Supply
eIEGL23
230VAC
4 SI01
1 EXC. TRANSF. USE SIGNAL

PHASE-PHASE FUNCTION
ROTOR E/F (MB111) TO
VOLT.: MAX. 850V OUT OF SERVICE
(400...850VACRMS) PROCESS THIS
ALARM
2 PANEL IEGL850" TEST ST.1
RECOMMENDED FOR (optional)
EXC. TRANSF. PHASE- TRIP
PHASE VOLTAGES: TEST ST.2 COMMANDS
400...850VACRMS (optional) OUTPUT CB1
3 SERIES RESONANCE CONTACTS CB2
BLOCK. ST.1
CIRCUIT (closed in case ALARM
(optional) CONTACTS
of ROTOR E/F)
4 RESONANCE VOLTAGE BLOCK. ST.2 Alarm 1St.
in case of ROTOR E/F (optional) Trip 1St.
Rotor
E/F
LEGEND out of
DRS Service
DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM
VERSION 2


CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE []

NOTEBOOK
2
DC-VOLTAGE
eIEGL23
SI01 CALCULATION OF
(DC-INPUT) ROTOR INSULATION [W]
5V
BY USING THE OUTPUT
DC-VOLTAGE OF
DC-VOLTAGE
MODULE eIEGL23.
1
1V
ROTOR-INSULATION
1k 5k
RESULT: ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [ ]

TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0
DISPLAY
PRESET
1
0
>=1
& ALARM
BLOCKING & ALARM

LED-
BIN. I/0
MATRIX
PRESET >=1
&
1 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
TRIP 1
0
t > tset
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0
TRIP-
PROCESSING
MATRIX


LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0

5V
RANGE: 500...5000
1V
ROTOR-
1k 5k INSULATION

eIEGL23
DRS COMPACT2. IT IS DESIGNED FOR APPLICATION WITH THE

Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX



Phase Phase Volt. Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

16.4.4. MR121 (0 ... 400 VAC)
L1 L2 L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
DRS-
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
COMPACT2
PROCESSING
EXC.
TRANSF.
2
MAIN
TRANSF.
INTERFACE
MODULE
MIEGL
FOR
G ROTOR
INPUT NO.09
GEN. ISOLATION
3~ ROTOR
SUPER- USED FOR
VISION ROTOR
ISOLATION
AUX. SUPPLY: SUPERVISION/
1
230VAC IN09 INTERNAL FAULT
(AUX. SUPPLY
MIEGL
INTERFACE SAFE SUPPLY

MISSING; MIEGL
CONNECTION
FAULTY)
TO ROTOR SI02
V
1 OPTIONAL: ROTOR 3 t SLOW INPUT
E/F PROTECTION NO.02: ACTUAL
SWITCHED OFF DURING 0,5 Hz MEASURED
STANDSTILL BY AUX. VALUE OF
CONTACT OF FIELD TEST ST.1 ROTOR
BREAKER. ISOLATION
(optional)
2 EXC. TRANSFORMER
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.: TEST ST.2
MAX. 400VAC. (optional) TRIP
NOTE: IF V > 400VAC COMMANDS
use: ext. panel BLOCK. ST.1 OUTPUT CB1
IEGL850" + module (optional) CONTACTS CB2
MIEGL850"! ALARM
BLOCK. ST.2
3 VOLT. PULSES FROM CONTACTS
PROT. DEVICE APPLIED (optional)
Alarm 1St.
TO ROTOR CIRCUIT FOR
MEASURING PURPOSES. Trip 1St.
Rotor
LEGEND insulation
DRS DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM protection
out of
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY service
VERSION 2
MR121 ROTOR E/F (INSULATION SUPERVISION) RANGE: 4...100kW

PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGES UP TO 400VAC LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 208 MR121 Rotor E/F (Insulation Supervision) Range: 4100kW Suitable For Exc. Systems With Exc. Transformer
Phase Phase Voltages Up To 400VAC Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [kW]

NOTEBOOK
3
DC-VOLTAGE
MIEGL
SI02 CALCULATION OF
(DC-INPUT) ROTOR INSULATION
5V
[kW] BY USING THE
DC-VOLTAGE
OUTPUT DC-VOLTAGE
1
OF MODULE MIEGL.
1V
ROTOR-INSULATION
20k 100k
TEST ST.1
RESULT: ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [k]
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
INSULATION VALUE < OPER. VALUE ST.1
TEST ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.1
0
>=1
&
BLOCK. ST.1 & ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET DISPLAY
2
TRIP ST.1
1
0 t1 >
& TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST.2
PRESET >=1 LED-
& MATRIX
1 & ALARM ST.2 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
1
2 TRIP ST.2 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT t2 >
& TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIP-
PROCESSING MATRIX
1 THE VOLT. SIGNAL FOR DC-INPUT SI02" 2 INFO: THE MIEGL-MODULE INLUDES A
IS PROVIDED BY THE INTERFACE VERY EXTENSIVE FILTER-ALGORITHM WITH
MODULE MIEGL (SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM). A LONG TIME CONSTANT SO THESE TIME
3 MODULE MIEGL LOCATED INSIDE DRS-COMPACT2 SETTINGS ARE NOT OF SIGNIFICANCE.

PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGES UP TO 400VAC LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Phase Phase Voltages Up To 400VAC Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
DC-VOLTAGE THE OUTPUT DX-VOLTAGE OF THE

INTERFACE-MODULE MIEGL IS CONVERTED
INTO A ROTOR-INSULATION VALUE [k].
5V
RANGE OF STAGE 1: 4...20k
1V
ROTOR-
20k 100k INSULATION
ROTOR E/F MODULE MIEGL IS POSITIONED INSIDE DRS COMPACT2.

MIEGL
IT IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE ROTOR (NO ADDITIONAL

EXTERNAL PANEL REQUIRED).
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX



PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGES UP TO 400VAC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Phase Phase Voltages Up To 400VAC Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

16.4.5. MR121 (400 ... 850 VAC)
L1 L2 L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
DRS-
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
COMPACT2
PROCESSING
EXC.
TRANSF.
2
MAIN
TRANSF.
INTERFACE
MODULE
AUX. MIEGL
G SUPPLY: FOR ROTOR
GEN. ROTOR 230VAC INPUT NO.09
3~ SAFE
INSULATION USED FOR
SUPER- ROTOR
SUPPLY VISION INSULATION
V 4 SUPERVISION
t OUT OF SERVICE/
INTERNAL FAULT
MIEGL850
IN09
INTERFACE (AUX. SUPPLY
0,5 Hz
CONNECTION MISSING; MIEGL
TO ROTOR PANEL FAULTY)
1 SI02
IEGL850"
1 OPTIONAL: ROTOR SLOW INPUT
3
3
SWITCHED OFF MEASURED
DURING STANDSTILL VALUE OF
BY AUX. CONTACT ROTOR
OF FIELD BREAKER. TEST ST.1
INSULATION
2 EXC. TRANSFORMER (optional)
PHASE-PHASE VOLT.: TEST ST.2
MAX. 850VAC. TRIP
NOTE: IF V < 400VAC (optional)
COMMANDS
PANEL IEGL850" BLOCK. ST.1 OUTPUT CB1
CAN BE OMITTED
(optional) CONTACTS CB2
(SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM
UP TO 400VAC) BLOCK. ST.2 ALARM
CONTACTS
3 PANEL IEGL850" + (optional)
MODULE MIEGL850" Alarm 1St.
RECOMMENDED FOR Trip 1St.
Rotor
EXC. TRANSF. PHASE-
insulation
PHASE VOLTAGES protection
FROM 400...850VACRMS out of
4 PULSES FROM service
PROTECTION DEVICE
APPLIED TO ROTOR
CIRCUIT FOR
MEASURING PURPOSES


CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [k ]

NOTEBOOK
3
DC-VOLTAGE
MIEGL850
SI02 CALCULATION OF
5V
[kW] BY USING THE
DC-VOLTAGE
OUTPUT DC-VOLTAGE
1
OF MODULE MIEGL.
1V
ROTOR-INSULATION
20k 100k
TEST ST.1
RESULT: ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [k ]
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TEST ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.1
0
>=1
&
BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET DISPLAY
2 TRIP ST.1
1
0 t1 >
& TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST.2
PRESET >=1 LED-
& MATRIX
0 PRESET
1
2 TRIP ST.2 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT t2 >
& TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIP-
PROCESSING MATRIX
1 THE VOLT. SIGNAL FOR DC-INPUT SI02" IS 2 INFO: THE MIEGL850-MODULE INCLUDES A
PROVIDED BY THE INTERFACE MODULE VERY EXTENSIVE FILTER-ALGORITHM WITH
MIEGL850 (SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM). A LONG TIME CONSTANT, SO THESE TIME
3 MODULE MIEGL850" LOCATED INSIDE DRS-COMPACT2. SETTINGS ARE NOT OF SIGNIFICANCE.


LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0

INTERFACE-MODULE MIEGL850 IS
CONVERTED INTO A ROTOR-INSULATION
5V
VALUE [k ].

1V
ROTOR- RANGE OF STAGE 2: 20...100k
20k 100k INSULATION
MIEGL850
ROTOR E/F MODULE MIEGL850 IS POSITIONED INSIDE DRS

COMPACT 2. IT IS DESIGNED FOR APPLICATION WITH THE EXTERNAL
PANEL IEGL850.
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX



VOLT. UP TO 850VACRMS (400...850VACRMS) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING/ LEGEND
Phase Phase Volt. Up To 850VACRMS (400850VACRMS) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

16.4.6. MR131 (UAKB)
L1 L2 L3
NOTE:
ROTOR CIRCUIT
DRS-
COMPLETELY ISOLATED
FROM GROUND.
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
EXC.
TRANSF.
2
MAIN
TRANSF.
INTERFACE
MODULE
UAKB
G FOR ROTOR
GEN. ROTOR INPUT NO.09
3~ INSULATION USED FOR
SUPER- ROTOR
VISION INSULATION
SUPERVISION
OUT OF SERVICE/
IN09 INTERNAL FAULT
UAKB
INTERFACE (AUX. SUPPLY

CONNECTION MISSING; UAKB
TO ROTOR FAULTY)
1 SI02
1 OPTIONAL: ROTOR SLOW INPUT
SWITCHED OFF MEASURED
DURING STANDSTILL VALUE OF
BY AUX. CONTACT ROTOR
OF FIELD BREAKER. TEST ST.1
INSULATION
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional) TRIP
COMMANDS
(optional) CONTACTS CB2
BLOCK. ST.2 ALARM

CONTACTS
(optional)
Alarm 1St.
Trip 1St.
Rotor
insulation
protection
out of
service
MR131 ROTOR E/F (UAKB) RANGE: 1...100k

LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 214 MR131 Rotor E/F (UAKB) Range: 1100k Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [k ]

NOTEBOOK
2
DC-VOLTAGE
UAKB
SI01 CALCULATION OF
5V
[kW] BY USING THE
DC-VOLTAGE
OUTPUT DC-VOLTAGE
1
OF MODULE MIEGL.
1V
ROTOR-INSULATION
20k 100k
TEST ST.1
RESULT: ROTOR INSULATION VALUE [k ]
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
TEST ST.2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST.1
0
>=1
&
BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET DISPLAY
2 TRIP ST.1
1
0 t1 >
& TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.2
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST.2
PRESET >=1 LED-
& MATRIX
0 PRESET
1
2 TRIP ST.2 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT t2 >
& TRIP ST.2
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
1 THE VOLT. SIGNAL FOR DC-INPUT SI02" IS
PROCESSING
UAKB (SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM).
2 MODULE UAKB" LOCATED INSIDE DRS-COMPACT2A.

Fig. 215 MR131 Rotor E/F (UAKB) Range: 1100k Logic Diagram / Processing

DC-VOLTAGE
UAKB
SI01
(DC-INPUT)
5V
DC-VOLTAGE
1V
ROTOR-INSULATION
20k 100k
5,00
4,00
3,00
SI.01 / Vdc
2,00
1,00
0,00
0,0 25,0 50,0 75,0 100,0 125,0 150,0
Rotor-Earth-Resistor R isol / kOhm
LEGEND:
SI01 ... DRS-COMPACT2A slow DC-input 01

CHARACTERISTIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 216 MR131 Rotor E/F (UAKB) Range: 1100k Characteristic Diagram

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
DC-VOLTAGE
THE OUTPUT DC-VOLTAGE OF THE

5V INTERFACE-MODULE UAKB IS CONVERTED
INTO A ROTOR-INSULATION VALUE [k].
1V
RANGE OF STAGE 1: 1 100k / 0 840 s
ROTOR- RANGE OF STAGE 2: 1 20k / 0 99 s
20k 100k INSULATION
UAKB
ROTOR E/F MODULE UAKB IS POSITIONED INSIDE DRS-COMPACT2A.
Programmable
(row 2...14) of
TRIP-
MATRIX



LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING/ LEGEND
Fig. 217 MR131 Rotor E/F (UAKB) Range: 1100k Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

16.5. FUNCTION
16.5.1. MR111/ MR121 / MR131
Rotor earth fault protective functions, respectively rotor insulation protective functions are
applied to monitor the insulation level to ground of the excitation circuit for synchronous machines.
A deterioration of the insulation level can thereby be recognised in time to take preventive measures against low
resistance single- or double earth faults.
The connection is carried out onto the DC circuit of the rotor whereby not only the rotor is supervised but also all
auxiliary circuits with a direct galvanic connection to this system.
MR111/ Rotor Earth Fault Protection:
For measuring the insulation conditions with the input module type eIEGL21 a nominal frequency signal of
approximately 30V AC is superimposed onto the rotor circuit which is produced via an
auxiliary voltage supply input.
The module output signal represents an indirect proportional DC signal which is converted via a slow analogue
input to be evaluated by the DRS Central Control Unit VE.
The DC voltage corresponding to the insulation level is sampled 12 times per cycle and compared
with the trigger value parameter. When the measured resistance is smaller than the set trigger value during 25
consecutive samples the function is alarm initiated and the trip delay time started.
When the fault persists during the whole time delay a trip output signal will be given.
MR121/ Rotor Insulation Protection:
With an auxiliary power supply the input module MIEGL produces a pulsed rectangular signal of
approximately 30 V amplitude with a selectable frequency (depending on the rotor capacitance)
of 0.1 to 0.5 Hz which is connected to the rotor circuit via an external attenuation unit.
In a measuring circuit the pulsed signal echo of the connected excitation system, i.e. rotor, cables, excitation,
excitation transformer, etc. is evaluated after a certain measuring time. Depending on the pulse frequency this may
take up to a few minutes and is made available as a
DC output signal of the module which is proportional to the insulation resistance and transferred via a slow
analogue input to the DRS Central Control Unit PROCESSING for further execution.
The DC voltage corresponding to the insulation level is sampled 12 times per cycle and compared
with the trigger value parameter. When the measured resistance is smaller than the set trigger value during 25
consecutive samples the function is alarm initiated and the trip delay time started.
When the fault persists during the whole time delay a trip output signal will be given.
The correct performance of the input module MIEGL is monitored in the module itself which is
provided with service indication and alarm contacts.
Both functions have test- and blocking inputs which by appropriate configuration and installed hardware (input
modules) enable protective function testing and function blocking.
MR131 / Rotor Insulation Protection (UAKB):

Refer to: "Description of Module UAKB CIC-012-A" Dwg. No.: CIC-012-A.XX/90

16.6. COMMISSIONING

16.6.1. MR111/ MR121 / MR131
Pre-Commissioning:
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry.
Also the function parameters have to be set according to the data of the rotor system.
The function outputs for the LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be configured
according to requirements.
The pre-commissioning test procedures for the rotor earth fault protection and the
rotor insulation protection differ considerably due to the different measuring methods.
MR111/ Rotor Earth Fault Protection:
Insert a resistance decade between a rotor connection, e.g. the slip ring, and the
generator shaft.
Reduce the resistance value until the rotor earth fault protection operates.
Record the operating value in the commissioning sheets.
Increase the resistance value until the rotor earth fault protection resets.
Record the reset value in the commissioning sheets.
During all tests check the insulation resistance level via the DRS option
"Actual Measured Values" in the window display.
The input matrix, LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be confirmed according to
the external circuitry and the circuit diagrams.
With half the resistance parameter setting measure the operating time of the protective
function with a timer and record the value into the test sheets.
Check the configured function block for each stage by applying the blocking signal
when the protection is operating and the function trip output has to reset.
Check the configured function test input for each stage by initiating the test signal and the
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without external test resistance.
MR121/ Rotor Insulation Protection:
At first for the actual plant configuration the correct pulse frequency has to be adjusted in the MIEGL input module
(please also refer to Dwg. No 4-664.523 , MIEGL commissioning).

Insert a resistance decade between a rotor connection, e.g. the slip ring, and the
generator shaft and reduce the setting value to about 10% of the operating value for stage 1
of the rotor insulation protection.
By monitoring the window display of the measured insulation level by selecting the option
"Actual Measured Values" which are approaching asymptotically the final value showing
approximately the value of the test resistor adjustment the correct response of the function
is verified.
Record the operating value display of stage 1 insulation level in the test sheets.
Increase the decade resistor value up to a reset of the stage 1 function and record the displayed
result in the test sheets.
Proceed in a similar way for stage 2.
The input matrix, LED matrix and the trip matrix have to be confirmed according to
the external circuitry and the circuit diagrams.
Should in addition to the measuring mode delay another time delay be configured for
each stage they are to be checked by the aforementioned procedures, e.g. via a test
input and the operating times recorded into the test sheets.
Check the configured function block for each stage by applying the blocking signal
when the protection is operating and the function trip output has to reset.
Check the configured function test input for each stage by initiating the test signal and the
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without external test resistance.
After commissioning all modified test parameters must be re-configured to the original plant parameter settings.
MR111/ MR121/ Primary Commissioning Tests:
During the primary tests the correct response of the protective function is verified during
system operating conditions and as far as possible following checks should be carried out:
- Open Circuit Voltage Tests:
Block the function trips of the rotor earth fault or rotor insulation protection.
Start up generator to rated speed and excite to nominal voltage.
Apply the same procedures as during the pre-commissioning tests to check the
operating value of the function.
Enter the values into the commissioning sheets.
Verify the possible configured external function block from the plant.
Re-activate the protection trips of the rotor earth fault function, respectively the
rotor insulation function.
If system conditions permit shut down the generator by a protection trip.
Remove all external test devices and restore the applicable parameter settings.
MR131 / Rotor Insulation Protection (UAKB):

Refer to: "Description of Module UAKB CIC-012-A" Dwg. No.: CIC-012-A.XX/90.

MS... STATOR EARTH FAULT
17. MS... STATOR EARTH FAULT
17.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MS . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MS . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Directional stator earth fault protection 1028 MS111 64G C2,M,L
Stator earth fault protection for 20 Hz injection method; 1149 MS121 64G C2,M
2-stage;
for use with UAKB.
Stator earth fault protection with 20 Hz injection method; 1044 MS211 64G C2,M,L
1-stage.
Note: Not to be used in conjunction with oversampling functions,
e.g.,.Quick Current..
Stabilised stator earth fault protection 1032 MS212 64G C2,M,L
Stator earth fault protection 3rd harmonic 1144 MS113 64G C2,M
with 1 E/F - Voltage Input and 3 Generator Terminal Voltage
Inputs
e.g.,.Quick Current.
Stator earth fault protection 3rd harmonic 1068 MS213 64G C2,M,L
with 2 E/F - Voltage Inputs
e.g.,.Quick Current.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MS111 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Directional stator earth fault protection 1028 MS111 64G C2,M,L
1 stage directional stator earth fault function.
MS111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current
Voltage
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 40 V in 1 V steps
Operating time: 0 ... 30 Seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Slope: 0/30/60/90 degrees
Operating direction: Direction 1/Direction 2
Please mind:
When changing from VE1 to VE2 then this parameter
changes from
"Direction1/Direction2" to
"Direction2/Direction1" !

Angle Io-Vo: In degrees electrical
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Operating time: 2 Cycles
2% In
2% electrical at angle


Stator earth fault protection for 20 Hz injection method; 1149 MS121 64G C2,M
for use with UAKB.
Stator earth fault function for 20 Hz system; to be combined with UAKB.

MS121 uses SI.01 (0 5 VDC).
MS121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analog DC [SI.01]: Rotor-Earthfaultvoltage (supplied by UAKB)
Binary: Blocking input St.1
Test input St.1
Blocking input St.2
Test input St.2
Outputs
Binary: Alarm St.1
Trip St.1
Alarm St.2
Trip St.2
Setting Parameters
Operating value St.1: 0.5 10.0 kOhm in 0,1 kOhm steps
Operating time St.1: 0 ... 840 sec in 0.5 sec steps
Operating value St.2: 0.5 10.0 kOhm in 0,1 kOhm steps
Operating timeSt.2: 0 ... 99 sec in 0.5 sec steps

Ground Resistance: in kOhm
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In
2% of impedance value


Stator earth fault protection with 20 Hz injection method 1044 MS211 64G C2,M,L
e.g. Quick Current,...
Note: PROCESSING internal sampling frequency . 20 Hz !
Stator earth fault function with 20 Hz signal injection (20 Hz impedance evaluation).
MS211
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Current 20 Hz
Voltage 20 Hz
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Measuring alarm
Setting Parameters
Operating time: 0 ... 30 Seconds in 0.05 sec steps

System impedance: in Ohm
Measured voltage: in V
Measured current: in A
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In
2% of impedance value


Stabilised stator earth fault protection 1032 MS212 64G C2,M,L
Stator earth fault function with stabilising against overvoltage- and overfrequency conditions.
MS212
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Stabilising voltage
Measured voltage
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Generator nominal voltage: 70 ... 140 V in 1 V steps
Nominal frequency: 16,7 ... 60 Hz in 0.1 Hz steps
Stabilising: 0 ... 140 % in 1 % steps

Operating value In V
Stator voltage In V
Frequency In Hz
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% Un


rd
"SEF 3 Harmonic 3-ph" 1144 MS113 64G C2,M
Stator earth fault protection 3rd harmonic
with 1 E/F - Voltage Input and 3 Generator Terminal Voltage
Inputs
Note: internal sampling frequency = generator nominal
frequency
rd
1-stage stator earth fault function with evaluation of the 3 harmonic component;
with 1 E/F - Voltage Input (Zero Sequence Voltage of Generator Neutral or Generator Busbar) and 3 Generator
Terminal Voltage Inputs
Explication of Set Values:

rd
Operating Value: 3. Harmonic relay starting value. The actual 3 Harmonic voltage value
can be calculated by using the Generator Neutral Voltage or the Generator
Busbar Open Delta voltage.
Operating Time: Trip Time Delay of relay.
Type: Relay starting, when the measured value is lower resp. higher than the
pick up value
Positive Phase Sequence Voltage: Minimum positive phase sequence voltage for release of function in case
of underdetection
PPS Voltage Blocking: Selection, whether the generator PPS voltage disables the operation of
the function in underdetection mode or not. Select 'Off' if the function
should not be blocked.
Phase Rotation: Selection of phase rotation.
MS113
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage L1-L2
Voltage L2-L3
Voltage L3-L1
rd
Voltage E/F (3 Harmonic)
Note:
Voltage generator busbar (Open Delta Voltage)
or:
Voltage generator neutral
Test input stage
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip

Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0.5 ... 50 V in 0.1 V - steps
Operating time: 0 ... 60 s in 0.05 s - steps
Type: Underdetection/ Overdetection
Positive Phase Sequence Voltage: 50 90 V in 0,5 V - steps
PPS Voltage Blocking: Off/ On
Phase Rotation: Right/ Left

rd
3 Harmonic Voltage: in V
Note:
with reference to Input No. 4 "Voltage E/F"
Positive Phase Sequence Voltage: in V
Note:
PPS Voltage is calculated with reference to Inputs No.
13
"Voltage L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1"
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97


Stator earth fault protection 3rd harmonic 1068 MS213 64G C2,M,L
with 2 E/F - Voltage Inputs
Note: internal sampling frequency = generator nominal
frequency
rd
1 stage stator earth fault function with evaluation of the 3 harmonic component.
with 2 Voltage Inputs (Zero Sequence Voltages of Generator Neutral and Generator Terminals)
MS213
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage generator busbar
Voltage generator neutral
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 0.2 ... 5,0 V in 0.1 V steps
Operating time: 0.1 ... 30 s in 0.05 s steps
Balance: 0.20 ... 5.00 in 0.05 steps

Voltage generator leads: in V
Voltage generator neutral: in V
Trigger voltage: in V
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97


17.3.1. MS111
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
ALTERNATIVE FOR LARGE X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
GEN.s WITH BUSBARS: 1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A OUT 01
HOLMGREEN C.T I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03
8 5A
6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
MAIN OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
TRANSF. 14 5A 11
C.T. RATIO (PER PHASE): 15 I5
OUT 06 12
IPHASE NOM [A] // 10[A] 3 4 16
17
18
1A
5A
I6 COMPACT2A OUT 07
13
14
19 1A 15
PREFERABLY: 20 5A
I7 OUT 08 16
21
RING-TYPE C.T. 22 1A X5
(CABLE SLIP-ON C.T.) 23 5A
I8
24 1
C.T. RATIO: 60A // 1A 5
OUT 09
25 1A
I10 INCREASED 2
26 5A
I9 SENSITIVITY/ 3
3.I0A 2
27
OUT 10 4
28 1A SPECIAL C.T. RATIO:
3.I0A 3.I0A+ I0B I 10 INPUT OF 1A GIVES A
5
29 OUT 11 6
X8 VE2-INTERNAL VALUE 7
OF 28,3A. OUT 12 8
1
3.U0 U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
U5 1
U0 nom. = 230V
10
G OUT 17 2
GEN. X4 3
3~
1 + OUT 18 4
I0B TEST +
2 IN 01 5
(opt.) - -
3 + OUT 19 6
BLOCK. +
(opt.) 4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
3.I0B 6 - IN 03 9
NEUTRAL V.T. 3.U0 1 R0 (NON-LINEAR) 7 + OUT 21 10
TRANSF. & 3.I0B 8 - IN 04 11
NEUTRAL P.T. 9 + OUT 22 12
PER 1 LAMP: 10 - IN 05 13
UGEN PH-PH / 3 [V] I 11 + OUT 23 14
RATIO: 1,6A 12 - IN 06 15
230 [V] 13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
U 15
X2
230V +
1 NOTE: U0 = UNEUTRAL / 3 16 IN 08 4
-
2 NOTE: I0 = INEUTRAL / 3 RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
3 VERSION OF RELAY: 1[A] (EXCEPT CURR.INPUT I10) 6
4 SEC. CURRENT RATIO IS PLANT SPECIFIC 2
TRANS-
5 SEC. CURRENT RATIO IS PLANT SPECIFIC 3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
EXAMPLE GIVEN FOR STANDARD APPLICATION
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6 NOTE: CURRENT INTPUT I10 SPECIAL RATIO
6
UAKB
TRANS-
INTERMEDIATE C.T. 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
LEGEND: 8 +5
RS422/485
INSIDE DRS Rx+ 12

OPTIONAL MODULE: 9 13
COMPACT 2 10 Rx-
-UAKB Transducer 1 GND 14
Transducer 2 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Shaft Current Tx- 16
Rotor E/F 13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) UAKB-
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface DRS- FAULT IN09 X9
RS422/485 chain line data interface CABLE
MODBUS control system interface no. TID- FRONTSIDE
006--
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MS111 DIR. STATOR E/F WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 218 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Wiring Diagram

17.3.2. MS211
+ - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
L1 L2 L3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
20Hz-GENERATOR 4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03
8 5A
6
G 9 I3 7
MAIN 20Hz 10 1A OUT 04 8
TRANSF. 11 5A
I4 9
12
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
V20Hz 18 I6 OUT 07 14
CTR 19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
BAND- 22 1A X5
PASS- 23 5A
I8
24 1
FILTER 25 1A OUT 09 2
(20Hz) 26 5A
I9 3
CL RV
27
OUT 10 4
2 28 1A
5
R I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
a VR
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
1 I20Hz 4 U2 OUT 14 12
C.T. 5 13
b U3 OUT 15 14
6
7 15
CS OUT 16 16
VN 500 U4
V 8
3 3 9 X6
10 U5 1
a OUT 17 2
1
X4 3
b TEST 1 + OUT 18 4
CG +
(opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
BLOCK. +
4 - IN 02 7
(opt.) -
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
GEN. 10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
UN X2
15 +
500V 1 OPEN DELTA or NEUTRAL V.T.
16 IN 08 4
3 -
(ALTERNATIVELY) RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
1 2 LOAD RESISTOR 6
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
LEGEND: 4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
OPTIONAL MODULE: 6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03
11
8 +5
Transducer 2
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
Shaft Current 9 13
10 Rx-
Rotor E/F 14
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) Tx+ 15
12 16
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MS211 STATOR E/F 100% 20Hz WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 219 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Wiring Diagram

17.3.3. MS212
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 RL linear
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
UR
+ - GND 1
I> 1 1A
OUT 01
2 5A DC 2
m.c.b. I1 24V...48VDC
IR 3 3
4 1A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
5 5A
6 I2 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8
9
5A
I3 7
alternatively OUT 04 8
10 1A
RL non-linear 11 5A 9
12 I4 OUT 05 10
DRS- 11
UR 13 1A
MAIN 14 5A
I5
15 OUT 06 12
TRANSF.
IR
16
17
18
1A
5A
I6 COMPACT2A OUT 07
13
14
15
19 1A
20 5A OUT 08 16
21 I7
22 1A X5
iL1
23
24
5A
I8 1
OUT 09 2
VMEASUR. 25 1A
eL1 26 5A 3
27 I9 OUT 10 4
P.T.
1 eL2 28 1A 5
I 10 OUT 11 6
iL2 29
EL1 X8 7
I1 iL3 1 OUT 12 8
eL3 U1 9
I2 EL2 2 OUT 13 10
3 11
EL3 VSTABILIZ. 4 U2 OUT 14 12
VL1L2 I3
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
G P.T.
9 X6
GEN.
3~ 10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
VDISPOSITION 5 OUT 20
+ 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
LEGEND: 16 IN 08 4
-
X7
1 TAPPING: 60,8% 6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 2
3
TRANS- 8
-UAKB Transducer 1 SI02 Tx+
MOD-
BUS
DUCER 1 9
Transducer 2 4 Tx-
10
OPTIONAL MODULE
Shaft Current 5 GND

Rotor E/F 6
UAKB
TRANS-
7 DUCER 2
SI03
+5 11
RS422/485
8 Rx+ 12
Rx-
GND
MODBUS control system interface 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04 15
Tx+
12 Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
IN09
X9
FAULT
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MS212 BIASED STATOR E/F 100% WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 220 MS212 Biased Stator E/F 100% Wiring Diagram

17.3.4. MS213
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I2
6 5
7
8
1A
5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A 9
12 I4
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
MAIN 14 5A 11
TRANSF. I5 OUT 06
15 12
COMPACT2A 13
16 1A
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26
27
5A
I9 3
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 NOTE: OUT 14 12
5 13
U3 ANY VOLTAGE OUT 15 14
P.T. 6
7 INPUT MAY BE 15
OUT 16 16
U 0 open delta 8 U4 USED
9 X6
U 0 neutral 10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
G + 1 + OUT 18 4
GEN. TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
3~ -
3 + OUT 19 6
+
BLOCK. (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
P.T. 11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
LEGEND: 6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 2
TRANS-
-UAKB Transducer 1 3 SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
OPTIONAL MODULE

Rotor E/F 6
UAKB
TRANS-
7 DUCER 2
SI03 11
RS422/485

9 13
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MS213 STATOR E/F 3rd HARMONIC WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 221 MS213 Stator E/F 3rd Harmonic Wiring Diagram


17.4.1. MS111
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
3.I0A + 3.I0A-3.I0B I0
3.I0A
-
3.I0B
3.U0 U0
GEN. G
3~
3.U0 V.T. 3.I0B R (LOAD)
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
87 Alarm
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
Fig. 17-5: MS111 DIR. STATOR E/F LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 222 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
ANGLE BETWEEN U0 and I0

(NOTE: U0 = REF = 0)
NOTEBOOK
]
E[
(SLO OP
I0" PE + SL
9 0)
se . 1
DIR
0)
t=
I0 SLOPE 1
9
PE +
SET VALUE
(SLO
0
(SLO
U0=
PE -
REF
I0
90
U0"
se . 2
)
DIR
t=
) 90
PE - 1 EXAMPLE
(SLO
GIVEN FOR
SET VALUE = 30
U0 > set set = DIR.1
&
((set SLOPE) - 90) < ( I0) < ((set SLOPE) + 90)
((set SLOPE) - 90 + 180) < ( I0) < ((set SLOPE) + 90 +180)

&
U0 > set set = DIR.2

TEST
BIN. I/0 ALARM
PRESET LED-
DISPLAY
1
0
>=1 ALARM
&
BLOCKING
& ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET >=1 LED-
&
1
MATRIX
BIN. I/0
0
PRESET
TRIP 1
TRIP 0
t > tset
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
PROCESSING
MATRIX
MS111 DIR. STATOR E/F LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 223 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE MODULE: MS111
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MD321
1
E[
] Calculation of angel between I0 and SLOPE
(SLO OP
PE + SL (reference for angel: U0 = 0). Result: DIR.1 or DIR.2
9 0 )
se . 1
DIR
Angle between I0 and SLOPE is in the range from

t=
I0
0)
SLOPE 1 DIR.1
9
SET VALUE
PE +
(SLOPE -90) ----- (SLOPE +90).

(SLO
0
NOTE: Reference for the angle is SLOPE(corresp.with 0).
(SLO
U0
PE -9
I0 DIR.2 Angle between I0 and SLOPE is in the range from

0)
se . 2
DIR
((SLOPE +180) -90) ----- ((SLOPE +180) +90).

t=
) 0
PE -9 1 EXAMPLE
NOTE: Reference for the angle is SLOPE(corresp.with 0).
(SLO
GIVEN FOR
SET VALUE = 30
SLOPE Set-value (0...30...60...90). SLOPE corresponds

with the (expected) angle of I0 (with reference to U0).
NOTE: If SLOPE requires a setting of (180...210...240
...270) please use alternative DIR-setting(= DIR.2).
I0 180+30
NOTEBOOK DISPLAY U0
30 30 U0
ANGLE BETWEEN U0 and I0 U0 I0 I0
(NOTE: U0 = REF = 0)
DISPLAY SHOWS +30 DISPLAY SHOWS -30 DISPLAY SHOWS +210
MATRIX
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MS111 DIR. STATOR E/F LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 224 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

CALCULATION OF DIR.1/DIR.2 (SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING")
SET SLOPE = 0 SET SLOPE = 30
DI
I0
R.
I0
1
U0 U0
DIR.2
DIR.1
SLOPE
E
OP
SL
I0 I0
2
R.
DI
SET SLOPE = 60 SET SLOPE = 90
DIR.1
DIR
.1
E
OP
SLOPE
I0 I0
SL
U0 U0
I0 I0
.2
DIR
DIR.2
MS111 DIR. STATOR E/F CALCULATION OF DIRECTION (1 2)

Fig. 225 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Calculation Of Direction (1 2)

HEALTHY CONDITION (NO E/F)
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
OUTZONE
C.T.
(TERMINAL
SIDE) X1/
3.I0A
19
3.I0A 1 3.I0A+ 3.I0B 20 I 10 I0
3.I0B X8/
1
UL3 3.U0 2 U 1 U0
UL2
INZONE
UL1
G
GEN.
3~
C.T. 1 NOTE: RATIO OF C.T.s:

(NEUTRAL
FOR OUTZONE E/F THE FOLLOWING
SIDE)
3.I0B MATHEMATICAL RELATION IS GIVEN:
1
V.T. 3.U0 R0 (SEC. CURRENT OF C.T. AT NEUTRAL SIDE) * 1,5 =
3.I0B (SEC. CURRENT OF C.T. AT TERMINAL SIDE).
TO BE FULFILLED AT CURRENT INPUT OF
DRS COMPACT 2.
DEF. OF PHASORS:
L1
NORMAL OPERATION:
RESIDUAL VOLTAGE OF NEUTRAL P.T.:
UL3L1 UL1L2 3.U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3 = 0

UL1
RESIDUAL CURRENT:
UL3 UL2
3.I0A = 0
3.I0B = 0
3.I0A - 3.I0B = 0
L3 L2
UL2L3
UL1 = UL1-0 = UL1 - 0
UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2
MS111 DIR. STATOR E/F POLARITY OF I0 AND U0 - PHASORS

Fig. 226 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Polarity of I0 and U0 - Phasors

AUSSENLIEGENDER FEHLER (AUSLSEBEDINGUNG NICHT ERFLLT)
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
AUSSENLIEGENDER FEHLER
BLOCK-
TRANSF.
ERDSCHLUSS (PHASE L3)
STROMWANDLER
(GEN-KLEMMENSEITE)
X1/
3.I0A
19
3.I0A 3.I0A- 3.I0B 20 I 10 I0
3.I0B X8/
INNENLIEGENDER FEHLEER
2 IL1 IL2 IL3 1

UL3 3.U0 2 U 1 U0
UL2
UL1
G
GEN.
3~
1 ERGEBNIS: GLEICHE RICHTUNG VON ERDSCHL.

STROMW.
-STROM UND SPANNUNG (AM EINGANG DRS-COMPACT2A)
(STERN-
P.T. PUNKT)
2 ANM: IL1 = IL2 = 0 BEI
STERNPUNKTS-
3.U0 R0 IL3 = -3.I0B PRIM.SEITE DER STR.W.
TRANSF. 3.I0B
3.I0B 3 ANM: U-EINGANG DES DRS COMPACT2 DREHT POLARITT.
(OHMIC/
NON-LINEAR) INNENLIEGEND ERGIBT DRS-INTERN EINE Ri.2
(ANSCHLUSS WIE GEZEICHNET).
EINSTELLWERT DESHALB Ri1".
ZEIGER FR DIE
SEK.GRSSEN DER L1
3.I
0B
STROM- UND
SPANNUNGSWANDLER
3.I
0A
1
3.U
1 0
. I 0B UL1
-3
3.I
0A
UL2 L3 UL2 L2
= ERDE
ANM: L3 = E/F
MS111 ERSCHLUSSRICHTUNG POLARIT DER I0 UND U0 - ZEIGER/

AUSSENLIEGENDER FEHLER
Fig. 227 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Polarity of I0 and U0 Phasors / Outzone E/F

E/F INZONE (TRIP-CONDITION)
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
OUTZONE
C.T.
(TERMINAL
SIDE) X1/
3.I0A =0
19
3.I0A =0 3.I0A- 3.I0B = -3.I0B 20 I 10 I0
3.I0B X8/ 3
E/F 1
(PH. L3) 3.U0 U 1 U0
2
1 IL1 IL2 IL3

UL3
UL2
INZONE
UL1
3.I0B
G 1 RESULT: OPPOSITE DIR. OF RES. CURR. RES. VOLT.

GEN.
3~ (INPUTS OF DRS-COMPACT2A).
C.T.
2 NOTE: IL1 = IL2 = 0 AT
(NEUTRAL IL3 = -3.I0B PRIM.SIDE OF C.T.s
P.T. SIDE)
3 NOTE: U-INPUT OF DRS COMPACT2 REVERSES THE
V.T. 3.U0 R0 POLARITY. INZONE E/F GIVES DRS-INTEGRAL
3.I0B
A DIR.2-RESULT (IF CONNECTED AS SHOWN).
3.I0B
(OHMIC/ THEREFORE THE SET HAS TO BE DIR.1".
NON-LINEAR)
1
.I 0B .I 0B
-3
-3
3. I 0 A
PHASORS AT SEC.
SIDE OF V.T./C.T.:
L1
3.I
0B
1
UL1
3.U
0
E NOTE: L3 = E/F
UL2 L3 UL2 L2
MS111 DIR. STATOR E/F POLARITY OF I0 AND U0 PHASORS / INZONE E/F

Fig. 228 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Polarity of I0 and U0 Phasors / Inzone E/F

VERIFICATION OF DIRECTION OF U0 AND I0 (SEE LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING")
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
OUTZONE
E/F
OUTZONE 1
X1/
3.I0A
19
3.I0A C.T. 3.I0A- 3.I0B 20 I 10 I0
3.I0B X8/ 3
1
E/F 2 3.U0 U 1 U0
INZONE 2
INZONE
3.I0B
G
GEN.
3~
3 SET VALUES USED FOR THIS EXAMPLE:
SLOPE: 0 deg.
C.T. OPERATING DIR.: DIR.1
(NEUTRAL
P.T. SIDE) NOTE:
IF POLARITIES SHOWN ON RECORDS
3.U0 R0 ARE INVERSED (INZONE OUTZONE)
V.T. 3.I0B PLEASE SWITCH SETTING TO DIR.2".
3.I0B
(OHMIC/
NON-LINEAR)
1 E/F OUTZONE 2 E/F INZONE

DRS RECORDED CURVES DRS RECORDED CURVES
I I
t t
U U
t t
MS111 DIR. STATOR E/F POLARITY OF I0 AND U0 PHASORS / VERIFICATION

Fig. 229 MS111 Dir. Stator E/F Polarity of I0 and U0 Phasors / Verification

17.4.2. MS211
L1 L2 L3
20Hz-GENERATOR
DRS-
MAIN
G COMPACT2A
-A-A 20Hz
TRANSF. fN = 20Hz
V20Hz V20Hz
4 3
CTR
fN = 20Hz
BAND-
PASS-
FILTER
PROCESSING
CL (20Hz)
2 RV
R
a VR
C.T. I20Hz
1
b
20Hz
CS
VN 500
V
3 3
a
1
b
CG
GEN. TEST
(optional)
UN BLOCKING
500V
3
(optional) 5
1
LEGEND:
TRIP
1 OPEN DELTA or NEUTRAL V.T. (ALTERNATIVELY) COMMANDS
2 LOAD RESISTOR
OUTPUT CB1
3 FFT-SYNCHRONIZING CHANNEL = 20Hz (19,9...20,1Hz) CONTACTS CB2
NOTE: THIS PROTECTION RELAY MUST NOT BE USED FOR
50/60Hz - c.t. or p.t.
ALARM
4 CAPACITANCES TO EARTH: CONTACTS
CG GENERATOR STATOR WINDING Alarm
CL GENERATOR TERMINALS/ CABLES Trip
CTR TRANSFORMER WINDING/ LOW VOLT.SIDE
CS CAPACITOR BANK (+ possible CB - cap.)
RV INTERNAL RESISTANCE AT 20Hz: 8W
5 please see drawing: MS211 BLOCKING INPUT/

DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS.

CPU+DSP - BOARD/
PROCESSING
VERSION 2
MS211 STATOR E/F 100% 20Hz LOGIC DIAGRAM

page 1/3: OVERVIEW
Fig. 230 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram page 1/3: Overview

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE
MEASUR. VOLTAGE
NOTEBOOK MEASUR. CURRENT
FIRMWARE FIRMWARE FIRMWARE

BAND-PASS- BAND-PASS- LOW-PASS
FFT-
V20Hz FILTER FILTER FILTER/ TIME
1. HARM.
2nd ORDER 2nd ORDER CONST =
(20Hz)
Q = 15 Q = 15 5 * PERIOD =
f = 20Hz f = 20Hz 250ms
BAND-PASS 4th ORDER
FIRMWARE FIRMWARE FIRMWARE

BAND-PASS- BAND-PASS- LOW-PASS
FFT-
I20Hz FILTER FILTER FILTER/ TIME
1. HARM.
2nd ORDER 2nd ORDER CONST =
(20Hz)
Q = 15 Q = 15 5 * PERIOD =
f = 20Hz f = 20Hz 250ms
| V20Hz (1.Harm.) |
|Z| =
| I20Hz (1.Harm.) |
TEST
BIN. I/0 |ZFILTERED| < (OPERATE VALUE) t>
PRESET
1
0
LED-
ALARM
DISPLAY
>=1
&
BLOCKING & ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
MATRIX BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MS211 STATOR E/F 100% 20Hz LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 231 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MS211
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MS211
1
0
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE:
CALC. INTERNAL |Z| is calculated by using the 1.Harm. of the 20Hz-voltage and the 1.Harm.
MEASURED VALUES
of the 20Hz-current.
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE
MEASUR. VOLTAGE MEAS. VOLTAGE resp. CURRENT:
MEASUR. CURRENT 1.Harm. of 20Hz-volt. resp. current
(result of FFT (FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM)).
BAND-PASS-
FILTER The 20Hz-volt. and current signals are filtered in order to eliminate
2nd ORDER the 50/60Hz-component.
Q = 15
f = 20Hz
LOW-PASS FILTER/
TIME CONST =
5 * PERIOD = 250ms
Programmable
LED-indications
software-matrix for
of
MATRIX DISPLAY
PROCESSING
(row 2...14) of
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MS211 STATOR E/F 100% 20Hz LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 232 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

L1 L2 L3
20Hz-GENERATOR
DRS-
MAIN
G COMPACT2A
20Hz
TRANSF. fN = 20Hz
fN = 20Hz
V20Hz V20Hz
PROCESSING
4 3
CTR
BAND-
PASS-
FILTER
CL (20Hz)
2 RV
R
a VR
C.T. I20Hz
1
b
20Hz
CS
VN 500
V
3 3
a
1
b
CG
EQUIVALENT 20Hz CIRCUIT:

RV=8 (see
no E/F: bandpass-
filter)
GEN. TEST
3
(optional) 20Hz
CE 1 R 2 4
gen.
UN BLOCKING
500V
3
(optional) 5
RV=8 (see
1
E/F: bandpass-
filter)
LEGEND:
1 OPEN DELTA or NEUTRAL V.T. (ALTERNATIVELY) 3
2 LOAD RESISTOR 4
5 E/F CE 1 R 2 20Hz
3 FFT-SYNCHRONIZING CHANNEL = 20Hz (19,9...20,1Hz)
gen.
NOTE: THIS PROTECTION RELAY MUST NOT BE USED FOR
50/60Hz - c.t. or p.t. REMARK:
4 CAPACITANCES TO EARTH:
CG GENERATOR STATOR WINDING
CL GENERATOR TERMINALS/ CABLES USE CAUTION!
CTR TRANSFORMER WINDING/ LOW VOLT.SIDE
CS CAPACITOR BANK (+ possible CB - cap.) Aux. supply of 20Hz-generator (electronic
RV INTERNAL RESISTANCE AT 20Hz: 8W generator module) has to be switched off
during maintenance works at stator winding.
5 please see drawing: MS211 BLOCKING INPUT/
LEGEND:
Example:
switch off m.c.b. (m.c.b. must
DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS. 1 CE = CTR + CL + CS + CG + )
have a signalling contact which is used for:
2 R...LOAD RESISTOR
a) blocking of 20Hz-protection
3 RV...SERIES RESISTANCE (INSIDE OF
DRS and
DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM BANDPASS-FILTER-MODULE)
b) to forward an alarm to the power station
4 20Hz-GENERATOR-MODULE
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION
controlRELAY
system.).
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS COMPACT 2 5 E/F between GEN-NEUTRAL and
Important note: during all E/F tests
EARTH resp. GEN-PHASE and EARTH
(primary tests) the 20 Hz-generator must be
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
PROCESSING ON, otherwise danger of damage!
VERSION 2
MS211 STATOR E/F 100% EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT

page 1/3
Fig. 233 MS211 Stator E/F 100% Equivalent Circuit page 1/3

AUX. SUPPLY (alternatively): 1 2 3 4
V = 3x80...130V AC ph-ph V = 80...265V AC

50 / 60Hz 50 / 60Hz V = 88...253V DC
+ -
V12 V23 V V
V31
1A1 1A2 1A3 1A1 1A2 1A1 1A2
DRS-
COMPACT2A
fN = 20Hz
fN = 20Hz
L1 L2 L3 V20Hz
1A1 1A2 1A3
PROCESSING
3
G
MAIN 20Hz
TRANSF.
V20Hz
4
CTR
I20Hz
CL
2 V
R
1 NOTE:
VR POWER CONSUMPTION OF 20Hz-GENERATOR :
a
110 VA.
C.T.
1
2 NOTE:
b
20Hz 20Hz-GENERATOR OUTPUT-VOLTAGE:
CS delayed up to 1min if supply voltage rises slowly.
VN 500
3 3 3 NOTE:
a 20Hz-GENERATOR OUTPUT-POWER:
b
1 75VA max. const.
CG
4 NOTE:
20HZ-GENERATOR HEAT-LOSSES:
20W.
GEN. TEST
(optional)
page 2/3: DETAIL: AUX. POWER SUPPLY
UN BLOCKING
500V
3
(optional) 5
1
Fig. 234 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram page 2/3: Detail: Aux. Power Supply

DRS-
COMPACT2A
fN = 20Hz
L1 L2 L3 1A1 1A2 1A3 V20Hz
PROCESSING
G
MAIN 20Hz
TRANSF.
V20Hz
CTR
I20Hz
fN = 20Hz
CL
V
R
a VR
C.T.
b
20Hz
CS
VN 500
3 3
a
b
CG 1 IMPORTANT NOTE:
MS211 must be blocked in case of
1
loss of aux. supply voltage of
20Hz-generator:
GEN. TEST
1. Vaux. supply = VDC:
(optional)
Block. = m.c.b. OFF
UN BLOCKING Block. = DC-supervision relay OFF
500V
3
(optional) 5
1
2. Vaux. supply = VAC:
Block. = (UAC < UAC min)

...approved supply voltage range
please see page 2/3!
If supplied by generator-voltage
deexcitation = blocking of E/F-prot.

page 3/3: DETAIL: BLOCKING INPUT
Fig. 235 MS211 Stator E/F 100% 20Hz Logic Diagram page 3/3: Detail: Blocking Input

17.4.3. MS212
RL linear
L1 L2 L3 UR
3
I>
m.c.b IR DRS-
COMPACT2A
3 alternatively
RL non-linear
UR
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
IR
VMEASUR.
iL1
eL1
P.T.
eL2
iL2
EL1
I1 iL3
eL3
EL2
I2
VSTABILIZ.
EL3
I3
GEN. P.T.
VG L1
VG L2
VG L3
3~
EL1 VG L1
VDISPOSITION 1 3
VDISPOSITION EL3 VG L2
VG L3 EL2
Generator Neutral 1
LEGEND:
1 NOTE: DEF. OF DIRECTIONS VCRITICAL 4
OF PHASORS (REFERENCE: WINDING 79 VG L1
SEE PHASORS SHOWN IN 78
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM) WERE

77 VDISPOSITION
76
CHOOSEN IN SUCH WAY TO 75
85 86
GET THE GEN. NEUTRAL
VG L3 74
96
87
88
POT. AND THE EARTH POT. 97 89
AS SHOWN IN THIS 2 98
1 99 90
VECTOR GRAPHICS. VG L2
2 TAPPING AT PHASE L2:
60,8% TEST
3 LOAD RESISTOR (LINEAR
TRIP
OR NON-LINEAR) (optional) COMMANDS
2 + 3 IN ORDER TO SHIFT
BLOCKING OUTPUT CB1
AWAY THE GEN. NEUTRAL CONTACTS CB2
FROM EARTH-POT. (optional) ALARM
VDISPOSITION 100% STATOR
E/F PROT.
CONTACTS
4 VOLTAGE PHASOR Alarm
DIAGRAM OF THE Trip
WINDINGS OF THE
SYNCHR.GEN


VERSION 2
MS212 BIASED STATOR E/F 100% LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 236 MS212 Biased Stator E/F 100% Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
VMEASUR.
|VMEASUR.| > ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE
CALCULATION OF ACTUAL SET VALUE (STABILIZING CHARACTERISTIC)
ACT. OPERATE VALUE 1
SETTING: ACTUAL
OPERATE VALUE OPERATE
VALUE
1
(V / Hz) / (Vn / Hzn)
VSTABILIZ.
SETTING: NOM.
GEN. VOLT.
TEST LED-
DISPLAY
BIN. I/0 SETTING: NOM. SETTING:
PRESET FREQUENCY BIAS
1
0
ALARM
>=1 LED-
& MATRIX
BLOCKING & ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 t>
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
1 FOR DETAILS PLEASE MATRIX
SEE Fig. MS212 BIASED
STATOR E/F 100% TRIP
CHARACTERISTIC
PROCESSING
MS212 BIASED STATOR E/F 100% LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 237 MS212 Biased Stator E/F 100% Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MS212
1
0
|VMEASUR.| > ACTUAL OPERATE VALUE |VMEASUR.| is compared with the calculated Actual Operate Value.
ACT. OPERATE VALUE Calculation of the Actual Operate Value. This calculation is based on:
a) set value: Operate Value

b) set value: Nom. Gen. Volt.
c) set value: Nom. Frequency
d) set value: Bias
1 e) measured value: VSTABILIZ. (voltage and frequency)
(V / Hz) / (Vn / Hzn)
Characteristic/Diagram:
see Fig. MS212 BIASED STATOR E/F 100% TRIP CHARACTERISTIC

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED-
PROCESSING-board
DISPLAY
(row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

MS212 BIASED STATOR E/F 100% LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 238 MS212 Biased Stator E/F 100% Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

TRIP CHARACTERISTIC
[PROCESSING (VE2) ONLY]
ACT. OPERATE VALUE [V] SET VALUE:

SET OPERATE VALUE [V]
BIAS = 140%
2,4
BIAS = 100%
BIAS = 50%
1,5
BIAS = 0%
1
0,5
1 2
ACT. GEN. VOLT. ACT. GEN. FREQU.

*
NOM. GEN. VOLT. NOM. GEN. FREQU.
FORMULA: 1
(ACT. OPER. VALUE) = (SET OPER. VALUE) * [1 + (BIAS) * (UG/UG nom * fG/fG nom - 1)]
1 CONDITION:
IF [UG < UG nom] use UG = UG nom!
IF [fG < fG nom] use fG = fG nom!
NOTE: THIS FORMULA IS VALID FOR VE2 ONLY! (DOES NOT APPLY FOR VE1).
MS212 BIASED STATOR E/F TRIP CHARACTERISTIC [PROCESSING (VE2) ONLY]

Fig. 239 MS212 Biased Stator E/F Trip Characteristic [Processing (VE2) Only]

17.4.4. MS213
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
U4
U 0 open delta
U5
U 0 neutral
P.T.
G
GEN.
3~
P.T.
GEN. MUST
NOT BE
EARTHED TEST
(NO NEUTRAL
GROUNDING (OPTIONAL)
RESISTOR)
BLOCKING TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
64 Alarm

VERSION 2
MS213 STATOR E/F 3rd HARMONIC LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 240 MS213 Stator E/F 3rd Harmonic Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
3rd HARMONIC OF U 0 open delta

3rd HARMONIC OF U 0 neutral
NOTEBOOK
1. HARMONIC 3. HARMONIC
U 0 open delta CALCULATION OF

3rd HARMONIC
3. HARMONIC (|U 0 open delta|)

(RATIO)
SET VALUE:
RATIO
+
U 0 neutral CALCULATION OF (|U 0 neutral|) -
3rd HARMONIC
= (|U 0 open delta|) - (|U 0 neutral|)
ALARM
> OPERATE VALUE
TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
PRESET
1
0
>=1
& ALARM
BLOCKING
& ALARM LED-
BIN. I/0 >=1 MATRIX
PRESET &
1
BIN. I/0
0
PRESET
TRIP 1
TRIP 0
t > tset
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MS213 STATOR E/F 3rd HARMONIC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 241 MS213 Stator E/F 3rd Harmonic Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MS213
1
CALCULATION OF
3rd HARMONIC CALC. OF 3rd HARMONIC-CONTENT BY FFT (FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM)
SET VALUE:
RATIO
WEIGHING FACTOR FOR U0 open delta
Sum
MATRIX
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MS213 STATOR E/F 3rd HARMONIC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING/ LEGEND

Fig. 242 MS213 Stator E/F 3rd Harmonic Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

17.5. FUNCTION
17.5.1. MS111
The directional stator earth fault protection is detecting earth faults in the stator winding of
3 phase rotating machines and the associated galvanic connected plant. The selective earth
fault protection range is approximately 10% from the generator neutral up to the generator leads
where the cable slip-on CTs are positioned.
The directional stator earth fault protection is using the zero sequence voltage- and the zero sequence current
components for earth fault detection. The zero sequence voltage value serves
as an initiation quantity whereas the phase displacement between the zero sequence current and
the zero sequence voltage determines whether there is an out of zone- or an in-zone fault.
In case of an earth a neutral displacement voltage is produced in the secondary open delta VT
circuit with a value depending on the location of the fault in the generator winding. The configured
trigger level of the zero sequence voltage determines the protective range of the stator earth fault function.
The zero sequence voltage is also producing a fault current via the earth fault path from all other
external plant connections whereby the current value depends on the respective zero sequence impedance of the
equipment. The phase displacement of the zero sequence current for the
protected generator is measured by the cable slip-on CTs.
From above it can now be deduced that the earth fault is an in-zone fault when voltage and current are in phase.
Since the zero sequence current has not only a resistive component a
permissible range of 60 (= Direction 1) is applicable. However, other locations of the CT/VT
installation are sometimes necessary which will result in a different phase angle displacement
between voltage and current, i.e. a phase angle >60 (= Direction 2) is selected.
The protection algorithm for the function samples the parameter signals 12 times each cycle.
For each sample interval the value and phase angle of the signals is computed according to
standard procedures.
The voltage signal is compared with the configured operating value of the function. At the same
time the phase angle Direction 1 or Direction 2 is computed and compared with the configured
tripping direction. When both criteria are fulfilled during 24 consecutive sample intervals the
function is initiated and the trip time delay started. In case the initiating conditions remain during the whole time
delay a trip output signal is produced.
Note:
The external equipment such as distribution transformers and loading resistor
shown in the circuit diagrams are individually designed for each plant according
to the calculations outlined in publication MA 553-7/87e.

17.5.2. MS211
See Technical Description " DRS-C2A-UAKB_V1_3_Beschreibung_D.pdf".

17.5.3. MS211
a)
Alarm "Measuring Fault" when V < 10V.
b)
Initiation delay: 380 ms (due to filtering).
c)
Initiation delay on pick-up: 700 ms.
d)
Time delay of Measuring Fault alarm: 640 ms.
e)
Drop-off delay Measuring Fault alarm: 440 ms.
f)
The Central Processing Unit PROCESSING has to be configured to a nominal frequency
of approximately 19.9 20.1 Hz.
Note:
Do not use a wider range! With a Fluke multimeter the frequency of the 20 Hz
generator has to be measured and a narrow as possible range adjusted!
The frequency configuration in Page0 must not be set to 50 Hz.
g)
Must not be applied together with oversampling functions!

17.5.4. MS212
The stator earth fault protection enables detection of earth faults in the stator winding of rotating machines and the
galvanic connected plant portions which are part of the generator-transformer LV system.
The protection is based on a method which produces an approximate 15% primary voltage displacement of the
phase to neutral voltage and does not require any special auxiliary equipment
but solely passive plant components. This small displacement voltage of the generator neutral does practically not
impose an additional burden to the winding insulation.
The earth fault protection covers 100% of the machine winding including the neutral and in
case of an earth fault only a small additional primary current is circulating through the fault
path, i.e. generally smaller than 5 A.
Due to the unsymmetrical connection of the distribution transformers also the generator neutral
is displaced with respect to ground potential thereby ensuring that also earth faults at the neutral
are definitely detected.
For the design and required ratings of the distribution transformers and the secondary loading impedance there are
versions with loading resistors and high interruption capacity miniature CBs available. For details please refer to
Publication MA 553-7/87e.
The generator neutral displacement voltage under normal operating conditions is essentially
depending on the generator system capacitance to ground and during overspeed- and/or
overvoltage conditions during a full load rejection or regulator failure may increase up to the
set operating value.
This is particularly the case when a relative small operating value has been selected ensuring
decisive operation at a generator voltage even at approximately 50% to cover the required
100% protection of the winding.
In order to keep a sufficient safety margin and to prevent mal-operation the operating value Va
of the function is temporarily increased by a configurable stabilising factor k from the initial
Ve value according to following formula:
Formula for PROCESSING (VE1):
U 2
g 1
U
Ua
2 2
Ue 1 k gn f
. 1. for VgVgn and for fgfgn
2 fn

Ua Ue for Vg<Vgn
Ua Ue for fg<fgn
k ....... Stabilising factor

Vg ..... Generator voltage
Vgn ... Generator nominal voltage
f ........ Generator frequency
fn ...... Generator nominal frequency
Formula for PROCESSING (VE2):

Ua = Ue . [1 + k ((UG/UGN) . (f/fN) 1)]
whereby:
Va Modified tripping value (according to stabilising characteristic)
Ve Configured tripping value
k Stabilising parameter (as per above formula).
Caution:
In case of VG<VGN then insert VGN into the formula
In case of f<fN then insert fN into the formula
Note for PROCESSING (VE2):

With the PROCESSING (VE2) a linear formula for stabilising is applicable.
The stabilising feature is only active when VG > VG nominal and when f > (as VE1).
The function algorithm is sampling the configured signals 12 per cycle and subsequently
computes the basic component of the displacement voltage as well as the frequency and
the basic component of the stabilising voltage, i.e. the generator voltage.
Then for each sample interval the operating value is computed according to the above formula
and compared with the measured value of the neutral displacement voltage. Should during 24
consecutive sample intervals the measured value is exceeding the operating value the function
initiation and the corresponding time delay are started.
When the initiation remains during the whole configured time delay then after delay expiry the
trip output will be set.
The function performance can be blocked or tested via the corresponding input signal
"Blocking Input" or "Test input".

17.5.5. MS113/ MS213
Note:
MS213: VLeads and VNeutral must have opposite polarity to enable V=0.
MS113: uses one voltage only (polarity does not matter).
Frequency range (generator overspeed):

a) Approximately +/- 10% in case of no synchronising channel is detected.
b) With active synchronising channel also a range f = 90 160 % is possible.
Do not combine with oversampling functions!
General Description of the Function

For a generator under healthy operating conditions we assume for simplification an even distribution of the
rd
3 harmonic distribution from the neutral to the generator leads (terminals).
V3T
Neutral Point Terminals
V3N
rd
In case of an earth fault the 3 harmonic component in the neutral is shorted whereby the value at the generator
leads is increased by the same prior value:

V3T
Neutral Point Terminals
V3N=0
rd
The above described distribution of the 3 harmonic over neutral and terminal side is taken for the evaluation of
earth faults close to the generator neutral.
rd
MS213 and MS113 are using different algorithms: MS213 compares the 3 Harmonic Zero Sequence E/F
Voltages, whereas MS113 evaluates just one of the voltages (for example because there is just one earthfault-
voltage available).
a)
MS213:
For the operation of the function we use the following formula:
Operation Value VOp = (Ratio x V3T) V3N

rd
This means that the value of the 3 harmonic at the generator neutral is taken as a reference
rd
and the change of the 3 harmonic component at the generator leads is applied for a ratio balance configuration of
the protective function.
The function settings, i.e. operation value and ratio have to be confirmed during the generator primary test
procedures.
b
MS113:
MS113 somehow is a simplified version compared with MS213. It has to be choosen if only one of the voltages (V3T
or V3N) is available:
V3T Open Delta Voltage Transformer at Generator Terminals
V3N Single Phase Voltage Transformer between Generator Neutral and Earth Potential.
Note: please ensure that the VT grounding(s) use(s) proper generator earth potential in order to avoid false
readings due to earth potential shifts (valid for both versions!).
rd
MS113 does not compare the 3 Harmonic components, it just uses and evaluates the change of one of the
voltages (Neutral or Terminal-side, whatever there is available). Depending on the voltage choosen, the value can
go up or down in case of generator neutral E/F (see Set Value "Type").
As a consequence in order to avoid a maltrip in case of "Underdetection" - we also have to consider the value of
the Positive Phase Sequence Voltage (generator terminals), that means that we need minimum PPS voltage to
release the operation of the function. Please see the corresponding set values: "Type", "Pos.Ph.Seq. Voltage" and
"PPS Volt. Blocking".
Note: in case of "Overdetection" no blocking is required.

17.6. COMMISSIONING

17.6.1. MS111
Pre-Commissioning:
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry.
Also the function parameters have to be set according to the data of the stator system.
Insert an ammeter into the current circuit, a voltmeter onto the voltage input and a phase angle
meter into the test circuit and with a relay test set inject the appropriate quantities.
Compare the meter indication with the external measured value display of the VE.
Based on the system calculations inject the minimum operating earth fault current by also
applying a voltage and adjust the phase angle to the operating range. Increase the voltage
until the function operates and record this value into the test sheets.
Reduce the test voltage until the function resets and record the value in the commissioning
sheets.
Compare the operating value with the set protective range and then increase the earth fault current up to 1.5 times
the minimum setting and also raise the displacement voltage to about
1.5 times the pick-up level.
Alter the phase angle between voltage and current in the + and direction until the function resets either way and
record these operating values into the commissioning sheets.
Check the alarm- and trip signals and the LED indication according to the configured settings
At 1.5 times the initiation value verify the function time delay with a suitable timer and enter
the results into the commissioning test sheets.
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without any external input quantities.

- In-Zone Earth Fault Test:
Block trips of the stator earth fault protection.

Connect a cable with suitable cross section, e.g. a safety earth, between a generator
phase and ground inside the protected zone.
Insert measuring instruments to evaluate the earth fault current, the neutral displacement
voltage and the generator voltage.
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation to produce operation
of the protective function.
Compare the instrument readings with the Actual Measured Value window display
in the DRS User program and note the results in the commissioning test sheets.
Confirm the protection range by substituting the values into following formula:
UAG
S(%) 1 .100
UNG
S Protection range in %
VAG Generator voltage initiating value
VNG Generator nominal voltage
Check any possible configured external function blocking inputs from the plant.
Restore the trip outputs of the stator earth fault protection.
If possible shut down the generator via a live protective function trip and remove
the ground test connection.
Re-configure any possible parameter changes to the original values.
- Out Of Zone Earth Fault Test:

phase and ground outside the protected zone..
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation only so far as to
prove restraint of the protective function with due consideration of the short time rating
of the earthing equipment.
Record the voltage and current values in the commissioning sheets.
Shut down the generator and remove the ground test connection.

17.6.2. MS211
Important note:
The 20Hz generator should be switched ON whenever the unit is in operation. Otherwise
the electronic components of the 20 Hz generator could be damaged in case of E/F tests by the arising E/F
voltages.
On the other hand the 20 Hz generator may cause dangerous voltages (20 Hz) at the primary side of the
generator neutral transformer; therefore the 20 Hz generator should be switched OFF whenever there is
installation work etc. in progress.
Initial Tests:
First make sure that all components are connected properly.
Set the parameters of the input matrix in keeping with the external connection.
Set the parameters for the preliminary operating value and time delay to the chosen values.
Set the parameters of the relay outputs in the LED matrix and in the tripping matrix, as applicable.
When testing the function, the plant equipment should preferably be out of service.
Turn on the 20 Hz displacement system after successfully testing its wiring. Connect the voltage transformer input
to a suitable auxiliary supply for the 20 Hz generator.
Connect an ammeter to the current transformer circuit, as well as a voltmeter to the output of the 20 Hz generator.
Compare the readings of the measuring instruments to the readings of the internal measured values of the
protective function. Enter these values, as well as the value "system impedance" (also displayed there) into the test
sheets as "without earth fault, unexcited".
Now fit an earth fault at any desired point and re-measure current, voltage and system impedance (at measuring
instruments and internal measured values). Enter the values into the test sheets as "with earth fault, unexcited".
Select a definite operating value, which should amount to between 25 % and a maximum of 50 % of the system
impedance in its status without earth fault.
Check the tripping and alarm signals, as well as the LED displays, for their set parameters and compliance with
circuit diagrams.
Supply half the impedance setting in order to measure the tripping time of the protective function, using a timer,
and enter the measured values into the test sheets.
Check relay blocking, by applying the blocking signal to the operated relay. The relay must then reset.
Check relay test input by applying the test signal. This must operate the protective function, or phase, even in fault-
free conditions.

Please bear in mind that other protective functions may also be operating when performing the described tests,
unless counter-measures are taken. Block the other functions in keeping with the relevant operating procedures, in
order to avoid this effect.
After testing, restore any possible changes in parameter settings to their nominal settings.
Start-up Tests:
The start-up test checks the function of the protective system during normal operation. If plant conditions permit,
we recommend to carry out the following tests:
If the 20 Hz displacement system has an external supply source, carry out the following test:
- Open Circuit Tests:
Block tripping of stator earth fault protection system.

With the generator running at rated speed repeat the tests, as described above, at
50 % nominal generatorvoltage and enter the measured results into the test sheets as "operation without
earth fault" or "operation with earth fault". If necessary, adjust the setting of the operating value according to
the test results, bearing in mind the limits given above.
Check any relay blocking inputs.
Re-activate tripping of stator ground fault protection system.
Return generator to standstill, if possible by tripping the protective system.
Remove earth fault and restore all parameters to their nominal values.
If the 20 Hz displacement system is supplied by a voltage transformer, carry out the following test:
Block tripping of the stator earth fault protection system.

With the generator running at rated speed measure system impedance at nominal voltage in earth-fault-free
condition, and enter the values into the test sheets.
Apply an earth fault at the generator neutral, measure system impedance at nominal voltage during earth-
fault conditions and enter the values into the test sheets.
Adjust operating values according to measured values, if applicable.
Remove earth fault.
Excite generator, without earth fault, to approximately 130 % of nominal voltage. The ground protection must
not be operated.
Enter the value for system impedance into the test sheets.
Carry out the below test, which should consider the insulation level of the transformer neutral point, in order
to test the stability for earth faults on the transformer high voltage side:
- Open Circuit Test:
Fit an earth fault to the high voltage side of the main transformer.
Start-up the generator and excite up to the permissible voltage level for the transformer neutral.
Measure system impedance via operating program and extrapolate this value for 130 % generator voltage
(inversely proportional).
Check whether the extrapolated value provides sufficient safety margin and adjust the operating parameter,
if necessary.
Return generator to standstill, if possible by tripping the protective function.
Remove earth fault and restore parameters to nominal values, if applicable.

17.6.3. MS212
Pre-Commissioning:
At first check the external cable connections and the primary bus connections of the distribution transformers as
well as the other external auxiliary devices.
The input matrix is to be configured according to the external wiring.
The parameters for the operating values and the time delay are to be set to the designed values.
Insert voltmeters on the neutral displacement input and the generator voltage input (= stabilising
voltage) and with a suitable relay test set carry out following secondary injection test.
Raise the neutral displacement voltage value and keep the stabilising voltage at zero until the protective function
operates.
Record the operating value with the remark "No stabilising Voltage" in the test sheets by also
comparing the instrument readings with the external Measured Values display of the VE.
Reduce the test voltage until the function resets and record the value.
Repeat the above tests with following stabilising voltage values:
- 120 % nominal voltage at rated frequency

- Nominal voltage at 130 % of rated frequency
Compare the test results with above formula and record the measured values in the test sheets.
Check the alarm- and trip signals and also the LED indications according to configuration and circuit diagrams.
At 1.5 times the trigger value measure the operating time with a suitable timer (for example: use DRSWIN-
operating program) and record the result into the commissioning test sheets.
protective function, respectively the stage has to operate without any external input quantities.

- In-Zone Earth Fault Test:

phase and ground inside the protected zone.
Insert measuring instruments to evaluate the neutral displacement voltage and the generator voltage.
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually raise excitation to produce operation
Compare the instrument readings with the Actual Measured Value window display
in the DRS User program and note the results in the commissioning test sheets.
Repeat above tests by alternatively grounding the other two phases and the generator
neutral and record the values into the commissioning sheets.
Restore the trip outputs of the stator earth fault protection.
the ground test connection.
Re-configure any possible parameter changes to the original values.
- Out Of Zone Earth Fault Test:

Apply a phase to ground connection of suitable cross section to the generator-
transformer HV side.
Start up generator to rated speed and manually excite with due consideration of
the insulation level of the HV transformer neutral well below the maximum withstand insulation capability.
The protective function has to remain stable and the instruments readings should be
compared with the DRS Measured Values and entered into the commissioning sheets.
Extrapolate the measured values of the neutral displacement voltage to 120 % of the
nominal system voltage and ensure that the safety margin to the operating value is 2.
Shut down the generator and re-locate the earth fault connection in turn to the other phases and repeat the
tests the same way as outlined above.
With open circuit excite the generator to rated voltage and record the off-load readings
Normal Operation in the commissioning sheets.

17.6.4. MS113/ MS213
Pre-conditions:
It should be ensured that the function input voltages are to be measured as exact as possible
and it is not advisable to connect the VT neutral measuring instruments to the station earth system since there may
be a potential difference which can cause a considerable deviation
from the real values.
Primary Test With the Generator
The production tolerances and therefore the magnetic characteristics for a generator, especially
rd
with regard to the 3 harmonic, are always slightly different for each unit.
For this reason the following tests have to be carried out with each generator.
Earth Fault at the Generator Neutal

With a direct connection between the generator neutral and the station earth resulting in a trip.
Normal Service Operation

To verify the correct function under stable unit operating conditions.
MS213: The amplitudes of the 3rd harmonics between the generator neutral and the generator leads are usually
changing with the unit power loading.
MS113: The amplitude of the 3rd harmonic at generator neutral or at the generator leads is usually changing with
the unit power loading.
To determine a stable operating value for all loading conditions against mal-operation and
definite operation it may sometimes be required to carry out a certain recommended test
procedure outlined in the tables below.

Proposed Commissiong Sheet Layout
With Earth Fault In Without Earth Fault/

1. Test (Open Circuit)
Generator Neutral Normal Operation
Generator current [A]
Generator voltage [kV]
Generator active power (MW)
Generator reactive power (MVAr)
3rd harmonic [V] measured at
the open delta VT at the
generator leads via the DRS
functions display window
(note: MS213.
MS113 only if this voltage has been
choosen)
the at the generator neutral
transformer via the DRS functions
display window
(note: MS213.
choosen)
3rd harmonic sum [V] (DRS internal
computed value/ shown in the DRS
(note: MS213 only)
"Bias" setting value
(temporary test setting)
(note: MS213 only)
"Operating Value" setting
Pos. Phase Sequ. Voltage
(note: MS113 only)
RelayTripped [Yes/No]


2. Test (50% Nominal Power)
(note: MS213.
choosen)
display window
(note: MS213.
choosen)
(note: MS213 only)
(note: MS213 only)
(note: MS113 only)


3. Test (100% Nominal Power)
(note: MS213.
choosen)
display window
(note: MS213.
choosen)
(note: MS213 only)
(note: MS213 only)
(note: MS113 only)


4. Test (Max. Overexcitation)
(note: MS213.
choosen)
display window
(note: MS213.
choosen)
(note: MS213 only)
(note: MS213 only)
(note: MS113 only)


5. Test (Max. Underexcitation)
(note: MS213.
choosen)
display window
(note: MS213.
choosen)
(note: MS213 only)
(note: MS213 only)
(note: MS113 only)

Table Evaluation:
It is recommended to draw a diagram where the number of tests are entered in the X-axis.
rd
In the Y-axis the sum of the 3 harmonic is entered for each test.
Subsequently all earth fault test values are combined to form a graph and the same way all
open circuit- and/or on-load test values.
Result: 2 graphs which are representing all permissible generator operating conditions with
or without an earth fault.
Between the two graphs a straight line, with Y = constant, is positioned which should have a sufficient safety
margin from the curves. Finally this obtained Y-value is used as the function operating value setting.
Should it not be possible to find a line which is not crossing one of the curves then a solution
by altering the Bias Setting value could be obtained (MS213).
If still not successful the plausibility of the curves should be investigated. Especially the
VT grounding should be checked to ensure that there are no false readings due to earth
potential shifts.
In some particular cases it may happen that the generator characteristic is almost symmetrical
rd
which then will produce almost no or a too small 3 harmonic component.
Note:
The generator characteristic symmetry greatly depends on the manufacturing tolerances and therefore it is required
to determine protection settings for each generator by separate tests.


MT... VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION
18. MT... VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION
18.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MT . . . VT Supervision Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MT . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

VT supervision 2 phase 1103 MT212 - C2,M,L
Vector sum of the 2 phase voltage inputs
Only applicable for phase to neutral voltages
Note: No outputs to trip matrix
but common alarm annunciation is provided
VT Broken Conductor 3-phase 1142 MT300 C2,M
Phase-phase voltages are applied to the protection relay (3
wires). "Broken conductor" is detected by comparing the
changes of the NPS-voltage and the NPS-current.
The protective function will detect:
a) shortcircuited VT- winding (one of the phase-voltages is
zero)
b) VT broken wire (one of the three wires between VT
and DRS is interrupted)
VT supervision 3 phase, Y-connection 1101 MT312 - C2,M,L
Common VT supervision 3 phase. Y-connection 1107 MT315 - C2,M,L
Evaluates the voltage sum similar to the
VT supervision 3 phase Y-connection, however
with standard protective function outputs
VT supervision 3 phase, D-connection 1104 MT313 - C2,M,L
Evaluates the NPS voltage component
Inverse time VT supervision 3 phase, D-connection 1108 MT317 - C2,M,L
Evaluates the NPS voltage component similar to the
VT supervision 3 phase D-connection, however

18.2.1. VT Supervision 2 Phase
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MT212 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

VT supervision 2 phase 1103 MT212 - C2,M,L
Vector sum of the 2 phase voltage inputs
Only applicable for phase to neutral voltages
but common alarm annunciation is provided
Supervision of a 2 pole VT set on symmetry (voltage sum computation).
MT212
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system L1 (phase to neutral)
Voltage system L3 (phase to neutral)
Outputs
Red alarm LED 1st row: DRS fault
Note: VT fault
Setting Parameters
Operating time: 1 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps

Voltage sum (2 x Vo): In V
Note: "Voltage Sum" refers to the selection of either
phase to phase or phase to neutral voltages
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

18.2.2. VT Broken Conductor 3 Phase
VT Broken Conductor 3-phase 1142 MT300 C2,M

Phase-phase voltages are applied to the protection relay (3
wires). "Broken conductor" is detected by comparing the
changes of the NPS-voltage and the NPS-current.
The protective function will detect:
a) shortcircuited VT- winding (one of the phase-voltages is
zero)
b) VT broken wire (one or more of the three wires between
VT and DRS are interrupted)
Broken conductor supervision for 3-phase CT circuits (phase-phase connection) to detect

single-, two and three-phase interruptions with indication of the faulty phases.
Explication of set values:

U2/U1: Minimum ratio of NPS to PPS in voltage (phase-phase voltage) to start the function in case
of single phase interruption
I2/I1: Minimum ratio of NPS to PPS in current to inhibit the function
in case of single phase interruption
"Current Change": Minmum change in PPS of current to inhibit the function
in case of multiphase interruption
"Blocking Delay": Additional time lag of the functions blocking signal
"Phase Rotation": Selection of phase rotation
"Transf. Supervision": To be selected 'Yes', if the VT broken conductor detection should
indicate a CT/VT error with the general device supervision contacts
MT300
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system L1-L2 (phase to phase voltage)
Voltage system L2-L3 (phase to phase voltage)
Voltage system L3-L1 (phase to phase voltage)
Current L1 (phase L1)
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Red alarm LED 1st row: DRS fault
Note: subcategory "CT/VT error"
Note: "DRS fault" will be issued if set value "Transformer Supervision" is
choosen "Yes"
Setting Parameters

U2/U1: 0,05 0,90 p.U. in 0,01 p.U. - steps

Note: U2 Neg. Phase Sequ. System of 1.Harm. of
Phase-Phase-Voltages
Note U Pos. Phase Sequ. System of 1. Harm. of
Phase Phase Voltages
I2/I1: 0,05 0,60 p.U. in 0,01 p.U. - steps
Note: I2 Neg. Phase Sequ. System of 1.Harm. of
Phase Currents
Note: I1 Pos. Phase Sequ. System of 1.Harm. of
Phase Currents
Current Change: 0,10 1,00 p.U. in 0,05 p.U. - steps
Blocking Delay: 0,00 20,0 s in 0,1 s - steps
Phase Rotation: Right/ Left
Transformer Supervision: No/ Yes

U2/U: in p.U.
Note: U2 Neg. Phase Sequ. System of 1.Harm. of
Phase-Phase-Voltages
U Pos. Sequ. Phase System of 1. Harm. of Phase
Phase Voltages
I2/I1: in p.U.
Note: I2 Neg. PhaseSequ. System of 1.Harm. of
Phase Currents
Note: I Pos. Phase Sequ. System of 1.Harm. of
Phase Currents
Measuring
Reset ratio: Hysterese 2 5 %.
2% In resp. Un

18.2.3. VT Supervision 3 Phase, Y - Connection

VT supervision 3 phase, Y-connection 1101 MT312 - C2,M,L
Supervision of a 3 pole VT set with Y-connection for symmetry.

Computation of the voltage sum, i.e. 3 x phase to neutral voltage.
Applicable for phase to neutral voltages only.
MT312
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage phase L1
Voltage phase L2
Voltage phase L3
Outputs
st
Red alarm LED 1 row: DRS fault
Note: VT fault
Setting Parameters

Note: Voltage sum of phase to neural voltages
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

18.2.4. VT Supervision 3 Phase, Y - Connection, With Optional VT Fault LED Indication

Common VT supervision 3 phase. Y-connection 1107 MT315 - C2,M,L
Evaluates the voltage sum similar to the
VT supervision 3 phase Y-connection, however
VT supervision function evaluating the voltage sum of a 3 phase Y-connected VT set.

Computation of the voltage sum (3 x zero sequence voltage).
Applicable for phase to neutral voltages only.
Optional VT fault supervision LED indication.
MT315
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage phase L1
Voltage phase L2
Voltage phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
st
Red fault LED, 1 row: DRS fault (optional / see setting parameters "Fault Evaluation").
Note: VT fault.
Setting Parameters
Fault evaluation: Yes / No

Note: Voltage sum of phase to neutral voltages
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% Vn

18.2.5. VT Supervision 3 Phase, D - Connection

VT supervision 3 phase, D-connection 1104 MT313 - C2,M,L
Evaluates the NPS voltage component
VT supervision function 3 phase, D-connected VT set for symmetry.

Computation of the NPS voltage component.
Suitable for phase to phase voltages.
MT313
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Phase to phase voltage L1-L2
Outputs
st
Red fault LED, 1 row: DRS fault
Note: VT fault
Setting Parameters

NPS system of the phase to phase voltages: In V
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% Vn

18.2.6. Inverse Time VT Supervision 3 Phase, D Connection, With Optional VT Fault LED Indication

Inverse time VT supervision 3 phase, D-connection 1108 MT317 - C2,M,L
Evaluates the NPS voltage component similar to the
VT supervision 3 phase D-connection, however
Supervision of a 3 pole VT set with D-connection for symmetry.

Computation of the NPS voltage values.
Applicable for monitoring phase to phase voltages.
MT317
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Phase to phase voltage L1-L2
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
st
Red fault LED, 1 row: DRS fault (optional / see setting parameters "Fault Evaluation").
Note: VT fault.
Setting Parameters

NPS system of the phase to phase voltages: In V
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% Vn


18.3.1. MT212
R T + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A
+ - GND 1
2 5A DC OUT 01 2
3 I1 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
5 5A
6 I2 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A
OUT 04 8
11 5A
I4 9
12
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
MAIN 14 5A
11
TRANSF. 15 I5 OUT 06 12
16
17
18
1A
5A
I6 COMPACT2A OUT 07
13
14
15
19 1A
20 5A OUT 08 16
21 I7
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A
OUT 09 2
26 5A
I9 3
27 OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
UR X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U R-0 U1 9
IR 2 OUT 13 10
3
U R-T 11
U T-0 4 U2 OUT 14 12
UT 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
G 8 U4 OUT 16 16
GEN.
2~ 9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
3
TRANS-
SI02 Tx+
8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
LEGEND: 4 Tx- 9
10
OPTIONAL MODULE
OPTIONAL MODULE: 5 GND

6
UAKB

7 SI03 11
Transducer 2 DUCER 2 +5
RS422/485
8 Rx+ 12
Shaft Current
9 Rx- 13
Rotor E/F
10 GND 14
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
Tx+ 15
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 12 Tx- 16
UAKB- X9
FAULT IN09
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MT212 V.T. MONITORING 2.PH. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 243 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH: Wiring Diagram

18.3.2. MT312/ MT315
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3
24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
5 5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A
8 5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
MAIN 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
TRANSF. 12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
14
15
5A
I5
DRS- OUT 06
11
12
COMPACT2A OUT 07
16 1A
17 5A 13
18 I6 14
19 1A 15
20 5A
21 I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
I 10 5
29
OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. 3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
MT315 only! 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
LEGEND: 6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 2
TRANS-
SI02 8
Tx+
MOD-
BUS
Transducer 2 4 9
Tx-
OPTIONAL MODULE
Shaft Current 5 10
GND
Rotor E/F 6
UAKB
TRANS-
7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
RS422/485

9 13
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MT312 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR WIRING DIAGRAM

MT315 RESIDUAL VOLTAGE DETECTION WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 244 MT312 V. T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Wiring Diagram MT315 Residual Voltage Detection Wiring Diagram

18.3.3. MT313/ MT317
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A
+ - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
5 5A
6 I2 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
9 I3 7
MAIN 10 1A
OUT 04 8
TRANSF. 11 5A
I4 9
12
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A 13
16 1A
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A
I7 OUT 08 16
21
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A
OUT 09 2
26 5A
I9 3
27
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
MT317 only! 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
LEGEND: 6
OPTIONAL MODULE: 2
-UAKB Transducer 1 TRANS- 8
3 SI02 Tx+
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
Shaft Current 10
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND
Rotor E/F 6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03 11
+5
8
RS422/485

9 13
RS422/485 chain line data interface Rx-
10 14
MODBUS control system interface GND
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
Tx+ 15
12 Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB- X9
FAULT IN09
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MT313 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA WIRING DIAGRAM

MT317 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OV WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 245 MT313 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Wiring Diagram MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV Wiring Diagram


18.4.1. MT212
R T
L1 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
U R-0
U R-T U T-0
G
GEN. 2~
LEGEND
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
MT212 V.T. MONITORING 2.PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 246 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
| 2 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) | =

= | 2 * I0 | = | IR + IT |
NOTEBOOK
IR
CALCULATION OF (2 * I0) =
= | 2 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) | =
IT = | IR + IT |
| 2 * I0 | > (OPERATE VALUE)
t>
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
LED WILL START FLASHING
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT
OUT 31 X2 see WIRING
4
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5 DIAGRAM!
PROCESSING
MT211 C.T. MONITORING 2.PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 247 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MT211
Online simulation
via notebook
CALCULATION OF (2 * U0) = Geometric sum of the phase-voltage phasors:

= 2 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE) =
UR + UT = 2 * U0.
= UR + UT
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED The red LED in the first row at the frontplate of the
AT FRONTPLATE OF PROCESSING/ PROCESSING-module will start to flash in case of C.T.-
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
fault.
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT OUT31: RELAY FAIL..

OUT 31 X2 NOTE: This RELAY FAIL. -signal is the sum of many
4
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5 possible single signals. In case of C.T.-fault it is not a
fault of the PROTECTION RELAY itself, usually the fault
will be outside of the DRS-COMPACT. Please connect
the notebook to find out what there is the exact reason
for the alarm RELAY FAIL!
MT212 V.T. MONITORING 2.PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 248 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

R T + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A
2 5A + - GND 1
3 I1 OUT 01
DC 2
4 1A 24V...48VDC 3
5
6
5A
I2 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
7 1A 5
8
9
5A
I3 OUT 03 6
10 1A
7
11 5A OUT 04 8
12 I4
9
13 1A OUT 05 10
MAIN
TRANSF.
14
15
5A
I5
DRS- OUT 06
11
12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A 13
18 I6
19 1A
OUT 07 14
20 5A 15
21 I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A
23 5A
I8 X5
24
25 1A
1
26 5A OUT 09 2
27 I9
3
28 1A OUT 10 4
29 I 10 5
2 OUT 11 6
VR X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
IR VR 2 U1 2
OUT 13 10
V R-T VT 3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
VT 5 13
3
6 U3 OUT 15 14
15
G OUT 16 16
GEN.
2~
LEGEND:
1 ALL PHASES OK. 4 WRONG POLARITY: VT
2 WIRE BROKEN: VR 5 THIS VALUE IS USED FOR COMPARISON
3 WIRE BROKEN: VT WITH SET VALUE.
VOLTAGES PHASE-PHASE
NOTEBOOK DISPLAY:
PHASOR V0 =
VR VT 5 |2 * V0| = 2 *
DIAGRAM (VR + VT) / 2
|ZERO.SEQU.VOLT.|
1
VR
50V 50V 0V 0V
EXAMPLE no. 1
VT
2 VR=0
0V 50V 25V 50V
EXAMPLE no. 2
VT
3
VR
50V 0V 25V 50V
EXAMPLE no. 3
VT=0
4 VR VT
50V 50V 50V 100V
EXAMPLE no. 4
MT212 V.T. MONITORING 2.PH. EXAMPLE 1 = USING PHASE-GROUND VOLTAGES

Fig. 249 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Example 1= Using Phase Ground Voltages

R T + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3
24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
5 5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A
8 5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
MAIN 14 5A
I5 11
15
TRANSF. OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A 13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A
21 I7 OUT 08 16
22
23
1A
5A
X5
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
I 10 5
2 29 OUT 11 6
VR X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
IR V R-T 2 U1 2
OUT 13 10
3
V R-T 11
V T-R 4 U2 OUT 14 12
VT 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
15
G 3 OUT 16 16
GEN.
2~
LEGEND:
1 ALL PHASES OK. 4 WRONG POLARITY: VT-R
2 WIRE BROKEN: VR-T 5 THIS VALUE IS USED FOR COMPARISON
3 WIRE BROKEN: VT-R WITH SET VALUE.
NOTEBOOK DISPLAY:
PHASOR V0 =
VR-T VT-R 5 |2 * V0| = 2 *
DIAGRAM (VR-T + VT-R) / 2
|ZERO.SEQU.VOLT.|
1 VR-T VT-R
100V 100V 0V 0V
EXAMPLE no. 1
2
VR-T= 0 VT-R
0V 100V 50V 100V
EXAMPLE no. 2
3
VR-T VT-R = 0
100V 0V 50V 100V
EXAMPLE no. 3
4 VR-T VT-R
100V 100V 100V 200V
EXAMPLE no. 4
MT212 V.T. MONITORING 2.PH. EXAMPLE 2 = USING PHASE-PHASE VOLTAGES

Fig. 250 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Example 2= Using Phase Phase Voltages

18.4.2. MT312/ MT315
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
U L1
U L2
U L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
MT315 only!
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 60 Alarm
60 Trip
CPU+DSP - BOARD/ MT315 only!
PROCESSING
VERSION 2
MT312 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR LOGIC DIAGRAM

MT315 RESIDUAL VOLTAGE DETECTION LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 251 MT312 V.T.Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram MT315 Residual Voltage Detection Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
| 3 * U0 | =
3 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE) =
NOTEBOOK = RESIDUAL VOLTAGE
U L1
CALCULATION OF (3 * U0) =
U L2
= 3 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE):
U L3 = 3 * U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3
| 3 * U0 | > (OPERATE VALUE)
2
IF:
MT315
1
IF:
t>
MT312 >=1
2
IF: SET VALUE
IF: TRANSF.
MT315 SUPERVISION
= YES
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
OUT 31 X2
4 LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
PRESET
TEST
1
2
0
>=1
BIN. I/0 & ALARM
PRESET LED-
BL. MATRIX
1 & ALARM
0 BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
FUNCTION & t> TRIP 1
OUTPUT 0
1 & TRIP
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
1 APPLlES FOR
MT312 ONLY
PROCESSING 2 APPLlES FOR
MT315 ONLY
MT312 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

MT315 RESIDUAL VOLTAGE DETECTION LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 252 MT312 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram Processing MT315 Residual Voltage Detection
Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MT312, MT315
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MT312,
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation) MT315
1
0
CALCULATION OF (3 * U0) = Geometric voltage sum of all 3 phase-voltage phasors.

= 3 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE): Note: U0 = (UL1 + UL2 + UL3) / 3
= 3 * U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3
3 * U0 = (UL1 + UL2 + UL3) = Uneutral
IF: MT312: a) supervision LED at frontplate of PROCESSING (1. ROW / red

MT312
LED) will flash
b) RELAY FAIL. OUTPUT-contact OUT1
c) no TRIP-MATRIX, no LED-MATRIX
IF:
MT315: a) this function acts like a standard DRS-protective function:
MT315 LED-MATRIX, TRIP-MATRIX, TEST-INPUT, BLOCKING-INPUT,
FUNCTION OUTPUT.
b) trigger conditions: same as MT312
c) OPTIONALLY (see set value TRANSF. SUPERVISION):
supervision LED (same as MT312)
RELAY FAIL. OUT31 (same as MT312)
LED- the LED-indications LED- PROCESSING-
MATRIX DISPLAY
(row 2...14) of board
TRIP-
MATRIX

MT312 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

MT315 RESIDUAL VOLTAGE DETECTION LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 253 MT312 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MT315 Residual Voltage Detection
Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A OUT 01
I1 DC 2
3
24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03
8 5A
6
9 I3 7
MAIN 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
TRANSF. 12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A
I5 11
15
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10
29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3 6 U3 OUT 15 14
15
OUT 16 16
G
GEN. LEGEND:
3~
1 STATUS OK. 3 2 WIRES BROKEN 2 PHASES MISSING
2 1 WIRE BROKEN DISPLAY SHOWS: 4 WRONG SEQUENCE OF PHASES
3 1 PHASE MISSING 3 * U0 = 57,7V. 5 THIS VALUE IS USED FOR COMPARISON
WITH SET VALUE.
VOLTAGES PHASE-GROUND
NOTEBOOK 5
PHASOR |UL1-0 + UL2-0 +
UL1-0 UL2-0 UL3-0 DISPLAY:
DIAGRAM UL3-0| / 3 = |U0|
3 * U0
UL1-0
1
57,7V 57,7V 57,7V 0V 0V
EXAMPLE no. 1
UL3-0 UL2-0
UL1-0
2
57,7V 57,7V 0V 57,7V / 3 57,7V
EXAMPLE no. 2
UL2-0
3
UL1-0
57,7V 0V 0V 57,7V / 3 57,7V
EXAMPLE no. 3
4
UL1-0 UL3-0
57,7V 57,7V 57,7V 173,2V / 3 173,2V
EXAMPLE no. 4
UL2-0
MT312 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR EXAMPLE

MT315 RESIDUAL VOLTAGE DETECTION
Fig. 254 MT312 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star MT315 Residual Voltage Detection } Example

18.4.3. MT313/ MT317
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
U L1L2
U L2L3
U L3L1
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
MT317 only!
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 60 Alarm
60 Trip
PROCESSING
VERSION 2
MT313 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA LOGIC DIAGRAM

MT317 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OV LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 255 MT313 V.T.Monitoring 3-PH.Delta Logic Diagram MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
|U2| =
= (NEG. PHASE SEQU. VOLT.) =
NOTEBOOK = NPS-VOLTAGE
U L1L2 CALCULATION OF
U L2L3 NEG. PHASE SEQU. VOLT.:
= |UL1L2 + a.UL2L3 + a.UL3L1| / 3 =
U L3L1
= |U2|
|U2| > (OPERATE VALUE)
2
IF:
MT317
1
IF:
t>
MT313 >=1
2
IF: SET VALUE
IF: TRANSF.
MT317 SUPERVISION
= YES
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING/
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
OUT 31 X2
4 LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
PRESET
TEST
1 2
0
>=1
BIN. I/0 & ALARM
PRESET LED-
BL. MATRIX
1 & ALARM
0 BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
OUTPUT 0
1 & TRIP
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
1 APPLlES FOR
MT313 ONLY
2 APPLlES FOR
MT317 ONLY
MT313 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

MT317 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OV LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 256 MT313 V. T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram Processing MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALCULATION OF Geometric voltage sum of all the voltage phasors.

NEG. PHASE SEQU. VOLT.: Result: (UL1L2 + a.UL2L3 + a.UL3L1) / 3 =
= |UL1L2 + a.UL2L3 + a.UL3L1| / 3 =
= |U2|
= (NEG. PHASE SEQU. VOLT. of PH-PH-VOLTAGES)

MT313
LED) will flash
b) RELAY FAIL. OUTPUT-contact OUT31 will close
IF:
FUNCTION OUTPUT.
MATRIX DISPLAY
TRIP-
MATRIX

MT313 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

MT317 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OV LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 257 MT313 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV

+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3
24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7 1A
8 5A
OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
MAIN 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
TRANSF. 12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A
I5 11
15
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A
21 I7 OUT 08 16
22
23
1A
5A
X5
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A
27 I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
I 10 5
29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
3 OUT 12 8
1
9
U L1L2 2 U1 2
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
15
OUT 16 16
G
GEN. LEGEND:
3~
1 ALL PHASES OK. 4 WRONG SEQUENCE OF PHASES
2 Vphase-phase (= VL1L2) IS MISSING. 5 THIS VALUE IS USED FOR COMPARISON
3 1 WIRE BROKEN (EXT. WIRE GOING TO X8/1) WITH SET VALUE.
V2 = NOTEBOOK DISPLAY:
PHASOR
VL1L2 VL2L3 VL3L1 (VL1L2 + a.VL2L3 + 5 |V2| =
DIAGRAM
a.VL3L1) / 3 |NEG.PH.SEQU.VOLT.|
1
VL3L1 VL1L2
100V 100V 100V 0V 0V
EXAMPLE no. 1
VL2L3
2
VL3L1 VL1L2
0V 100V 100V =0 33,3V 33,3V
EXAMPLE no. 2
VL2L3
3
approx. approx. VL3L1 VL1L2
100V 50V 50V
EXAMPLE no. 3 50V 50V
VL2L3
4 VL3L1 VL2L3
100V 100V 100V 100V 100V
EXAMPLE no. 4
VL1L2
MT313 V.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA EXAMPLE

MT317 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OV
Fig. 258 MT313 V.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta MT317 Neg. Phase Sequ. OV } Example

18.5. FUNCTION
18.5.1. General Basics MT212/ MT312/ MT315/ MT313/ MT317
VT supervision functions are applied for the internal DRS monitoring features to check the VT
external plant circuits but also to verify the correct internal signal processing.
Monitoring is based on the fact that in high voltage systems under normal operating conditions
there are no negative phase sequence- or zero sequence components except for the duration
of system disturbances or faults.
All function analogue signals are sampled 12 times each cycle. Via Fourier Analysis (DSP) the
st
corresponding vectors (value and phase angle) for the 1 harmonic are determined.
At each sample interval the CPU evaluates the zero sequence- or NPS system and compares
whether the initiating conditions are above the operating setting. If the initiating conditions are
exceeding the set values during 24 consecutive samples (= 2 cycles) then the time delay is started. After the
configured time delay expiry the fault alarm is given and in the DRS fault
status the condition CT/VT Fault entered.
VT Supervision.
Differences Between the Various Functions.
MT212 evaluates: 2 x zero sequence voltage = 1 x neutral voltage

= vector voltage sum.
Note: For 2 phase systems. Use of phase voltages.
MT312 evaluates: 3 x zero sequence voltage = 1 x neutral voltage

= vector voltage sum.
Note: For 3 phase systems. Only for phase to neutral voltages (not for
phase to phase voltages).
MT315: As MT312, however with additional outputs to the software LED matrix
and the software trip matrix. Can be therefore be applied just like
a normal protective function.
A VT supervision function as per MT312 can optionally be provided
(red status LED in the first row) und may be enabled or disabled via
the Setting Parameters window.
MT313 evaluates: 1 x NPS system voltage = |U2| = |UL1L2 + a.UL2L3 + a.UL3L1| / 3.

Note: For 3 phase systems suitable with phase to phase voltages.
Please note: In case of phase to phase voltages the voltage sum
will always remain zero. An unbalanced system can therefore only
be detected via the NPS system computation.
MT317: As MT331, however with additional outputs to the software LED matrix
and the software trip matrix. Can be therefore be applied just like
a normal protective function.
A VT supervision function as per MT313 can optionally be provided
(red status LED in the first row) und may be enabled or disabled via
the Setting Parameters window.

18.5.2. MT300
18.5.2.1. General Basics:
VT Broken Conductor function MT300 is applied for the internal DRS monitoring features to check the VT external
plant circuits (broken conductor ) and the VT condition (shortcircuited
windings ).
Please mind that in case of broken wires there is possibility of malfunction of some protective functions (for
example impedance protection or power measurement). Of course the cause for a missing voltage can also be a
blown fuse or a tripped mcb.
The "trip" output of the MT300 can be used to block other sensible protective functions to avoid an emergency
trip. Usually the power station will then be shut down by standard procedures (depends on back-up configuration
etc).
The function MT300 is a broken-wire supervision for 3-phase VT-circuits which are connected by phase-phase
voltage wiring to the protective relay (3 wires). It detects one-, two- and threephase interruptions of the voltage
wiring circuits.
MT300 calculates the following actual values:
UPPS Positive Sequence System of Phase-Phase-Voltage

UNPS Negative Sequence System of Phase-Phase-Voltage
IPPS Positive Sequence System of Phase-Current
INPS Negative Sequence System of Phase-Current
The relay decides for the following faulty conditions of the VT-circuit:
a.
Detection of Single phase broken wire, if:
UPPS > (0,1 x Unom)

IPPS > (0,1 x Inom)
(INPS / IPPS) < (set value (INPS / IPPS))
(UNPS / UPPS) (set value (UNPS / UPPS))
Please note:
In case of single phase broken wire the symmetry of the voltages will be disordered, but not the symmetry
of the currents. During a real fault in the power station (primary fault) there will be a NPS system coming
up for both (voltage and current) systems.
b.
Detection of 2- or 3-phase broken wire, if:
UPPS < (0,1 x Unom)

UNPS < (0,1 x Unom)
(Current Change of IPPS) < (set value (Current Change))
Blocking Input "BLK" = "0" (note: for example: if GCB is off then BLK = "1"; additionally
there also exists an automatic internal blocking of the function if at the
same time the voltages (U1) and currents (I1) equal zero.
Please note:
It does not make a difference for the protective function whether there is a 2- or 3-phase broken wire
condition present. As already mentioned above we are using a phase-phase connection of the 3-phase VT.
Therefore even in case of only 2-wires broken the relay will not see any input voltage.
The principle of detection of 2- (or 3-) phase wire faults is different from the single wire fault algorithm.

The function supervises the change of the current system. If the voltages drop to zero but the currents
dont change then there probably will be a broken wire condition. If the currents should go up (when the
voltages drop) then there will probably be some shortcircuit. As a consequence the function will be blocked
automatically in this case. Additionally it is recommended to use alarms of other protective functions which
are dependent on current measuring to block the MT300.
During standstill of the power plant there will be no voltage and no current. Accordingly there is another
automatic blocking applied in case the Positive Sequence Voltage and the Positive Sequence Current are
below 10% of their nominal value.
Blocking:
The function is blocked if:
a)
Internal or external blocking signal
b)
At least one of the phase currents exceed 150% of relay nominal current
c)
All phase currents are below the "release" value of 10% relay nominal current
(valid for single phase faults of the VT only)
Set Value "Blocking Delay":

defines how long a (internal or external) blocking of the function is extended.
Set Value "Transformer Supervision":

a)
st
"No" the protective function does not initiate the alarm "Device Fault" (1 row/
red LED).
Note: the "trip" output is not affected by this parameter.
b)
"Yes" the alarm "Device Fault" is activated in case of "Broken Wire"
condition.

18.5.2.2. Function Test
Practical example (using an Omicron CMC256, or similar):
a)
Omicron Settings:
V L1-E ... 57,7 V
V L2-E ... 57,7 V
V L3-E ... 57,7 V
I L1 ... 1 A
I L2 ... 1 A
I L3 ... 1 A
b)
Connect phase-phase voltages and phase currents to the protection relay.
The "Measured Value Window" of the DRS Protective Relay will show:
V L1-L2 ... 100 V
V L2-L2 ... 100 V
V L3-L1 ... 100 V
I L1 ... 1 A
I L2 ... 1 A
I L3 ... 1 A
c)
The "Prot. Function Measured Values Window" of the MT300 Prot. Function will show the internal
calculated values:
V inv / V = 0 p.u.
I inv / I = 0 p.u.
NPS Voltage =0V
PPS Voltage = 100 V
NPS Current =0A
PPS Current =1A
d)
The next step is to shortcircuit the L1-winding of the VT. This is done by setting the V L1-E of the Omicron
to zero (the wiring is not touched). This is exactly the situation of a shorcircuited VT-winding. The Omicron
settings now look like:
V L1-E ... 0 V
V L2-E ... 57,7 V
V L3-E ... 57,7 V
I L1 ... 1 A
I L2 ... 1 A
I L3 ... 1 A
e)
V L1-L2 ... 57,5 V
V L2-L2 ... 100 V
V L3-L1 ... 57,5 V
I L1 ... 1 A
I L2 ... 1 A
I L3 ... 1 A
f)
calculated values:
V inv / V = 0,5 p.u.
I inv / I = 0 p.u.

NPS Voltage = 33,3 V

PPS Voltage = 66,6 V
NPS Current =0A
PPS Current =1A
g)
The next feature to be tested will be the VT Broken Conductor Detection.
We adjust the following Omicron settings (standard values):
V L1-E ... 57,7 V
V L2-E ... 57,7 V
V L3-E ... 57,7 V
I L1 ... 1 A
I L2 ... 1 A
I L3 ... 1 A
h)
Now the wire of phase L1 going to the protection relay is interrupted ("broken conductor").
V L1-L2 ... 50 V
V L2-L2 ... 100 V
V L3-L1 ... 50 V
I L1 ... 1 A
I L2 ... 1 A
I L3 ... 1 A
i)
calculated values:
V inv / V = 1 p.u.
I inv / I = 0 p.u.
NPS Voltage = 50 V
PPS Voltage = 50 V
NPS Current =0A
PPS Current =1A
j)
Now we check the correct calculation of the NPS current:
We adjust the following Omicron settings:
V L1-E ... 57,7 V
V L2-E ... 57,7 V
V L3-E ... 57,7 V
I L1 ... 0 A
I L2 ... 1 A
I L3 ... 1 A
k)
V L1-L2 ... 100 V
V L2-L2 ... 100 V
V L3-L1 ... 100 V
I L1 ... 0 A
I L2 ... 1 A
I L3 ... 1 A
l)
calculated values:
V inv / V = 0 p.u.

I inv / I = 0,5 p.u.

NPS Voltage =0V
PPS Voltage = 100 V
NPS Current = 0,33 A
PPS Current = 0,66 A
Discussion of SETTINGS for the above specified MT300 tests:
a)
Setting: V2/V1 < 1 p.u. Broken Conductor will be detected (see above/ example (g)).
b)
Setting: V2/V1 < 0,5 p.u. Shortcircuit of VT winding will be detected ( see above/
example (d));
Broken Conductor will be detected (see above/ example (g)).

18.6. COMMISSIONING

Pre-Commissioning:
The parameters for the operating value and time delay have to be set to the designed values.
For the "VT Test 3 Phase, " function also the corresponding phase rotation has to be configured.
Single phase inject 1.1 times the voltage operating value into the system. By correct function response after the set
time delay following annunciations occur.
Fault alarm category 1

Fault indication, i.e. red "Fault" LED flashing
With protective functions MT315 and MT317 additionally also the configured LEDs
and outputs are activated.
From the User program via the menu options "System" "DRS Fault Status" read out the
entry " CT/VT Fault".
Switch off the injected test voltage and reset the fault alarm operating the blue reset key until
the yellow and red LED row indication is altering alternatively.
During the primary tests the correct function operation of the protective scheme during normal
system conditions. For checking the VT supervisions it is recommended to carry out open circuit
off-load tests in order to prevent any other protective functions from operating when temporary opening a VT circuit
to verify the supervision function.
To perform the tests please proceed as follows:

Block any protective function trips which may occur when opening a VT circuit.
When off-load open one phase of the VT set being supervised at the cubicle
terminals until the system fault indication appears.
From the User program via the menu options "System" "DRS Fault Status" read
out the entry " CT/VT Fault".
Restore the VT connection and reset the fault alarm.
After completion of the tests disable blocking of any protective function trip outputs
and perform shut-down the generator.


MT... CT SUPERVISION
19. MT... CT SUPERVISION
19.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MT . . . CT Supervision Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MT . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

CT Broken Conductor 2-phase. 1141 MT210 - C2,M
Broken conductor supervision for 2-phase CT circuits to detect
single phase interruption with indication of the faulty phase.
"Broken Conductor": One of the phase currents is above the
"Current Interlock"-set value and the other one is
below 2,5% of nominal current.
CT supervision 2 phase. 1102 MT211 - C2,M,L
Current sum evaluation.
Note: No outputs to trip matrix.
Only common fault alarm.
CT Broken Connector 3-phase. 1140 MT310 - C2,M
Broken conductor supervision for 3-phase CT circuits to detect
single and two phase interruptions with indication of the faulty
phases.
"Broken Conductor": At least one of the phase currents is above
the "Current Interlock"-set value and one or two of the phase
currents are below 2,5% of nominal current.
CT supervision 3 phase, Y-connection. 1100 MT311 - C2,M,L
Note: No outputs to trip matrix.
Only common fault alarm.
CT supervision 3 phase, D-connection. 1105 MT314 - C2,M
NPS current evaluation.
Caution: But phase currents are applied!
This system is to be used when only 2 phase currents are
rd
measured directly and the 3 one is determined by external
wiring connection whereby the current sum
will always amount to zero

Current sum evaluation 3 phase. 1106 MT316 - C2,M,L

Computation of the current sum similar to
CT supervision 3 phase, Y-connection however
with outputs like a normal protective function
Inverse time CT supervision 3 phase. 1109 MT318 - C2,M
NPS current evaluation similar to
CT supervision 3 phase, D-connection (MT314), however
with outputs like a normal protective function.
Note: Input matrix should be configured:
Phase L1-L2
Phase L2-L3
Phase L3-L1
Inverse time CT supervision 3 phase. 2105 MT31C - L
CT supervision 3 phase, D-connection (MT314), however
with outputs like a normal protective function.
Phase L1-L2
Phase L2-L3
Phase L3-L1
Function to be used with device: Standard LIGHT.

19.2.1. CT Supervision 2 Phase

CT supervision 2 phase 1102 MT211 - C2,M,L
Current sum evaluation
Only common fault alarm
CT supervision of a 2 pole CT set for symmetry (current sum evaluation).
MT211
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L3
Outputs
st
Red fault LED, 1 row : DRS Fault
Note: CT fault
Setting parameters
Operating value: 0.10 ... 0.50 xIn in 0.01 xIn steps

Current sum (2 x Io): In A
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

19.2.2. CT Supervision 3 Phase, Y - Connection

CT supervision 3 phase, Y-connection 1100 MT311 - C2,M,L
Only common fault alarm
CT supervision of a 3 pole CT set for symmetry, current sum evaluation, Y - connection.

Computation of the current sum (3 x zero sequence current).
MT311
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Outputs
st
Note: CT fault
Setting parameters

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

19.2.3. Current Sum Evaluation 3 Phase, Y Connection with Optional CT Supervision

Current sum evaluation 3 phase 1106 MT316 - C2,M,L
Computation of the current sum similar to
CT supervision 3 phase, Y-connection however
Current sum evaluation of a 3 pole CT set for symmetry (3 x zero sequence current),
Y connection with optional CT supervision (Fault LED Indication).
MT314
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
st
Red fault LED, 1 row : DRS Fault (optional / see setting parameters "Fault Evaluation").
Note: CT fault.
Setting parameters

Note: Current sum of phase currents
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

19.2.4. CT Supervision 3 Phase, D - Connection

CT supervision 3 phase, D-connection 1105 MT314 - C2,M,L
NPS current evaluation
This system is to be used when only 2 phase currents are
rd
measured directly and the 3 one is determined by external
wiring connection whereby the current sum
will always amount to zero
CT supervision of a 3 pole CT set for symmetry, D - connection.

Computation of the NPS current system.
MT314
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Note: This phase current is not directly measured but obtained by
a suitable external connection method (L3 = -L1-L2 )
Outputs
st
Note: CT fault
Setting parameters

NPS current system: In A
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In

19.2.5. Inverse Time CT Supervision 3 Phase, D Connection with Optional LED Fault Indication

Inverse time CT supervision 3 phase 1109 MT318 - C2,M,L
CT supervision 3 phase, D-connection however
Phase L1-L2
Phase L2-L3
Phase L3-L1
Caution: But phase currents may be applied too in special
utilization:
This function to be used if there are measured just 2 of 3
phases, while the 3rd phase is hardware-calculated by
proper wiring. As a consequence the current sum always
equals zero.
Inverse time current evaluation of a 3 pole CT set for symmetry, D - connection.

Also to be used for phase currents if there are only measured 2 phase currents in a 3 phase system
(explanation: see above!).
Computation of the NPS current system and optional LED fault indication.
MT318
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Note: This phase current is not directly measured but obtained by
a suitable external connection method (L3 = -L1-L2 )
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
st
Red fault LED, 1 row : DRS Fault (optional / see setting parameters "Fault Evaluation")
Note: CT fault
Setting parameters


NPS current system: In A
Note: The NPS current system of the phase
rd
currents when the 3 phase is evaluated by
external connection,
respectively the NPS system of the phase current
inputs
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% In


19.3.1. MT211
R T + - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
IR 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC OUT 02 4
IT 5
6
5A
I2 DC
5
7 1A OUT 03
8 5A
6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
MAIN 14 5A 11
15 I5
TRANSF. OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A
17 5A
13
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
IR I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
IT U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U3 OUT 15 14
G 6
15
7
GEN. 2~ OUT 16 16
8 U4
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
LEGEND: -
X7
OPTIONAL MODULE: 6
Transducer 2 2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
BUS
4 9
Rotor E/F Tx-
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
UAKB
TRANS-
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
10 Rx-
GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006-- FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MT211 C.T. MONITORING 2.PH. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 259 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Wiring Diagram

19.3.2. MT311/ MT316
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 OUT 01
2 5A
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2
5 5A
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3
8 5A
9 I3 7
MAIN 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
TRANSF. 12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
MT316 only! 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
OPTIONAL MODULE: TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
DUCER 1
-UAKB Transducer 1
BUS
4 Tx- 9
Transducer 2
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Shaft Current 6
UAKB
TRANS-
Rotor E/F 7 SI03
11
DUCER 2 +5
8
RS422/485

10 Rx-
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
MODBUS control system interface Tx+
12 16
13 Tx-
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MT311 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR WIRING DIAGRAM

MT316 RESIDUAL CURRENT DETECTION WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 260 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Wiring Diagram MT316 Residual Current Detection Wiring Diagram

19.3.3. MT314/ MT318
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2 DC
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
MAIN 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
TRANSF. 12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
I5
15 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. 3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
MT318 only! 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
OPTIONAL MODULE: TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
-UAKB Transducer 1 4 9
Tx-
OPTIONAL MODULE
Shaft Current 6
UAKB
TRANS-
Rotor E/F 7 DUCER 2
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485

9 13
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MT314 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA WIRING DIAGRAM

MT318 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OC WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 261 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Wiring Diagram MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC Wiring Diagram


19.4.1. MT211
R T
L1 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
IR
IT
G
GEN. 2~
LEGEND

VERSION 2
MT211 C.T. MONITORING 2.PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 262 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
2 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE) =

= | 2 * U0 | = | UR + UT |
NOTEBOOK
UR
CALCULATION OF (2 * U0) =
= 2 * (ZERO SEQU. VOLTAGE) =
UT = UR + UT
| 2 * U0 | > (OPERATE VALUE)
t>
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
OUT 31 X2 see WIRING
4
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5 DIAGRAM!
PROCESSING
MT212 V.T. MONITORING 2.PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 263 MT212 V.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MT211
Online simulation
via notebook
Geometric sum of the current phasors:
= | 2 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) | = IR + IT = 2 * I0.
= | IR + IT |
ACTIVATE SUPERVISION-LED The red LED in the first row at the frontplate of the
AT FRONTPLATE OF PROCESSING/ PROCESSING-module will start to flash in case of C.T.-
LOCATED: 1. ROW fault.
COLOUR: RED
ACTIVATE OUTPUT-CONTACT OUT31: RELAY FAIL..

OUT 31 X2 NOTE: This RELAY FAIL. -signal is the sum of many
4
RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5 possible single signals. In case of C.T.-fault it is not a
fault of the PROTECTION RELAY itself, usually the fault
will be outside of the DRS COMPACT. Please connect
the notebook to find out what alone is the exact reason
for the alarm RELAY FAIL!
MT211 C.T. MONITORING 2.PH. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 264 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

+ - BATT.
R T
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
IR 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
IT 5
6
5A
I2 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
9 I3 7
MAIN 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A 9
TRANSF. 12 I4
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A 13
16 1A
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A
I7 OUT 08 16
21
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
IR 26
27
5A
I9 3
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10
IT
LEGEND:
1 ALL PHASES OK.
G 2 PHASE IR BROKEN
GEN. 2~ 3 PHASE IT BROKEN
4 IT WRONG POLARITY
5 THIS VALUE TO BE COMPARED WITH SET VALUE
PHASE CURRENTS
NOTEBOOK 5
measured: measured: PHASOR I0 = DISPLAY:
IR IT DIAGRAM (IR + IT) / 2 |2 * I0| = |ZERO
SEQU.CURR.|
IR
1
1A 1A 0A 0A
EXAMPLE no. 1
IT
2
IR = 0
0A 1A 0,5A 1A
EXAMPLE no. 2
IT
4 IR
1A 0A 0,5A 1A
EXAMPLE no. 3
IT = 0
IR IT
5
1A 1A 1A 2A
EXAMPLE no. 4
MT211 C.T. MONITORING 2.PH. EXAMPLE

Fig. 265 MT211 C.T. Monitoring 2.PH. Example

19.4.2. MT311/ MT316
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
MT316 only!
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 60 Alarm
60 Trip
PROCESSING
VERSION 2
MT311 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR LOGIC DIAGRAM

MT316 RESIDUAL CURRENT DETECTION LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 266 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH.Star Logic Diagram MT316 Residual Current Detection Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
= |3 * I0 | =
3 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) =
RESIDUAL CURRENT
NOTEBOOK
I L1
I L2
= 3 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT)
I L3 = 3 * I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
| 3 * I0 | > (OPERATE VALUE)

IF:
MT316

IF:
t>
MT311 >=1

IF: SET VALUE
IF: TRANSF.
MT316 SUPERVISION
= YES
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
OUT 31 X2
4 LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
PRESET
TEST
1

0
>=1
BIN. I/0 & ALARM
PRESET LED-
BL. MATRIX
1 & ALARM
0 BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
OUTPUT 0
1 & TRIP
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
APPLlES FOR
MT311 ONLY
APPLlES FOR
MT316 ONLY
MT311 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

MT316 RESIDUAL CURRENT DETECTION LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 267 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram Processing MT316 Residual Current Detection

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALCULATION OF (3 * I0) = Geometric current sum of all 3 phase-current phasors.

= 3 * (ZERO SEQU. CURRENT) Note: I0 = (IL1 + IL2 + IL3) / 3
= 3 * I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
3 * I0 = (IL1 + IL2 + IL3 ( = Ineutral)

MT311
LED) will flash
IF:
FUNCTION OUTPUT.
MATRIX DISPLAY
TRIP-
MATRIX

MT311 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

MT316 RESIDUAL CURRENT DETECTION LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 268 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MT316 Residual Current Detection

+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 OUT 01
2 5A
I1 DC 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2
5 5A
6 I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3
8 5A
9 I3 7
MAIN 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
TRANSF. 12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3
G U2 OUT 14
11
GEN. 4 12
3~ 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
PHASE CURRENTS
|I0| = NOTEB. DISPLAY:

PHASOR
IL1 IL2 IL3 (IL1 + IL2 |3 * I0| = 3 * |ZERO.
DIAGRAM
+ IL3) / 3 SEQU.CURR.|
IL1
1
1A 1A 1A 0A 0A
EXAMPLE no. 1
IL3 IL2
2
IL1 = 0
0A 1A 1A 0,33A 1A
EXAMPLE no. 2
IL3 IL2
3
IL1 = IL2 = 0
0A 0A 1A 0,33A 1A
EXAMPLE no. 3
IL3
IL1
4
1A 1A 1A 0A 0A
EXAMPLE no. 4
IL2 IL3
LEGEND:
1 ALL PHASES OK. 3 PHASES IL1, IL2 BROKEN
2 PHASE IL1 BROKEN 4 WRONG SEQU. OF CURRENT PHASES (NOT DETECTED BY I0-METHOD)
MT311 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. STAR

MT316 RESIDUAL CURRENT DETECTION EXAMPLE
Fig. 269 MT311 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Star MT316 Residual Current Detection } Example

19.4.3. MT314/ MT318
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
I L1
1
I L2
- (I L1 + I L2)
2
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
MT318 only!
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
1 EXAMPLE SHOWN FOR

C.T. (L1), C.T. (L2).
Note: C.T. (L3) not available.
2 IL3 is calculated by adding

(IL1 + IL2) and inversing the sign:
TRIP
IL3 = - (IL1 + IL2) COMMANDS
3 DELTA: The meaning of DELTA is that I0 OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
(ZERO SEQU. CURR.) equals 0 because of
ALARM
the calculation method of IL3.
CONTACTS
60 Alarm
LEGEND: 60 Trip
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY MT318 only!

COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS- COMPACT2A

VERSION 2
MT314 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA LOGIC DIAGRAM

MT318 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OC LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 270 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
(NEG. PHASE SEQU. CURRENT)

= | I2 |
NOTEBOOK
I L1 CALCULATION OF I2 =
I L2 = (NEG.PHASE SEQU. CURR.)
= (IL1 + a2.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3
I L3
Note: a = e j.2 / 3
| I2 | > (OPERATE VALUE)
2
IF:
MT318
1
IF:
t>
MT314 >=1
2
IF: SET VALUE
IF: TRANSF.
MT318 SUPERVISION
= YES
AT FRONTPLATE OF
PROCESSING /
LOCATED: 1. ROW
COLOUR: RED
OUT 31 X2
4 LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
PRESET
TEST
1 1
0
>=1
BIN. I/0 & ALARM
PRESET LED-
BL. MATRIX
1 & ALARM
0 BIN. I/0
PRESET
>=1
OUTPUT 0
1 & TRIP
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
1 APPLlES FOR
MT314 ONLY
2 APPLlES FOR
MT318 ONLY
MT314 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

MT318 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING
Fig. 271 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram Processing MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC

LEGEND PROCESSING
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
CALCULATION OF I2 = Geometric sum of the phasors:

= (NEG.PHASE SEQU. CURR.) (IL1 + a2.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3 = I2
= (IL1 + a2.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3 Note: a = e j.2 / 3
Note: a = e j.2/ 3
Explanation: The I0-current (zero sequence current) must not be used for
detection of c.t.-fault because the (originally) missing phase current is
calculated by using the formula: I0 = 0.

MT314
LED) will flash
IF:
FUNCTION OUTPUT.
MATRIX DISPLAY
TRIP-
MATRIX

MT314 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

MT318 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OC LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 272 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC

+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2 DC
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
MAIN 10 1A OUT 04 8
6 11 5A
TRANSF. 12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
29 I 10
LEGEND:
1 all phases Ok.
2 1 WIRE BROKEN (phase L2)
G
GEN. 3 1 WIRE BROKEN (phase L1)
3~ 4 WRONG SEQU. OF PHASES (L1-L3-L2)
5 L1 // L2
6 Note: IL3 is calculated by wiring!
PHASE CURRENTS
calculated NOTEBOOK
PHASOR |I2| =
measured: measured: by wiring: DISPLAY:
DIAGRAM (IL1 + a.IL2 +
IL1 IL2 6 I
L3 = |I2| = |NEG.PH.
6 a.IL3) / 3
- (IL1 + IL2) SEQU.CURR.|
IL1
1
1A 1A 1A 0A 0A
EXAMPLE no. 1
IL3 IL2
IL1
2
1A 0A 1A IL2 = 0 0,577A 0,577A
EXAMPLE no. 2
IL3
IL3
3
0A 1A 1A IL1 = 0 0,577A 0,577A
EXAMPLE no. 3
IL2
IL1
4
1A 1A 1A 1A 1A
EXAMPLE no. 4
IL2 IL3
IL2 IL1
5
1A 1A 2A 1A 1A
EXAMPLE no. 5
IL3
MT314 C.T. MONITORING 3-PH. DELTA EXAMPLE

MT318 NEG. PHASE SEQU. OC
Fig. 273 MT314 C.T. Monitoring 3-PH. Delta MT318 Neg. Phase Sequ. OC } Example

19.5. FUNCTION
General Basics:
CT supervision functions are applied for the internal DRS monitoring features to check the CT
external plant circuits but also to verify the correct internal signal processing.
Monitoring is based on the fact that in high voltage systems under normal operating conditions
there are no negative phase sequence- or zero sequence components except for the duration
of system disturbances or faults
All function analogue signals are sampled 12 times each cycle. Via Fourier Analysis (DSP) the
st
corresponding vectors (value and phase angle) for the 1 harmonic are determined.
At each sample interval the CPU evaluates the zero sequence- or NPS system and compares
whether the initiating conditions are above the operating setting. If the initiating conditions are
exceeding the set values during 24 consecutive samples (= 2 cycles) then the time delay is started. After the
configured time delay expiry the fault alarm is given and in the DRS fault
status the condition CT/VT Fault entered.
CT Supervision.
Differences Between the Various Functions.
MT211 evaluates: 2 x zero sequence current = 1 x neutral current.

Note: For 2 phase systems.
MT311 evaluates: 3 x zero sequence current = 1 x neutral current.

Note: For 3 phase systems.
MT314 evaluates: 1 x NPS current system.

Note: Suitable for 3 phase systems whereby only 2 direct current inputs
rd
are realised and the 3 phase current is obtained from the external wire
connections according to Kirchhoffs Law. In that case the current sum
will always be zero and unsymmetrical conditions can only be detected
by consideration of the NPS system.
MT316: As MT311, however provided with additional outputs to the software

LED matrix and the software trip matrix and can therefore be applied
just like a normal protective function.
The CT supervision function as per MT311 is optional, i.e. a red
status LED in the first row and can be enabled or disabled via the
setting parameters.
MT318: As MT314, however provided with additional outputs to the software

LED matrix and the software trip matrix and can therefore be applied
just like a normal protective function.
The CT supervision function as per MT314 is optional, i.e. a red
status LED in the first row and can be enabled or disabled via the
setting parameters.

19.5.1. MT211
The function is computing the vector current sum (= 2 x zero sequence current).
The window display for the Internal Measured Values also shows the current sum.
Example 1:
Current phase L1 = 1 A,
Current phase L3 = 0.
Display window shows 1 A (= current sum).
Example 2:
Current phase L3 = 1 A, 0 angle displacement with phase L1.
Display window shows 2 A (= current sum).
Example 3:
Current phase L1 = 1 A
Current phase L3 = 1 A, 180 angle displacement with phase L1.
Display window shows 0 (= current sum).
Note: Refers to normal operating conditions.

19.5.2. MT311
The function is computing the vector current sum (= 3 x zero sequence current).
The window display for the Internal Measured Values also shows the current sum.
Example 1:
Current phase L2 = 0
Display window shows 1 A (= current sum)
Example 2:
Current phase L2 = 1 A (120 electrical lagging L1)
Example 3:
Current phase L2 = 1 A (equal phase angle L1)
Example 4:
Display window shows 0 (= current sum)
Note: Refers to normal operating conditions

19.5.3. MT314
The function computes the NPS current system: I2 = (IL1 + a2.IL2 + a.IL3) / 3.
The window display for the Internal Measured Values also shows the NPS system.
Example 1:
Display window shows 0.33 A (= NPS system)
Example 2:
Current phase L3 = 0.
Example 3:
Example 4:
Display window shows 0 A (= NPS system)
Note: A purely zero sequence current system
Example 5:
Display window shows 1 A (= NPS system)
Note: A purely NPS current system
Example 6:
Current phase L3 = 1 A (240 electrical lagging L1).
Display window shows 0 (= NPS system).
Note: Normal operation being a purely positive sequence system
Application of This Function:
a)
Phase to phase currents of a 3 phase system (Note: Zero sequence system is always zero).
b)
Phase currents whereby only the CT current inputs of 2 phases are actually measured and the
3rd current is obtained by suitable external wire connections (Kirchhoffs Law). In this case the

zero sequence system remains always zero. A possible unsymmetrical condition can only be
detected via the NPS system.

19.5.4. MT316
Inputs and internal computation as MT311 however provided with additional outputs to the software LED matrix
and the software trip matrix and can therefore be applied just like a
normal protective function.
The CT supervision function as per MT311 is optional, i.e. a red status LED in the first row
and can be enabled or disabled via the setting parameters.
19.5.5. MT318
Inputs and internal computation as MT314 however provided with additional outputs to the software LED matrix
and the software trip matrix and can therefore be applied just like a
normal protective function.
The CT supervision function as per MT314 is optional, i.e. a red status LED in the first row
and can be enabled or disabled via the setting parameters.

19.6. COMMISSIONING

Pre-Commissioning:
The parameters for the operating value and time delay have to be set to the designed values.
For the "VT Test 3 Phase, " function also the corresponding phase rotation has to be configured.
Single phase inject 1.1 times the current operating value into the system. By correct function response after the set
time delay following annunciations occur.
Fault alarm category 1

Fault indication, i.e. red "Fault" LED flashing
With protective functions MT316 and MT318 additionally also the configured LEDs
and outputs are activated.
From the User program via the menu options "System" "DRS Fault Status" read out the
entry " CT/VT Fault".
Switch off the injected test current and reset the fault alarm by operating the blue reset key
until the yellow and red LED row indication is altering alternatively
During the primary tests the correct function operation of the protective scheme during normal
system conditions. For checking the CT supervisions it is recommended to carry out short circuit
off-load tests in order to prevent any other protective functions from operating when temporary opening a VT circuit
to verify the supervision function.
To perform the tests please proceed as follows:

Block any protective function trips which may occur when shorting a CT circuit.
Short out one phase of the CT set being supervised at the cubicle terminals until
the system fault indication appears.
From the User program via the menu options "System" "DRS Fault Status" read
out the entry " CT/VT Fault".
Remove the CT short connection and reset the fault alarm.
After completion of the tests disable blocking of any protective function trip outputs
and perform a shut-down of the generator.

MU... SYNCHRONISING CHECK / VOLTAGE BALANCE 1 /
VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20. MU... SYNCHRONISING CHECK / VOLTAGE BALANCE 1 /

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MU . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MU . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Synchronising check 1077 MU211 25 C2,M
Voltage balance 1 1069 MU611 60 C2,M

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.2.1. Synchronising Check
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MU211 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Synchronising check 1077 MU211 25 C2,M
Synchronizing check relay for network paralleling live and dead power systems.
MU211
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1
Voltage system 2
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip
Setting Parameters
Voltage Threshold: 5.0 80.0 V in 0.5 V steps
Differential Voltage: 2.0 20.0 in 0.5 V - steps
Operating Mode: Dead/ Live
Tyime Delay: 1.00 ... 30.00 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Accuracy: 2% Vn

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.2.2. Voltage Balance 1

3 phase, 1 stage voltage balance function with comparison features between two 3 phase VTs
indicating the faulty VT set.
MU611
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage system 1/ L1-L2, or:
Voltage system 1/ L1-0
Voltage system 1/ L1-L2, or:
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation L1
Trip L1
Initiation L2
Trip L2
Initiation L3
Trip L3
System 1 (Indication: VT system 1 faulty)
System 2 (Indication: VT system 1 faulty)
Setting Parameters
Operate value: 2 ... 50 V in 0.2 V steps
VT voltage: 10 ... 90 V in 1 V steps

Diff. Voltage Ph. A in [V]
Diff. Voltage Ph. B in [V]
Diff. Voltage Ph. C in [V]

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Accuracy: 2% Vn

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.2.3. Voltage Balance 2

3 phase, 1 stage voltage balance function with blocking features during unsymmetrical
load conditions.
MU312
Technical Data
Inputs
Current phase L2
Current phase L3
Voltage system 1-2
Voltage system 2-3
Voltage system 3-1
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters

Neg. Phase Sequ. Current: in [A]
Neg. Phase Sequ. Voltage: in [V]
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
Accuracy: 2% Vn

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.3. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

20.3.1. MU211
SYSTEM 1 + - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
+ - GND 1
1 1A
2 5A DC OUT 01 2
3 I1 24V...48VDC 3
4 1A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
5 5A
6 I2 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A 7
9 I3
10 1A
OUT 04 8
11 5A 9
12 I4 OUT 05 10
DRS- 11
13 1A
14 5A
15 I5 OUT 06 12
16
17
18
1A
5A
I6 COMPACT2A OUT 07
13
14
15
19 1A
20 5A OUT 08 16
21 I7
22 1A X5
23 5A 1
SYSTEM 2 24 I8
OUT 09 2
25 1A
L1 L2 L3 26 5A 3
27 I9 OUT 10 4
28 1A 5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
SYSTEM 1 1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L1L2 4 U2 OUT 14 12
SYSTEM 2 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
BLOCKING (opt.) + 4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
LEGEND: 3
TRANS-
SI02 Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
DUCER 1 9
OPTIONAL MODULE: 4 Tx-
10
OPTIONAL MODULE
-UAKB Transducer 1 5 GND

6
UAKB
Transducer 2 TRANS-
7 SI03
+5 11
Shaft Current DUCER 2
RS422/485
8 Rx+ 12
Rotor E/F 13
9 Rx-
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 10 GND 14
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
Tx+ 15
RS422/485 chain line data interface 12 Tx- 16
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB- X9
FAULT IN09
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MU211 SYNCHRO-CHECK WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 274 MU211 Synchro Check Wiring Diagram

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.3.2. MU611
L1 L2 L3
DRS- 1
P.T.1
MODULAR
U L1/P.T.1
U L2/P.T.1
U L3/P.T.1
A1X5/
01
U L1/P.T.1 02 U1
03
U L2/P.T.1 04 U2
05
P.T.2 U L3/P.T.1 06 U3
07
U L1/P.T.2 08 U4
09
U L2/P.T.2 10 U5
11
U L3/P.T.2 12 U6
U L1/P.T.2
U L2/P.T.2
U L3/P.T.2
A2X33/
+ b02 +
TEST (opt.) - d06 ^ - 1 IN 01
+ z02 +
BLOCKING (opt.) - d06 ^ - 1 IN 02
1 NOTE: MU611 USE AT DRS MODULAR ONLY!

DRS COMPACT NOT ENOUGH P.T.s.
MU611 VOLTAGE BALANCE 1 WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 275 MU611 Voltage Balance 1 Wiring Diagram

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.3.3. MU312
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. 3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
LEGEND: 2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
OPTIONAL MODULE:
BUS
4 Tx- 9
-UAKB Transducer 1
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Transducer 2 6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03
11
Rotor E/F 8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
9 13
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) Rx-
10 14
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface GND
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
RS422/485 chain line data interface 12 Tx+
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MU312 VOLTAGE BALANCE2 WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 276 MU312 Voltage Balance 2 Wiring Diagram

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2

20.4.1. MU211
DRS-
SYSTEM 1
COMPACT2A
L1 L2 L3
SYSTEM 1
U L1L2
PROCESSING
SYSTEM 2
L1 L2 L3 U L1L2
SYSTEM 2
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Trip

VERSION 2
MU211 SYNCHRO-CHECK LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 277 MU211 Synchro Check Logic Diagram

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
NOTEBOOK
|U| < (VOLT. THRESHOLD)
SET VALUE
>=1
OPERATING MODE = DEAD
SYSTEM1
U L1L2 |U| < (VOLT.THRESHOLD)
SYSTEM2
U L1L2 |U| > (VOLT. THRESHOLD)
SET VALUE OPERATING MODE

&
= LIVE or DEAD
|U| > (VOLT. THRESHOLD)
|USYSTEM1 - USYSTEM2| < >=1

(DIFFERENTIAL VOLTAGE)
TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
PRESET
1 SYNCHRO-CHECK = OK.
0
BLOCKING >=1
LED-
BIN. I/0 MATRIX
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 & t> PRESET
1
0
1
0
RELEASE
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1 & RELEASE TRIP-
0 MATRIX
PROCESSING
1 OUTPUT = RELEASE
(SYNCHRO CHECK = OK
CB ON = APPROVED)
MU211 SYNCHRO-CHECK LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 278 MU211 Synchro Check Logic Diagram / Processing

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE MODULE: MU211
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MU211
1
0
SET VALUE = DEAD One or both voltages have to be below the set value VOLTAGE THRESHOLD.
SET VALUE = LIVE Both voltages have to be above the set value VOLTAGE THRESHOLD and
the difference of the two voltages has to be smaller than the set value
DIFFERENTIAL VOLTAGE.

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED- PROCESSING
DISPLAY
(row 2...14)

TRIP-
MATRIX

RELEASE FUNCTION OUTPUT: RELEASE (INTERLOCK IS APPROVED)
MU211 SYNCHRO-CHECK LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 279 MU211 Synchro Check Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.4.2. MU611
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
MODULAR
PROCESSING
P.T.1
U L1/P.T.1
U L2/P.T.1
U L3/P.T.1
U1
U L1/P.T.1
U2
U L2/P.T.1
U3
P.T.2 U L3/P.T.1
U4
U L1/P.T.2
U5
U L2/P.T.2
U6
U L3/P.T.2
U L1/P.T.2
U L2/P.T.2
U L3/P.T.2
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL) TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
60 Alarm
MODULAR TYPE: DRS-MODULAR

VERSION 2
MU611 VOLTAGE BALANCE 1 LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 280 MU611 Voltage Balance 1 Logic Diagram

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NOTEBOOK DIFF.VOLTAGE PHASE A
DIFF.VOLTAGE PHASE B
DIFF.VOLTAGE PHASE C
U L1/P.T.1
| UL1/P.T.1 - UL1/P.T.2 | > OPERATE VALUE VOLTAGE BALANCE
ALARM L1
U L2/P.T.1 | UL1/P.T.1 | < VT SUPERVISION
SYSTEM1 MISSING
SYSTEM2 MISSING
| UL2/P.T.1 - UL2/P.T.2 | > OPERATE VALUE VOLTAGE BALANCE

ALARM L2
SYSTEM1 MISSING
| UL2/P.T.2 | < VT SUPERVISION
U L2/P.T.2 SYSTEM2 MISSING
U L3/P.T.2 | UL3/P.T.1 - UL3/P.T.2 | > OPERATE VALUE VOLTAGE BALANCE

ALARM L3
SYSTEM1 MISSING
SYSTEM2 MISSING
>=1
&
ALARM L1
PROCESSING
& ALARM L1
TRIP L1
t>
& TRIP L1
LED-
DISPLAY
ALARM L2
>=1
&
& ALARM L2
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TEST TRIP L2
1
0 t>
& LED-
TRIP L2
MATRIX
ALARM L3
>=1
& BIN. I/0
& ALARM L3
PRESET
BIN. I/0 1
PRESET 0
BL. TRIP L3
1
1
0 t>
& & TRIP L3
V.B. SYSTEM1 MISSING TRIP-

>=1 & MATRIX
& V.B. SYSTEM1 MISSING
FUNCTION
OUTPUT V.B. SYSTEM2 MISSING 1 NO ALARM IF
1 BOTH SYSTEMS
>=1 & MISSING
0 & V.B. SYSTEM2 MISSING
MU611 VOLTAGE BALANCE 1 LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 281 MU611 Voltage Balance 1 Logic Diagram Processing

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MU611
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MU611
1
| UL1/P.T.1 - UL1/P.T.2 | > OPERATE VALUE

Voltage difference between System 1 and System 2 phases L1
exceeds the Set Value.
Voltage UL1 of System 1 drops below the minimum value given
by the Set Value.
Note: ALARM is blocked if both Systems go low at the same time.
Programmable software-matrix for the LED-
LED- indications
MATRIX (row 2...14) of PROCESSING
LED-indications of
LED- PROCESSING
DISPLAY (row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

MU611 VOLTAGE BALANCE 1 LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 282 MU611 Voltage Balance 1 Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.4.3. MU312
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
U L1L2
PROCESSING
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND 60 Alarm
60 Trip

VERSION 2
MU312 VOLTAGE BALANCE2 LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 283 MU312 Voltage Balance 2 Logic Diagram

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
I2 NPS-CURRENT
NOTEBOOK U2 NPS-VOLTAGE
U L1L2
U L2L3 U2
NEG.PHASE |U2|>
U L3L1 SEQU.VOLT.
I L1
I L2 I2
NEG.PHASE |I2|<
I L3 SEQU.CURR.
U2 >
&
TEST LED-
I2 < DISPLAY
BIN. I/0
PRESET used for BLOCKING if I2 > set
1
0
ALARM
>=1 LED-
& MATRIX
BLOCKING & ALARM
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 t>
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TRIP 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MU312 VOLTAGE BALANCE2 LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 284 MU312 Voltage Balance 2 Logic Diagram / Processing

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
LEGEND PROCESSING
CPU+DSP - BOARD/ VERSION 2 // FIRMWARE-MODULE: MU312
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
Calculation of NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE U2

U2
NEG.PHASE
U2 = (UL1L2 + a . UL2L3 + a . UL3L1) / 3
SEQU.VOLT. NOTE: a = e j . 2 P / 3
I2
Calculation of NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE CURRENT I2
NEG.PHASE I2 = (IL1 + a . IL2 + a . IL3) / 3
SEQU.CURR.
NOTE: a = e j . 2 P / 3
|U2|> Check |U2|> set
Check |I2|< set
|I2|<
NOTE: (I2 > set) corresponds with BLOCKING condition

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED-
PROCESSING-board
DISPLAY
(row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

MU312 VOLTAGE BALANCE2 LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 285 MU312 Voltage Balance 2 Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.5. FUNCTION
20.5.1. MU211
Synchronising check function providing an interlock for paralleling live line and/or dead bus
power systems.
The function is computing the absolute voltage vector difference of the two VT voltages.
Principle:
A.
"Dead" Line And/Or Dead Bus Mode (see Set Value "Operating Mode"):
a)
Both input voltages have to be below the "Voltage Threshold" setting value.
b)
One input voltage has to be below the "Voltage Threshold" setting value.
c)
Both input voltages have to be above the "Voltage Threshold" setting value and the
absolute value of the differential voltage vector must be smaller than the
Differential Voltage setting.
B.
"Live" Line/Live Bus Mode (see Set Value "Operating Mode"):
a)
Both input voltages have to be above the "Voltage Threshold" setting value and the absolute value of the
differential voltage vector must be smaller than the Differential Voltage setting.
A. + B.
Note:
Therefore the "Voltage Threshold" setting value for either operating mode is to be
approached in opposite ways.

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.5.2. MU611
Voltage Balance 1
3 phase, 1 stage voltage balance function with comparison features between two 3 phase VTs
indicating the faulty VT set.
This function can either be applied for phase to phase or phase to neutral voltages.
Principle:
The function is evaluating the absolute voltage vector difference (amplitude difference and phase angle
are considered) for all 3 VT voltages and when the setting value of one phase is exceeded
a corresponding initiation signal output, and after the set time delay a trip output signal is given for each
individual phase.
Also a VT fault indication is provided for either of the two VT systems:
"System 1"
"System 2" ...
... Specification of the function outputs System 1 and System 2:
"System 1" means: The VT of Systems 1 is faulty, i.e. at least one of the three voltages is
below the "VT Voltage" setting.
"System 2" means: The VT of Systems 2 is faulty, i.e. at least one of the three voltages is
below the "VT Voltage" setting. Note: Also operating when "System 1" is faulty.
As outlined above, the failure of a VT set is additionally supervised by an integrated undervoltage

function which will operate when the VT Voltage configuration is falling below the setting value
("System 1" or "System 2").
Please note: The above alarm annunciations do not definitely mean a VT fault- or differential
voltage condition but only indicates that one of the input voltage is below the set VT Voltage
minimum.
Function Application:
Only applicable for DRS-MODULAR since 6 VT inputs are required.

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.5.3. MU312
3 phase, 1 stage voltage balance function with blocking features during unsymmetrical
load conditions.
This function is based on the evaluation of the negative phase sequence voltage
component (NPS voltage).
Principle:
The protective function is evaluating the Negative Phase Sequence Voltage (NPS) and from the results
derives the voltage symmetry. The PC window display for the "Internal Measured Values" shows the
computed V- and I- inverse values.
The Negative Phase Sequence Current Component serves for function blocking.
Istruction for function calibration and determination of the setting values:
By single phase injection of a 100 V the "Internal Measured Values" display shows 33 V.
The nominal input voltages are 3 x 100 V phase to phase.
Also phase to neutral voltage input connections are permissible, however the Alarm
and Trip settings are to be reduced accordingly.
When injecting a single phase current of 1 A the "Internal Measured Values" display
is showing 0.33 A whereby the nominal phase input currents are 3 x 1 A.
Summary:
The 100% reference amounts to:
- NPS current system: Anti-clockwise, system 3 phase, 3 x 1A ... Display = I2 = 1A.
- NPS voltage system: Anti-clockwise, system 3 phase, 3 x 100 V ... Display = V2 = 100V.
Determination of the NPS component:
The function is evaluating all three phases and by a three phase system therefore all three
phases have to be connected to the VT inputs since a missing phase input is not considered
by the function since the measured input quantities are directly evaluated.
The connected voltages, respectively currents to the input matrix are taken for evaluating the
negative phase sequence component. For the algorithm of the function it makes no difference whether
phase to phase or phase to neutral voltages are applied. The function evaluates the external voltage
inputs configured in the input matrix whereby the setting values have to be determined according to the
external wiring connections.

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2
20.6. COMMISSIONING

20.6.1. MU211
Disconnect Trip output and make test synchronisation. Check correctly function of trip output with output LED and
digital multimeter.
20.6.2. MU311 / MU611
Disconnect one of the input voltages during normal operation (recommended: idling operation):
function will operate

VOLTAGE BALANCE 2

MU... OVER/UNDERVOLTAGE DT
21. MU... OVER/UNDERVOLTAGE DT
21.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MU . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MU . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Over/undervoltage protection,1 phase, 1 stage, 1009 MU111 59/27 C2,M,L
with configurable reset ratio.
Over/undervoltage protection,1 phase, 2 stage, 1011 MU121 59/27 C2,M,L
Over/undervoltage protection, DC, 1 phase, 2 stage 1051 MU120 59/27 C2,M
Over/undervoltage protection, 3 phase, 1 stage 1008 MU311 59/27 C2,M
separate outputs
Over/undervoltage protection,3 phase, 1 stage 1057 MU313 59/27 C2,M,L
common outputs, with configurable reset ratio.
separate outputs, with reduced reset ratio.
Over/undervoltage protection, 3 phase, 1 stage 1090 MU315 59/27 C2,M,L
common outputs, with reduced reset ratio.
Note: MU315 is preferred to MU314
(common outputs)
separate outputs
Note: MU323 is now obsolete
Fast Overvoltage Protection based on sampled values, 2997 MU421 59 L
4 phase, 1 stage.

21.2.1. Over/Undervoltage DT 1 Phase, 1 Stage

Over/undervoltage protection, 1 phase, 1 stage, 1009 MU111 59/27 C2,M,L
1 phase, 1 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable
over- or undervoltage evaluation, with configurable reset ratio.
MU111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Type: Over/under evaluation
Reset ratio: Normal/ Reduced
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.96875/0.992
Accuracy: 2% Vn

21.2.2. Over/ Undervoltage DT 1 Phase, 2 Stage

over- or undervoltage evaluation, with configurable reset ratio.
MU121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Type: Over/ Under evaluation
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.96875/0.992
Accuracy: 2% Vn


Over/undervoltage protection, DC, 1 phase, 2 stage 1051 MU120 59/27 C2,M
2 stage definite time delayed (DT) DC voltage function with selectable

over- or undervoltage evaluation.
MU120
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: DC input (DC voltage)
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 1
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 0.01 ... 50 V in 0.01 V steps
Operating value stage 2: 0.01 ... 50 V in 0.01 V steps
Setting range: 0.1 ... 10 V/V in 0.01 V steps
Voltage at 0 V: 0.000 ... 4.995 V in 0.005 V steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.96875
Operating time: 3 cycles typical at PROCESSING sample
frequency
Accuracy: 2% Vn


separate outputs
over- or undervoltage evaluation with separate outputs.
MU311
Technical Data
Inputs
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation system 1
Trip system 1
Initiation system 2
Trip system 2
Initiation system 3
Trip system 3
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Accuracy: 2% Vn


Over/undervoltage protection,3 phase, 1 stage 1057 MU313 59/27 C2,M,L
over- or undervoltage evaluation with common outputs, with configurable reset ratio.
MU313
Technical Data
Inputs
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.96875/0.992
Accuracy: 2% Vn


separate outputs, with reduced reset ratio.
3 phase, 1 stage definite time delayed (DT) voltage function with selectable over- or undervoltage evaluation and
reduced reset ratio, with separate outputs.
MU314
Technical Data
Inputs
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation system 1
Trip system 1
Initiation system 2
Trip system 2
Initiation system 3
Trip system 3
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.992
Accuracy: 2% Vn


common outputs, with reduced reset ratio.
Note: MU315 is preferred to MU314
(common outputs)
reduced reset ratio, with common outputs.
MU315
Technical Data
Inputs
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Initiation
Trip
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.992
Accuracy: 2% Vn


separate outputs
separate outputs.
MU321
Technical Data
Inputs
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1/ system 1
Trip stage 1/ system 1
Initiation stage 1/ system 2
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Accuracy: 2% Vn


common outputs, with configurable reset ratio
Note: MU323 is now obsolete
MU322
Technical Data
Inputs
Voltage system 2
Voltage system 3
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.96875/0.992
Accuracy: 2% Vn

21.2.5. Fast Overvoltage Protection DT 4-phase 1-stage

Fast Overvoltage Protection based on sampled values, 2997 MU421 59 L
4 phase, 1 stage. (DRSLIGHT-
File:
DRS_1V42)
4 phase, 1 stage voltage function with fast response (no time delay), based on sampled values.
The protective function contains 4 independent channels (4 analogue inputs and 4 trip outputs).
MU421
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage A
Voltage B
Voltage C
Voltage D
Test input
Outputs
Binary: Trip A
Trip B
Trip C
Trip D
Setting Parameters
Operating value A: 5 ... 200 V in 1 V steps
Please note:
The Set Values represent RMS Values (for example
100 V RMS). The Protective Function will calculate
the Peak Values (for example 141 V), which will be
used for tripping.
Operating value B: 5 ... 200 V in 1 V steps
Operating value C: 5 ... 200 V in 1 V steps
Operating value D: 5 ... 200 V in 1 V steps

Measuring
Reset ratio: approx.: 1,00.
Explanation:
On-Counter: 2 Samples are above Set Value.
Off-Counter: 254 Samples are below Set Value.
Therefore no hysteresis is required.
Operating time: 2 Samples (1,66 ms) + Ouput Relay (3 ms)
Explanation:
Sample Rate: 1200 samples/ sec. (constant sample
rate).
[Please note: Sample Rate does not depend on the
frequency of the analogue input signal.]
1 Sample 0,833 ms
2 Samples 1,66 ms internal trip time
Total Trip Time: 1,66 ms + 3 ms
Accuracy: 3% Vn


21.3.1. MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU313/ MU314/ MU315/ MU321/ MU322
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A 9
12 I4
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A 13
16 1A
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26
27
5A
I9 3
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
1 3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
2 -
5 + OUT 20 8
+
-
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
-
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
1 FOR ACTUAL NUMBER OF PHASES: 12 - IN 06 15
SEE LIST OF MODELS ON LOGIC DIAGRAM. 13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
2 FOR ACTUAL NUMBER OF STAGES: X2
15 +
SEE LIST OF MODELS ON LOGIC DIAGRAM. 16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
LEGEND: 4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
OPTIONAL MODULE: 6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03 11
Transducer 2 8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
Shaft Current 9 13
Rotor E/F 10 Rx-
GND 14
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) Tx+
12 16
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DEF. TIME OVER-/ UNDER-VOLTAGE:

MU111 VOLTAGE 1-PH. 1-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 286 Def. Time Over-/Under Voltage: MU111 Voltage 1-PH. 1-ST. Wiring Diagram
For Available Models: See ,,Logic Diagram


21.4.1. MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU313/ MU314/ MU315/ MU321/ MU322
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
V L1L2
PROCESSING
1
V L2L3
V L3L1
TEST ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
2
BLOCK. ST.1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCK. ST.2
(OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
1 FOR ACTUAL NUMBER OF PHASES:
TRIP
SEE LIST OF MODELS BELOW! COMMANDS
2 FOR ACTUAL NUMBER OF STAGES: OUTPUT CB1
SEE LIST OF MODELS BELOW! CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY 59 Alarm
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS COMPACT 2 59 Trip

VERSION 2

MU111 VOLTAGE 1-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 287 Def. Time Over-/Under-Voltage Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
ALARM
(|FFT 1.H.| of VL1L2 ) < (set value
STAGE 1 2
set value: OPERATE VALUE ST.1)
VL1-L2
Type = VL2-L3
(|FFT 1.H.| of VL1L2 ) > (set value >=1
1 OVER- VL3-L1
OPERATE VALUE ST.1)
V L1L2 DETECTION
V L2L3 Type = ALARM
(|FFT 1.H.| of VL1L2 ) < (set value
V L3L1 UNDER- STAGE 2 2
OPERATE VALUE ST.2)
DETECTION VL1-L2
VL2-L3
(|FFT 1.H.| of VL1L2 ) > (set value >=1
VL3-L1
OPERATE VALUE ST.2)
V L1L2
V L2L3
TEST ST.1 V L3L1
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST.2
PRESET
ALARM ST.1
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2 >=1
&
& ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 LED-
0 DISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1>
& TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
ALARM ST.2 MATRIX
BLOCK. ST.2 >=1
&
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0 1
TRIP ST.2 0
t2 >
OUTPUT
1
TRIP-
0
MATRIX
1 NUMBER OF PHASES (VOLTAGE
INPUTS) DEPENDS ON TYPE OF
RELAY. (SEE LIST OF MODELS PROCESSING 2 SHOWN:
ON LOGIC DIAGRAM). 3-PH. RELAY WITH
SUMMED UP OUTPUTS.

MU111 VOLTAGE 1-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 288 Def. Time Over-/Under-Voltage: MU111 Voltage 1-PH. 1-ST. Logic Diagram / Processing
For Available Models: See ,, Logic Diagram

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MU111...MU322
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
all FUNCTION OUTPUTS disabled (test-operation) MU322
Type =
OVER- OVER- or UNDERVOLTAGE - relay function to be choosen via set value.
DETECTION
Type =
UNDER-
DETECTION
The measured voltage signal UL1L2 is analyzed by use of
(|FFT 1.H.| of UL1L2 ) > (set value
FAST FOURIER TRANSFORMATION (FFT).
OPERATE VALUE ST.1)
The relay function uses the 1.Harmonic of UL1L2 only.
MU322 MODEL-NUMBERS (FIRMWARE-FUNCTIONS) EXAMPLE:
consecutive number
number of stages
number of phases
type of function (e.g. V voltage)
microprocessor - based hardware
MATRIX
PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX


MU111 VOLTAGE 1-PH. 1-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Abb. 289 Def. Time Over-/Under-Voltage: MU111 Voltage 1-PH. 1-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend for available
models: see "Logic Diagram"

21.4.2. MU421
DRS-LIGHT
PROCESSING
V(A)
V.T.
V(B)
V.T.
V(C)
V.T.
V(D)
V.T.
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
LEGEND
DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY
DRS-LIGHT
TYPE: DRS-LIGHT
PROCESSING DRSLIGHT-FILE: 1V42
MU421 VOLTAGE 4-PH 1-ST (V>>>) LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 290 MU421 Voltage 4-ph 1-st ( V>>>) Logic Diagramm

NOTEBOOK
OVERSAMPLING 1
(INSTANTANEOUS VALUES)
V(A)
V(B)
V(C)
V(D)
VSample > (Vset x 2)
V
set
2 3ms
Samples
TEST
DETECTION OUTPUT
BIN. I/0 OF V > RELAY
PRESET
1 TRIP TIME approx. 5ms
0 LED-
DISPLAY
BLOCKING TRIP
>=1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 &
& TRIP LED-
0
MATRIX
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
FUNCTION
0
OUTPUT
1
0
1
NOTE: THIS IS AN OVER-SAMPLING- TRIP-
MODE FUNCTION (1200 Samples /sec). MATRIX
COMBINATION OF THIS FUNCTION
WITH REGULAR PROTECTIVE
FUNCTIONS IS RESTRICTED!
PROCESSING
MU421 VOLTAGE 4-PH. 1-ST. (V>>>) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 291 MU421 Voltage 4-ph 1-st ( V>>>) Logic Diagramm Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE MODULE: MU421 (DRSLIGHT-File: 1V42)
CALC. INTERNAL

PRESET
1
0
via notebook: 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1
0
OVERSAMPLING
(INSTANTANEOUS
MU421 USES AN OVERSAMPLING MODE (1200 SAMPLES/SEC) IN
VALUES)
ORDER TO QUICKEN TRIPPING.
VSample > (Vset x 2)

MU421 IS A FAST OPERATING OVERVOLTAGE RELAY WHICH
V
GENERATES A (INTERNAL) TRIP ALREADY AFTER 2 SAMPLES.
set
THERE IS NO ALARM-STAGE. BECAUSE OF THE INCREASED
2 3ms SAMPLE-RATE THE INTERNAL TRIP OCCURS ALREADY AFTER
Samples
APPROX. 1,7 MS. THE OUTPUT RELAIS ADDITIONALLY NEEDS
DETECTION OUTPUT
OF V > RELAY APPROX. 3 MS.
TOTAL TRIP TIME: 5 MS.
TRIP TIME approx. 5ms
Programmable
LED-indications
software-matrix for
of
MATRIX DISPLAY
PROCESSING
(row 2...5) of
(row 2...5)
PROCESSING

TRIP-
MATRIX

MU421 VOLTAGE 4-PH. 1-ST. (V>>>) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 292 MU421 Voltage 4-ph 1-st ( V>>>) Logic Diagramm Processing / Legend

21.5. FUNCTION
21.5.1. MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU321
Over/undervoltage time delayed protective functions with a DT characteristic are applied

where a suitable time delay for a co-ordinated shut down of the respective plant equipment
is necessary in case of over- or undervoltage conditions above or below the pre-set voltage
limit values. Besides the normal voltage supervision this also includes special applications
such as earth fault protection or interturn faults by generators.
All analogue signals of the function are sampled 12 times each cycle. From the measured
results the amplitude of the basic harmonic is considered for each system according to the
standard algorithm (Fourier Transformation).
For each sample interval the computed amplitude value is compared with the configured
settings (above setting by over evaluation and below setting by under evaluation).
When initiating conditions persist during 24 consecutive samples, i.e. 2 cycles, the
instantaneous output is set and the time delay started. After expiry of the set time delay
the trip output is activated. The delay is according to the applied DT characteristic independent
from the input signal value.
21.5.2. MU421
DRSLIGHT-File:
DRS_1V42
Overvoltage protective function, based on sampled values (not Fourier Analysis), no delay time, instantanuous
tripping.
This is a special purpose function. It will trip when 2 samples are above the setting. It will drop off when 254
samples are below the setting. Note: the drop delay ensures a minimum length for the trip-puls given to the circuit
breaker.
The sample rate is 1200 samples per second, so the internal tripping time (2 samples) is calculated: 1,66 ms.
The relay output requires approx.. 3 ms to close. In total we get a tripping time of: 1,66 ms + 3 ms.
On/Off-Counter:
On-Counter defines how many samples have to be above the setting in order trip.
Off-Counter defines how many samples have to be below the setting in order to drop off.
Internal settings (not shown at the Function Parameter table) for On/Off Counters:
Using DRSWIN:
choose: System
choose: Maintenenance
choose: Function MU421 (U>>>)
Address: 64 On-Counter (standard setting: 2 samples)
Address: 65 Off-counter (standard setting: 254 samples); this setting assures a minimum duration of the trip
pulse.
Note:

The Disturbance Data File records 1200 Samples/sec. too.
Note:
Because of the special sampling frequency the protection relay MU421 needs its own DRS LIGHT device. It cannot
be operated together with standard rate protective functions. Exception: Signal Functions, etc.
The protective function MU421 provides 4 independet channels. Every channel has its own analogue input und trip
output.
Set Value "Operating Value L1" ( L2/L3/L4):

This is a RMS-value (for easier referencing). The protective function internally will calculate the peak value of this
RMS-value. The peak value is used for the trip decision:
Peak = RMS x 2
For example:
Set = 100 V RMS
Peak = 141 V
Result:
The function will trip when two sample values are above 141 V.
These features are demonstrated by the following screenshots:
Screenshot no. 1:
DRSWIN // MU421
Please mind: the setting is 100V(RMS!)

Screenshot no. 2:
MU421 // Recorded Curves (History)
Please mind: MU421 trips at 142 V peak (corresponds with setting 100V RMS).

21.6. COMMISSIONING

21.6.1. MU111/ MU121/ MU311/ MU321
Pre-Commissioning:
The input matrix has to be configured according to the external circuitry and the operating value set according to
requirements.
The operating value- and time delay parameters are to be set to the designed values
(protection co-ordination requirements).
To perform the tests with a relay test set inject the appropriate voltage quantity into, e.g. VT input
system 1 and adjust the level to produce operation of the function.
Note the operating value in the commissioning sheets.

Alter the test voltage into the reset direction of the function and record the drop-off value.
Please note that the external measured values can also be viewed in the internal measured
value display of the User program.
Carry out the tests for the other systems and/or stages and record the test results into the
commissioning sheets.
With 1.1 times the operating setting value verify the time delay for each phase and/or stage by
using a suitable timer and record the measured results in the test sheets.
plant requirements.
After the checks all temporary setting changes have to be restored to the original values.

During the primary tests the function of the protective scheme is checked under regular
operation.
As far as system conditions permit following tests for the over- or undervoltage protective functions are
recommended:
These tests must only be carried out after completion of the primary short circuit-
and earth fault tests when generator and the associated plant can safely be excited
to nominal voltage.
Block trip outputs of the voltage functions.
Insert measuring instruments into the VT circuits and/or compare the internal
measured values of the DRS User program.
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually excite by either raising or lowering
the voltage until the respective function operates. For overvoltage functions it is advised
to reduce the setting value during the test procedure.
Record the operating values in the test sheets.
For multistage functions repeat the test for each stage as outlined above.
Re-activate the trip outputs of the voltage functions.
If system conditions permit shut down the generator via a live protection trip.
- Load Rejection Tests:
With the generator under full load conditions, i.e. also with maximum inductive load
perform a full load rejection by tripping the generator CB.
In this case with the excitation system on auto-control an overvoltage protective
function must not produce a trip output otherwise the setting has to be modified
according to the generator open circuit excitation characteristic curve.
For primary earth fault test procedures please refer to the relevant documents.

MX... OVERFLUXING
22. MX... OVERFLUXING
22.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MX . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MX . . . FNNR TYPE ASNI Application

Overfluxing protection 2 stage 1035 MX121 81 C2,M,L
Overfluxing protection inverse time 1079 MX125 81 C2,M,L

MX... OVERFLUXING
22.2.1. Overfluxing DT 2 Stage
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MX121 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Overfluxing protection 2 stage 1035 MX121 81 C2,M,L
Two stage overfluxing function with definite time (DT) V/f evaluation.
MX121
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage
Note:
Flux = V/f
whereby: V input voltage of this (see above!) channel
f frequency of the SYNC channel (Fourier Analysis)
Note: For frequency evaluation the SYNC channel of the PROCESSING is
always taken. The voltage input only provides the actual voltage signal for the
computation of the fluxing level (V/f ratio).
The SYNC channel and the voltage measuring input need not necessarily be
the same.
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Trip stage 1
Initiation stage 2
Trip stage 2
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1: 0.8 ... 1,5 in 0.01 steps
Operating value stage 2: 0.8 ... 1,5 in 0.01 steps

MX... OVERFLUXING

Saturation: In p.u.
(referred to the nominal voltage/nominal frequency).
Measuring
Reset ratio: 3% of Set Value "Nominal Voltage" resp. "Nominal
Frequency"
(note.: U/f = Saturation)
Operating time: Depending on the frequency shift.
Condition: The SYNC channel must already be active
for about 1 s.
Accuracy: 0.01 Hz
2% Vn

MX... OVERFLUXING
22.2.2. Overfluxing Inverse Time
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MX125 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Overfluxing protection inverse time 1079 MX125 81 C2,M,L
1 phase overfluxing protection with inverse time V/f tripping characteristic.
MX125
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Voltage
Note:
Flux = V/f
whereby: V input voltage of this (see above!) channel
f frequency of the SYNC channel (Fourier Analysis)
Note: For frequency evaluation the SYNC channel of the PROCESSING is
always taken. The voltage input only provides the actual voltage signal for the
computation of the fluxing level (V/f ratio).
The SYNC channel and the voltage measuring input need not necessarily be
the same.

Test input stage 1
Outputs
Binary: Alarm
Trip
Setting Parameters
Time constant: 1 ... 100 min in 0.5 min steps
Saturation limit: 10 ... 100 % in 1 % steps
Saturation alarm: 25 ... 150 % in 1 % steps
Saturation trip: 25 ... 150 % in 1 % steps

Saturation: In p.u.
(refered to the nominal voltage/nominal frequency).

MX... OVERFLUXING
Measuring
Reset ratio: 3% of Set Value U resp. f
(note.: U/f = Saturation)
Operating time: Depending on the frequency shift.
Condition: The SYNC channel must already be active
for about 1 s.
Accuracy: 0.01 Hz
2% Vn

MX... OVERFLUXING

22.3.1. MX121
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A 9
12 I4
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A 13
16 1A
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
TRANS- 15
19 1A
21 I7
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26
27
5A
I9 3
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
UL1L2 U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
G 9 X6
GEN. 10 U5 1
3~ OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCK. ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
BLOCK. ST.2 (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
LEGEND: DUCER 1
BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE
OPTIONAL MODULE: 5 GND 10

UAKB
TRANS-
SI03 11
8 +5
RS422/485
Shaft Current Rx+ 12

Rotor E/F 9 13
10 Rx-
GND 14
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04 15
Tx- 16
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MX121 OVERFLUXING WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 293 MX121 Overfluxing Wiring Diagram

MX... OVERFLUXING
22.3.2. MX125
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...48VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2 5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A 9
12 I4
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A 13
16 1A
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26
27
5A
I9 3
OUT 10 4
28 1A
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. 3 + OUT 19 6
3~ BLOCKING (opt.) + 4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
1 Important note: The voltage channel used for 15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
OVERFLUXING must be the same as used for RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
DRS-internal FFT-Synchronization. X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
GND 14
Rotor E/F 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
Tx+ 15
13 Tx-

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MX125 OVERFLUXING INVERSE TIME WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 294 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Wiring Diagram

MX... OVERFLUXING

22.4.1. MX121
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN PROCESSING
TRANSF.
UL1L2
G
GEN.
3~
TEST ST.1
(optional)
TEST ST.2
(optional)
TRIP
BLOCK. ST.1
COMMANDS
(optional)
OUTPUT CB1
ALARM
(optional)
CONTACTS
Alarm 1St.
LEGEND Trip 1St.


VERSION 2
MX121 OVERFLUXING LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 295 MX121 Overfluxing Logic Diagram

MX... OVERFLUXING
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
FLUX 1
NOTEBOOK
1
U L1 meas. ACTUAL VOLT. set value NOM. VOLT. = ACTUAL
meas. ACTUAL FREQU. set value NOM. FREQU. FLUX
FLUX > (set value OPERATE VALUE St.1)
FLUX > (set value OPERATE VALUE St.2)

TEST ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0
ALARM ST.1
TEST ST.2 >=1
&
& ALARM ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1 LED-
0 DISPLAY
TRIP ST.1
BLOCK. ST.1
t1 >
& TRIP ST.1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
0 LED-
ALARM ST.2 MATRIX
BLOCK. ST.2 >=1
&
PRESET BIN. I/0
1 PRESET
0 1
TRIP ST.2 0
t2 >
OUTPUT
1
TRIP-
0
MATRIX
1 Note: Nominal FLUX = 1,00

PROCESSING
MX121 OVERFLUXING LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 296 MX121 Overfluxing Logic Diagram / Processing

MX... OVERFLUXING
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MX121
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MX121
1
0
Calculation of the ACUAL FLUX

meas. ACTUAL VOLT. set value NOM. VOLT. = ACTUAL referred to NOM. FLUX (= 1 p.u.).
meas. ACTUAL FREQU. set value NOM. FREQU. FLUX

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED-
DISPLAY PROCESSING
(row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

ALARM ST.1 (ACTUAL FLUX) > set stage 1
ALARM ST.2 (ACTUAL FLUX) > set stage 2
TRIP ST.1 t1 > set (stage 1)
TRIP ST.2 t2 > set (stage 2)
MX121 OVERFLUXING LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 297 MX121 Overfluxing Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

MX... OVERFLUXING
22.4.2. MX125
DRS-
COMPACT2A
L1 L2 L3
PROCESSING
U L1L2
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Trip

VERSION 2
MX125 OVERFLUXING INVERSE TIME LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 298 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Logic Diagram

MX... OVERFLUXING
CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
SATURATION
FLUX
NOTEBOOK
CALCULATION OF SATURATION TEMPERATURE 3
SATURATION TEMP.
FLUX 3
2 FLUX 2
U L1L2 1
V / Vn
FLUX 1
TRIP (set)
f / fn FLUX
ALARM (set)
SATURATION
LIMIT (set)
t
SATURATION
TEMP
CALCULATION OF ALARM/ TRIP

SATURATION TEMP.
TRIP
TRIP (set)
ALARM (set)
ALARM
TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
t
PRESET
1 TRIP
0 ALARM
BLOCKING ALARM
>=1 LED-
BIN. I/0 & MATRIX
& ALARM
PRESET
1
BIN. I/0
0
PRESET
TRIP 1
>=1 0
&
FUNCTION & TRIP
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
PROCESSING
MATRIX
1 Uphase-phase used for saturation detection must be the FFT-synchronising channel (see DRS/ page 0).
2 V, f actual values Vn, fn nom. values (see settings)
3 SATURATION TEMPERATURE = (SATURATION TEMPERATURE LIMIT) * ( 1 - e -t / (TIME CONSTANT) )
actual saturation set value = final loading for continuous time constant of protected device.
temp. in [%] referred permissible overfluxing in [%] refered to This time constant is referred to the set value
to nom. saturation nominal saturation temp. (Un, fn, t = ). SATURATION (TEMP) LIMIT.
temp. (Vn, fn, t = ). Note: The setting for SATURATION (TEMP.) Note: Un, fn the SATUR. LIMIT is reached
LIMIT is generally set to 100% at t = .
(recommended; corresponds with Un, fn, t = ). See example/ Fig. ..
MX125 OVERFLUXING INVERSE TIME LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 299 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Logic Diagram / Processing

MX... OVERFLUXING
LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE MODULE: MX125
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MX125
1
0
V / Vn Calculation of actual flux [%] referred to nom. values of protected device (Vn, fn).
f / fn
SATURATION TEMP.
FLUX 3
Calculation of SATURATION (TEMP.) by using the actual flux
FLUX 2
(FLUX 1 or FLUX 2 or FLUX 3).
FLUX 1
Settings: SATURATION LIMIT: set to 100%
TRIP (set)
ALARM (set)
ALARM: acc. gen. manufacturer
SATURATION TRIP: acc. gen. manufacturer
LIMIT (set)
TIME CONSTANT: acc. gen. manufacturer
t

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED- PROCESSING
DISPLAY
(row 2...14)

TRIP-
MATRIX

RELEASE FUNCTION OUTPUT: RELEASE (INTERLOCK IS APPROVED)
MX125 OVERFLUXING INVERSE TIME LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 300 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

MX... OVERFLUXING
VGen
FLUX =
fGen.
100%
VGen. nom
nom. flux =
fGen. nom
SATURATION
TEMPRATURE
TRIP 3
ALARM 2
SATURATION LIMIT 1
100%
(1 - 1 / e) * (SATURATION LIMIT)
TIME CONSTANT
(set value)
LEGEND:
1 Recommended standard settings:
SET VALUE SATURATION LIMIT is choosen 100% nom. saturation temperature

(corresponds with VGen nom, fGen nom, t = ).
This value is reached at t = at nom. operation of generator or transformer.
2 ALARM level:
Example: Generator Volt. Nom. Range: VG nom 5% (assume).
SET VALUE ALARM: 106%. See note below!
3
TRIP level:
Example: Generator Volt. Nom. Rage: VG nom 5% (assume).
SET VALUE TRIP: 109% See note below!
2 , 3 Important note: Set values Alarm, Trip, Time constant to be correlated with
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION SETTINGS and with SPECIFICATION of GEN. MANUFACTERER.
MX125 OVERFLUXING INVERSE TIME EXAMPLE FOR STANDARD SETTINGS

Fig. 301 MX125 Overfluxing Inverse Time Example For Standard Settings

MX... OVERFLUXING
22.5. FUNCTION
22.5.1. MX121
Electrical plants such as generators or transformers are designed and rated for a maximum occurring flux density.
When the value is exceeded, e.g. due to excitation regulator fault under
off-load conditions or power system voltage rise overheating of the machines with resulting
damages may occur. For instance, the big increase of the magnetising current with a large
higher harmonic component will not only cause overheating of the generator-transformer but
will also cause non-permissible induced voltage peaks in the generator rotor circuit.
The overfluxing protection is a single phase function and the voltage input signal is sampled
12 times each cycle. Via the Fourier Transformation the signal voltage level and frequency is determined for each
sample interval from which the instant V/f value is computed. This value
is compared with the nominal VN/fN setting and thus the saturation value S derived according
to following formula.
V fN
S
VN f
For each sample interval the computed amplitude value is compared with the configured
settings for each stage and when initiating conditions persist during 13 consecutive samples,
i.e. approx. 1 cycle, the instantaneous output for the relevant stage is set and the time delay started. After expiry of
the set time delay the corresponding the trip output is activated.

MX... OVERFLUXING
22.5.2. MX125
Setting Values:
a)
"Saturation Limit".
Definition: At rated voltage and nominal frequency the flux level after the time constant period
is following:
Saturation = (1-1/e) x Saturation Limit.
The saturation limit is given in % of the nominal flux density whereby the nominal flux density
at rated voltage is theoretically approached asymptotic after an infinite time.
Caution: Also the Permissible Saturation Limit is independent from the function setting
approaching the permissible flux after an infinite time!!
Example: When a "Saturation Limit" setting is chosen to be 50% than the flux loading value
is also increasing correspondingly slower and will reach the 50% setting after an infinite approach.
b)
"Saturation Alarm": Is given as a %-age value of the nominal saturation limit (see (a)).
c)
"Saturation Trip": Is given as a %-age value of the nominal saturation limit (see (a)).
Display Window (Notebook):
"Saturation Load" ... Time integral over the flux saturation.

"Saturation" ... = (V/Vn)/(f/fn), whereby: V ... Voltage; f ... Frequeny.

MX... OVERFLUXING
22.6. COMMISSIONING

22.6.1. MX121
Pre-Commissioning:
requirements.
With a suitable relay test set or alternatively an external voltage source having a multimeter also with frequency
evaluation connected parallel to the respective voltage input inject rated voltage
with nominal frequency.
Compare the instrument readings with the DRS Internal Measured Values of the PROCESSING Control Unit
whereby the internal saturation indication should show a value of 1.
Raise the test voltage up to the operating value of the function and record the result in the
Nominal Frequency Test column of the test sheets.
The function reset value is obtained by reducing the input voltage and the result should be recorded as above.
At nominal voltage input the frequency is lowered to produce initiation of Stage 1 and by raising the frequency
again the function reset value is determined.
Both frequency values should be recorded in the commissioning test sheets.
During all tests the internal Saturation measured values has to be observed and by substituting
the results into the above formula verified by calculation.
Stage 2 should also be tested as outlined above.
With 1.5 times the operating setting value verify the time delay for both stages by
using a suitable timer and record the measured results in the test sheets.

settings have to be set to the original values and
restored according to the plant requirements
During the primary tests the function of the protective scheme is checked under regular
operating conditions.
As far as system conditions permit following tests for the protective function is recommended:
-Open circuit tests:
Block trip outputs of the overfluxing protection.

Insert a multimeter with frequency evaluation capabilities to the VT input.
Run up generator to rated speed and manually excite off-load to rated voltage.
By lowering the speed and/or increasing the voltage verify the initiating limits
The saturation value is displayed in the internal measured values of the function.
Note the operating values and the corresponding voltages into the commissioning
sheets.
Check that the configured saturation level stays within the permissible values.
When system conditions permit shut down the generator unit via a live trip.
22.6.2. MX125
With the aid of the "Internal Measured Values" window display the correct function
behaviour can simply be confirmed during normal system operation.
At rated voltage and nominal frequency the saturation level shows 100 %.
The Saturation Burden is described in the PROCESSING logic diagrams.

MY... ENERGISING FUNCTION
23. MY... ENERGISING FUNCTION
23.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MY . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MY 111 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Energising function 1097 MY111 C2,M,L

PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MY111 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Energising function 1097 MY111 C2,M,L
Single Phase Transformer energizing: Close CB main contacts at voltage peak (Minimisation of Inrush Current).
MY111
Technical Data
Inputs
Analogue: Measuring voltage R-T (16 2/3 Hz system).
Note: this voltage will be used for calculating the CB close command for the
transformer; the system frequency will be derived from the SYNC-channel.
It is recommended to use the same voltage for both purposes (if suitable).
Rotor current (AC side)
Test input
CB close command
Outputs
Binary: Operation interlock
Preventive interlock
Closing without reference voltage
Setting Parameters
Time delay: 0 ... 170 ms in 5 ms steps
Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% Vn
Accuracy of CB close command (timing): typ. +/- 2,5 ms, max. 5 ms.
Note: Frequency = 16 2/3 Hz.


23.3.1. MY111
R T
+ - BATT.
L1 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 + - GND 1
2 I1 DC OUT 01 2
24V...48VDC 3
3 110V...220VDC
U R-T I2 DC OUT 02 4
4 5
5 OUT 03 6
6 I3 7
CB1 1
7 OUT 04 8
8 I4 9
9 OUT 05 10
10 I5
DRS OUT 06
11
12
COMPACT 2
11 13
12 I6 OUT 07 14
13 15
TRANSF. 15 X5
16 I8 1
17 OUT 09 2
18 I9 3
19 OUT 10 4
I 10 5
20 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
CB2 2
U R-T U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
OUT 16 16
G 8 U4
GEN. 9 X6
2~ U5 1
10
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
(CB1) CLOSE ORDER - 2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
TEST (opt.) + 4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
1 CB1 to be closed/ BLOCKING (opt.) + 6 - IN 03 9
-
using MY111 7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
2 CB2 stays open. 9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
3 Important note: IN 06
12 - 15
voltage channel 13 + OUT 24 16
must be same as 14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
used for DRS-internal 4
16 - IN 08
FFT-synchronisation. RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
6
2
eIEGL23
LEGEND: 3 8
eIU124
Tx+
OPTIONAL MODULES
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULES: 5 10
-MIEGL rotor isolation supervision GND
6
-eIEGL rotor earth fault protection 7
8
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
-eIU124 shaft current supervision 9
Rx- 13
10
EURAX

MIEGL
11 GND
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface Tx+ 15
13 Tx-
14
FRONTSIDE CAN BUS X9

DRS-CABLE no. 100
CANH
CANL
GND
GND
RS 232
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
X10
NOTEBOOK
X11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MAINTENANCE
MY111 CB CLOSE CONTROL (16 2/3 Hz) WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 302 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Wiring Diagram


23.4.1. MY111
R T
L1 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
CB1 1
PROCESSING
MAIN
TRANSF.
CB2 2
U R-T
3
G
GEN.
2~
(CB1) CLOSE -
1 CB1 to be closed/
ORDER (Request)
using MY111
TEST
2 CB2 stays open.
(OPTIONAL)
3 Important note:
BLOCKING
voltage channel
must be same as (OPTIONAL)
used for DRS-internal
FFT-synchronisation. CLOSE
RELEASE
OUTPUT CB
CONTACTS
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND
Close Release
DRS DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM Inhibit
Close w/o V-ref
CPU+DSP - BOARD/
MY111 CB CLOSE CONTROL (16 2/3 Hz) LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 303 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
close w/o volt. ref.

U < Min. Volt. Setting
U R-T INHIBIT (U>Umax)
U > Max. Volt. Setting
(=SYNCHR.
CHANNEL
FFT) UR-T SETTING 1
TIME DELAY
PLEASE
NOTE!
CB1
CLOSED
1
DIG. OUTPUT
CB1 CLOSE REL. (short pulse)
DIG. INPUT 2
CLOSE ORDER (long pulse)
close release
INHIBIT
2 CLOSE RELEASE
&
(CB1) BIN. I/0 &
CL. PRESET
ORD. 1
LED-
0 & DISPLAY
BIN. I/0
PRESET
TEST
1 >=1
& CLOSE RELEASE
0
BIN. I/0 & CLOSE RELEASE

LED-
PRESET >=1 MATRIX
BL. & BIN. I/0
1
0
PRESET
CLOSE w/o VOLT.REF. (U<Umin) 1
FUNCTION 0
t > tSET
OUTPUT & CLOSE w/o VOLT.REF.
1
0
PROCESSING COMMAND CLOSE CB1!

2 TRIP-
FROM OPERATOR MATRIX
1 TIME DELAY =
[=CB CLOSE ORDER]
CB1 CLOSING TIME.
Note: not shown in diagram: Output Inhibit.
MY111 CB CLOSE CONTROL (16 2/3 Hz) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING

Fig. 304 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Logic Diagram Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MY111

1 1 1 1" 1 0"
0
via notebook: 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MY111
1
U < Min. Volt. Setting In case the measured voltage is smaller than the set value Min. Volt. Setting
and the input CLOSE ORDER is active then the command
CLOSE w/o VOLT. REF is generated.
U > Max. Volt. Setting The CLOSE ORDER-output is blocked if the measured voltage is too high.
U R-T Voltage between phase R and phase T (2-phase system!).

This voltage must be used DRS-internal for FFT-synchronisation too!
Please check (DRS PROCESSING page 0)!
CLOSE ORDER Digital input signal, CLOSE RELEASE Digital output signals,
coming from plant control. CLOSE w/o VOLT. REF. going to CB ON-COIL.
UR-T SETTING
TIME DELAY setting.
TIME DELAY
close release has to be given in advance in order to
compensate for the CB closing time.
Please calculate this setting by using the recorded
curves-feature.
t
CB1
CLOSED
CB closing procedure is finished exactly when the voltage
DIG. OUTPUT
CB1 CLOSE REL. (short pulse) reaches the amplitude (= max. elongation).
DIG. INPUT Result: Transformer Inrush Current is minimized.
CLOSE ORDER (long pulse)
LED- LED-
the LED-indications DISPLAY PROCESSING
MATRIX
(row 2...14) of (row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MY111 CB CLOSE CONTROL (16 2/3 Hz) LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 305 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

MAIN TRANSFORMER
CB CLOSE CONTROL/ FUNCTIONAL SEQUENCE
CB1
T1
IMAGNETISING + IINRUSH (16 2/3 Hz) I=0
2-PHASE SYSTEM
UR-T (RAILWAY/ 16 2/3 Hz)
MAIN TRANSFORMER
UR-T
set value
DELAY
TIME
1
t
0 90 180 270 360
INPUT
CLOSE coming from plant control
ORDER
t
OUTPUT
CLOSE sent to CB1 ON-COIL
RELEASE (time steps/accuracy: 5 ms max, 2,5 ms typ.)
t
MAIN CONTACTS OF CB1

CB1 =
closed
t
CB1 is closing CB1 closing procedure finished = CB1 is closed

1
1 Note: in practive the DELAY TIME will be much longer than shown on this diagram.
MY111 CB CLOSE CONTROL (16 2/3 Hz) FUNCTIONAL SEQUENCE

Fig. 306 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Functional Sequence

MAIN TRANSFORMER INRUSH CURRENT
CB1
T1
IMAGNETISING + IINRUSH (16 2/3 Hz) I = 0 (always)
NOTE:
UR-T
AVAILABLE FOR
2-PHASE SYSTEMS
MAIN TRANSFORMER (16 2/3 Hz) ONLY!)
A.)
UR-T
CB1 closed at
t
I = IINRUSH INRUSH CURRENT OF T1 NORMAL

MAGNETISING CURR. OF T1
RESULT:
INRUSH CURR. = max
UR-T
B.)
CB1 closed at
I = IINRUSH
NORMAL
RESULT: MAGNETISING CURRENT OF T1
INRUSH CURR. = min
t
MY111 CB CLOSE CONTROL (16 2/3 Hz) PRINCIPLE / EXPLANATION

Fig. 307 MY111 CB Close Control (16 2/3 Hz) Principle / Explanation

23.5. FUNCTION
23.5.1. MY111
Application of this function: For railway traction systems / 16 2/3 Hz/ 2 phase.
Note: Railway systems are generally not earthed at the LV side and are 2 phase floating
systems whereas at the HV side one phase is connected to ground.
The function is monitoring the phase to phase voltages of this system.
Please note that this particular protective function may not be applied for 50 Hz systems and not for
three phase systems.
Function operating sequence:

The function is energising the single phase transformer at the instant of 90 phase to phase voltage.
Note: At 16 2/3 Hz the sample interval the measured values is about 5 ms (Fourier Analysis)
whereby the function is normally selecting the sample close to the voltage maximum value.
Also the function is switching-on the transformer at a V = 0 value after exactly one sample
after request.
Operating logic:
V>Vmax: Interlock
Vmin<V<Vmax: Switch-on at voltage maximum of phase to phase voltage.
V<Vmin: Interlock disable without reference voltage whereby after 1 sample the
CB closing command is initiated.

23.6. COMMISSIONING

23.6.1. MY111
Several repeated energising test of the transformer have to be carried out to verify the correct performance of the
DRS Energising Function to verify the correct performance with the aid
of the DRS Recorded Curves feature, i.e. Internal Recorded Curves.
But most important: Please observe the transformer design rating.
Note: The MY111 parameter "Function Initiates Fault Record" has to be configured.

MZ... MINIMUM IMPEDANCE / UNDERVOLTAGE - OVERCURRENT /
. VOLTAGE RESTRAINT OVERCURRENT
24. MZ... MINIMUM IMPEDANCE / UNDERVOLTAGE - OVERCURRENT /

24.1. OVERVIEW
List of the Available MZ . . . Protective Functions

M ... DRS-MODULAR
L ... DRS-LIGHT
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS: MZ . . . FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

Minimum impedance protection with circular characteristic, 2- 1026 MZ221 21 C2,M
phase, 2-stage, separate outputs
Note: Preferred function is MZ222 with common outputs.
Minimum impedance protection with circular characteristic, 2- 1059 MZ222 21 C2,M,L
phase, 2-stage with common outputs
Note: MZ222 is preferred to MZ221 since common outputs
phase, 2-stage with separate outputs
phase, 2-stage, with common outputs
Undervoltage Overcurrent, 3-phase 1074 MZ311 51/27 C2,M
Compound Voltage Overcurrent 1095 MZ312 51/27 C2,M

(I1>) .AND. ((V1<) .OR. (V2>)), 3-phase,
whereby: U1 Pos. Phase Sequ. System Voltage
U2 Neg. Phase Sequ. System Voltage
I1 Pos. Phase Sequ. System Current

24.2.1. Minimum lmpedance Circular Characteristic, 2 phase, 2 stage - separate output
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MZ 221 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

phase, 2-stage, separate outputs
Minimum impedance function (Z<t) and overcurrent function (I>t) for two-phase systems,
with separate outputs.
MZ221
Technical Data:
Inputs
Analogue: Current input system 1 phase L1
Current input system 2 phase L2
Voltage input system 1
Binary: Blocking input stage 1 (Z<t)
Blocking input stage 2 (I>t)
Test input stage 1 (Z<t)
Test input stage 2 (I>t)
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1, stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 1, stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation stage 2, stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation L1, stage 2 (I>t)
Trip L1, stage 2 (I>t)
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 1 (impedance): 0.1 ... 30.0 Ohm in 0.1 Ohm steps
Operating value stage 2 (current interlock + 0.1 ... 5.0 x In in 1% steps
overcurrent):
Time delay stage 1: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps


Impedance system 1 in Ohm

Measuring
Reset ratio: 1.03
2% of current value

24.2.2. Minimum lmpedance Circular Characteristic, 2 Phase, 2 Stage -common output

phase, 2-stage with common outputs
Minimum impedance function (Z<t) and overcurrent function (I>t) for two-phase systems
with common outputs.
MZ222
Technical Data:
Inputs
Test input stage 1
Test input stage 2
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation stage 2 (I>t)
Trip stage 2 (I>t)
Setting Parameters
overcurrent):

Measuring
Reset ratio: 1.03
2% of current value

24.2.3. Minimum lmpedance Circular Characteristic, 3 Phase, 2 Stage -separate output

phase, 2-stage with separate outputs
Minimum impedance function (Z<t) and overcurrent function (I>t) for three-phase systems,
with separate outputs.
MZ321
Technical Data:
Inputs
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1, stage 1 (Z<t)
Setting Parameters
overcurrent):


Impedance system 1 In Ohm
Measuring
Reset ratio: 1.03
2% of current value

24.2.4. Minimum lmpedance Circular Characteristic, 3 Phase, 2 Stage -common output
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION: MZ322 FNNR TYPE ANSI Application

phase, 2-stage, with common outputs
Minimum impedance function (Z<t) and overcurrent function (I>t) for three-phase systems,
with common outputs.
MZ322
Technical Data:
Inputs
Outputs
Binary: Initiation stage 1 (Z<t)
Trip stage 1 (Z<t)
Initiation stage 2 (I>t)
Trip stage 2 (I>t)
Setting Parameters
Operating value stage 2 (Current interlock + 0.1 ... 5.0 x In in 1% steps
overcurrent):


Measuring
Reset ratio: 1.03
2% of current value

24.2.5. Undervoltage/Overcurrent 3 Phase

Undervoltage-Overcurrent, 3-phase 1074 MZ311 51/27 C2,M
3 phase Unvoltage-Overcurrent function selectable to with - or without

current latching feature.
MZ311
Technical Data:
Inputs
Binary: Test input voltage function
Blocking input voltage function
Test input current function
Blocking input current function
Outputs
Binary: Undervoltage/overcurrent initiation
Undervoltage/overcurrent trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value I: 0.1 ... 5.0 x In in 1% steps
Time Delay: 0 ... 30 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Current Memory: Yes/No
End of Current Memory: External blocking signal/End of Trip Pulse (300 ms)
Measuring
Reset ratio: 1.03
2% of current value

24.2.6. Compound Voltage Overcurrent (I> .AND. (U< .OR. UNPS>))

Compound Voltage Overcurrent 1095 MZ312 51/27 C2,M
(I1>) .AND. ((V1<) .OR. (V2>)), 3-phase,
whereby: U1 Pos. Phase Sequ. System Voltage
U2 Neg. Phase Sequ. System Voltage
I1 Pos. Phase Sequ. System Current
Definite time delayed overcurrent protection with two timing stages. The current interlock
is enabled in case of undervoltage or inverse time overvoltage conditions.
MZ312
Technical Data:
Inputs
Binary: Test input voltage function
Blocking input voltage function
Test input current function
Blocking input current function
Outputs
Binary: Undervoltage/overcurrent initiation
Undervoltage/overcurrent trip
Setting Parameters
Operating value I>: 0.1 ... 5.0 x In in 0.01 x In steps
Operating value V<: 2 ... 200 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating value Vinv: 5 ... 50 V in 0.2 V steps
Operating time 1: 0 ... 180 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Operating time 2: 0 ... 180 seconds in 0.05 sec steps
Phase rotation: Clockwise/Anti-clockwise
End latched interlock: External blocking signal/trip reset

Vinv (NPS voltage) In %

Measuring
Reset ratio: 0.97
2% of current value


24.3.1. MZ221/ MZ222
R T + - BATT.
L1 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
1 3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L1 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
8 5A
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
U R-0 26
27
5A
I9 3
28 1A
OUT 10 4
U R-T U T-0 I 10
5
29 OUT 11 6
X8 7
alternatively: 1 OUT 12 8
9
U R-T 2 U1
OUT 13 10
G 3 11
GEN. U T-R 4 U2 OUT 14 12
2~ 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
BLOCKING ST.1 (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
LEGEND: 13 + OUT 24 16
1 Current direction irrelevantely 14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
because MIN. IMP.-function is 16 IN 08 4
-
non-directional. RELAY FAIL. OUT 31 5
X7
6
OPTIONAL MODULE:
2
8
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+
Transducer 2
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
Shaft Current
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
Rotor E/F 6
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
10 Rx-
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+
Tx- 16
13
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MZ221 MIN IMPEDANCE 2-PH. 2-ST. WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 308 MZ221 Min Impedance 2-PH. 2-ST. Wiring Diagram MZ222 Min Impedance 2-PH. 2ST. Wiring Diagram

24.3.2. MZ321/ MZ322
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
GEN. G 25
26
1A
5A
OUT 09 2
I9 3
3~ 27
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST ST.1 (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
-
3 + OUT 19 6
+
TEST ST.2 (opt.) - 4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
+
7 + OUT 21 10
+
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
LEGEND: 2
TRANS-
SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
BUS

OPTIONAL MODULE
6
UAKB

7 SI03
11
Rotor E/F DUCER 2 +5
8
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
GND 14
15
12 Tx+
13 Tx-
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE

Fig. 309 MZ321 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2.-ST. Wiring Diagram MZ322 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. Wiring Diagram

24.3.3. MZ311
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1
24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5
OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20 5A OUT 08
21 I7 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST V (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ BLOCKING V (opt.)
+
4 - IN 02 7
-
5 + OUT 20 8
+
TEST I (opt.) - 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
+
BLOCKING I (opt.) - 8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
LEGEND: 3
TRANS-
SI02 8
DUCER 1 Tx+
MOD-
BUS
OPTIONAL MODULE: 4 Tx- 9

OPTIONAL MODULE
-UAKB Transducer 1 5 GND 10

6
UAKB
Transducer 2 TRANS-
SI03
11
8 +5
RS422/485
Rotor E/F Rx+ 12

9 13
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) 10 Rx-
GND 14
X9/X10 IEC870 5-103 control system interface 11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
RS422/485 chain line data interface 12 Tx+
Tx- 16
14 ROTOR E/F SI01
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
DRS-CABLE no. TID-006-- FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT. WITH CURR. MEMORY WIRING DIAGRAM
Fig. 310 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot. With Curr. Memory Wiring Diagram

24.3.4. MZ312
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3 X2 1 2 3
X1 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4 1A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
I L2 5
6
5A
I2
5
7 1A OUT 03 6
I L3 8
9
5A
I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
DRS-
13 1A
14 5A 11
15 I5 OUT 06 12
COMPACT2A
16 1A 13
17 5A
18 I6 OUT 07 14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
U L2L3 4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
U L3L1 6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
G +
TEST (opt.) 2 - IN 01 5
GEN. -
3 + OUT 19 6
3~ +
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
TRANS-
LEGEND: 3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
OPTIONAL MODULE:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
UAKB
TRANS-
SI03
11
Shaft Current 8 +5
RS422/485
Rx+ 12
Rotor E/F 9 13
10 Rx-
CAN BUS future use (hardware extension) GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
13
UAKB-
FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
MZ312 COMPOUND VOLT. O/C WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 311 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Wiring Diagram


24.4.1. MZ221/ MZ222
R T
L1 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
MAIN
TRANSF.
PROCESSING
U R-0
1
U R-T U T-0
alternatively:
U R-T
G 2
2~ GEN. U T-R
IR
IT
TEST ST1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING ST1
(OPTIONAL) TRIP
COMMANDS
BLOCKING ST2
OUTPUT CB1
(OPTIONAL) CONTACTS CB2
LEGEND ALARM CONTACTS 1

1 AT NOM. OPER. THE CALC. IMPEDANCE Impedance 2-ph. St. 1 Syst. 1 Alarm
(SEE INTERNAL MEA-. VALUEA - WINDOW) Impedance 2-ph. St. 1 Syst. 1 Trip
Impedance 2-ph. St. 1 Syst. 2 Alarm
WILL BE: 50 Impedance 2-ph. St. 1 Syst. 2 Trip
Impedance 2-ph. St. 2 L1 Alarm
2 AT NOM. OPER. THE CALC. IMPEDANCE Impedance 2-ph. St. 2 L1 Trip
(SEE INTERNAL MEAS. VALUES - WINDOW) Impedance 2-ph. St. 2 L3 Alarm
Impedance 2-ph. St. 2 L3 Trip
WILL BE: 100

DRS-
DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY Note: phase separated OUTPUTS at MZ221 only

VERSION 2
MZ221 MIN. IMPEDANCE 2-PH. 2-ST. WITH CIRCULAR CHARACTERISTIC,

WITH PHASE-SEPARATED OUTPUTS
WITH JOINT PHASE OUTPUTS
Fig. 312 MZ221 Min. Impedance 2-PH. 2ST. With Circular Characteristic, with Phase Separated Outputs
MZ222 Min. Impedance 2-PH. 2ST. With Circular Characteristic, with Joint Phase Outputs

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 1 [Ohm]
NOTEBOOK
6
U L1-0 5 1 setting OPERATE VALUE
resp. UL1-L3 lUL1-0l 2 setting CURRENT INTERLOCK

lZ1l = |Z1|> set 1
U L3-0 6 lIL1l 3 setting TIME DELAY IMP.
resp. UL3-L1
4 setting Time DELAY CUR.
I lUL3-0l
L1
lZ3l = |Z3|> set 1 5 using UL1-0 will result in
I L3 lIL3l calculated imp = 50 Ohm at nom
operation
lUL1-L3l
6 alternatively: |Z1| =
lIL1l
note: nom. operation = 100 Ohm
2
|IL1|> set >=1 & t > set 3
2
|IL2|> set >=1 & t > set 3
TEST ST. 1
BIN. I/0
PRESET t > set 4
1
0 t > set 4
ALARM ST.1
BLOCK. ST. 1
BIN. I/0 >=1 & & ALARM ST. 1

PRESET
1 TRIP ST.1
0
TEST ST. 2
>=1 & & TRIP ST. 1
BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET DISPLAY
1
0
BLOCK. ST. 2 ALARM ST.2
BIN. I/0
LED-
PRESET
>=1 & & ALARM ST. 2 MATRIX
1 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
TRIP ST.2
1
0
FUNCTION
>=1 & & TRIP ST. 2
OUTPUT
1
0 TRIP-
PROCESSING MATRIX
MZ221 MIN IMPEDANCE 2-PH. 2-ST. WITH CIRCULAR CHARACTERISTIC WITH

PHASE SEPARATED OUTPUTS LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 313 MZ221 Min Impedance 2-PH. 2ST. With Circular Characteristic With Phase Separated Outputs
Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MZ212, MZ222
CALC. INTERNAL
Online-simulation of BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0

BIN. I/0 regular
PRESET DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
PRESET PRESET always PRESET always
1 via notebook: 0 0 0
0
FUNCTION Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MZ212

OUTPUT
MZ222
1
0
Check |IL1|> set value:

|IL1|> SET
a) used for STAGE 2 (TRIP I>)
b) used for STAGE 1 (Release of Z < Trip)
note: Memory Function of I> implemented !
lUL1-0l Calculation of impedance vector of

lZ1l =
lIL1l System 1 (used for Stage 1)
the LED-indications LED- PROCESSING
LED-
DISPLAY
MATRIX (row 2...14) of (row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

MZ221 MIN. IMPEDANCE 2-PH. 2-ST. LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 314 MZ221 Min Impedance 2-ph 2-st Logic Diagram Processind /Legend
MZ222 Min. Impedance 2-ph 2-st Logic Diagram Processing/ Legend

lZACTUALl
ZSET
Analog
INPUT I ACTUAL
signals
ISET
ALARM I> current memory

STAGE 1 interlock funktion
(Z< & I>)
I> current memory

TRIP interlock funktion
STAGE 1
(Z< & I>) tDELAY(IMP)
Digital
OUTPUT
signals
ALARM
STAGE 2
(I>)
TRIP
STAGE 2 tDELAY(CUR)
(I>t)
t
MZ221 MIN. IMPEDANCE 2-PH. 2-ST. TIMING SEQUENCE / EXAMPLE

MZ222 MIN. IMPEDANCE 2-PH. 2-ST. TIMING SEQUENCE / EXAMPLE
Fig. 315 MZ221 Min. Impedance 2-PH. 2-ST. Timing Sequence / Example MZ222 Min Impedance 2-PH. 2-ST.
Timing Sequence / Example

24.4.2. MZ321/ MZ322
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
U L1L2
PROCESSING
U L2L3
U L3L1
GEN.
G
3~
I L1
I L2
I L3
TEST ST1
(OPTIONAL)
TEST ST2
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING ST1
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING ST2
(OPTIONAL) TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
LEGEND
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY ALARM CONTACTS 1
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS-COMPACT2A Impedance 3-ph. St. 1 Syst. 1 Alarm
Impedance 3-ph. St. 1 Syst. 1 Trip
PROCESSING CPU+DSP - BOARD/ Impedance 3-ph. St. 1 Syst. 2 Alarm
VERSION 2 Impedance 3-ph. St. 1 Syst. 2 Trip
Impedance 3-ph. St. 1 Syst. 3 Alarm
1 Note: Impedance 3-ph. St. 1 Syst. 3 Trip
phase separated OUTPUTS at MZ321 only Impedance 3-ph. St. 2 A (L1) Alarm
Impedance 3-ph. St. 2 A (L1) Trip
MZ322 shared Outputs for phases L1, L2, L3. Impedance 3-ph. St. 2 B (L2) Alarm
Impedance 3-ph. St. 2 B (L2) Trip
Impedance 3-ph. St. 2 C (L3) Alarm
Impedance 3-ph. St. 2 C (L3) Trip

WITH PHASE-SEPARATED OUTPUTS
WITH PHASE COMMON OUTPUTS
Fig. 316 MZ321 Min. Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. With Circular Characteristic, With Phase Separated Outputs
MZ322 Min. Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. With Circular Characteristic With Phase Common Outputs

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2
lUL1L2l
U L2L3 lZ1l = |Z1|> set
lIL1-IL2l
U L3L1
I L1
lUL2L3l
lZ2l = |Z2|> set
I L2 lIL2-IL3l LEGEND:
1 setting OPERATE VALUE
I L3 2 setting CURRENT INTERLOCK
3 setting TIME DELAY IMP.
lUL3L1l
lZ3l = |Z3|> set 4 setting Time DELAY CUR.
lIL3-IL1l
3
2 >=1 & t > set
|IL1|> set
3
2 >=1 & t > set
|IL2|> set
2 3
>=1 & t > set
|IL3|> set
TEST ST. 1
BIN. I/0
4
PRESET t > set
1 4
0 t > set
4
t > set
BLOCK ST. 1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST. 1
0
TEST ST. 2 >=1 & & ALARM ST. 1

BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET DISPLAY
TRIP ST. 1
1
0
>=1 & & TRIP ST. 1
BLOCK ST. 2
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST. 2

PRESET LED-
MATRIX
1 >=1 & & ALARM ST. 2 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
1
TRIP ST. 2 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT >=1 & & TRIP ST. 2
1
0 TRIP-
PROCESSING
MATRIX
MZ321 MIN IMPEDANCE 3-PH. 2-ST. WITH CIRCULAR CHARACTERISTIC WITH

PHASE SEPARATED OUTPUTS LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING
Fig. 317 MZ321 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. With Circular Characteristic With Phase Separated Outputs

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
IMPEDANCE SYSTEM 1 []
NOTEBOOK
U L1L2
lUL1L2l
U L2L3 lZ1l = |Z1|> set
lIL1-IL2l
U L3L1
I L1
lUL2L3l
lZ2l = |Z2|> set
I L2 lIL2-IL3l LEGEND:
1 setting OPERATE VALUE
I L3 2 setting CURRENT INTERLOCK

3 setting TIME DELAY IMP.
lUL3L1l
lZ3l = |Z3|> set 4 setting Time DELAY CUR.
lIL3-IL1l
3
2 >=1 & t > set
|IL1|> set
3
2 >=1 & t > set
|IL2|> set
2 3
>=1 & t > set
|IL3|> set
TEST ST. 1
BIN. I/0
4
PRESET t > set
1 4
0 t > set
4
t > set
BLOCK ST. 1
BIN. I/0
PRESET
1
ALARM ST. 1
0
TEST ST. 2 >=1 & & ALARM ST. 1

BIN. I/0 LED-
PRESET DISPLAY
TRIP ST. 1
1
0
>=1 & & TRIP ST. 1
BLOCK ST. 2
BIN. I/0 ALARM ST. 2

PRESET LED-
MATRIX
1 >=1 & & ALARM ST. 2 BIN. I/0
0 PRESET
1
TRIP ST. 2 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT >=1 & & TRIP ST. 2
1
0 TRIP-
PROCESSING
MATRIX
MZ322 MIN IMPEDANCE 3-PH. 2-ST. WITH CIRCULAR CHARACTERISTIC

WITH PHASE COMMON OUTPUTS FOR PHASES L1, L2, L3
Fig. 318 MZ322 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. With Cicular Characteristic With Phase Common Outputs For Phases L1, L2, L3

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MZ321, MZ322
CALC. INTERNAL
Online-simulation of BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0

BIN. I/0 regular
PRESET DIG. IN-/OUTPUTS
PRESET PRESET always PRESET always
1 via notebook: 0 0 0
0
FUNCTION Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MZ321

OUTPUT MZ322
1 all FUNCTION OUTPUTS enabled (regular-operation)
0
Check |IL1|> set value:

|IL1|> set a) used for STAGE 2 (TRIP I>)
b) used for STAGE 1 (Release of Z < Trip)
note: I> current interlock memory function implemented!
Calculation of IMPEDANCE of
lUL1L2l
System 1 (used for Stage 1)
lZ1l =
lIL1-IL2l
the LED-indications LED- PROCESSING
LED-
DISPLAY
MATRIX (row 2...14) of (row 2...14)
PROCESSING
TRIP-
MATRIX

Fig. 319 MZ321 Min. Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. Logic Diagram Processing / Legend MZ322 Min Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST.

lZACTUALl
ZSET
derived
from
Analog
INPUT IACTUAL
signals
ISET
I> current
ALARM memory
STAGE 1 interlock
(Z< & I>) funktion
I> current
memory
TRIP interlock
STAGE 1 funktion
(Z< & I>) tDELAY(IMP)
t
Digital
OUTPUT
signals
ALARM
STAGE 2
(I>)
TRIP
STAGE 2 tDELAY(CUR)
(I>)
t
MZ321 MIN. IMPEDANCE 3-PH.. 2-ST. TIMING SEQUENCE / EXAMPLE

Fig. 320 MZ321 Min. Impedance 3-PH. 2-ST. Timing Sequence / Example

24.4.3. MZ311
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
U L1L2
PROCESSING
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST V
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING V
(OPTIONAL)
TEST I
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING I TRIP
COMMANDS
(OPTIONAL)
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND Trip

VERSION 2
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT. WITH CURR. MEMORY LOGIC DIAGRAM
Fig. 321 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot. With Curr. Memory Logic Diagram

NOTEBOOK
V L1L2 V<
>=1
V L2L3 V<
&
V L3L1 V< V<
TEST V
BLOCKING V
& ALARM
I L1 I>
>=1 I>
I L2 &
I>
ALARM (I>) & (V<)
I L3
I>
SET VALUE
TEST V TEST I CURRENT MEMORY:
YES
BIN. I/0 BLOCKING I &
PRESET NO
1
0
BLOCKING V SET VALUE END OF

CURRENT MEMORY:
BIN. I/0
BLOCK
PRESET SIGNAL
RESET
END OF CURRENT
1 END OF
TRIP PULSE MEMORY
TRIP PULSE
0 LED-
DISPLAY
TEST I
BIN. I/0
TRIP (I>) & (V<)
PRESET t>
1 TRIP TRIP PULSE (length = fixed)
0
BLOCKING I t
LED-
MATRIX
length of trip pulse
BIN. I/0 BIN. I/0
PRESET PRESET
& TRIP END OF TRIP
1
PULSE 1
0
0
ALARM
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
1 & ALARM TRIP-
0 MATRIX
PROCESSING
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT. WITH CURR. MEMORY

LOGIC DIAGRAM/ PROCESSING
Fig. 322 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot. With Curr. Memory Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MZ311
Online simulation
via notebook

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MZ311
1
0
I> |I| > OPERATING VALUE I
V< |V| < OPERATING VALUE U
SET VALUE
CURRENT MEMORY: CURRENT MEMORY: YES or NO
YES
to be choosen via set value!
NO
SET VALUE END OF

CURRENT MEMORY: TERMINATION OF CURRENT MEMORY by BLOCK SIGNAL
BLOCK
SIGNAL
(external applied) or by END OF TRIP PULSE (automatically by firmware)
END OF to be choosen via set value!
TRIP PULSE
TRIP PULSE (length = fixed)

After the DELAY TIME (see settings) has expired a TRIP PULSE with an
t (internal) specified (fixed) length is issued.
length of trip pulse
The falling edge of the TRIP PULSE (end of TRIP PULSE) is used to break up the
END OF
TRIP PULSE CURRENT MEMORY. END OF TRIP PULSE
Interrupts the CURRENT MEMORY feedback circuit.
Programmable
LED-indications
software-matrix for
of
MATRIX DISPLAY
PROCESSING
(row 2...14) of
(row 2...14)
PROCESSING

TRIP-
MATRIX

MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT. WITH CURR. MEMORY

LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND
Fig. 323 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot. With Curr. Memory Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

Iactual
Iset
Vactual
Vset
(I>) & (V<)

[CURR. MEMORY=YES]
2 1
(I>) & (V<) CURR. MEMORY

ALARM fulfilled (=YES) takes over
2 1
DELAY TIME
TRIP (set value)
1
fixed length
BLOCK I (opt.) (by firmware)
LEGEND:
1 Termination of CURRENT MEMORY feedback circuit by END OF TRIP PULSE acc. to set value:
END OF CURRENT MEMORY = End of Trip Pulse
Note: Length of trip pulse is fixed (DRS firmware).
2 Termination of CURRENT MEMORY - feedback circuit by external applied BLOCK SIGNAL

Note: BLOCK SIGNAL usually to be derived from
3 CB = OFF - aux. contact.
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT./ TIMING SEQUENCE / EXAMPLE:

SET VALUE CURR. MEMORY = YES.
Fig. 324 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot./ Timing Sequence / Example : Set Value ,,Curr. Memory = ,,YES.

Iactual
I>
Iset
In
Vactual
Un
Vset
V<
t
(I>) & (V<)

[CURR. MEMORY=NO]
(I>) & (V<)
(I>) & (V<)

ALARM fulfilled
DELAY TIME
TRIP (set value)
fixed length
(by firmware)
MZ311 UNDERVOLT. & O/C PROT./ TIMING SEQUENCE / EXAMPLE:

SET VALUE CURR. MEMORY = NO.
Fig. 325 MZ311 Undervolt. & O/C Prot./ Timing Sequence / Example: Set Value ,,Curr. Memory = ,,No.

24.4.4. MZ312
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
COMPACT2A
U L1L2
PROCESSING
U L2L3
U L3L1
I L1
I L2
I L3
GEN.
G
3~
TEST
(OPTIONAL)
BLOCKING
(OPTIONAL)
TRIP
COMMANDS
OUTPUT CB1
CONTACTS CB2
ALARM
CONTACTS
LEGEND I > Alarm

U < Alarm
DRS DIGITAL RELAY SYSTEM NPS > Alarm
I > & (U < .or.
DRS- DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY NPS >) Trip1
COMPACT2A TYPE: DRS-COMPACT2A I > & (U < .or.
NPS >) Trip2
VERSION 2
MZ312 COMPOUND VOLT. O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM

Fig. 326 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Logic Diagram

CALC. INTERNAL
MEASURED VALUES
U2 NPS-VOLTAGE
NOTEBOOK
|U| < set
|U| < set >=1
|U| < set

|U| <
U L1L2 |U| <
U2 (|U| <)
NEG.PHASE
.OR.
NPS > .OR.
U L2L3 SEQU.VOLT. |U2| > set |U2| > (|U2| >)
OF PHASE-
U L3L1 PHASE
VOLTAGES &
I L1
|I| > set
|I|>
I L2
|I| > set >=1
I L3
|I| > set
U < alarm
|U|<
&
& U < alarm
I > alarm
|I| >
& I > alarm
TEST
LED-
BIN. I/0 DISPLAY
PRESET
NPS (U2) > alarm
1 NPS (U2) >
0
& NPS (U2) > alarm
>=1
BLOCKING &
BIN. I/0 TRIP 1 LED-

PRESET TIME MATRIX
DELAY1 & TRIP 1
1
0 BIN. I/0
>=1 PRESET
&
1
TRIP 2 0
FUNCTION TIME
OUTPUT DELAY2 & TRIP 2
1
0
TRIP-
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MZ312 COMPOUND VOLT. O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM / PROCESSING

Fig. 327 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Logic Diagram / Processing

LEGEND PROCESSING
FIRMWARE-MODULE: MZ312
CALC. INTERNAL

1
via notebook:
1 1 1" 1 0"
0 0 0 0
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
Online-simulation of the FUNCTION OUTPUTS of the protective function MZ312
1
0
U2 Calculation of NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE U2

NEG.PHASE
SEQU.VOLT. U2 = (UL1L2 + a . UL2L3 + a . UL3L1) / 3
OF PHASE-
PHASE NOTE: a = e j . 2 / 3
VOLTAGES
|U2| > set Check |U2|> set
|I| > set Check |I|> set
|U| < set Check |U|< set

MATRIX
LED-indications of
LED-
PROCESSING-board
DISPLAY
(row 2...14)
TRIP-
MATRIX

TRIP 1 FUNCTION OUTPUT: TRIP 1
TRIP 2 FUNCTION OUTPUT: TRIP 2
MZ312 COMPOUND VOLT. O/C LOGIC DIAGRAM PROCESSING / LEGEND

Fig. 328 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Logic Diagram Processing / Legend

Iactual
I>
Iset
In
Vactual
Un
Vset
V<
t
|U2| (=NPS)
NPS-set
(I >) & ((U <) .or. (NPS >))
U < alarm RESETTED BY EXT.

BLOCKING SIGNAL
DERIVED FROM CB-
OFF AUX. CONTACT
NPS > alarm
I > alarm
TRIP 1
TRIP 1
DELAY TIME 1
t
TRIP 2
TRIP 2
DELAY TIME 2
MZ312 COMPOUND VOLT. O/C TIMING SEQUENCE/ EXAMPLE

Fig. 329 MZ312 Compound Volt. O/C Timing Sequence / Example

24.5. FUNCTION
24.5.1. MZ221/ MZ222/ MZ321/ MZ322
Minimum impedance functions are applied as back-up protection instead of a distance protection
in the generator bus circuit or as a back-up for other plants where fault direction does not matter and protection co-
ordination with overcurrent functions will not provide a sufficient coverage.
The three phase minimum impedance protection is designed for isolated- or high impedance- or Peterson Coil
earthed power systems whereby the two phase model may also be applied in solid
grounded systems.
In order to cope for all fault conditions, with the exception of double earth faults, the three phase
model function is using, e.g. for measuring system 1 the phase currents I L1 and IL2 with vector-
wise substraction and the impedance value of system 1 with the phase to phase voltages V L1-L2 according to the
following formula below.

UL1L2
Z1
I L1 I L2
The same applies for the other two measuring systems by corresponding insertion of the relevant
measured values.
It can be validated that with this method any three phase- and two phase faults with- or without ground connection
are determined correctly.
The two phase function model is calculating for, e.g. system 1 according to following formula.

UL1
Z1
I L1
For the impedance measurement an overcurrent interlock with latching features is applied
which means that if even the initiating current is falling below the set value the function will
be active as long as the impedance evaluation is not above the trigger value.
The overcurrent function interlock is also operating as a second stage time delayed overcurrent protection.
The computation of the CT/VT input signals, i.e. phase currents and phase to phase voltages are
are carried out by the measuring algorithm 12 times each cycle.
Currents of the three phase function model are sampled for each system and substracted as
per above formula.
Afterwards with each sample interval the impedance of the 3 fault loops is calculated and
phase-wise verified whether the initiating condition is above the set value.
If the initiating conditions are above the current interlock and below the underimpedance configuration during 24
consecutive sample intervals initiation of stage 2 is given first and the corresponding time delay started whereby
stage 1 is independent from the interlock setting staying initiated as long as the impedance criteria are fulfilled.
After expiry of the time delay
stage 1 a trip signal Trip Stage 1 is being produced.
Also after stage 2 delay a "Trip Stage 2" is given.
Via the Test and Blocking inputs the various stages of the minimum impedance function
can be tested and/or blocked during the commissioning procedures.


24.5.2. MZ311
Undervoltage/Overcurrent, 3 Phase.
Function:
At least one of the three phase to phase voltages must be smaller and at least one of the three
current inputs must be larger than the configured setting values whereby voltage and current
inputs need not be associated.
Algorithm:
a)
V< (=Undervoltage) .AND. I> (=Overcurrent)
Have to occur simultaneously to initiate the function. It is sufficient when one of the three
phase to phase voltages is below the setting and any of the three phase currents is exceeding
the configured value.
Currents and voltages need not belong to a certain phase relation which also is not necessary.
b)
When setting parameter "Current Interlock" is reached then during the time delay sequence the
current value can fall below setting but a TRIP signal will still be initiated after the delay (Setting
Parameters "Operating time").
During the whole operating sequence the undervoltage initiation has to remain otherwise with
even the overcurrent stage being still activated the function would reset immediately.
c)
When the current interlock "Latched" parameter is not enabled then during the whole time delay
the conditions V< (undervoltage) .AND. I> (overcurrent) have to be present to produce a trip.
d)
After expiry of the time delay the trip output is initiated. After CB trip V< and I< are applicable.
Since I< (undercurrent) is no longer required for the function memory mode (see setting parameter
"Latched") the trip conditions after a generator shut-down would not reset. Therefore
it is necessary to reset the latched trip sequence after a trip by suitable means.
In the DRS User program a "End Latched Interlock" can be configured ensuring a trip output
reset under stand-still conditions:
"End Latched Interlock" = "External Blocking Signal": Blocking input "Voltage Function" must
be set via external contact inputs.
"End Latched Interlock" = "Trip Reset": In this case the trip output duration is fixed
to the function internal memory feature of
300 ms.
Simultaneously with trip reset the
undercurrent memory is disabled.
e)
Blocking inputs:
Voltage blocking: Is always active.

Current blocking input: Is only active when the current interlock function
setting has not passed the latched current
configuration. This blocking feature does not
reset the undercurrent
interlock and therefore is not suitable for an
End Latched Interlock external input (refer to
item d).

24.5.3. MZ312
Definite time overcurrent protection with 2 time delay stages. The current interlock is enabled by
either undervoltage- or NPS overvoltage conditions.
Function:
At least one phase current has to be above the setting and simultaneously at least one of the
phase to phase voltages must be below the configured settings or the NPS voltage being above setting
during the whole time delay sequence.
Algorithm:
a)
I> (=Overcurrent)
.AND.
(U< (=Undervoltage) .OR. V2> Negative Phase Sequence Component is Above Setting Value
Must be present during the whole time delay up to trip initiation.

It is sufficient when any one of the phase to phase voltages is smaller than the setting
value or the NPS component has exceeded the setting when any of the phase currents is
above configuration setting.
Voltage and current input signals need not conform to the phase relation which can also not
definitely defined by phase to phase voltages and phase currents.
Please note: Function MZ312 is not latched by memory.
b)
Calibration of the NPS voltage system:
NPS voltage = |U2| = |UL1L2 + a.UL2L3 + a.UL3L1| / 3.
Example 1:
By single phase injection with 100 V nominal the DRS internal display window will indicate
a value of 33.3 V.
Example 2:
By an external wire break the window display will show about 50 V.
Please note: Phase to phase voltages are applied and if one of the three VT connections is
interrupted the other two phases will back-feed in a 50% to 50% relation into the faulty phase
to phase circuit, i.e. the corresponding two analogue inputs will display an internal measured
value of approximately 50 V whereby the sum is a 100 V. The resulting negative phase sequence
voltage amounts to approximately 50 V.
c)
Function outputs:
- Current function ... one of the three phase currents is above "Operating value I>" setting.
- Voltage function ... one of the three phase to phase voltages is below the
"Operating Value V<".
- Vinv voltage function ... the NPS voltage value is larger than the "Operating value Vinv" setting.
- Trip 1 ... is carried out after the "Operating Time 1" delay.
- Trip 2 ... is carried out after the "Operating Time 2" delay
Note: Both trip signals are apart from the two time delays performing
the same shut-down sequence.

Note: MZ312 function is not provided with an initiating output.
d)
Blocking input is disabling the trip outputs:
- Voltage function
- Trip 1
- Trip 2
Blocking input does not disable the trip outputs:

- Current function
- Negative phase sequence voltage function
e)
Test input sets the outputs:
- Trip 1
- Trip 2
Test input does not enable the outputs:

- Current function
- Voltage function
f)
Change of function output sets all 5 outputs to "0":
- Current function
- Voltage function
- Trip 1
- Trip 2
g)
Setting Parameters "Phase Rotation":
Is referred to the voltage inputs.
Note: Necessary for the computation of the NPS voltage system.
h)
Note:
When the "Function Output" is displayed as output = "1" it does not necessarily mean that the function has
operated. It could also be that only an undervoltage condition is appearing. Please note that
all function outputs are supervised by an OR logic which issues the "Function Output = 1" status.

24.6. COMMISSIONING
24.6.1. MZ221/ MZ222/ MZ321/ MZ322

Pre-Commissioning:
requirements.
The function tests are preferably performed with the primary plant out of service.
With a relay test set, for example inject a test current into phase L1 and L2 and apply a test voltage with nominal
rating to system 1 VL1-L2.
Increase the current input into the interlock direction (= Stage 2) of the impedance stage
and observe the operating response in the DRS optional Actual Measured Values
function display window.
Note the current interlock operating value (= Stage 2) in the commissioning sheets.
By injection of 1.2 times the configured current interlock value reduce the voltage until
operation of the impedance function.
Verify the result according to the above formula and also observe the optional
Actual Measured Values impedance window display.
Record the impedance stage operating value (= Stage 1) into the commissioning sheets.
Raise the test voltage input until the impedance stage (= Stage 1) resets and record the
value into the commissioning sheets.
Reduce the test current until the current interlock reset value and record the result in the commissioning sheets.
Please note that all external measured inputs, i.e. CT/VT quantities can be observed in the
DRS User program displays.
Proceed with the same measurements for the other phases and record the values into the
commissioning sheets.
Observe the trip and alarm signals, respectively the LED indications according to the parameter
Check the operating time at 1.5 times resp. 0,5 times the setting for each phase and stage with a suitable
timer and enter the results into the test sheets.

- Short circuit test:
Apply a short circuit of adequate rating located at a position where primary current can
flow through the respective CT set.
Insert measuring instruments into the CT/VT and/or open the internal measured values window in the DRS
User program.
Run up the generator to rated speed and manually adjust excitation until the current
interlock is operating.
Temporarily configure the function if necessary with reduced setting.
the short circuit and the external multimeters.
Restore the original function settings suitable for normal service operation.


DRS SYSTEM / POLARITY OF VT AND CT QUANTITIES
25. DRS SYSTEM / POLARITY OF VT AND CT QUANTITIES

25.1. DEFINITIONS / VOLTAGE- AND CURRENT VECTORS
DEFINITION OF POLARITY OF VOLT. & CURR. PHASORS

FOR DRS PROT. SYSTEM
THEORY OF PHASOR DIAGRAM

L1 L2 L3
MAIN
TRANSF.
THEORY:
PHASORS TAKEN MOVE PHASE ROTATE PHASORS
FROM DRAWING: VOLT. PHASORS: DIAGRAM 180C:
UL3L1
PHASE L1
This point is NOT
UL1L2 UL2L3 POTENTIAL
EARTH-POT.
EARTH
POTENTIAL L1
DIR. 1 DIR. 2 UL1
UL2
UL3L1 UL1 UL1L2 UL3L1 UL1 UL1L2
UL3 UL2 UL3
UL3 UL3
UL2 UL2
IL1 IL2 IL3 L3 L2
UL2L3 UL1 UL2L3
This point is NOT
G PHASE L3-POT.
GEN.
3~ UL1 = UL1-0 = UL1 - 0 = UL1
UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2
UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2
UL1 = UL1-0 = UL1 - 0
DIRECTION 1: UL1L2
IL1
IL1 UL1
UL1L2
G
GEN.
3~
DIRECTION 2: UL1L2
UL1
IL1
UL1L2
G
GEN.
3~
IL1
DRS PROT.SYSTEM/ POLARITY OF VOLT. & CURR. PHASORS

page 1/5
Fig. 330 DRS Prot. System/ Polarity of Volt. & Curr. Phasors

25.2. DRS COMPACT/ POLARITY OF VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS
+ - BATT.
L1 L2 L3
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
I L1 2
3
5A
I1 24V...48VDC
DC OUT 01 2
3
4
5
1A
5A
110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
note: IL1 goes X1/2 6 I2
5
X1/1 because
7 1A OUT 03 6
MAIN 8
9
5A
I3 7
TRANSF. Intermediate 10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
Transformer turns 12 I4 9
13 1A
OUT 05 10
phase by 180. 11
14
15
16
5A
1A
I5 DRS- OUT 06 12
13
17
18
19
5A
1A
I6 COMPACT2A OUT 07 14
15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
IL1 22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
UL1L2
OUT 09 2
t
-30 25 1A
26 5A 3
27 I9
OUT 10 4
28 1A
IL1
t 5
29 I 10 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
IL1 9
U L1L2 2 U1
OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
UL3L1 5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
UL1L2 UL2L3 7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
UL1 9 X6
UL2 10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
UL3 X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
+
TEST (opt.) - 2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
+
5 + OUT 20 8
G 6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
GEN. 3~ IN 04 11
8 -
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 SI02
Tx+
8
MOD-
DUCER 1
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+

FAULT IN09 X9
FRONTSIDE
X10
RS 232
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE

page 2/5

30
INPUT PROCESSING:
channel I1=IL1 channel U1=UL1L2
RECORDED CURVES WILL SHOW:
DRS-COMPACT2
DRS-COMPACT2A I
channel I1=IL1
30
U channel U1=UL1L2
-30
DRS-COMPACT1 I
channel I1=IL1
(same as COMPACT2)
30
U
channel U1=UL1L2
-30

page 3/5

25.3. DRS-MODULAR / POLARITY OF VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS
DRS-MODULAR
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
F1X1 MODULAR
1
I L1 2 I1
UL1L2
t
-30
IL1
A1X5
1
IL1
U L1L2 2 U1
UL3L1
UL1L2 UL2L3
G 30
INPUT PROCESSING:
GEN. 3~
DRS-COMPACT2 I
channel I1=IL1
30
U channel U1=UL1L2
-30

page 4/5

25.4. DRS-LIGHT / POLARITY OF VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS
DRS-LIGHT
L1 L2 L3
DRS-
X1 LIGHT
1
I L1 3 I1
UL1L2
t
-30
IL1
X8
1
IL1
U L1L2 2 V 1-2
UL3L1
UL1L2 UL2L3
G 30
INPUT PROCESSING:
GEN. 3~
Adjustable via page 0/ address 72:

parameter = POS same as COMPACT 2.
DRS-LIGHT I
channel I1=IL1
30
U channel U1=UL1L2
-30

page 5/5


DRS SYSTEM / COMMUNICATION RS422-485
26. DRS SYSTEM / COMMUNICATION RS422-485

26.1. RS485 - BUS
DRS COMMUNICATIONS DRS-COMPACT2 & DRS-LIGHT/ RS422/ 485
MAX. 31 DEVICES (DRS-COMPACT OR DRS-LIGHT)
DRS-C2 DRS-C2
1 X2 X2
4 4
OUT 31 5 OUT 31 5
6 6
OUT 32 7 OUT 32 7
560R
Tx+ 8 Tx+ 8
1W
MOD-
MOD-
BUS
BUS
Tx- 9 Tx- 9
GND 10 GND 10
120R
1W RS422/485 RS422/485
+VCm= 5V= 11 +VCm= 5V= 11 (not used)
3
560R Rx+ 12 Rx+ 12
1W Rx- 13 Rx- 13
4 GND 14 5
GND 14
Tx+ 15 Tx+ 15
Tx- 16 Tx- 16
120R
1W
SHIELD 2.
MAY BE USED AS
GND-LINE
6
1 NOTEBOOK
(=BUS-MASTER)
DRS-LIGHT 560R
1W CONVERTER
RS485 RS232
120R
1W
560R +5V
1W
47k PLUG:
RS422/485 120R SUB D9-F
X3
1W
+VCx= 5V= 9 W5 +5V RXD
100k X1/2
Rx+ 10 W1 Tx+ TXD
X1/3
Rx- 11 W2 Tx- CTS
X1/8 or
GND 12 W6 GND DSR
X1/6
Tx+ 13 W4 Rx+ DCD
47k X1/1
Tx- 14 W3 Rx- GND see
X1/5
page 2
GND
1 TERMINATING RESISTORS (120 OHM) & PULL-UP- & PULL-DOWN-RESISTOR (560 OHM):
MAY BE CANCELLED IF TOTAL LENGTH OF BUS < 30 m.
NOTE: CANCEL ALL OR NOTHING! IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINATING RESISTORS WITHOUT
PULL-UP/DOWN-RESISTORS! PULL-UP/DOWN-RESISTORS AT Rx-SIDE ONLY!
2 FOR SHORT CONNECTIONS (IF TOTAL < 30 m) NO SHIELD NECESSARY, JUST GND-LINE. USE STD. CUBICLE WIRING.
3 CABLES (IF TOTAL > 30 m): STANDARD TWISTED PAIR CABLE (2 x 0,6 mm) WITH SHIELD (USED AS GND-WIRE).
R = 100 OHM / 1 kM, MAX. C = 750 pF (MAX. 38400 Bd), CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE = 120 OHM
4 GND-CONNECTION: 100 R NOT NECESSARY BECAUSE GND IS POTENTIAL-FREE AT DRS-COMPACT AND DRS-LIGHT.
5 USE SHIELD OR GND-WIRE

6 BUS: USE SERIAL CONNECTION AND NOT STAR-CONNECTION.
DRS COMMUNICTION / RS485-BUS NOTEBOOK

page 1/4 d
Fig. 335 DRS Communication / RS485-BUS Notebook

26.2. RS485 -- DRSCOM
CONVERTER
1 1
RS485 RS232
UN1372S
UN1052B
D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
UN3
UN3
1
+5V PLASTIC-FIBRE
OPTIC CABLE
47k PLUG: TYPE: UN1902
660nm
SUB D9-F 2 LENGTH: 0...50m 2
W5 +5V RXD
UN3372S
UN3052B
100k X1/2 50m
W1 Tx+ TXD
D25-F
X1/3
D9-M
SUB
SUB
W2 Tx- CTS
UN3
UN3
X1/8 500m
W6 GND DSR 2
X1/6
W4 Rx+ DCD 1000m HCS-FIBRE
47k X1/1
W3 Rx- GND OPTIC CABLE
X1/5
TYPE: UN3902
GND
850nm
UN6372S 3 LENGTH: 50...500m 3
UN6052B
ST ST
D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
NOTE: see PAGE 1/4! ST
3
GLASS-FIBRE ST
OPTIC CABLE
TYPE: GLASS
850nm
FIBREOPTIC LENGTH: 500...1000m FIBREOPTIC
LEGEND: CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 see page 4!
PRINCIPAL connectors plugged together

DIAGRAM
DRS-COM4: 4
SLAVES COM-S...
COM-P
X11 X12 X13 X14 X21 X22 X23 X24 X81 X82 X83 X84
COM-S1 COM-S2 COM-S n

Backplate Backplate Backplate
DC-DC
MASTER
COM-M
Backplate
COM-M COM-A1 COM-A2 COM-A n

X4 X3 X2 X1
Dimension: 19" 3 U height rock
DRS-COM Diagnostic
(NOTEBOOK)
PC ANALOG OUTPUTS
MODEM (OPT.)
DCF77 LEGEND: see PAGE 4/4
DRS COMMUNICTION / RS485-BUS DRS-COM2

page 2/4
Fig. 336 DRS Communication / RS485-BUS DRS-COM2

26.3. RS485 -- CONTROL SYSTEM PC
UN1372S
UN1052B
D25-F
D9-M
POWER STATION UNIT 1:
SUB
SUB
UN3
UN3
CONVERTER
RS485 RS232
+5V
UN3372S
UN3052B
47k PLUG:
D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
UN3
UN3
SUB D9-F
W5 +5V RXD
100k X1/2
W1 Tx+ TXD
X1/3
W2 Tx- CTS
X1/8
UN6372S
UN6052B
W6 GND DSR
X1/6 ST ST
D25-F
D9-M
W4 Rx+ DCD
SUB
SUB
X1/1
W3 Rx- 47k
X1/5
GND connectors
ST ST plugged
GND
together
OPTIC CABLES/ TECHN. DETAILS: see PAGE 2/4!
UN1372S
UN1052B
CONVERTER
D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
UN3
UN3
RS485 RS232
+5V CONTROL
ROOM-PC
47k PLUG:
UN3372S
UN3052B
SUB D9-F
D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
UN3
UN3
W5 +5V RXD
100k X1/2
W1 Tx+ TXD
X1/3
W2 Tx- CTS
X1/8
W6 GND DSR
X1/6
W4 Rx+ DCD
X1/1
UN6372S
UN6052B
W3 Rx- 47k GND

X1/5 ST ST
D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
GND COM1
ST ST
POWER STATION UNIT 3: COM2

CONVERTER
UN1372S
UN1052B
RS485 RS232 COM3

D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
UN3
UN3
+5V
COM4
47k PLUG:
SUB D9-F
UN3372S
UN3052B
W5 +5V RXD
D25-F
D9-M
X1/2
SUB
SUB
100k
UN3
UN3
W1 Tx+ TXD
X1/3
W2 Tx- CTS
X1/8
W6 GND DSR
X1/6
W4 Rx+ DCD
47k X1/1
W3 Rx- GND
X1/5
UN6372S
UN6052B
GND
ST ST
D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
ST ST
CONVERTER
RS485 RS232
UN1372S
UN1052B
D25-F
D9-M
+5V
SUB
SUB
UN3
UN3
47k PLUG:
SUB D9-F
W5 +5V RXD
UN3372S
UN3052B
100k X1/2
W1 Tx+ TXD
D25-F
D9-M
X1/3
SUB
SUB
UN3
UN3
W2 Tx- CTS
X1/8
W6 GND DSR
X1/6
W4 Rx+ DCD
47k X1/1
W3 Rx- GND
X1/5
GND
UN6372S
UN6052B
ST ST
D25-F
D9-M
SUB
SUB
ST ST
NOTE: see PAGE 1/4!
DRS COMMUNICTION / RS485-BUS CONTROL ROOM-PC

page 3/4
Fig. 337 DRS Communication / RS485-BUS Control Room - PC

26.4. RS485 -- DRSCOM / LEGEND
LEGEND to page 2

1 PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC CABLE 660nm, TYPE: UN 1902
HOW TO CHOOSE TYPE OF

FIBREOPTIC CONNECTORS
(DEPENDING ON LENGTH):
see PAGE 2
UN1902
2* 1000 PMMA-Fibre
Fibre
2 HCS-FIBRE OPTIC CABLE 850nm, TYPE: UN 3902

see PAGE 2
UN3902
2* 200/230 HCS-Fibre
Outer diameter: 6mm
3 GLASS-FIBRE OPTIC CABLE WITH ST-CONNECTORS 850nm// 62,5/125, TYPE: UN 3944

see PAGE 2
OPTIC CONNECTOR TYPE: 2pc. ST/UN 4442 (red)

OPTIC CONNECTOR TYPE: +2pcs. ST/UN 4443 (green)
4 FRONTPANEL OF DRS COM2:
DCF77/ GPS (clock) +Service-connector at frontplate (for Notebook/ similar to VE-frontplate)
DC-DC COM-M SLAVES (COM-S...)
NOTEBOOK
(opt.)
BACKPLATE OF DRS COM2: DCF77/ GPS (clock)

SLAVES (COM-S...) COM-M DC-DC
MASTER: COM3
X3 MODEM
MASTER: COM1
X1 DRS COM
DIAGNOSTIC
MASTER: COM2
X2 PC
MASTER: COM4
SLAVE: COM1-X21 SLAVE: COM2-X11 X4 DCF77
SLAVE: COM2-X22 SLAVE: COM1-X12
DRS COMMUNICTION / RS485-BUS DRS-COM2 / LEGEND

page 4/4
Fig. 338 DRS Communication / RS485-BUS DRS-COM2/ Legend

DRS SYSTEM / DIFFERENCES DRS COMPACT2 - DRS COMPACT2A
27. DRS SYSTEM / DIFFERENCES DRS COMPACT2 - DRS COMPACT2A

27.1. BASICS
The digital protection system DRS COMPACT2A is a further improvement to the well known DRS COMPACT2
superseding the latter. Both relay models are to a large extent performing the same functionality and the
differences are outlined in the following sections.
27.2. RELAY CASE DIMENSIONS
Both devices have the same numbers of Unit Height and Unit Width. The COMPACT2A is regarding the case size
a little bit smaller but is provided with the same front dimensions and construction mass as the COMPACT2.
27.3. IN- / OUTPUTS
An overview over the various input- and output channels is shown in the following diagrams:

+ - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 + - GND 1
2 I1 DC OUT 01 2
24V...48VDC 3
3 110V...220VDC
I2 DC OUT 02 4
4 5
5 OUT 03 6
6 I3 7
7 OUT 04 8
8 I4 9
9 OUT 05 10
11
10
11
I5
DRS- OUT 06 12
13
12
13
I6 COMPACT2 OUT 07 14
15
14 I7 OUT 08 16
15 X5
16 I8 1
17 OUT 09 2
18 I9 3
19 OUT 10 4
I 10 5
20 OUT 11 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
LEGEND:
eIEGL23
3 8
eIU124
Tx+
OPTIONAL MODULES
MOD-
BUS
OPTIONAL MODULES: 4 Tx- 9

5 GND 10
-MIEGL rotor isolation supervision
6
-eIEGL rotor earth fault protection 7
8
RS422/485
-eIU124 shaft current supervision Rx+ 12

9 13
10 Rx-
EURAX
14
MIEGL
11 GND
12 Tx+
13 Tx-
14
FRONTSIDE
X9
RS 232
X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS-COMPACT2
Fig. 339 DRS-COMPACT2

+ - BATT.
X1 X2 1 2 3 X3
1 1A + - GND 1
2 5A
I1 DC OUT 01 2
3 24V...60VDC 3
4
5
1A
5A 110V...220VDC DC OUT 02 4
6 I2
5
7
8
1A
5A
POWER SUPPLY OUT 03 6
9 I3 7
10 1A OUT 04 8
11 5A
12 I4 9
OUT 05 10
13
14
15
1A
5A
I5 DRS- OUT 06
11
12
16
17
18
1A
5A
I6
COMPACT2A OUT 07
13
14
19 1A 15
20
21
5A
I7 OUT 08 16
22 1A X5
23 5A
24 I8 1
25 1A OUT 09 2
26 5A 3
27 I9
28 1A
OUT 10 4
5
I 10 OUT 11
29 6
X8 7
1 OUT 12 8
U1 9
2 OUT 13 10
3 11
4 U2 OUT 14 12
5 13
6 U3 OUT 15 14
7 15
U4 OUT 16 16
8
9 X6
10 U5 1
OUT 17 2
X4 3
1 + OUT 18 4
2 - IN 01 5
3 + OUT 19 6
4 - IN 02 7
5 + OUT 20 8
6 - IN 03 9
7 + OUT 21 10
8 - IN 04 11
9 + OUT 22 12
10 - IN 05 13
11 + OUT 23 14
12 - IN 06 15
13 + OUT 24 16
14 - IN 07
X2
15 +
16 IN 08 4
-
X7
6
2
TRANS-
3 DUCER 1
SI02
Tx+ 8
MOD-
BUS
4 Tx- 9
LEGEND:
OPTIONAL MODULE
5 GND 10
6
UAKB
OPTIONAL MODULE: 7
TRANS-
SI03
8
RS422/485
Transducer 2 Rx+ 12
9 13
Rotor E/F GND 14
11 SHAFT CURR. SI04
15
12 Tx+

FAULT IN09 X9
IEC 60870-5-103
RS 232 X10
NOTEBOOK
MAINTENANCE
DRS-COMPACT2A
Fig. 340 DRS-COMPACT2A

27.3.1. ANALOGUE INPUTS FOR CT AND VT CIRCUITS
Both models have the same number of current and voltage inputs:
10 x current
5 x voltage
For the CT inputs it has to be considered that in case of the DRS COMPACT2A the external CT inputs can either
be connected to the 1A- or 5A tap on the same relay model, whereas the COMPACT2 can only be delivered in
either a 1A or 5A version.
Therefore the DRS COMPACT2A is provided with 3 CT terminal connections instead of only 2 in case of the
COMPACT2:
1A tap
5A tap
Neutral
As a consequence this requires a different terminal number arrangement which has to be considered when
replacing and changing the relay model.
27.3.2. DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUTS
The same number applies for both relay models.
27.3.3. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
The same type and number for both relay models.
27.3.4. OPTIONAL MODULES
DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2A
MIEGL Rotor insulation UAKB Rotor insulation

Rotor earth fault
eIEGL Rotor earth fault Signal transducer
Shaft current
EURAX Signal transducer
eIU124 Shaft current
For the DRS COMPACT2 there are 4 additional module types available of which not more than 2 can be included
in the same device as shown on the diagram above.
The DRS COMPACT2A is provided with only one additional module UAKB which covers all functions (software
configuration and jumper settings required). The output circuitry of the UAKB is internally standardised wired
according to the diagram above.

DRS FAMILY FURTHER DOCUMENTS
28. DRS FAMILY FURTHER DOCUMENTS

Further publications on DRS family products can be found in the list below. With reference to the item number they
can be ordered in an electronic or hardcopy version.
28.1. Download-Portal im WWW
An anytime up-to-date download portal is available for everyone.
Open in your browser www.andritz.com and click on business area HYDRO. Click next on item Downloads on
the menu. Click on this page on top right corner on the link DRS downloads, see the arrows on following image.

DRS Downloads: http://www.andritz.com/hydro/hy-downloads/hy-drs-download.htm

28.2. DRS-MODULAR
Documents
Document Reference
DRS-MODULAR DRS-MODULAR Operation Manual DIM-001-1
DRS-MODULAR DRS-MODULAR Description of Hardware DIM-000-1
DRS-MODULAR DRS-MODULAR Technical Data (e) DIM-021-1
28.3. DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2A

Documents
Document Item Number
DRS-COMPACT2A DRS-COMPACT2A Gertebeschreibung (e) MIC-007-1
DRS-COMPACT2A DRS-COMPACT2A device description (ru) MIC-008-1
DRS-COMPACT2A DRS-COMPACT2A Techn. Data sheet GIC-000-A.XX/90
DRS-COMPACT2A DRS-COMPACT2A Mazeichnungen DIC00811_C2A-
Auenrohr.pdf
DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2 Flyer (e) MIC-005-1
DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2 O & M Manual (e) DIC-025-1
DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2 technical short description DIC-018-1
DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2 Local Operation (e) DIC-006-1
DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2 Connecting Diagram DIC-011-1
DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2 Device back view terminals DIC-013-1
DRS-COMPACT2 DRS-COMPACT2 Replace VE2 Card DIC-026-1
28.4. DRS-LIGHT
Documents
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Operation Manual (e) DIL-000-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Operation Manual (s) DIL-005-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Techn. Short Description (e) MIL-001-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Techn. Short. Description (f) MIL-002-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Local Operation (e) DIL-001-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Local Operation (i) DIL-020-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Configurator DIL-014-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Function list per version DIL-019-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Type Code DIL-007-1
DRS-LIGHT Wiring diagram DRS-LIGHT DIL-009-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Dim. Draw. F. flush panel moun DIL-018-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Dimensions Drawing DIL-008-1
DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Mech kit f projection mounting TIL-032--.XX/10
DRS-LIGHT ZE DRS-LIGHT Certificate GIL-000-A.XX/79

DRS-LIGHT DRS-LIGHT Auto reclose tech. Description DIL-010-1
28.5. DRS-WIN
Documents
DRS-WIN4 DRS-WIN4 User Manual (e) SID-401-1.XX/93
DRS-WIN4 DRS-WIN4 User Manual (i) SID-401-1.XX/92
DRS-WIN4 DRS-WIN4 User Manual (n) SID-401-1.XX/91
DRS-WIN4 DRS-WIN4 operation manual (ru) SID-401-1.XX/94
DRS-WIN4 DRS-WIN4 DEMO Version (e) SID-101-1.XX/60
DRS-WIN DRS-WIN und Windows7 User information(e) DID-043-1
DRS-WIN DRS-WIN update instr. How spare parte DID-039-1
DRS-WIN3 DRS-WIN3 User Manual (e) SID-301-1.XX/93

NOTES


Hy Drs Function Library 1 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hy Drs Function Library 1 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRS

This document is applicable to the following product(s):

2016 by ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH, All rights reserved.

2 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

2. MB... LOGIC FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 27

3. MC... CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION ........................................ 63

4. MD... GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL ................................................................ 73

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 3 / 744

4.5.1. CT Saturation Detection ................................................................................................. 97

5. MD... TRANSFORMATOR DIFFERENTIAL .....................................................101

6. ME... OUT OF STEP PROTECTION .................................................................157

7. ME... UNDER EXCITATION PROTECTION .....................................................191

4 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

7.3.5. ME323.............................................................................................................................. 208

8. MF... OVER/UNDERFREQUENCY / FREQUENY GRADIENT / VECTOR SHIFT

9. MI... CURRENT IDMT / VOLTAGE RESTRAINT OVERCURRENT / MOTOR

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 5 / 744

9.6.2. MI318 .............................................................................................................................. 295

10. MI... OVER/UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME (DT) ..............297

11. ML... OVERLOAD .............................................................................................353

12. MN... NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE ............................................................373

6 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

12.3.1. MN211/ MN221 ................................................................................................................ 382

13. MP... POWER ................................................................................................... 407

14. MP... SUDDEN LOAD LOSS............................................................................ 425

15. MQ ... INADVERTENT ENERGISING/VOLTAGE CONTROLLED

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 7 / 744

15.5. FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................. 452

16. MR... ROTOR EARTH FAULT / ROTOR INSULATION ...................................459

17. MS... STATOR EARTH FAULT ........................................................................493

8 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

18. MT... VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION ......................................... 547

19. MT... CT SUPERVISION................................................................................... 579

20. MU... SYNCHRONISING CHECK / VOLTAGE BALANCE 1 / VOLTAGE

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 9 / 744

20.2.3. Voltage Balance 2 ........................................................................................................... 613

21. MU... OVER/UNDERVOLTAGE DT .................................................................631

22. MX... OVERFLUXING .......................................................................................655

23. MY... ENERGISING FUNCTION .......................................................................673

10 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

23.2. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................. 674

24. MZ... MINIMUM IMPEDANCE / UNDERVOLTAGE - OVERCURRENT /

25. DRS SYSTEM / POLARITY OF VT AND CT QUANTITIES ............................... 725

26. DRS SYSTEM / COMMUNICATION RS422-485 ............................................... 731

27. DRS SYSTEM / DIFFERENCES DRS COMPACT2 - DRS COMPACT2A......... 735

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 11 / 744

27.3.4. OPTIONAL MODULES ................................................................................................... 738

28. DRS FAMILY FURTHER DOCUMENTS .........................................................739

12 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

Fig. 1 MB111 MB141 MB142 Signal Function Wiring Diagram ................................................................. 34

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 13 / 744

14 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 15 / 744

16 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 17 / 744

18 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 19 / 744

20 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions

specialized personnel (*).

ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH

(*) Definition: specialised personnel are persons who

DRS Library of Protective Functions DID-001-1.06 21 / 744

22 / 744 DID-001-1.06 DRS Library of Protective Functions